diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:51:22 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:51:22 -0700 |
| commit | 32fbdf71f96546328400d3f9502f99699da72461 (patch) | |
| tree | 274e99c0ab3c18dddc89386a2d6d383a499fa015 /17546-h | |
Diffstat (limited to '17546-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 17546-h/17546-h.htm | 14004 |
1 files changed, 14004 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/17546-h/17546-h.htm b/17546-h/17546-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a4b81c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/17546-h/17546-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,14004 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Lion of Saint Mark, by G. A. Henty</title> +<style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[*/ + body {background:#ffffff; + color:black; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + font-size:14pt; + margin-top:70px; + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align:justify} + h1 {text-align: center; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.05em} + h1.pg {text-align: center; text-transform: none; letter-spacing: 0em} + h2 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3.pg {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0em} + hr {height: 5px} + em {font-weight: bold} + pre {margin-left: 10%; font-size: 10pt;} + p {text-indent: 4% } + caption { font-weight: bold; letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-family: "Arial";} + caption.toc { text-transform: uppercase; font-size: 18pt; } + table {text-align: center} + td { font-family: "Arial";} + thead { font-weight: bold;} + td.ltoc { letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; + text-transform: uppercase; text-align: right; vertical-align: top } + td.rtoc { font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; text-align: left} + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 0em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + border: solid black; + height: 5px; } + pre {font-size: 65%;} +/*]]>*/ +</style> +</head> +<body> +<h1 class="pg">The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Lion of Saint Mark, by G. A. Henty</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: The Lion of Saint Mark</p> +<p> A Story of Venice in the Fourteenth Century</p> +<p>Author: G. A. Henty</p> +<p>Release Date: January 18, 2006 [eBook #17546]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE LION OF SAINT MARK***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3 class="pg">E-text prepared by Martin Robb</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<h1>The Lion of St. Mark:</h1> + +<h2>A Story of Venice in the Fourteenth Century<br /> +<br /><br /> +by G. A. Henty.</h2> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<hr /> +<p> </p> +<table align="center" summary="Table of Contents"> +<caption class="toc">Contents<br /> </caption> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"></td> +<td class="rtoc"><a href="#Preface">Preface.</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch1">Chapter 1:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">Venice.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch2">Chapter 2:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">A Conspiracy.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch3">Chapter 3:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">On The Grand Canal.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch4">Chapter 4:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">Carried Off.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch5">Chapter 5:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">Finding A Clue.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch6">Chapter 6:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">The Hut On San Nicolo.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch7">Chapter 7:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">On Board A Trader.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch8">Chapter 8:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">An Attack By Pirates.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch9">Chapter 9:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">The Capture Of The Lido.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch10">Chapter 10:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">Recaptured.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch11">Chapter 11:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">The Battle Of Antium.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch12">Chapter 12:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">In Mocenigo's Power.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch13">Chapter 13:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">The Pirates' Raid.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch14">Chapter 14:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">The End Of The Persecutor.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch15">Chapter 15:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">The Battle Of Pola.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch16">Chapter 16:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">The Recapture Of The Pluto.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch17">Chapter 17:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">An Ungrateful Republic.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch18">Chapter 18:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">The Release Of Pisani.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch19">Chapter 19:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">The Siege Of Chioggia.</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch20">Chapter 20:</a></td> +<td class="rtoc">The Triumph Of Venice.</td> +</tr> +</table> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<h2><a id="Preface">Preface.</a></h2> + +<p>Of all the chapters of history, there are few more interesting +or wonderful than that which tells the story of the rise and +progress of Venice. Built upon a few sandy islands in a shallow +lagoon, and originally founded by fugitives from the mainland, +Venice became one of the greatest and most respected powers of +Europe. She was mistress of the sea; conquered and ruled over a +considerable territory bordering on the Adriatic; checked the +rising power of the Turks; conquered Constantinople; successfully +defied all the attacks of her jealous rivals to shake her power; +and carried on a trade relatively as great as that of England in +the present day. I have laid my story in the time not of the +triumphs of Venice, but of her hardest struggle for existence--when +she defended herself successfully against the coalition of Hungary, +Padua, and Genoa--for never at any time were the virtues of Venice, +her steadfastness, her patriotism, and her willingness to make all +sacrifice for her independence, more brilliantly shown. The +historical portion of the story is drawn from Hazlitt's History of +the Republic of Venice, and with it I have woven the adventures of +an English boy, endowed with a full share of that energy and pluck +which, more than any other qualities, have made the British empire +the greatest the world has ever seen.</p> + +<p>G. A. Henty.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch1">Chapter 1</a>: Venice.</h2> + +<p>"I suppose you never have such nights as these in that misty +island of yours, Francisco?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, we have," the other said stoutly. "I have seen just as +bright nights on the Thames. I have stood down by Paul's Stairs and +watched the reflection of the moon on the water, and the lights of +the houses on the bridge, and the passing boats, just as we are +doing now.</p> + +<p>"But," he added honestly, "I must confess that we do not have +such still, bright nights very often, while with you they are the +rule, though sometimes even here a mist rises up and dims the +water, just as it does with us."</p> + +<p>"But I have heard you say that the stars are not so bright as we +have them here."</p> + +<p>"No, I do not think they are, Matteo. I do not remember now, but +I do know, when I first came here, I was struck with the brightness +of the stars, so I suppose there must have been a difference."</p> + +<p>"But you like this better than England? You are glad that your +father came out here?"</p> + +<p>Francis Hammond did not answer at once.</p> + +<p>"I am glad he came out," he said after a pause, "because I have +seen many things I should never have seen if I had stayed at home, +and I have learned to speak your tongue. But I do not know that I +like it better than home. Things are different, you see. There was +more fun at home. My father had two or three apprentices, whom I +used to play with when the shop was closed, and there were often +what you would call tumults, but which were not serious. Sometimes +there would be a fight between the apprentices of one ward and +another. A shout would be raised of 'Clubs!' and all the 'prentices +would catch up their sticks and pour out of the shops, and then +there would be a fight till the city guard turned out and separated +them. Then there used to be the shooting at the butts, and the +shows, and the Mayday revels, and all sorts of things. The people +were more merry than you are here, and much more free. You see, the +barons, who are the same to us that your great families are to you, +had no influence in the city. You are a nation of traders, and so +are we; but in London the traders have the power, and are absolute +masters inside their own walls, caring nothing for the barons, and +not much for the king. If anyone did wrong he got an open and fair +trial. There was no fear of secret accusations. Everyone thought +and said as he pleased. There was no Lion's Mouth, and no Council +of Ten."</p> + +<p>"Hush! hush! Francisco," the other said, grasping his arm. "Do +not say a word against the council. There is no saying who may be +listening."</p> + +<p>And he looked nervously round to see if anyone was within +earshot.</p> + +<p>"There it is, you see," his companion said. "So long as we have +a safe conscience, in London we are frightened at nothing, whereas +here no one can say with certainty that he may not, before tomorrow +morning, be lying in the dungeons of St. Mark, without the +slightest idea in the world as to what his crime has been."</p> + +<p>"There, there, Francisco," Matteo said uneasily. "Do talk about +other things. Your notions may do very well in England, but are not +safe to discuss here. Of course there are plenty here who would +gladly see a change in some matters, but one cannot have +everything; and, after all, when one has so much to be proud of, +one need not grumble because everything is not just as one would +like."</p> + +<p>"Yes, you have much to be proud of," Francis Hammond agreed. "It +is marvellous that the people of these scattered islets should be +masters of the sea, that their alliance should be coveted by every +power in Europe, that they should be the greatest trading community +in the world. If I were not English I should like to be +Venetian."</p> + +<p>The speakers were standing at the edge of the water in front of +the Palace of St. Mark. In the piazza behind them a throng of +people were walking to and fro, gossiping over the latest news from +Constantinople, the last rumour as to the doings of the hated rival +of Venice, Genoa, or the purport of the letter which had, as +everyone knew, been brought by the Bishop of Treviso from the pope +to the seignory.</p> + +<p>The moon was shining brightly overhead, and glittering in the +waters of the lagoon, which were broken into innumerable little +wavelets by the continual crossing and recrossing of the gondolas +dotting its surface. There was a constant arrival and departure of +boats from the steps, fifty yards to the right of the spot where +the speakers were standing; but where they had stationed +themselves, about halfway between the landing steps and the canal +running down by the side of the ducal palace, there were but few +people about.</p> + +<p>Francis Hammond was a lad between fifteen and sixteen years old. +His father was a merchant of London. He was a man of great +enterprise and energy, and had four years before determined to +leave his junior partner in charge of the business in London, and +to come out himself for a time to Venice, so as to buy the Eastern +stuffs in which he dealt at the headquarters of the trade, instead +of paying such prices as the agents of the Venetian traders might +demand in London.</p> + +<p>He had succeeded beyond his expectations. In Venice there were +constantly bargains to be purchased from ships returning laden with +the spoils of some captured Genoese merchantman, or taken in the +sack of some Eastern seaport. The prices, too, asked by the traders +with the towns of Syria or the Black Sea, were but a fraction of +those charged when these goods arrived in London. It was true that +occasionally some of his cargoes were lost on the homeward voyage, +captured either by the Genoese or the Moorish pirates; but even +allowing for this, the profits of the trade were excellent.</p> + +<p>The English merchant occupied a good position in Venice. The +promptness of his payments, and the integrity of his dealings, made +him generally respected; and the fact that he was engaged in trade +was no drawback to his social position, in a city in which, of all +others, trade was considered honourable, and where members of even +the most aristocratic families were, with scarcely an exception, +engaged in commerce. There were many foreign merchants settled in +Venice, for from the first the republic had encouraged strangers to +take up their residence there, and had granted them several +privileges and advantages.</p> + +<p>Between Venice and England there had always been good feeling. +Although jealous of foreigners, England had granted the Venetians +liberty to trade in London, Southampton, and some other towns as +far back as the year 1304; and their relations had always been +cordial, as there were no grounds for jealousy or rivalry between +the two peoples; whereas the interference of France, Germany, +Austria, and Hungary in the affairs of Italy, had frequently caused +uneasiness to Venice, and had on several occasions embroiled her +with one or other of the three last named powers. France had as yet +taken a very minor part in the continual wars which were waged +between the rival cities of Italy, and during the Crusades there +had been a close alliance between her and Venice, the troops of the +two nations fighting together at the siege of Constantinople, and +causing the temporary overthrow of the Greek Empire of the +East.</p> + +<p>The rise of Venice had been rapid, and she owed her advancement +to a combination of circumstances. In the first place, her insular +position rendered her almost impervious to attack, and she had +therefore no occasion to keep on foot any army, and was able to +throw all her strength on to the sea, where Genoa was her only +formidable rival. In the second place, her mercantile spirit, and +her extensive trade with the East, brought in a steady influx of +wealth, and her gold enabled her to purchase allies, to maintain +lengthy struggles without faltering, and to emerge unscathed from +wars which exhausted the resources, and crippled the powers, of her +rivals.</p> + +<p>The third source of her success lay in the spirit of her +population. Like Rome in her early days, she was never cast down by +reverses. Misfortune only nerved her to further exertions, and +after each defeat she rose stronger than before. But the cause +which, more than all, contributed to give to Venice her ascendancy +among the cities of Italy, was her form of government. Democratic +at first, as among all communities, it had gradually assumed the +character of a close oligarchy, and although nominally ruled by a +council containing a large number of members, her destinies were +actually in the hands of the Doge, elected for life, and the +Council of Ten, chosen from the great body of the council. Thus she +had from the first been free from those factions which were the +bane of Genoa and Florence. Some of the great families had from +time to time come more prominently to the front than others, but +none had attained predominant political power, and beyond a few +street tumults of slight importance, Venice had not suffered from +the popular tumults and uprisings which played so prominent a part +in the history of her rivals.</p> + +<p>Thus, undisturbed by discord at home, Venice had been able to +give all her attention and all her care to her interests abroad, +and her affairs, conducted as they were by her wisest citizens, +with a single eye to the benefit of the state, had been +distinguished by a rare sagacity. Her object had been single and +uniform, to protect her own interests, and to prevent any one city +on the mainland attaining such a preponderance as would render her +a dangerous neighbour. Hence she was always ready to ally herself +with the weaker against the stronger, and to aid with money and men +any state struggling against an ambitious neighbour. Acting on this +principle she by turns assisted Padua against Verona, and Verona +against Padua, or either of them when threatened by the growing +power of Milan, and at the end of a war she generally came out with +an increased territory, and added importance.</p> + +<p>It is probable that no community was ever governed, for hundreds +of years, with such uniform wisdom and sagacity as was Venice; but +the advantage was not without drawbacks. The vigilance of the +Council of Ten in repressing plots, not unfrequently set on foot by +the enemies of the republic, resulted in the adoption of a hateful +system of espionage. The city was pervaded with spies, and even +secret denunciations were attended to, and the slightest expression +of discontent against the ruling authorities was severely punished. +On the other hand, comparatively slight attention was paid to +private crime. Assassinations were of frequent occurrence, and +unless the victim happened to be very powerfully connected, no +notice was taken when a man was found to be missing from his usual +place, and his corpse was discovered floating in the lagoon. +Consequently crimes of this kind were, in the great majority of +cases, committed with impunity, and even when traced, the authors, +if possessed of powerful protectors, seldom suffered any greater +punishment than temporary banishment.</p> + +<p>After standing for some time on the Piazzetta, the two lads +turned and, entering the square of Saint Mark, mingled with the +crowd. It was a motley one. Nobles in silks and satins jostled with +fishermen of the lagoons. Natives of all the coasts and islands +which owned the sway of Venice, Greeks from Constantinople, Tartar +merchants from the Crimea, Tyrians, and inhabitants of the islands +of the Aegean, were present in considerable numbers; while among +the crowd, vendors of fruit and flowers from the mainland, and of +fresh water or cooling drinks, sold their wares. The English lad's +companion--Matteo Giustiniani--belonged to one of the leading +families of Venice, and was able to name to Francis most of the +nobles and persons of importance whom they passed.</p> + +<p>"There is Pisani," he said. "Of course you know him. What a +jolly, good-tempered looking fellow he is! The sailors would do +anything for him, and they say he will have command of the next +fleet that puts to sea. I wish I was going with him. There is sure +to be a fierce fight when he comes across the Genoese. His father +was one of our greatest admirals.</p> + +<p>"That noble just behind him is Fiofio Dandolo. What a grand +family they have been, what a number of great men they have given +to the republic! I should like to have seen the grand old Doge who +stormed the walls of Constantinople, and divided the Eastern empire +among the crusading barons. He was a hero indeed.</p> + +<p>"No; I don't know who that young noble in the green velvet cap +and plum coloured dress is. O yes, I do, though; it is Ruggiero +Mocenigo; he has been away for the last two years at +Constantinople; he was banished for having killed Polo Morosini--he +declared it was in fair fight, but no one believed him. They had +quarrelled a few days before over some question of the precedence +of their families, and Morosini was found dead at the top of the +steps close to the church of Saint Paolo. Some people heard a cry +and ran up just as Mocenigo leapt into his gondola, but as it rowed +off their shouts called the attention of one of the city guard +boats which happened to be passing, and it was stopped. As his +sword was still wet with blood, he could not deny that he was the +author of the deed, but, as I said, he declared it was in fair +fight. The Morosinis asserted that Polo's sword was undrawn, but +the Mocenigo family brought forward a man, who swore that he was +one of the first to arrive, and pick up the sword and place it in +its scabbard to prevent its being lost. No doubt he lied; but as +Mocenigo's influence in the council was greater than that of the +Morosini, the story was accepted. However, the public feeling was +so strong that they could not do less than sentence Ruggiero to two +years' banishment. I suppose that has just expired, and he has +returned from Constantinople. He had a bad reputation before this +affair took place, but as his connections are so powerful, I +suppose he will be received as if nothing had happened. There are +plenty of others as bad as he is."</p> + +<p>"It's a scandalous thing," Francis Hammond said indignantly, +"that, just because they have got powerful connections, men should +be allowed to do, almost with impunity, things for which an +ordinary man would be hung. There ought to be one law for the rich +as well as the poor."</p> + +<p>"So there is as far as the state is concerned," his companion +replied. "A noble who plots against the state is as certain of a +place in the lowest dungeons as a fisherman who has done the same; +but in other respects there is naturally some difference."</p> + +<p>"Why naturally?" Francis retorted. "You belong to a powerful +family, Giustiniani, and my father is only a trader, but I don't +see that naturally you have any more right to get me stabbed in the +back, than I have to get you put out of the way."</p> + +<p>"Naturally perhaps not," Matteo laughed; "but you see it has +become a second nature to us here in Venice. But seriously I admit +that the present state of things has grown to be a scandal, and +that the doings of some of our class ought to be put down with a +strong hand."</p> + +<p>"Well, I shall say goodnight now," the English boy said. "My +father doesn't like my being out after ten. He keeps up his English +habits of shutting up early, and has not learned to turn night into +day as you do here in Venice."</p> + +<p>"The bell has just tolled the hour, Francis," his father said as +he entered.</p> + +<p>"I didn't think it was quite so late, father; the Piazza is +crowded. I really do not think there is one person in Venice who +goes to bed so early as we do. It is so pleasant in the moonlight +after the heat of the day."</p> + +<p>"That is true enough, Francis, but men are meant to sleep at +night and to work in the day. I think our fathers carried this too +far when they rang the curfew at eight; but ten is quite late +enough for any honest man to be about in the streets, and the hours +of the early morning are just as pleasant and far more healthy than +those of the evening, especially in a place like this where the +mists rise from the water, to say nothing of the chance of meeting +a band of wild gallants on their way homewards heated with wine, or +of getting a stab in the back from some midnight assassin. However, +I do not blame Venice for enjoying herself while she can. She will +have more serious matters to attend to soon."</p> + +<p>"But she is at peace with every one at present, father. I +thought when she signed the treaty with Austria after a year's +fighting, she was going to have rest for a time."</p> + +<p>"That was only the beginning of the trouble, Francis, and the +council knew it well; that was why they made such terms with +Austria as they did. They knew that Austria was only acting in +accord with Hungary, and Padua, and Genoa. The others were not +ready to begin, so Austria came on her own account to get what +booty and plunder she could. But the storm is gathering, and will +burst before long. But do not let us stand talking here any longer. +It is high time for you to be in bed."</p> + +<p>But though Francis retired to his room, it was more than an hour +before he got into bed. His window looked down upon one of the +canals running into the Grand Canal. Gondolas lighted by lanterns, +or by torches held by servitors, passed constantly backwards and +forwards beneath his window, and by leaning out he could see the +passing lights of those on the Grand Canal. Snatches of song and +laughter came up to him, and sometimes the note of a musical +instrument. The air was soft and balmy, and he felt no inclination +for sleep.</p> + +<p>Francis thought over what his father had said of the probability +of war, as he sat at his window, and wished that he were a couple +of years older and could take part in the struggle. The Venetian +fleet had performed such marvels of valour, that, in the days when +military service was almost the sole avenue to distinction and +fortune, the desire to take part in a naval expedition, which +promised unusual opportunities of gaining credit and renown, was +the most natural thing possible for a boy of spirit.</p> + +<p>Francis was a well built lad of nearly sixteen. He had, until he +left London when about twelve years old, taken his full share in +the rough sports which formed so good a training for the youths of +England, and in which the citizens of London were in no way behind +the rest of the kingdom. He had practised shooting with a light bow +and arrows, in company with boys of his own age, in the fields +outside the city walls; had engaged in many a rough tussle with +light clubs and quarterstaffs; and his whole time--except for an +hour or two daily which he had, as the son of a well to do citizen, +spent in learning to read and write--had been occupied in games and +exercises of one kind or other.</p> + +<p>Since his arrival in Venice he had not altogether discontinued +his former habits. At his earnest solicitation, his father had +permitted him to attend the School of Arms, where the sons of +patricians and well-to-do merchants learned the use of sword and +dagger, to hurl the javelin, and wield the mace and battleaxe; and +was, besides, a frequenter of some of the schools where old +soldiers gave private lessons in arms to such as could afford it; +and the skill and strength of the English lad excited no slight +envy among the young Venetian nobles. Often, too, he would go out +to one of the sandy islets, and there setting up a mark, practise +with the bow. His muscles too, had gained strength and hardness by +rowing. It was his constant habit of an evening, when well away +from the crowded canals in the gondola, with Giuseppi, the son and +assistant of his father's gondolier, to take an oar, for he had +thoroughly mastered the difficult accomplishment of rowing well in +a gondola; but he only did this when far out from the city, or when +the darkness of evening would prevent his figure from being +recognized by any of his acquaintances, for no Venetian of good +family would demean himself by handling an oar. Francis, however, +accustomed to row upon the Thames, could see no reason why he +should not do the same in a gondola, and in time he and his +companion could send the boat dancing over the water, at a rate +which enabled them to overtake and distance most pair-oared +boats.</p> + +<p>After breakfast next morning he went down to the steps, where +Beppo and Giuseppi, in their black cloth suits with red sashes +round their waists, were waiting with the gondola in which Mr. +Hammond was going out to Malamocco, to examine a cargo which had +the day before arrived from Azoph. Giuseppi jumped ashore.</p> + +<p>"I have heard of just the gondola to suit you, Messer Francisco, +and you can get her a bargain."</p> + +<p>"What is she like, Giuseppi?"</p> + +<p>"She belongs to a man out at Lido. She was built for the race +two years ago, but her owner fell sick and was unable to start. He +has not got strong again, and wants to sell his boat, which is far +too light for ordinary work. They say she is almost like an +eggshell, and you and I will be able to send her along grandly. She +cost four ducats, but he will sell her for two."</p> + +<p>"That is capital, Giuseppi. This gondola is all well enough for +my father, but she is very heavy. This evening we will row over to +Lido and look at her."</p> + +<p>A few minutes later Mr. Hammond came down. Beppo and his son +took off their jackets, and in their snow white shirts and black +trousers, set off by the red scarf and a red ribbon round their +broad hats, took their places on the bow and stern. Mr. Hammond sat +down on the cushions in the middle of the boat, and with an easy, +noiseless motion the gondola glided away from the stairs. Francis, +with a little sigh, turned away and strolled off for a couple of +hours' work with the preceptor, with whom he had continued his +studies since he came to Venice.</p> + +<p>This work consisted chiefly of learning various languages, for +in those days there was little else to learn. Latin was almost +universally spoken by educated men in southern Europe, and Greeks, +Italians, Spaniards, and Frenchmen were able to converse in this +common medium. French Francis understood, for it was the language +in use in the court and among the upper classes in England. Italian +he picked up naturally during his residence, and spoke it with the +facility of a native. He could now converse freely in Latin, and +had some knowledge of German. At the same school were many lads of +good Venetian families, and it was here that he had first made the +acquaintance of Matteo Giustiniani, who was now his most intimate +friend.</p> + +<p>Matteo, like all the young nobles of Venice, was anxious to +excel in military exercises, but he had none of the ardour for +really hard work which distinguished his friend. He admired the +latter's strength and activity, but could not bring himself to +imitate him, in the exercises by which that strength was attained, +and had often remonstrated with him upon his fondness for +rowing.</p> + +<p>"It is not seemly, Francisco, for a gentleman to be labouring +like a common gondolier. These men are paid for doing it; but what +pleasure there can be in standing up working that oar, till you are +drenched with perspiration, I cannot understand. I don't mind +getting hot in the School of Arms, because one cannot learn to use +the sword and dagger without it, but that's quite another thing +from tugging at an oar."</p> + +<p>"But I like it, Matteo; and see how strong it has made my +muscles, not of the arm only, but the leg and back. You often say +you envy me my strength, but you might be just as strong if you +chose to work as I do. Besides, it is delightful, when you are +accustomed to it, to feel the gondola flying away under your +stroke."</p> + +<p>"I prefer feeling it fly away under some one else's stroke, +Francisco. That is pleasant enough, I grant; but the very thought +of working as you do throws me into a perspiration. I should like +to be as strong as you are, but to work as a gondolier is too high +a price to pay for it."</p> + +<p>That evening, Francis crossed the lagoon in the gondola with +Giuseppi, to inspect the boat he had heard of. It was just what he +wanted. In appearance it differed in no way from an ordinary +gondola, but it was a mere shell. The timbers and planking were +extremely light, and the weight of the boat was little more than a +third of that of other craft. She had been built like a working +gondola, instead of in the form of those mostly used for racing, +because her owner had intended, after the race was over, to plank +her inside and strengthen her for everyday work. But the race had +never come off, and the boat lay just as she had come from the +hands of her builder, except that she had been painted black, like +other gondolas, to prevent her planks from opening. When her owner +had determined to part with her he had given her a fresh coat of +paint, and had put her in the water, that her seams might close +up.</p> + +<p>"I don't like parting with her," the young fisherman to whom she +belonged said. "I tried her once or twice, and she went like the +wind, but I got fever in my bones and I am unlikely to race again, +and the times are hard, and I must part with her."</p> + +<p>Francis and Giuseppi gave her a trial, and were delighted with +the speed and ease with which she flew through the water. On their +return Francis at once paid the price asked for her. His father +made him a handsome allowance, in order that he might be able to +mix, without discomfort, with the lads of good family whom he met +at his preceptor's and at the schools of arms. But Francis did not +care for strolling in the Piazza, or sitting for hours sipping +liquors. Still less did he care for dress or finery. Consequently +he had always plenty of money to indulge in his own special +fancies.</p> + +<p>As soon as the bargain was completed, Giuseppi took his place in +the old gondola, while Francis took the oar in his new acquisition, +and found to his satisfaction that with scarcely an effort he could +dart ahead of his companion and leave him far behind. By nightfall +the two gondolas were fastened, side by side, behind the gaily +painted posts which, in almost all Venetian houses, are driven into +the canal close to the steps, and behind which the gondolas +belonging to the house lie safe from injury by passing craft.</p> + +<p>"I have bought another gondola, father," Francis said the next +morning. "She is a very light, fast craft, and I got her +cheap."</p> + +<p>"I don't see what you wanted another gondola for, Francis. I do +not use mine very much, and you are always welcome to take it when +I do not want it."</p> + +<p>"Yes, father, but you often use it in the evening, and that is +just the time when one wants to go out. You very often only take +Beppo with you, when you do not go on business, and I often want a +boat that I could take with Giuseppi. Besides, your gondola is a +very solid one, and I like passing people."</p> + +<p>"Young people always want to go fast," Mr. Hammond said. "Why, I +can't make out. However, Francis, I am not sorry that you have got +a boat of your own, for it has happened several times lately, that +when in the evening I have gone down intending to row round to the +Piazzetta, I have found the boat gone, and have had to walk. Now I +shall be able to rely on finding Beppo asleep in the boat at the +steps. In future, since you have a boat of your own, I shall not be +so particular as to your being in at ten. I do not so much mind +your being out on the water, only you must promise me that you will +not be in the streets after that hour. There are frequent broils as +the evening gets on, not to mention the danger of cutthroats in +unfrequented lanes; but if you will promise me that you will never +be about the streets after half past nine, I will give you leave to +stay out on the water till a later hour; but when you come in late +be careful always to close and bar the door, and do not make more +noise than you can help in coming up to your room."</p> + +<p>Francis was much pleased with this concession, for the +obligation to return at ten o'clock, just when the temperature was +most delightful and the Grand Canal at its gayest, had been very +irksome to him. As to the prohibition against being in the streets +of Venice after half past nine, he felt that no hardship whatever, +as he found no amusement in strolling in the crowded Piazza.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch2">Chapter 2</a>: A Conspiracy.</h2> + +<p>"Who are those ladies, Matteo?" Francis asked his friend one +evening, as the latter, who was sitting with him in his gondola, +while Giuseppi rowed them along the Grand Canal, half rose and +saluted two girls in a passing gondola.</p> + +<p>"They are distant cousins of mine, Maria and Giulia Polani. They +only returned a short time since from Corfu. Their father is one of +the richest merchants of our city. He has for the last three years +been living in Corfu, which is the headquarters of his trade. The +family is an old one, and has given doges to Venice. They are two +of our richest heiresses, for they have no brothers. Their mother +died soon after the birth of Giulia."</p> + +<p>"They both look very young," Francis said.</p> + +<p>"Maria is about sixteen, her sister two years younger. There +will be no lack of suitors for their hands, for although the family +is not politically powerful, as it used to be, their wealth would +cause them to be gladly received in our very first families."</p> + +<p>"Who was the middle-aged lady sitting between them?"</p> + +<p>"She is only their duenna," Matteo said carelessly. "She has +been with them since they were children, and their father places +great confidence in her. And he had need to, for Maria will ere +long be receiving bouquets and perfumed notes from many a young +gallant."</p> + +<p>"I can quite fancy that," Francis said, "for she is very pretty +as well as very rich, and, as far as I have observed, the two +things do not go very often together. However, no doubt by this +time her father has pretty well arranged in his mind whom she is to +marry."</p> + +<p>"I expect so," agreed Matteo.</p> + +<p>"That is the worst of being born of good family. You have got to +marry some one of your father's choice, not your own, and that +choice is determined simply by the desire to add to the political +influence of the family, to strengthen distant ties, or to obtain +powerful connections. I suppose it is the same everywhere, Matteo, +but I do think that a man or woman ought to have some voice in a +matter of such importance to them."</p> + +<p>"I think so, too, at the present time," Matteo laughed; "but I +don't suppose that I shall be of that opinion when I have a family +of sons and daughters to marry.</p> + +<p>"This gondola of yours must be a fast one indeed, Francisco, for +with only one rower she keeps up with almost all the pair oared +boats, and your boy is not exerting himself to the utmost, +either."</p> + +<p>"She can fly along, I can tell you, Matteo. You shall come out +in her some evening when Giuseppi and I both take oars. I have had +her ten days now, and we have not come across anything that can +hold her for a moment."</p> + +<p>"It is always useful," Matteo said, "to have a fast boat. It is +invaluable in case you have been getting into a scrape, and have +one of the boats of the city watch in chase of you."</p> + +<p>"I hope I sha'n't want it for any purpose of that sort," Francis +answered, laughing. "I do not think I am likely to give cause to +the city watch to chase me."</p> + +<p>"I don't think you are, Francisco, but there is never any +saying."</p> + +<p>"At any rate it is always useful to be able to go fast if +necessary, and if we did want to get away, I do not think there are +many pair-oared gondolas afloat that would overtake us, though a +good four oar might do so. Giuseppi and I are so accustomed to each +other's stroke now, that though in a heavy boat we might not be a +match for two men, in a light craft like this, where weight does +not count for so much, we would not mind entering her for a race +against the two best gondoliers on the canals, in an ordinary +boat."</p> + +<p>A few evenings later, Francis was returning homewards at about +half past ten, when, in passing along a quiet canal, the boat was +hailed from the shore.</p> + +<p>"Shall we take him, Messer Francisco?" Giuseppi asked in a low +voice; for more than once they had late in the evening taken a +fare.</p> + +<p>Francis rowed, like Giuseppi, in his shirt, and in the darkness +they were often taken for a pair-oared gondola on the lookout for a +fare. Francis had sometimes accepted the offer, because it was an +amusement to see where the passenger wished to go--to guess whether +he was a lover hastening to keep an appointment, a gambler on a +visit to some quiet locality, where high play went on unknown to +the authorities, or simply one who had by some error missed his own +gondola, and was anxious to return home. It made no difference to +him which way he rowed. It was always possible that some adventure +was to be met with, and the fare paid was a not unwelcome addition +to Giuseppi's funds.</p> + +<p>"Yes, we may as well take him," he replied to Giuseppi's +question.</p> + +<p>"You are in no hurry to get to bed, I suppose?" the man who had +hailed them said as the boat drew up against the wall of the +canal.</p> + +<p>"It does not make much difference to us, if we are well paid, to +keep awake," Giuseppi said.</p> + +<p>Upon such occasions he was always the spokesman.</p> + +<p>"You know San Nicolo?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, I know it," Giuseppi said; "but it is a long row--six +miles, if it's a foot."</p> + +<p>"You will have to wait there for an hour or two, but I will give +you half a ducat for your night's work."</p> + +<p>"What do you say, partner?" Giuseppi asked Francis.</p> + +<p>"We may as well go," the lad replied after a moment's pause.</p> + +<p>The row was certainly a long one, but the night was delightful, +and the half ducat was a prize for Giuseppi; but what influenced +Francis principally in accepting was curiosity. San Nicolo was a +little sandy islet lying quite on the outside of the group of +islands. It was inhabited only by a few fishermen; and Francis +wondered that a man, evidently by his voice and manner of address +belonging to the upper class, should want to go to such a place as +this at this hour of the night. Certainly no ordinary motives could +actuate him.</p> + +<p>As the stranger took his place in the boat, Francis saw by the +light of the stars that he was masked; but there was nothing very +unusual in this, as masks were not unfrequently worn at night by +young gallants, when engaged on any frolic in which they wished +their identity to be unrecognized. Still it added to the interest +of the trip; and dipping his oar in the water he set out at a slow, +steady stroke well within his power. He adopted this partly in view +of the length of the row before them, partly because the idea +struck him that it might be as well that their passenger should not +suspect that the boat was other than an ordinary gondola. The +passenger, however, was well satisfied with the speed, for they +passed two or three other gondolas before issuing from the narrow +canals, and starting across the broad stretch of the lagoon.</p> + +<p>Not a word was spoken until the gondola neared its destination. +Then the passenger said:</p> + +<p>"You row well. If you like the job I may employ you again."</p> + +<p>"We are always ready to earn money," Francis said, speaking in a +gruff voice quite unlike his own.</p> + +<p>"Very well. I will let you know, as we return, what night I +shall want you again. I suppose you can keep your mouths shut on +occasion, and can go without gossiping to your fellows as to any +job on which you are employed?"</p> + +<p>"We can do that," Francis said. "It's no matter to us where our +customers want to go, if they are willing to pay for it; and as to +gossiping, there is a saying, 'A silver gag is the best for keeping +the mouth closed.'"</p> + +<p>A few minutes later the bow of the gondola ran up on the sandy +shore of San Nicolo. The stranger made his way forward and leapt +out, and with the words, "It may be two hours before I am back," +walked rapidly away.</p> + +<p>"Why, Messer Francisco," Giuseppi said when their passenger was +well out of hearing, "what on earth possessed you to accept a fare +to such a place as this? Of course, for myself, I am glad enough to +earn half a ducat, which will buy me a new jacket with silver +buttons for the next festa; but to make such a journey as this was +too much, and it will be very late before we are back. If the +padrone knew it he would be very angry."</p> + +<p>"I didn't do it to enable you to earn half a ducat, Giuseppi, +although I am glad enough you should do so; but I did it because it +seemed to promise the chance of an adventure. There must be +something in this. A noble--for I have no doubt he is one--would +never be coming out to San Nicolo, at this time of night, without +some very strong motive. There can be no rich heiress whom he might +want to carry off living here, so that can't be what he has come +for. I think there must be some secret meeting, for as we came +across the lagoon I saw one or two beats in the distance heading in +this direction. Anyhow, I mean to try and find out what it all +means."</p> + +<p>"You had better not, sir," Giuseppi said earnestly. "If there is +any plot on foot we had best not get mixed up in it. No one is too +high or too low to escape the vengeance of the council, if found +plotting against the state; and before now gondolas, staved in and +empty, have been found drifting on the lagoons, and the men who +rowed them have never been heard of again. Once in the dungeons of +Saint Mark it would be of no use to plead that you had entered into +the affair simply for the amusement. The fact that you were not a +regular boatman would make the matter all the worse, and the maxim +that 'dead men tell no tales' is largely acted upon in Venice.</p> + +<p>"I think, sir, the best plan will be to row straight back, and +leave our fare to find his way home as best he may."</p> + +<p>"I mean to find something out about it if I can, Giuseppi. A +state secret may be dangerous, but it may be valuable. Anyhow, +there can be no great risk in it. On the water I think we can show +our heels to anyone who chases us; and once in Venice, we are +absolutely safe, for no one would suspect a gondola of Mr. Hammond, +the English merchant, of having any connection with a hired craft +with its two gondoliers."</p> + +<p>"That is true enough, sir; but I don't like it for all that. +However, if you have made up your mind to it, there is nothing more +to be said."</p> + +<p>"Very well. You stay here, and I will go and look round. You had +better get the gondola afloat, and be ready to start at the +instant, so that, if I should have to run for it, I can jump on +board and be off in a moment."</p> + +<p>Francis made his way quietly up to the little group of huts +inhabited by the fishermen, but in none of them could he see any +signs of life--no lights were visible, nor could he hear the murmur +of voices. There were, he knew, other buildings scattered about on +the island; but he had only the light of the stars to guide him, +and, not knowing anything of the exact position of the houses, he +thought it better to return to the boat.</p> + +<p>"I can find no signs of them, Giuseppi."</p> + +<p>"All the better, Messer Francisco. There are some sorts of game, +which it is well for the safety of the hunter not to discover. I +was very glad, I can tell you, when I heard your whistle, and made +out your figure returning at a walk. Now you are back I will take +an hour's nap, and I should advise you to do the same."</p> + +<p>But Francis had no thought of sleep, and sat down at his end of +the gondola, wondering over the adventure, and considering whether +or not it would be worth while to follow it up another night. That +it was a plot of some sort he had little doubt. There were always +in Venice two parties, equally anxious perhaps for the prosperity +of the republic, but differing widely as to the means by which that +prosperity would be best achieved, and as to the alliances which +would, in the long run, prove most beneficial to her. There were +also needy and desperate men ready enough to take bribes from any +who might offer them, and to intrigue in the interest of Padua or +Ferrara, Verona, Milan, or Genoa--whichever might for the time be +their paymasters.</p> + +<p>Francis was English, but he had been long enough in Venice to +feel a pride in the island city, and to be almost as keenly +interested in her fortunes as were his companions and friends; and +a certain sense of duty, mingled with his natural love of +adventure, decided him to follow up the chance which had befallen +him, and to endeavour to ascertain the nature of the plot which +was, he had little doubt, being hatched at San Nicolo.</p> + +<p>In a very few minutes the regular breathing of Giuseppi, who had +curled himself up in the bottom of the boat, showed that he had +gone to sleep; and he did not stir until, an hour and a half after +the return of Francis, the latter heard the fall of footsteps +approaching the gondola.</p> + +<p>"Wake up, Giuseppi, here comes our fare!"</p> + +<p>Francis stood up and stretched himself as the stranger came +alongside, as if he too had been fast asleep.</p> + +<p>"Take me back to the spot where I hailed you," the fare said +briefly, as he stepped into the boat and threw himself back on the +cushions, and without a word the lads dipped their oars in the +water and the gondola glided away towards Venice.</p> + +<p>Just as they reached the mouth of the Grand Canal, and were +about to turn into it, a six-oared gondola shot out from under the +point, and a voice called out:</p> + +<p>"Stop, in the name of the republic, and give an account of +yourselves!"</p> + +<p>"Row on," the passenger exclaimed, starting up. "Ten ducats if +you can set me safely on shore."</p> + +<p>Had the lads been real gondoliers, it is probable that even this +tempting offer would not have induced them to disregard the order +from the galley, for they would have run no slight risk in so +doing. But Francis had no desire to be caught, and perhaps +imprisoned for a considerable time, until he was able to convince +the council that his share of the night's work had been merely the +result of a boyish freak. With two strokes of his oar, therefore, +he swept the boat's head round, thereby throwing their pursuers +directly astern of them; then he and Giuseppi threw their whole +weight into the stroke, and the boat danced over the water at a +pace very different to that at which it had hitherto proceeded.</p> + +<p>But, fast as they went, the galley travelled somewhat faster, +the rowers doing their utmost in obedience to the angry orders of +their officer; and had the race been continued on a broad stretch +of water, it would sooner or later have overhauled the gondola. But +Francis was perfectly aware of this, and edged the boat away +towards the end of the Piazzetta, and then, shooting her head +round, dashed at full speed along the canal by the side of the +ducal palace, the galley being at the time some forty yards +behind.</p> + +<p>"The first to the right," Francis said, and with scarce a pause +in their speed, they turned off at right angles up the first canal +they came to. Again and again they turned and twisted, regardless +of the direction in which the canals took them, their only object +being to gain on their pursuers, who lost considerably at each +turn, being obliged always to check their speed, before arriving at +each angle, to allow the boat to go round.</p> + +<p>In ten minutes she was far behind, and they then abated their +speed, and turned the boat's head in the direction in which they +wished to go.</p> + +<p>"By San Paolo," the stranger said, "that was well done! You are +masters of your craft, and sent your boat along at a pace which +must have astonished those fellows in that lumbering galley. I had +no reason to fear them, but I do not care to be interfered with and +questioned by these jacks-in-office of the republic."</p> + +<p>A few minutes later they reached the place where he embarked, +and as he got out he handed the money he had promised to +Giuseppi.</p> + +<p>"Next Thursday night," he said, "at half past ten."</p> + +<p>"It seems a dangerous sort of service, signor," Giuseppi said +hesitatingly. "It is no joke to disobey the officers of the +republic, and next time we may not be so fortunate."</p> + +<p>"It's worth taking a little risk when you are well paid," the +other said, turning away, "and it is not likely we shall run +against one of the state galleys another night."</p> + +<p>"Home, now, Giuseppi," Francis said, "we can talk about it +tomorrow. It's the best night's work you ever did in your life, and +as I have had a grand excitement we are both contented."</p> + +<p>During the next few days Francis debated seriously with himself +whether to follow up the adventure; but he finally decided on doing +so, feeling convinced that there could be no real danger, even were +the boat seized by one of the state galleys; as his story, that he +had gone into the matter simply to discover whether any plot was +intended against the republic, would finally be believed, as it +would be beyond the bounds of probability that a lad of his age +could himself have been concerned in such a conspiracy. As to +Giuseppi, he offered no remonstrance when Francis told him that he +intended to go out to San Nicolo on the following Thursday, for the +ten ducats he had received were a sum larger than he could have +saved in a couple of years' steady work, and were indeed quite a +fortune in his eyes. Another such a sum, and he would be able, when +the time came, to buy a gondola of his own, to marry, and set up +housekeeping in grand style. As for the danger, if Francis was +willing to run it he could do the same; for after all, a few +months' imprisonment was the worst that could befall him for his +share in the business.</p> + +<p>Before the day came Matteo Giustiniani told Francis a piece of +news which interested him.</p> + +<p>"You remember my cousin Maria Polani, whom we met the other +evening on the Grand Canal?"</p> + +<p>"Of course I do, Matteo. What of her?"</p> + +<p>"Well, what do you think? Ruggiero Mocenigo, whom I pointed out +to you on the Piazza--the man who had been banished for two +years--has asked for her hand in marriage."</p> + +<p>"He is not going to have it, I hope," Francis said indignantly. +"It would be a shame, indeed, to give her to such a man as +that."</p> + +<p>"That is just what her father thought, Francisco, and he refused +Ruggiero pretty curtly, and told him, I believe, he would rather +see her in her grave than married to him; and I hear there was a +regular scene, and Ruggiero went away swearing Polani should regret +his refusal."</p> + +<p>"I suppose your cousin does not care much about his threats," +Francis said.</p> + +<p>"I don't suppose he cares much about them," Matteo replied; "but +Ruggiero is very powerfully connected, and may do him damage, not +to speak of the chance of his hiring a bravo to stab him on the +first opportunity. I know my father advised Polani to be very +cautious where he went at night for a time. This fellow, Ruggiero, +is a dangerous enemy. If he were to get Polani stabbed, it would be +next to impossible to prove that it was his doing, however strong +the suspicion might be; for mere suspicion goes for nothing against +a man with his influence and connections. He has two near relations +on the council, and if he were to burn down Polani's mansion, and +to carry off Maria, the chances are against his being punished, if +he did but keep out of the way for a few months."</p> + +<p>As in England powerful barons were in the habit of waging +private wars with each other, and the carrying off a bride by force +was no very rare event, this state of things did not appear, to +Francis, as outrageous as it would do to an English lad of the +present day, but he shook his head.</p> + +<p>"Of course one understands, Matteo, that everywhere powerful +nobles do things which would be regarded as crimes if done by +others; but, elsewhere, people can fortify their houses, and call +out and arm their retainers, and stand on their guard. But that +here, in a city like this, private feuds should be carried on, and +men stabbed when unconscious of danger, seems to me +detestable."</p> + +<p>"Of course it isn't right," Matteo said carelessly, "but I don't +know how you are going to put a stop to it; and after all, our +quarrels here only involve a life or two, while in other countries +nobles go to war with each other, and hundreds of lives, of people +who have nothing to do with the quarrel, may be sacrificed."</p> + +<p>This was a light in which Francis had hardly looked upon the +matter before, and he was obliged to own that even private +assassination, detestable as it was, yet caused much less suffering +than feudal war. Still, he was not disposed entirely to give in to +his friend's opinion.</p> + +<p>"That is true, Matteo; but at the same time, in a war it is fair +fighting, while a stab in the back is a cowardly business."</p> + +<p>"It is not always fair fighting," Matteo replied. "You hear of +castles being surprised, and the people massacred without a chance +of resistance; of villages being burned, and the people butchered +unresistingly. I don't think there is so much more fairness one way +than the other. Polani knows he will have to be careful, and if he +likes he can hire bravos to put Ruggiero out of the way, just as +Ruggiero can do to remove him. There's a good deal to be said for +both sides of the question."</p> + +<p>Francis felt this was so, and that although he had an abhorrence +of the Venetian method of settling quarrels, he saw that as far as +the public were concerned, it was really preferable to the feudal +method, of both parties calling out their retainers and going to +war with each other, especially as assassinations played no +inconsiderable part in the feudal struggles of the time.</p> + +<p>On the Thursday night the gondola was in waiting at the agreed +spot. Francis had thought it probable that the stranger might this +time ask some questions as to where they lived and their usual +place of plying for hire, and would endeavour to find out as much +as he could about them, as they could not but suspect that he was +engaged in some very unusual enterprise. He had therefore warned +Giuseppi to be very careful in his replies. He knew that it was not +necessary to say more, for Giuseppi had plenty of shrewdness, and +would, he was sure, invent some plausible story without the least +difficulty, possessing, as he did, plenty of the easy mendacity so +general among the lower classes of the races inhabiting countries +bordering on the Mediterranean. Their fare came down to the gondola +a few minutes after the clock had tolled the half hour.</p> + +<p>"I see you are punctual," he said, "which is more than most of +you men are."</p> + +<p>Francis was rowing the bow oar, and therefore stood with his +back to the passenger, and was not likely to be addressed by him, +as he would naturally turn to Giuseppi, who stood close behind him. +As Francis had expected, as soon as they were out on the lagoon the +passenger turned to his companion and began to question him.</p> + +<p>"I cannot see your faces," he said; "but by your figures you are +both young, are you not?"</p> + +<p>"I am but twenty-two," Giuseppi said, "and my brother is a year +younger."</p> + +<p>"And what are your names?"</p> + +<p>"Giovanni and Beppo Morani."</p> + +<p>"And is this boat your own?"</p> + +<p>"It is, signor. Our father died three years ago, leaving us his +boat."</p> + +<p>"And where do you usually ply?"</p> + +<p>"Anywhere, signor, just as the fancy seizes us. Sometimes one +place is good, sometimes another."</p> + +<p>"And where do you live?"</p> + +<p>"We don't live anywhere, signor. When night comes, and business +is over, we tie up the boat to a post, wrap ourselves up, and go to +sleep at the bottom. It costs nothing, and we are just as +comfortable there as we should be on straw in a room."</p> + +<p>"Then you must be saving money."</p> + +<p>"Yes; we are laying money by. Some day, I suppose, we shall +marry, and our wives must have homes. Besides, sometimes we are +lazy and don't work. One must have some pleasure, you know."</p> + +<p>"Would you like to enter service?"</p> + +<p>"No, signor. We prefer being our own masters; to take a fare or +leave it as we please."</p> + +<p>"Your boat is a very fast one. You went at a tremendous rate +when the galley was after us the other night."</p> + +<p>"The boat is like others," Giuseppi said carelessly; "but most +men can row fast when the alternative is ten ducats one way or a +prison the other."</p> + +<p>"Then there would be no place where I could always find you in +the daytime if I wanted you?"</p> + +<p>"No, signor; there would be no saying where we might be. We have +sometimes regular customers, and it would not pay us to disappoint +them, even if you paid us five times the ordinary fare. But we +could always meet you at night anywhere, when you choose to +appoint."</p> + +<p>"But how can I appoint," the passenger said irritably, "if I +don't know where to find you?"</p> + +<p>Giuseppi was silent for a stroke or two.</p> + +<p>"If your excellency would write in figures, half past ten or +eleven, or whatever time we should meet you, just at the base of +the column of the palace--the corner one on the Piazzetta--we +should be sure to be there sometime or other during the day, and +would look for it."</p> + +<p>"You can read and write, then?" the passenger asked.</p> + +<p>"I cannot do that, signor," Giuseppi said, "but I can make out +figures. That is necessary to us, as how else could we keep time +with our customers? We can read the sundials, as everyone else can; +but as to reading and writing, that is not for poor lads like +us."</p> + +<p>The stranger was satisfied. Certainly every one could read the +sundials; and the gondoliers would, as they said, understand his +figures if he wrote them.</p> + +<p>"Very well," he said. "It is probable I shall generally know, +each time I discharge you, when I shall want you again; but should +there be any change, I will make the figures on the base of the +column at the corner of the Piazzetta, and that will mean the hour +at which you are to meet me that night at the usual place."</p> + +<p>Nothing more was said, until the gondola arrived at the same +spot at which it had landed the passenger on the previous +occasion.</p> + +<p>"I shall be back in about the same time as before," the fare +said when he alighted.</p> + +<p>As he strode away into the darkness, Francis followed him. He +was shoeless, for at that time the lower class seldom wore any +protection to the feet, unless when going a journey over rough +ground. Among the gondoliers shoes were unknown; and Francis +himself generally took his off, for coolness and comfort, when out +for the evening in his boat.</p> + +<p>He kept some distance behind the man he was following, for as +there were no hedges or inclosures, he could make out his figure +against the sky at a considerable distance. As Francis had +expected, he did not make towards the village, but kept along the +island at a short distance from the edge of the water.</p> + +<p>Presently Francis heard the dip of oars, and a gondola ran up on +the sands halfway between himself and the man he was following. He +threw himself down on the ground. Two men alighted, and went in the +same direction as the one who had gone ahead.</p> + +<p>Francis made a detour, so as to avoid being noticed by the +gondoliers, and then again followed. After keeping more than a +quarter of a mile near the water, the two figures ahead struck +inshore. Francis followed them, and in a few minutes they stopped +at a black mass, rising above the sand. He heard them knock, and +then a low murmur, as if they were answering some question from +within. Then they entered, and a door closed.</p> + +<p>He moved up to the building. It was a hut of some size, but had +a deserted appearance. It stood between two ridges of low sand +hills, and the sand had drifted till it was halfway up the walls. +There was no garden or inclosure round it, and any passerby would +have concluded that it was uninhabited. The shutters were closed, +and no gleam of light showed from within.</p> + +<p>After stepping carefully round it, Francis took his post round +the angle close to the door, and waited. Presently he heard +footsteps approaching--three knocks were given on the door, and a +voice within asked, "Who is there?"</p> + +<p>The reply was, "One who is in distress."</p> + +<p>The question came, "What ails you?"</p> + +<p>And the answer, "All is wrong within."</p> + +<p>Then there was a sound of bars being withdrawn, and the door +opened and closed again.</p> + +<p>There were four other arrivals. The same questions were asked +and answered each time. Then some minutes elapsed without any fresh +comers, and Francis thought that the number was probably complete. +He lay down on the sand, and with his dagger began to make a hole +through the wood, which was old and rotten, and gave him no +difficulty in piercing it.</p> + +<p>He applied his eye to the orifice, and saw that there were some +twelve men seated round a table. Of those facing him he knew three +or four by sight; all were men of good family. Two of them belonged +to the council, but not to the inner Council of Ten. One, sitting +at the top of the table, was speaking; but although Francis applied +his ear to the hole he had made, he could hear but a confused +murmur, and could not catch the words. He now rose cautiously, +scooped up the sand so as to cover the hole in the wall, and swept +a little down over the spot where he had been lying, although he +had no doubt that the breeze, which would spring up before morning, +would soon drift the light shifting sand over it, and obliterate +the mark of his recumbent figure. Then he went round to the other +side of the hut and bored another hole, so as to obtain a view of +the faces of those whose backs had before been towards him.</p> + +<p>One of these was Ruggiero Mocenigo. Another was a stranger to +Francis, and some difference in the fashion of his garments +indicated that he was not a Venetian, but, Francis thought, a +Hungarian. The other three were not nobles. One of them Francis +recognized, as being a man of much influence among the fishermen +and sailors. The other two were unknown to him.</p> + +<p>As upwards of an hour had been spent in making the two holes and +taking observations, Francis thought it better now to make his way +back to his boat, especially as it was evident that he would gain +nothing by remaining longer. Therefore, after taking the same +precautions as before, to conceal all signs of his presence, he +made his way across the sands back to his gondola.</p> + +<p>"Heaven be praised, you are back again!" Giuseppi said, when he +heard his low whistle, as he came down to the boat. "I have been in +a fever ever since I lost sight of you. Have you succeeded?"</p> + +<p>"I have found out that there is certainly a plot of some sort +being got up, and I know some of those concerned in it, but I could +hear nothing that went on. Still, I have succeeded better than I +expected, and I am well satisfied with the night's work."</p> + +<p>"I hope you won't come again, Messer Francisco. In the first +place, you may not always have the fortune to get away unseen. In +the next place, it is a dangerous matter to have to do with +conspiracies, whichever side you are on. The way to live long in +Venice is to make no enemies."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I know that, Giuseppi, and I haven't decided yet what to +do in the matter."</p> + +<p>A quarter of an hour later, their fare returned to the boat. +This time they took a long detour, and, entering Venice by one of +the many canals, reached the landing place without adventure. The +stranger handed Giuseppi a ducat.</p> + +<p>"I do not know when I shall want you again; but I will mark the +hour, as agreed, on the pillar. Do not fail to go there every +afternoon; and even if you don't see it, you might as well come +round here at half past ten of a night. I may want you +suddenly."</p> + +<p>Before going to sleep that night, Francis thought the matter +over seriously, and finally concluded that he would have no more to +do with it. No doubt, by crossing over to San Nicolo in the +daytime, he might be able to loosen a plank at the back of the hut, +or to cut so large an opening that he could hear, as well as see, +what was going on within; but supposing he discovered that a plot +was on hand in favour of the enemies of Venice, such as Padua or +Hungary, what was he to do next? At the best, if he denounced it, +and the officers of the republic surrounded the hut when the +conspirators were gathered there, arrested them, and found upon +them, or in their houses, proofs sufficient to condemn them, his +own position would not be enviable. He would gain, indeed, the +gratitude of the republic; but as for rewards, he had no need of +them. On the other hand, he would draw upon himself the enmity of +some eight or ten important families, and all their connections and +followers, and his life would be placed in imminent danger. They +would be all the more bitter against him, inasmuch as the discovery +would not have been made by accident, but by an act of deliberate +prying into matters which concerned him in no way, he not being a +citizen of the republic.</p> + +<p>So far his action in the matter had been a mere boyish freak; +and now that he saw it was likely to become an affair of grave +importance, involving the lives of many persons, he determined to +have nothing further to do with it.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch3">Chapter 3</a>: On The Grand Canal.</h2> + +<p>Giuseppi, next morning, heard the announcement of the +determination of Francis, to interfere no further in the matter of +the conspiracy at San Nicolo, with immense satisfaction. For the +last few nights he had scarcely slept, and whenever he dozed off, +dreamed either of being tortured in dungeons, or of being murdered +in his gondola; and no money could make up for the constant terrors +which assailed him. In his waking moments he was more anxious for +his employer than for himself, for it was upon him that the +vengeance of the conspirators would fall, rather than upon a young +gondolier, who was only obeying the orders of his master.</p> + +<p>It was, then, with unbounded relief that he heard Francis had +decided to go no more out to San Nicolo.</p> + +<p>During the next few days Francis went more frequently than usual +to the Piazza of Saint Mark, and had no difficulty in recognizing +there the various persons he had seen in the hut, and in +ascertaining their names and families. One of the citizens he had +failed to recognize was a large contractor in the salt works on the +mainland. The other was the largest importer of beasts for the +supply of meat to the markets of the city.</p> + +<p>Francis was well satisfied with the knowledge he had gained. It +might never be of any use to him, but it might, on the other hand, +be of importance when least expected.</p> + +<p>As a matter of precaution he drew up an exact account of the +proceedings of the two nights on the lagoons, giving an account of +the meeting, and the names of the persons present, and placed it in +a drawer in his room. He told Giuseppi what he had done.</p> + +<p>"I do not think there is the least chance of our ever being +recognized, Giuseppi. There was not enough light for the man to +have made out our features. Still there is nothing like taking +precautions, and if--I don't think it is likely, mind--but if +anything should ever happen to me--if I should be missing, for +example, and not return by the following morning--you take that +paper out of my drawer and drop it into the Lion's Mouth. Then, if +you are questioned, tell the whole story."</p> + +<p>"But they will never believe me, Messer Francisco," Giuseppi +said in alarm.</p> + +<p>"They will believe you, because it will be a confirmation of my +story; but I don't think that there is the least chance of our ever +hearing anything further about it."</p> + +<p>"Why not denounce them at once without putting your name to it," +Giuseppi said. "Then they could pounce upon them over there, and +find out all about it for themselves?"</p> + +<p>"I have thought about it, Giuseppi, but there is something +treacherous in secret denunciations. These men have done me no +harm, and as a foreigner their political schemes do not greatly +concern me. I should not like to think I had sent twelve men to the +dungeons and perhaps to death."</p> + +<p>"I think it's a pity you ever went there at all, Messer +Francisco."</p> + +<p>"Well, perhaps it is, Giuseppi; but I never thought it would +turn out a serious affair like this. However, I do wish I hadn't +gone now; not that I think it really matters, or that we shall ever +hear anything more of it. We may, perhaps, some day see the result +of this conspiracy, that is, if its objects are such as I guess +them to be; namely, to form a party opposed to war with Hungary, +Padua, or Genoa."</p> + +<p>For some days after this Francis abstained from late excursions +in the gondola. It was improbable that he or Giuseppi would be +recognized did their late passenger meet them. Still, it was +possible that they might be so; and when he went out he sat quietly +among the cushions while Giuseppi rowed, as it would be a +pair-oared gondola the stranger would be looking for. He was sure +that the conspirator would feel uneasy when the boat did not come +to the rendezvous, especially when they found that, on three +successive days, figures were marked as had been arranged on the +column at the corner of the Piazzetta.</p> + +<p>Giuseppi learned indeed, a week later, that inquiries had been +made among the gondoliers for a boat rowed by two brothers, +Giovanni and Beppo; and the inquirer, who was dressed as a retainer +of a noble family, had offered five ducats reward for information +concerning it. No such names, however, were down upon the register +of gondoliers licensed to ply for hire. Giuseppi learned that the +search had been conducted quietly but vigorously, and that several +young gondoliers who rowed together had been seen and +questioned.</p> + +<p>The general opinion, among the boatmen, was that some lady must +have been carried off, and that her friends were seeking for a clue +as to the spot to which she had been taken.</p> + +<p>One evening Francis had been strolling on the Piazza with +Matteo, and had remained out later than he had done since the night +of his last visit to San Nicolo. He took his seat in the gondola, +and when Giuseppi asked him if he would go home, said he would +first take a turn or two on the Grand Canal as the night was close +and sultry.</p> + +<p>There was no moon now, and most of the gondolas carried torches. +Giuseppi was paddling quietly, when a pair-oared gondola shot past +them, and by the light of the torch it carried, Francis recognized +the ladies sitting in it to be Maria and Giulia Polani with their +duenna; two armed retainers sat behind them. They were, Francis +supposed, returning from spending the evening at the house of some +of their friends. There were but few boats now passing along the +canal.</p> + +<p>Polani's gondola was a considerable distance ahead, when Francis +heard a sudden shout of, "Mind where you are going!"</p> + +<p>Then there was a crash of two gondolas striking each other, +followed by an outburst of shouts and cries of alarm, with, Francis +thought, the clash of swords.</p> + +<p>"Row, Giuseppi!" he exclaimed, leaping from his seat and +catching up the other oar; and with swift and powerful strokes the +two lads drove the gondola towards the scene of what was either an +accident, or an attempt at crime.</p> + +<p>They had no doubt which it was when they arrived at the spot. A +four-oared gondola lay alongside that of the Polanis, and the +gondoliers with their oars, and the two retainers with their +swords, had offered a stout resistance to an armed party who were +trying to board her from the other craft, but their resistance was +well nigh over by the time Francis brought his gondola +alongside.</p> + +<p>One of the retainers had fallen with a sword thrust through his +body, and a gondolier had been knocked overboard by a blow from an +oar. The two girls were standing up screaming, and the surviving +retainer was being borne backwards by three or four armed men, who +were slashing furiously at him.</p> + +<p>"Quick, ladies, jump into my boat!" Francis exclaimed as he came +alongside, and, leaning over, he dragged them one after the other +into his boat, just as their last defender fell.</p> + +<p>With a fierce oath the leader of the assailants was about to +spring into the gondola, when Francis, snatching up his oar, smote +him with all his strength on the head as he was in the act of +springing, and he fell with a heavy splash into the water between +the boats.</p> + +<p>A shout of alarm and rage rose from his followers, but the +gondolas were now separated, and in another moment that of Francis +was flying along the canal at the top of its speed.</p> + +<p>"Calm yourselves, ladies," Francis said. "There is no fear of +pursuit. They will stop to pick up the man I knocked into the +canal, and by the time they get him on board we shall be out of +their reach."</p> + +<p>"What will become of the signora?" the eldest girl asked, when +they recovered a little from their agitation.</p> + +<p>"No harm will befall her, you may be sure," Francis said. "It +was evidently an attempt to carry you off, and now that you have +escaped they will care nothing for your duenna. She seemed to have +lost her head altogether, for as I lifted you into the boat she +clung so fast to your garments that I fancy a portion of them were +left in her grasp."</p> + +<p>"Do you know where to take us? I see you are going in the right +direction?" the girl asked.</p> + +<p>"To the Palazzo Polani," Francis said. "I have the honour of +being a friend of your cousin, Matteo Giustiniani, and being with +him one day when you passed in your gondola, he named you to +me."</p> + +<p>"A friend of Matteo!" the girl repeated in surprise. "Pardon me, +signor, I thought you were two passing gondoliers. It was so dark +that I could not recognize you; and, you see, it is so unusual to +see a gentleman rowing."</p> + +<p>"I am English, signora, and we are fond of strong exercise, and +so after nightfall, when it cannot shock my friends, I often take +an oar myself."</p> + +<p>"I thank you, sir, with all my heart, for my sister and myself, +for the service you have rendered us. I can hardly understand what +has passed, even now it seems like a dream. We were going quietly +along home, when a large dark gondola dashed out from one of the +side canals, and nearly ran us down. Our gondolier shouted to warn +them, but they ran alongside, and then some men jumped on board, +and there was a terrible fight, and every moment I expected that +the gondola would have been upset. Beppo was knocked overboard, and +I saw old Nicolini fall; and then, just as it seemed all over, you +appeared suddenly by our side, and dragged us on board this boat +before I had time to think."</p> + +<p>"I am afraid I was rather rough, signora, but there was no time +to stand on ceremony. Here is the palazzo."</p> + +<p>The boat was brought up by the side of the steps. Francis leapt +ashore and rang the bell, and then assisted the girls to land. In a +minute the door was thrown open, and two servitors with torches +appeared. There was an exclamation of astonishment as they saw the +young ladies alone with a strange attendant.</p> + +<p>"I will do myself the honour of calling tomorrow to inquire if +you are any the worse for your adventure, signora."</p> + +<p>"No, indeed," the eldest girl said. "You must come up with us +and see our father. We must tell him what has happened; and he will +be angry indeed, did we suffer our rescuer to depart without his +having an opportunity of thanking him."</p> + +<p>Francis bowed and followed the girls upstairs. They entered a +large, very handsomely furnished apartment where a tall man was +sitting reading.</p> + +<p>"Why, girls," he exclaimed as he rose, "what has happened? you +look strangely excited. Where is your duenna? and who is this young +gentleman who accompanies you?"</p> + +<p>"We have been attacked, father, on our way home," both the girls +exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"Attacked?" Signor Polani repeated. "Who has dared to venture on +such an outrage?"</p> + +<p>"We don't know, father," Maria said. "It was a four-oared +gondola that ran suddenly into us. We thought it was an accident +till a number of men, with their swords drawn, leaped on board. +Then Nicolini and Francia drew their swords and tried to defend us, +and Beppo and Jacopo both fought bravely too with their oars; but +Beppo was knocked overboard, and I am afraid Nicolini and Francia +are killed, and in another moment they would have got at us, when +this young gentleman came alongside in his gondola, and dragged us +on board, for we were too bewildered and frightened to do anything. +One of them--he seemed the leader of the party--tried to jump on +board, but our protector struck him a terrible blow with his oar, +and he fell into the water, and then the gondola made off, and, so +far as we could see, they did not chase us."</p> + +<p>"It is a scandalous outrage, and I will demand justice at the +hands of the council.</p> + +<p>"Young sir, you have laid me under an obligation I shall never +forget. You have saved my daughter from the worst calamity that +could befall her. Who is it to whom I am thus indebted?"</p> + +<p>"My name is Francis Hammond. My father is an English merchant +who has, for the last four years, established himself here."</p> + +<p>"I know him well by repute," Polani said. "I trust I shall know +more of him in the future.</p> + +<p>"But where is your duenna, girls?"</p> + +<p>"She remained behind in the gondola, father; she seemed too +frightened to move."</p> + +<p>"The lady seemed to have lost her head altogether," Francis +said. "As I was lifting your daughters into my gondola, in a very +hasty and unceremonious way--for the resistance of your servitors +was all but overcome, and there was no time to be lost--she held so +tightly to their robes that they were rent in her hands."</p> + +<p>Signor Polani struck a gong.</p> + +<p>"Let a gondola be manned instantly," he said, "and let six of +you take arms and go in search of our boat. Let another man at once +summon a leech, for some of those on board are, I fear, grievously +wounded, if not killed."</p> + +<p>But there was no occasion to carry out the order concerning the +boat, for before it was ready to start the missing gondola arrived +at the steps, rowed by the remaining gondolier. The duenna was +lifted out sobbing hysterically, and the bodies of the two +retainers were then landed. One was dead; the other expired a few +minutes after being brought ashore.</p> + +<p>"You did not observe anything particular about the gondola, +Maria, or you, Giulia?"</p> + +<p>"No, father, I saw no mark or escutcheon upon it, though they +might have been there without my noticing them. I was too +frightened to see anything; it came so suddenly upon us."</p> + +<p>"It was, as far as I noticed, a plain black gondola," Francis +said. "The men concerned in the affair were all dressed in dark +clothes, without any distinguishing badges."</p> + +<p>"How was it you came to interfere in the fray, young gentleman? +Few of our people would have done so, holding it to be a dangerous +thing, for a man to mix himself up in a quarrel in which he had no +concern."</p> + +<p>"I should probably have mixed myself up in it, in any case, when +I heard the cry of women," Francis replied; "but, in truth, I +recognized the signoras as their gondola passed mine, and knew them +to be cousins of my friend Matteo Giustiniani. Therefore when I +heard the outcry ahead, I naturally hastened up to do what I could +in the matter."</p> + +<p>"And well you did it," Polani said heartily. "I trust that the +man you felled into the water is he who is the author of this +outrage. I do not think I need seek far for him. My suspicions +point very strongly in one direction, and tomorrow I will lay the +matter before the council and demand reparation."</p> + +<p>"And now, signor, if you will permit me I will take my leave," +Francis said. "The hour is late, and the signoras will require rest +after their fright and emotion."</p> + +<p>"I will see you tomorrow, sir. I shall do myself the honour of +calling early upon your father, to thank him for the great service +you have rendered me."</p> + +<p>Signor Polani accompanied Francis to the steps, while two +servants held torches while he took his seat in the gondola, and +remained standing there until the barque had shot away beyond the +circle of light.</p> + +<p>"We seem fated to have adventures, Giuseppi."</p> + +<p>"We do indeed, Messer Francisco, and this is more to my liking +than the last. We arrived just at the nick of time; another half +minute and those young ladies would have been carried off. That was +a rare blow you dealt their leader. I fancy he never came up again, +and that that is why we got away without being chased."</p> + +<p>"I am of that opinion myself, Giuseppi."</p> + +<p>"If that is the case we shall not have heard the last of it, +Messer Francisco. Only someone of a powerful family would venture +upon so bold a deed, as to try to carry off ladies of birth on the +Grand Canal, and you may find that this adventure has created for +you enemies not to be despised."</p> + +<p>"I can't help it if it has," Francis said carelessly. "On the +other hand, it will gain for me an influential friend in Signor +Polani, who is not only one of the richest merchants of Venice, but +closely related to a number of the best families of the city."</p> + +<p>"His influence will not protect you against the point of a +dagger," Giuseppi said. "Your share in this business cannot but +become public, and I think that it would be wise to give up our +evening excursions at present."</p> + +<p>"I don't agree with you, Giuseppi. We don't go about with +torches burning, so no one who meets us is likely to recognize us. +One gondola in the dark is pretty much like another, and however +many enemies I had, I should not be afraid of traversing the +canals."</p> + +<p>The next morning, at breakfast time, Francis related to his +father his adventure of the previous evening.</p> + +<p>"It is a mistake, my son, to mix yourself up in broils which do +not concern you; but in the present instance it may be that your +adventure will turn out to be advantageous to your prospects. +Signor Polani is one of the most illustrious merchants of Venice. +His name is known everywhere in the East, and there is not a port +in the Levant where his galleys do not trade. The friendship of +such a man cannot but be most useful to me.</p> + +<p>"Upon the other hand, you will probably make some enemies by +your interference with the plans of some unscrupulous young noble, +and Venice is not a healthy city for those who have powerful +enemies; still I think that the advantages will more than balance +the risk.</p> + +<p>"However, Francis, you must curb your spirit of adventure. You +are not the son of a baron or count, and the winning of honour and +glory by deeds of arms neither befits you, nor would be of +advantage to you in any way. A trader of the city of London should +be distinguished for his probity and his attention to business; and +methinks that, ere long, it will be well to send you home to take +your place in the counting house under the eye of my partner, John +Pearson.</p> + +<p>"Hitherto I have not checked your love for arms, or your +intercourse with youths of far higher rank than your own; but I +have been for some time doubting the wisdom of my course in +bringing you out here with me, and have regretted that I did not +leave you in good hands at home. The events of last night show that +the time is fast approaching when you can no longer be considered a +boy, and it will be better for you to turn at once into the groove +in which you are to travel, than to continue a mode of life which +will unfit you for the career of a city trader."</p> + +<p>Francis knew too well his duty towards his father to make any +reply, but his heart sank at the prospect of settling down in the +establishment in London. His life there had not been an unpleasant +one, but he knew that he should find it terribly dull, after the +freedom and liberty he had enjoyed in Venice. He had never, +however, even to himself, indulged the idea that any other career, +save that of his father, could be his; and had regarded it as a +matter of course that, some day, he would take his place in the +shop in Cheapside.</p> + +<p>Now that it was suddenly presented to him as something which +would shortly take place, a feeling of repugnance towards the life +came over him. Not that he dreamt for a moment of trying to induce +his father to allow him to seek some other calling. He had been +always taught to consider the position of a trader of good +standing, of the city of London, as one of the most desirable +possible. The line between the noble and the citizen was so +strongly marked that no one thought of overstepping it. The +citizens of London were as proud of their position and as tenacious +of their rights as were the nobles themselves. They were ready +enough to take up arms to defend their privileges and to resist +oppression, whether it came from king or noble; but few indeed, +even of the wilder spirits of the city, ever thought of taking to +arms as a profession.</p> + +<p>It was true that honour and rank were to be gained, by those who +rode in the train of great nobles to the wars, but the nobles drew +their following from their own estates, and not from among the +dwellers in the cities; and, although the bodies of men-at-arms and +archers, furnished by the city to the king in his wars, always did +their duty stoutly in the field, they had no opportunity of +distinguishing themselves singly. The deeds which attracted +attention, and led to honour and rank, were performed by the +esquires and candidates for the rank of knighthood, who rode behind +the barons into the thick of the French chivalry.</p> + +<p>Therefore Francis Hammond had never thought of taking to the +profession of arms in his own country; though, when the news +arrived in Venice of desperate fighting at sea with the Genoese, he +had thought, to himself, that the most glorious thing in life must +be to command a well-manned galley, as she advanced to the +encounter of an enemy superior in numbers. He had never dreamed +that such an aspiration could ever be satisfied--it was merely one +of the fancies in which lads so often indulge.</p> + +<p>Still, the thought that he was soon to return and take his place +in the shop in Chepe was exceedingly unpleasant to him.</p> + +<p>Soon after breakfast the bell at the water gate rang loudly, and +a minute later the servant entered with the news that Signor Polani +was below, and begged an interview. Mr. Hammond at once went down +to the steps to receive his visitor, whom he saluted with all +ceremony, and conducted upstairs.</p> + +<p>"I am known to you by name, no doubt, Signor Hammond, as you are +to me," the Venetian said, when the first formal greetings were +over. "I am not a man of ceremony, nor, I judge, are you; but even +if I were, the present is not an occasion for it. Your son has +doubtless told you of the inestimable service, which he rendered to +me last night, by saving my daughters, or rather my eldest +daughter--for it was doubtless she whom the villains sought--from +being borne off by one of the worst and most disreputable of the +many bad and disreputable young men of this city."</p> + +<p>"I am indeed glad, Signor Polani, that my son was able to be of +service to you. I have somewhat blamed myself that I have let him +have his own way so much, and permitted him to give himself up to +exercises of arms, more befitting the son of a warlike noble than +of a peaceful trader; but the quickness and boldness, which the +mastery of arms gives, was yesterday of service, and I no longer +regret the time he has spent, since it has enabled him to be of aid +to the daughters of Signor Polani."</p> + +<p>"A mastery of arms is always useful, whether a man be a +peace-loving citizen, or one who would carve his way to fame by +means of his weapons. We merchants of the Mediterranean might give +up our trade, if we were not prepared to defend our ships against +the corsairs of Barbary, and the pirates who haunt every inlet and +islet of the Levant now, as they have ever done since the days of +Rome. Besides, it is the duty of every citizen to defend his native +city when attacked. And lastly, there are the private enemies, that +every man who rises but in the smallest degree above his fellows is +sure to create for himself.</p> + +<p>"Moreover, a training in arms, as you say, gives readiness and +quickness, it enables the mind to remain calm and steadfast amidst +dangers of all sorts, and, methinks, it adds not a little to a +man's dignity and self respect to know that he is equal, man to +man, to any with whom he may come in contact. Here in Venice we are +all soldiers and sailors, and your son will make no worse merchant, +but rather the better, for being able to wield sword and +dagger.</p> + +<p>"Even now," he said with a smile, "he has proved the advantage +of his training; for, though I say it not boastfully, Nicholas +Polani has it in his power to be of some use to his friends, and +foremost among them he will henceforward count your brave son, and, +if you will permit him, yourself.</p> + +<p>"But you will, I trust, excuse my paying you but a short visit +this morning, for I am on my way to lay a complaint before the +council. I have already been round to several of my friends, and +Phillipo Giustiniani and some six others, nearest related to me, +will go with me, being all aggrieved at this outrage to a family +nearly connected. I crave you to permit me to take your son with +me, in order that he may be at hand, if called upon, to say what he +knows of the affair."</p> + +<p>"Assuredly it is his duty to go with you if you desire it; +although I own I am not sorry that he could see, as he tells me, no +badge or cognizance which would enable him to say aught which can +lead to the identification of those who would have abducted your +daughter. It is but too well known a fact that it is dangerous to +make enemies in Venice, for even the most powerful protection does +not avail against the stab of a dagger."</p> + +<p>"That is true enough," the merchant said. "The frequency of +assassinations is a disgrace to our city; nor will it ever be put +down until some men of high rank are executed, and the seignory +show that they are as jealous of the lives of private citizens, as +they are of the honour and well being of the republic."</p> + +<p>Francis gladly threw aside his books when he was told that +Signor Polani desired him to accompany him, and was soon seated by +the side of the merchant in his gondola.</p> + +<p>"How old are you, my friend?" the merchant asked him, as the +boat threaded the mazes of the canals.</p> + +<p>"I am just sixteen, signor."</p> + +<p>"No more!" the merchant said in surprise. "I had taken you for +well-nigh two years older. I have but just come from the Palazzo +Giustiniani, and my young kinsman, Matteo, tells me that in the +School of Arms there are none of our young nobles who are your +match with rapier or battleaxe."</p> + +<p>"I fear, sir," Francis said modestly, "that I have given up more +time to the study of arms than befits the son of a sober +trader."</p> + +<p>"Not at all," the Venetian replied. "We traders have to defend +our rights and our liberties, our goods and our ships, just as much +as the nobles have to defend their privileges and their castles. +Here in Venice there are no such distinctions of rank as there are +elsewhere. Certain families, distinguished among the rest by their +long standing, wealth, influence, or the services they have +rendered to the state, are of senatorial rank, and constitute our +nobility; but there are no titles among us. We are all citizens of +the republic, with our rights and privileges, which cannot be +infringed even by the most powerful; and the poorest citizen has an +equal right to make himself as proficient in the arms, which he may +be called upon to wield in defence of the state, as the Doge +himself. In your country also, I believe, all men are obliged to +learn the use of arms, to practise shooting at the butts, and to +make themselves efficient, if called upon to take part in the wars +of the country. And I have heard that at the jousts, the champions +of the city of London have ere now held their own against those of +the court."</p> + +<p>"They have done so," Francis said; "and yet, I know not why, it +is considered unseemly for the sons of well-to-do citizens to be +too fond of military exercises."</p> + +<p>"The idea is a foolish one," the Venetian said hotly. "I myself +have, a score of times, defended my ships against corsairs and +pirates, Genoese, and other enemies. I have fought against the +Greeks, and been forced to busy myself in more than one serious +fray in the streets of Constantinople, Alexandria, and other ports, +and have served in the galleys of the state. All men who live by +trade must be in favour of peace; but they must also be prepared to +defend their goods, and the better able they are to do it, the more +the honour to them.</p> + +<p>"But here we are at the Piazzetta."</p> + +<p>A group of nobles were standing near the landing place, and +Signor Polani at once went up to them, and introduced Francis to +them as the gentleman who had done his daughter and their kinswoman +such good service. Francis was warmly thanked and congratulated by +them all.</p> + +<p>"Will you wait near the entrance?" Signor Polani said. "I see +that my young cousin, Matteo, has accompanied his father, and you +will, no doubt, find enough to say to each other while we are with +the council."</p> + +<p>The gentlemen entered the palace, and Matteo, who had remained +respectfully at a short distance from the seniors, at once joined +his friend.</p> + +<p>"Well, Francis, I congratulate you heartily, though I feel quite +jealous of you. It was splendid to think of your dashing up in your +gondola, and carrying off my pretty cousins from the clutches of +that villain, Ruggiero Mocenigo, just as he was about to lay his +hands on them."</p> + +<p>"Are you sure it was Ruggiero, Matteo?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, there can't be any doubt about it. You know, he had asked +for Maria's hand, and when Polani refused him, had gone off +muttering threats. You know what his character is. He is capable of +any evil action; besides, they say that he has dissipated his +patrimony, in gaming and other extravagances at Constantinople, and +is deep in the hands of the Jews. If he could have succeeded in +carrying off Maria it would more than have mended his fortunes, for +she and her sister are acknowledged to be the richest heiresses in +Venice. Oh, there is not a shadow of doubt that it's he.</p> + +<p>"You won't hear me saying anything against your love of prowling +about in that gondola of yours, since it has brought you such a +piece of good fortune--for it is a piece of good fortune, Francis, +to have rendered such a service to Polani, to say nothing of all +the rest of us who are connected with his family. I can tell you +that there are scores of young men of good birth in Venice, who +would give their right hand to have done what you did."</p> + +<p>"I should have considered myself fortunate to have been of +service to any girls threatened by violence, though they had only +been fishermen's daughters," Francis said; "but I am specially +pleased because they are relatives of yours, Matteo."</p> + +<p>"To say nothing to their being two of the prettiest girls in +Venice," Matteo added slyly.</p> + +<p>"That counts for something too, no doubt," Francis said +laughing, "though I didn't think of it.</p> + +<p>"I wonder," he went on gravely, "whether that was Ruggiero whom +I struck down, and whether he came up again to the surface. He has +very powerful connections, you know, Matteo; and if I have gained +friends, I shall also have gained enemies by the night's work."</p> + +<p>"That is so," Matteo agreed. "For your sake, I own that I hope +that Ruggiero is at present at the bottom of the canal. He was +certainly no credit to his friends; and although they would of +course have stood by him, I do not think they will feel, at heart, +in any way displeased to know that he will trouble them no longer. +But if his men got him out again, I should say you had best be +careful, for Ruggiero is about the last man in Venice I should care +to have as an enemy. However, we won't look at the unpleasant side +of the matter, and will hope that his career has been brought to a +close."</p> + +<p>"I don't know which way to hope," Francis said gravely. "He will +certainly be a dangerous enemy if he is alive; and yet the thought +of having killed a man troubles me much."</p> + +<p>"It would not trouble me at all if I were in your place," Matteo +said. "If you had not killed him, you may be very sure that he +would have killed you, and that the deed would have caused him no +compunction whatever. It was a fair fight, just as if it had been a +hostile galley in mid-sea; and I don't see why the thought of +having rid Venice of one of her worst citizens need trouble you in +any way."</p> + +<p>"You see I have been brought up with rather different ideas to +yours, Matteo. My father, as a trader, is adverse to fighting of +all kinds--save, of course, in defence of one's country; and +although he has not blamed me in any way for the part I took, I can +see that he is much disquieted, and indeed speaks of sending me +back to England at once."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I hope not!" Matteo said earnestly. "Hitherto you and I +have been great friends, Francis, but we shall be more in future. +All Polani's friends will regard you as one of themselves; and I +was even thinking, on my way here, that perhaps you and I might +enter the service of the state together, and get appointed to a war +galley in a few years."</p> + +<p>"My father's hair would stand up at the thought, Matteo; though, +for myself, I should like nothing so well. However, that could +never have been. Still I am sorry, indeed, at the thought of +leaving Venice. I have been very happy here, and I have made +friends, and there is always something to do or talk about; and the +life in London would be so dull in comparison. But here comes one +of the ushers from the palace."</p> + +<p>The official came up to them, and asked if either of them was +Messer Francisco Hammond, and, finding that he had come to the +right person, requested Francis to follow him.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch4">Chapter 4</a>: Carried Off.</h2> + +<p>It was with a feeling of considerable discomfort, and some awe, +that Francis Hammond followed his conductor to the chamber of the +Council. It was a large and stately apartment. The decorations were +magnificent, and large pictures, representing events in the wars of +Venice, hung round the walls. The ceiling was also superbly +painted. The cornices were heavily gilded. Curtains of worked +tapestry hung by the windows, and fell behind him as he entered the +door.</p> + +<p>At a table of horseshoe shape eleven councillors, clad in the +long scarlet robes, trimmed with ermine, which were the +distinguishing dress of Venetian senators, were seated--the doge +himself acting as president. On their heads they wore black velvet +caps, flat at the top, and in shape somewhat resembling the flat +Scotch bonnet. Signor Polani and his companions were seated in +chairs, facing the table.</p> + +<p>When Francis entered the gondolier was giving evidence as to the +attack upon his boat. Several questions were asked him when he had +finished, and he was then told to retire. The usher then brought +Francis forward.</p> + +<p>"This is Messer Francisco Hammond," he said.</p> + +<p>"Tell your story your own way," the doge said.</p> + +<p>Francis related the story of the attack on the gondola, and the +escape of the ladies in his boat.</p> + +<p>"How came you, a foreigner and a youth, to interfere in a fray +of this kind?" one of the councillors asked.</p> + +<p>"I did not stop to think of my being a stranger, or a youth," +Francis replied quietly. "I heard the screams of women in distress, +and felt naturally bound to render them what aid I could."</p> + +<p>"Did you know who the ladies were?"</p> + +<p>"I knew them only by sight. My friend Matteo Giustiniani had +pointed them out to me, on one occasion, as being the daughters of +Signor Polani, and connections of his. When their gondola had +passed mine, a few minutes previously, I recognized their faces by +the light of the torches in their boat."</p> + +<p>"Were the torches burning brightly?" another of the council +asked; "because it may be that this attack was not intended against +them, but against some others."</p> + +<p>"The light was bright enough for me to recognize their faces at +a glance," Francis said, "and also the yellow and white sashes of +their gondoliers."</p> + +<p>"Did you see any badge or cognizance, either on the gondola or +on the persons of the assailants?"</p> + +<p>"I did not," Francis said. "They certainly wore none. One of the +torches in the Polani gondola had been extinguished in the fray, +but the other was still burning, and, had the gondoliers worn +coloured sashes or other distinguishing marks, I should have +noticed them."</p> + +<p>"Should you recognize, were you to see them again, any of the +assailants?"</p> + +<p>"I should not," Francis said. "They were all masked."</p> + +<p>"You say you struck down the one who appeared to be their leader +with an oar, as he was about to leap into your boat. How was it the +oar was in your hand instead of that of your gondolier?"</p> + +<p>"I was myself rowing," Francis said. "In London, rowing is an +amusement of which boys of all classes are fond, and since I have +been out here with my father I have learned to row a gondola; and +sometimes, when I am out of an evening, I take an oar as well as my +gondolier, enjoying the exercise and the speed at which the boat +goes along. I was not rowing when the signora's boat passed me, but +upon hearing the screams, I stood up and took the second oar, to +arrive as quickly as possible at the spot. That was how it was that +I had it in my hand, when the man was about to leap into the +boat."</p> + +<p>"Then there is nothing at all, so far as you know, to direct +your suspicion against anyone as the author of this attack?"</p> + +<p>"There was nothing," Francis said, "either in the gondola +itself, or in the attire or persons of those concerned in the fray, +which could give me the slightest clue as to their identity."</p> + +<p>"At any rate, young gentleman," the doge said, "you appear to +have behaved with a promptness, presence of mind, and courage--for +it needs courage to interfere in a fray of this sort--beyond your +years; and, in the name of the republic, I thank you for having +prevented the commission of a grievous crime. You will please to +remain here for the present. It may be that, when the person +accused of this crime appears before us, you may be able to +recognize his figure."</p> + +<p>It was with mixed feelings that Francis heard, a minute or two +later, the usher announce that Signor Ruggiero Mocenigo was +without, awaiting the pleasure of their excellencies.</p> + +<p>"Let him enter," the doge said.</p> + +<p>The curtains fell back, and Ruggiero Mocenigo entered with a +haughty air. He bowed to the council, and stood as if expecting to +be questioned.</p> + +<p>"You are charged, Ruggiero Mocenigo," the doge said, "with being +concerned in an attempt to carry off the daughters of Signor +Polani, and of taking part in the killing of three servitors of +that gentleman."</p> + +<p>"On what grounds am I accused?" Ruggiero said haughtily.</p> + +<p>"On the ground that you are a rejected suitor for the elder +lady's hand, and that you had uttered threats against her father, +who, so far as he knows, has no other enemies."</p> + +<p>"This seems somewhat scanty ground for an accusation of such +gravity," Ruggiero said sneeringly. "If every suitor who grumbles, +when his offer is refused, is to be held responsible for every +accident which may take place in the lady's family, methinks that +the time of this reverend and illustrious council will be largely +occupied."</p> + +<p>"You will remember," the doge said sternly, "that your previous +conduct gives good ground for suspicion against you. You have +already been banished from the state for two years for +assassination, and such reports as reached us of your conduct in +Constantinople, during your exile, were the reverse of +satisfactory. Had it not been so, the prayers of your friends, that +your term of banishment might be shortened, would doubtless have +produced their effect."</p> + +<p>"At any rate," Ruggiero said, "I can, with little difficulty, +prove that I had no hand in any attempt upon Signor Polani's +daughters last night, seeing that I had friends spending the +evening with me, and that we indulged in play until three o'clock +this morning--an hour at which, I should imagine, the Signoras +Polani would scarcely be abroad."</p> + +<p>"At what time did your friends assemble?"</p> + +<p>"At nine o'clock," Ruggiero said. "We met by agreement in the +Piazza, somewhat before that hour, and proceeded together on foot +to my house."</p> + +<p>"Who were your companions?"</p> + +<p>Ruggiero gave the names of six young men, all connections of his +family, and summonses were immediately sent for them to attend +before the council.</p> + +<p>"In the meantime, Messer Francisco Hammond, you can tell us +whether you recognize in the accused one of the assailants last +night."</p> + +<p>"I cannot recognize him, your excellency," Francis said; "but I +can say certainly that he was not the leader of the party, whom I +struck with my oar. The blow fell on the temple, and assuredly +there would be marks of such a blow remaining today."</p> + +<p>As Francis was speaking, Ruggiero looked at him with a cold +piercing glance, which expressed the reverse of gratitude for the +evidence which he was giving in his favour, and something like a +chill ran through him as he resumed his seat behind Signor Polani +and his friends.</p> + +<p>There was silence for a quarter of an hour. Occasionally the +members of the council spoke in low tones to each other, but no +word was spoken aloud, until the appearance of the first of the +young men who had been summoned. One after another they gave their +evidence, and all were unanimous in declaring that they had spent +the evening with Ruggiero Mocenigo, and that he did not leave the +room, from the moment of his arrival there soon after nine o'clock, +until they left him at two in the morning.</p> + +<p>"You have heard my witnesses," Ruggiero said, when the last had +given his testimony; "and I now ask your excellencies, whether it +is right that a gentleman, of good family, should be exposed to a +villainous accusation of this kind, on the barest grounds of +suspicion?"</p> + +<p>"You have heard the evidence which has been given, Signor +Polani," the doge said. "Do you withdraw your accusation against +Signor Mocenigo?"</p> + +<p>"I acknowledge, your excellency," Signor Polani said, rising, +"that Ruggiero Mocenigo has proved that he took no personal part in +the affair, but I will submit to you that this in no way proves +that he is not the author of the attempt. He would know that my +first suspicion would fall upon him, and would, therefore, +naturally leave the matter to be carried out by others, and would +take precautions to enable him to prove, as he has done, that he +was not present. I still maintain that the circumstances of the +case, his threats to me, and the fact that my daughter will +naturally inherit a portion of what wealth I might possess, and +that, as I know and can prove, Ruggiero Mocenigo has been lately +reduced to borrowing money of the Jews, all point to his being the +author of this attempt, which would at once satisfy his anger +against me, for having declined the honour of his alliance, and +repair his damaged fortunes."</p> + +<p>There were a few words of whispered consultation between the +councillors, and the doge then said:</p> + +<p>"All present will now retire while the council deliberates. Our +decision will be made known to the parties concerned, in due +time."</p> + +<p>On leaving the palace, Signor Polani and his friends walked +together across the Piazza, discussing the turn of events.</p> + +<p>"He will escape," Polani said. "He has two near relations on the +council, and however strong our suspicions may be, there is really +no proof against him. I fear that he will go free. I feel as +certain as ever that he is the contriver of the attempt; but the +precautions he has taken seem to render it impossible to bring the +crime home to him. However, it is no use talking about it any more, +at present.</p> + +<p>"You will, I hope, accompany me home, Signor Francisco, and +allow me to present you formally to my daughters. They were too +much agitated, last night, to be able to thank you fully for the +service you had rendered them.</p> + +<p>"Matteo, do you come with us."</p> + +<p>Three days passed, and no decision of the council had been +announced, when, early in the morning, one of the state messengers +brought an order that Francis should be in readiness, at nine +o'clock, to accompany him. At that hour a gondola drew up at the +steps. It was a covered gondola, with hangings, which prevented any +from seeing who were within. Francis took his seat by the side of +the official, and the gondola started at once.</p> + +<p>"It looks very much as if I was being taken as a prisoner," +Francis said to himself. "However, that can hardly be, for even if +Ruggiero convinced the council that he was wholly innocent of this +affair, no blame could fall on me, for I neither accused nor +identified him. However, it is certainly towards the prisons we are +going."</p> + +<p>The boat, indeed, was passing the Piazzetta without stopping, +and turned down the canal behind, to the prisons in rear of the +palace. They stopped at the water gate, close to the Bridge of +Sighs, and Francis and his conductor entered. They proceeded along +two or three passages, until they came to a door where an official +was standing. A word was spoken, and they passed in.</p> + +<p>The chamber they entered was bare and vaulted, and contained no +furniture whatever, but at one end was a low stone slab, upon which +something was lying covered with a cloak. Four of the members of +the council were standing in a group, talking, when Francis +entered. Signor Polani, with two of his friends, stood apart at one +side of the chamber. Ruggiero Mocenigo also, with two of his +companions, stood on the other side.</p> + +<p>Francis thought that the demeanour of Ruggiero was somewhat +altered from that which he had assumed at the previous +investigation, and that he looked sullen and anxious.</p> + +<p>"We have sent for you, Francisco Hammond, in order that you may, +if you can, identify a body which was found last night, floating in +the Grand Canal."</p> + +<p>One of the officials stepped forward and removed the cloak, +showing on the stone slab the body of a young man. On the left +temple there was an extensive bruise, and the skin was broken.</p> + +<p>"Do you recognize that body?"</p> + +<p>"I do not recognize the face," Francis said, "and do not know +that I ever saw it before."</p> + +<p>"The wound upon the temple which you see, is it such as, you +would suppose, would be caused by the blow you struck an unknown +person, while he was engaged in attacking the gondola of Signor +Polani?"</p> + +<p>"I cannot say whether it is such a wound as would be caused by a +blow with an oar," Francis said; "but it is certainly, as nearly as +possible, on the spot where I struck the man, just as he was +leaping, sword in hand, into my gondola."</p> + +<p>"You stated, at your examination the other day, that it was on +the left temple you struck the blow."</p> + +<p>"I did so. I said at once that Signor Ruggiero Mocenigo could +not have been the man who led the assailants, because had he been +so he would assuredly have borne a mark from the blow on the left +temple."</p> + +<p>"Look at the clothes. Do you see anything there which could lead +you to identify him with your assailant?"</p> + +<p>"My assailant was dressed in dark clothes, as this one was. +There was but one distinguishing mark that I noticed, and this is +wanting here. The light of the torch fell upon the handle of a +dagger in his girdle. I saw it but for a moment, but I caught the +gleam of gems. It was only a passing impression, but I could swear +that he carried a small gold or yellow metal-handled dagger, and I +believe that it was set with gems, but to this I should not like to +swear."</p> + +<p>"Produce the dagger found upon the dead man," one of the council +said to an official.</p> + +<p>And the officer produced a small dagger with a fine steel blade +and gold handle, thickly encrusted with gems.</p> + +<p>"Is this the dagger?" the senator asked Francis.</p> + +<p>"I cannot say that it is the dagger," Francis replied; "but it +closely resembles it, if it is not the same."</p> + +<p>"You have no doubt, I suppose, seeing that wound on the temple, +the dagger found in the girdle, and the fact that the body has +evidently only been a few days in the water, that this is the man +whom you struck down in the fray on the canal?"</p> + +<p>"No, signor, I have no doubt whatever that it is the same +person."</p> + +<p>"That will do," the council said. "You can retire; and we thank +you, in the name of justice, for the evidence you have given."</p> + +<p>Francis was led back to the gondola, and conveyed to his +father's house. An hour later Signor Polani arrived.</p> + +<p>"The matter is finished," he said, "I cannot say satisfactorily +to me, for the punishment is wholly inadequate to the offence, but +at any rate he has not got off altogether unpunished. After you +left, we passed from the prison into the palace, and then the whole +council assembled, as before, in the council chamber. I may tell +you that the body which was found was that of a cousin and intimate +of Ruggiero Mocenigo. The two have been constantly together since +the return of the latter from Constantinople. It was found, by +inquiry at the house of the young man's father, that he left home +on the evening upon which the attack was committed, saying that he +was going to the mainland, and might not be expected to return for +some days.</p> + +<p>"The council took it for granted, from the wound in his head, +and the fact that a leech has testified that the body had probably +been in the water about three days, that he was the man that was +stunned by your blow, and drowned in the canal. Ruggiero urged that +the discovery in no way affected him; and that his cousin had, no +doubt, attempted to carry off my daughter on his own account. There +was eventually a division among the council on this point, but +Maria was sent for, and on being questioned, testified that the +young man had never spoken to her, and that, indeed, she did not +know him even by sight; and the majority thereupon came to the +conclusion that he could only have been acting as an instrument of +Ruggiero's.</p> + +<p>"We were not in the apartment while the deliberation was going +on, but when we returned the president announced that, although +there was no absolute proof of Ruggiero's complicity in the affair, +yet that, considering his application for my daughter's hand, his +threats on my refusal to his request, his previous character, and +his intimacy with his cousin, the council had no doubt that the +attempt had been made at his instigation, and therefore sentenced +him to banishment from Venice and the islands for three years."</p> + +<p>"I should be better pleased if they had sent him back to +Constantinople, or one of the islands of the Levant," Mr. Hammond +said. "If he is allowed to take up his abode on the mainland, he +may be only two or three miles away, which, in the case of a man of +his description, is much too near to be pleasant for those who have +incurred his enmity."</p> + +<p>"That is true," Signor Polani agreed, "and I myself, and my +friends, are indignant that he should not have been banished to a +distance, where he at least would have been powerless for fresh +mischief. On the other hand, his friends will doubtless consider +that he has been hardly treated. However, as far as my daughters +are concerned, I will take good care that he shall have no +opportunity of repeating his attempt; for I have ordered them, on +no account whatever, to be absent from the palazzo after the shades +of evening begin to fall, unless I myself am with them; and I shall +increase the number of armed retainers in the house, by bringing +some of my men on shore from a ship which arrived last night in +port. I cannot believe that even Ruggiero would have the insolence +to attempt to carry them off from the house by force; but when one +has to deal with a man like this, one cannot take too great +precautions."</p> + +<p>"I have already ordered my son, on no account, to be out after +nightfall in the streets. In his gondola I do not mind, for unless +the gondoliers wear badges, it is impossible to tell one boat from +another after dark. Besides, as he tells me, his boat is so fast +that he has no fear whatever of being overtaken, even if recognized +and chased. But I shall not feel comfortable so long as he is here, +and shall send him back to England on the very first occasion that +offers."</p> + +<p>"I trust that no such occasion may occur just yet, Signor +Hammond. I should be sorry, indeed, for your son to be separated so +soon from us. We must talk the matter over together, and perhaps +between us we may hit on some plan by which, while he may be out of +the reach of the peril he has incurred on behalf of my family, he +may yet be neither wasting his time, nor altogether separated from +us."</p> + +<p>For the next fortnight Francis spent most of his time at the +Palazzo Polani. The merchant was evidently sincere in his +invitation to him to make his house his home; and if a day passed +without the lad paying a visit, would chide him gently for +deserting them. He himself was frequently present in the balcony, +where the four young people--for Matteo Giustiniani was generally +of the party--sat and chatted together, the gouvernante sitting +austerely by, with at times a strong expression of disapproval on +her countenance at their laughter and merriment, although--as her +charges' father approved of the intimacy of the girls with their +young cousin and this English lad--she could offer no open +objections. In the afternoon, the party generally went for a long +row in a four-oared gondola, always returning home upon the +approach of evening.</p> + +<p>To Francis this time was delightful. He had had no sister of his +own; and although he had made the acquaintance of a number of lads +in Venice, and had accompanied his father to formal entertainments +at the houses of his friends, he had never before been intimate in +any of their families. The gaiety and high spirits of the two +girls, when they were in the house, amused and pleased him, +especially as it was in contrast to the somewhat stiff and +dignified demeanour which they assumed when passing through the +frequented canals in the gondola.</p> + +<p>"I do not like that woman Castaldi," Francis said one evening +as, after leaving the palazzo, Giuseppi rowed them towards the +Palazzo Giustiniani, where Matteo was to be landed.</p> + +<p>"Gouvernantes are not popular, as a class, with young men," +Matteo laughed.</p> + +<p>"But seriously, Matteo, I don't like her; and I am quite sure +that, for some reason or other, she does not like me. I have seen +her watching me, as a cat would watch a mouse she is going to +spring on."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps she has not forgiven you, Francisco, for saving her two +charges, and leaving her to the mercy of their assailants."</p> + +<p>"I don't know, Matteo. Her conduct appeared to me, at the time, +to be very strange. Of course, she might have been paralysed with +fright, but it was certainly curious the way she clung to their +dresses, and tried to prevent them from leaving the boat."</p> + +<p>"You don't really think, Francis, that she wanted them to be +captured?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know whether I should be justified in saying as much as +that, Matteo, and I certainly should not say so to anyone else, but +I can't help thinking that such was the case. I don't like her +face, and I don't like the woman. She strikes me as being +deceitful. She certainly did try to prevent my carrying the girls +off and, had not their dresses given way in her hands, she would +have done so. Anyhow, it strikes me that Ruggiero must have had +some accomplice in the house. How else could he have known of the +exact time at which they would be passing along the Grand Canal? +For, that the gondola was in waiting to dash out and surprise them, +there is no doubt.</p> + +<p>"I was asking Signora Giulia, the other day, how it was they +were so late, for she says that her father never liked their being +out after dusk in Venice, though at Corfu he did not care how late +they were upon the water. She replied that she did not quite know +how it happened. Her sister had said, some time before, that she +thought it was time to be going, but the gouvernante--who was +generally very particular--had said that there was no occasion to +hurry, as their father knew where they were, and would not be +uneasy. She thought the woman must have mistaken the time, and did +not know how late it was.</p> + +<p>"Of course, this proves nothing. Still I own that, putting all +the things together, I have my suspicions."</p> + +<p>"It is certainly curious, Francisco, though I can hardly believe +it possible that the woman could be treacherous. She has been for +some years in the service of the family, and my cousin has every +confidence in her."</p> + +<p>"That may be, Matteo; but Ruggiero may have promised so highly +that he may have persuaded her to aid him. He could have afforded +to be generous, if he had been successful."</p> + +<p>"There is another thing, by the bye, Francisco, which did not +strike me at the time; but now you speak of it, may be another link +in the chain. I was laughing at Maria about their screaming, and +saying what a noise the three of them must have made, and she said, +'Oh, no! there were only two of us--Giulia and I screamed for aid +at the top of our voices; but the signora was as quiet and brave as +possible, and did not utter a sound.'"</p> + +<p>"That doesn't agree, Matteo, with her being so frightened as to +hold the girls tightly, and almost prevent their escape, or with +the row she made, sobbing and crying, when she came back. Of course +there is not enough to go upon; and I could hardly venture to speak +of it to Signor Polani, or to accuse a woman, in whom he has +perfect confidence, of such frightful treachery on such vague +grounds of suspicion. Still I do suspect her; and I hope, when I go +away from Venice, you will, as far as you can, keep an eye upon +her."</p> + +<p>"I do not know how to do that," Matteo said, laughing; "but I +will tell my cousins that we don't like her, and advise them, in +future, not on any account to stay out after dusk, even if she +gives them permission to do so; and if I learn anything more to +justify our suspicions, I will tell my cousin what you and I think, +though it won't be a pleasant thing to do. However, Ruggiero is +gone now, and I hope we sha'n't hear anything more about him."</p> + +<p>"I hope not, Matteo; but I am sure he is not the man to give up +the plan he has once formed easily, any more than he is to forgive +an injury.</p> + +<p>"However, here we are at your steps. We will talk the other +matter over another time. Anyhow, I am glad I have told you what I +thought, for it has been worrying me. Now that I find you don't +think my ideas about her are altogether absurd, I will keep my eyes +more open than ever in future. I am convinced she is a bad one, and +I only hope we may be able to prove it."</p> + +<p>"You have made me very uncomfortable, Francisco," Matteo said as +he stepped ashore; "but we will talk about it again tomorrow."</p> + +<p>"We shall meet at your cousin's in the evening. Before that +time, we had better both think over whether we ought to tell anyone +our suspicions, and we can hold a council in the gondola on the way +back."</p> + +<p>Francis did think the matter over that night. He felt that the +fact told him by Giulia, that the gouvernante had herself been the +means of their staying out later than usual on the evening of the +attack, added great weight to the vague suspicions he had +previously entertained; and he determined to let the matter rest no +longer, but that the next day he would speak to Signor Polani, even +at the risk of offending him by his suspicions of a person who had +been, for some years, in his confidence. Accordingly, he went in +the morning to the palazzo, but found that Signor Polani was +absent, and would not be in until two or three o'clock in the +afternoon. He did not see the girls, who, he knew, were going out +to spend the day with some friends.</p> + +<p>At three o'clock he returned, and found that Polani had just +come in.</p> + +<p>"Why, Francisco," the merchant said when he entered, "have you +forgotten that my daughters will be out all day?"</p> + +<p>"No, signor, I have not forgotten that, but I wish to speak to +you. I dare say you will laugh at me, but I hope you will not think +me meddlesome, or impertinent, for touching upon a subject which +concerns you nearly."</p> + +<p>"I am sure you will not be meddlesome or impertinent, +Francisco," Signor Polani said reassuringly, for he saw that the +lad was nervous and anxious. "Tell me what you have to say, and I +can promise you beforehand that, whether I agree with you or not in +what you may have to say, I shall be in no way vexed, for I shall +know you have said it with the best intentions."</p> + +<p>"What I have to say, sir, concerns the Signora Castaldi, your +daughters' gouvernante. I know, sir, that you repose implicit +confidence in her; and your judgment, formed after years of +intimate knowledge, is hardly likely to be shaken by what I have to +tell you. I spoke to Matteo about it, and, as he is somewhat of my +opinion, I have decided that it is, at least, my duty to tell you +all the circumstances, and you can then form your own +conclusions."</p> + +<p>Francis then related the facts known to him. First, that the +assailants of the gondola must have had accurate information as to +the hour at which they would come along; secondly, that it was at +the gouvernante's suggestion that the return had been delayed much +later than usual; lastly, that when the attack took place, the +gouvernante did not raise her voice to cry for assistance, and that +she had, at the last moment, so firmly seized their dresses, that +it was only by tearing the girls from her grasp that he had been +enabled to get them into the boat.</p> + +<p>"There may be nothing in all this," he said when he had +concluded. "But at least, sir, I thought that it was right you +should know it; and you will believe me, that it is only anxiety as +to the safety of your daughters that has led me to speak to +you."</p> + +<p>"Of that I am quite sure," Signor Polani said cordially, "and +you were perfectly right in speaking to me. I own, however, that I +do not for a moment think that the circumstances are more than mere +coincidences. Signora Castaldi has been with me for upwards of ten +years. She has instructed and trained my daughters entirely to my +satisfaction. I do not say that she is everything that one could +wish, but, then, no one is perfect, and I have every confidence in +her fidelity and trustworthiness. I own that the chain you have put +together is a strong one, and had she but lately entered my +service, and were she a person of whom I knew but little, I should +attach great weight to the facts, although taken in themselves they +do not amount to much. Doubtless she saw that my daughters were +enjoying themselves in the society of my friends, and in her +kindness of heart erred, as she certainly did err, in allowing them +to stay longer than she should have done.</p> + +<p>"Then, as to her not crying out when attacked, women behave +differently in cases of danger. Some scream loudly, others are +silent, as if paralysed by fear. This would seem to have been her +case. Doubtless she instinctively grasped the girls for their +protection, and in her fright did not even perceive that a boat had +come alongside, or know that you were a friend trying to save them. +That someone informed their assailants of the whereabouts of my +daughters, and the time they were coming home, is clear; but they +might have been seen going to the house, and a swift gondola have +been placed on the watch. Had this boat started as soon as they +took their seat in the gondola on their return, and hastened, by +the narrow canals, to the spot where their accomplices were +waiting, they could have warned them in ample time of the approach +of the gondola with my daughters.</p> + +<p>"I have, as you may believe, thought the matter deeply over, for +it was evident to me that the news of my daughters' coming must +have reached their assailants beforehand. I was most unwilling to +suspect treachery on the part of any of my household, and came to +the conclusion that the warning was given in the way I have +suggested.</p> + +<p>"At the same time, Francisco, I thank you deeply for having +mentioned to me the suspicions you have formed, and although I +think that you are wholly mistaken, I certainly shall not neglect +the warning, but shall watch very closely the conduct of my +daughters' gouvernante, and shall take every precaution to put it +out of her power to play me false, even while I cannot, for a +moment, believe she would be so base and treacherous as to attempt +to do so."</p> + +<p>"In that case, signor, I shall feel that my mission has not been +unsuccessful, however mistaken I may be, and I trust sincerely that +I am wholly wrong. I thank you much for the kind way in which you +have heard me express suspicions of a person in your +confidence."</p> + +<p>The gravity with which the merchant had heard Francis' story +vanished immediately he left the room, and a smile came over his +face.</p> + +<p>"Boys are boys all the world over," he said to himself, "and +though my young friend has almost the stature of a man, as well as +the quickness and courage of one, and has plenty of sense in other +matters, he has at once the prejudices and the romantic ideas of a +boy. Had Signora Castaldi been young and pretty, no idea that she +was treacherous would have ever entered his mind; but what young +fellow yet ever liked a gouvernante, who sits by and works at her +tambour frame, with a disapproving expression on her face, while he +is laughing and talking with a girl of his own age. I should have +felt the same when I was a boy. Still, to picture the poor signora +as a traitoress, in the pay of that villain Mocenigo, is too +absurd. I had the greatest difficulty in keeping my gravity when he +was unfolding his story. But he is an excellent lad, nevertheless. +A true, honest, brave lad, with a little of the bluffness that they +say all his nation possess, but with a heart of gold, unless I am +greatly mistaken."</p> + +<p>At seven o'clock, Francis was just getting into his gondola to +go round again to Signor Polani's, when another gondola came along +the canal at the top of its speed, and he recognized at once the +badge of the Giustiniani. It stopped suddenly as it came abreast of +his own boat, and Matteo, in a state of the highest excitement, +jumped from his own boat into that of Francis.</p> + +<p>"What is the matter, Matteo? What has happened?"</p> + +<p>"I have terrible news, Francisco. My cousins have both +disappeared."</p> + +<p>"Disappeared!" Francis repeated in astonishment "How have they +disappeared?"</p> + +<p>"Their father has just been round to see mine. He is half mad +with grief and anger. You know they had gone to spend the day at +the Persanis?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, yes," Francis exclaimed; "but do go on, Matteo. Tell me +all about it, quickly."</p> + +<p>"Well, it seems that Polani, for some reason or other, thought +he would go and fetch them himself, and at five o'clock he arrived +there in his gondola, only to find that they had left two hours +before. You were right, Francisco, it was that beldam Castaldi. She +went with them there in the morning, and left them there, and was +to have come in the gondola for them at six. At three o'clock she +arrived, saying that their father had met with a serious accident, +having fallen down the steps of one of the bridges and broken his +leg, and that he had sent her to fetch them at once.</p> + +<p>"Of course, they left with her instantly. Polani questioned the +lackeys, who had aided them to embark. They said that the gondola +was not one of his boats, but was apparently a hired gondola, with +a closed cabin. The girls had stopped in surprise as they came down +the steps, and Maria said, 'Why, this is not our gondola!'</p> + +<p>"Castaldi replied, 'No, no; our own gondolas had both gone off +to find and bring a leech, and as your father was urgently wanting +you, I hailed the first passing boat. Make haste, dears, your +father is longing for you.'</p> + +<p>"So they got on board at once, and the gondola rowed swiftly +away. That is all I know about it, except that the story was a lie, +that their father never sent for them, and that up to a quarter of +an hour ago they had not reached home."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch5">Chapter 5</a>: Finding A Clue.</h2> + +<p>"This is awful, Matteo," Francis said, when his friend had +finished his story. "What is to be done?"</p> + +<p>"That is just the thing, Francisco. What is to be done? My +cousin has been already to the city magistrates, to tell them what +has taken place, and to request their aid in discovering where the +girls have been carried to. I believe that he is going to put up a +proclamation, announcing that he will give a thousand ducats to +whomsoever will bring information which will enable him to recover +the girls. That will set every gondolier on the canals on the +alert, and some of them must surely have noticed a closed gondola +rowed by two men, for at this time of year very few gondolas have +their covers on. It seems to be terrible not to be able to do +anything, so I came straight off to tell you."</p> + +<p>"You had better send your gondola home, Matteo. It may be +wanted. We will paddle out to the lagoon and talk it over. Surely +there must be something to be done, if we could but think of +it.</p> + +<p>"This is terrible, indeed, Matteo," he repeated, after they had +sat without speaking for some minutes. "One feels quite helpless +and bewildered. To think that only yesterday evening we were +laughing and chatting with them, and that now they are lost, and in +the power of that villain Mocenigo, who you may be sure is at the +bottom of it.</p> + +<p>"By the way," he said suddenly, "do you know where he has taken +up his abode?"</p> + +<p>"I heard that he was at Botonda, near Chioggia, a week ago, but +whether he is there still I have not the least idea."</p> + +<p>"It seems to me that the thing to do is to find him, and keep +him in sight. He will probably have them hidden away somewhere, and +will not go near them for some time, for he will know that he will +be suspected, and perhaps watched."</p> + +<p>"But why should he not force Maria to marry him at once?" Matteo +said. "You see, when he has once made her his wife he will be safe, +for my cousin would be driven then to make terms with him for her +sake."</p> + +<p>"He may try that," Francis said; "but he must know that Maria +has plenty of spirit, and may refuse to marry him, threaten her as +he will. He may think that, after she has been kept confined for +some time, and finds that there is no hope of escape, except by +consenting to be his wife, she may give way. But in any case, it +seems to me that the thing to be done is to find Ruggiero, and to +watch his movements."</p> + +<p>"I have no doubt my cousin has already taken steps in that +direction," Matteo said, "and I feel sure that, in this case, he +will receive the support of every influential man in Venice, +outside the Mocenigo family and their connections. The carrying off +of ladies, in broad daylight, will be regarded as a personal injury +in every family. The last attempt was different. I do not say it +was not bad enough, but it is not like decoying girls from home by +a false message. No one could feel safe, if such a deed as this +were not severely punished."</p> + +<p>"Let us go back again, Matteo. It is no use our thinking of +anything until we know what has really been done, and you are sure +to be able to learn, at home, what steps have been taken."</p> + +<p>On reaching home Matteo learned that Polani, accompanied by two +members of the council, had already started in one of the swiftest +of the state galleys for the mainland. A council had been hastily +summoned, and, upon hearing Polani's narrative, had dispatched two +of their number, with an official of the republic, to Botonda. If +Ruggiero was found to be still there, he was to be kept a prisoner +in the house in which he was staying, under the strictest watch. If +he had left, orders were to be sent, to every town in the Venetian +dominions on the mainland, for his arrest when discovered, and in +that case he was to be sent a prisoner, strongly guarded, to +Venice.</p> + +<p>Other galleys had been simultaneously dispatched to the various +ports, ordering a strict search of every boat arriving or leaving, +and directing a minute investigation to be made as to the occupants +of every boat that had arrived during the evening or night. The +fact that a thousand ducats were offered, for information which +would lead to the recovery of the girls, was also to be published +far and wide.</p> + +<p>The news of the abduction had spread, and the greatest +indignation was excited in the city. The sailors from the port of +Malamocco came over in great numbers. They regarded this outrage on +the family of the great merchant as almost a personal insult. +Stones were thrown at the windows of the Palazzo Mocenigo, and an +attack would have been made upon it, had not the authorities sent +down strong guards to protect it. Persons belonging to that house, +and the families connected with it, were assaulted in the streets, +and all Venice was in an uproar.</p> + +<p>"There is one comfort," Giuseppi said, when he heard from +Francis what had taken place. "Just at present, Mocenigo will have +enough to think about his own affairs without troubling about you. +I have been in a tremble ever since that day, and have dreamed bad +dreams every night."</p> + +<p>"You are more nervous for me than I am for myself, Giuseppi; but +I have been careful too, for although Ruggiero himself was away his +friends are here, and active, too, as you see by this successful +attempt. But I think that at present they are likely to let matters +sleep. Public opinion is greatly excited over the affair, and as, +if I were found with a stab in my back, it would, after what has +passed, be put down to them, I think they will leave me alone."</p> + +<p>"I do hope, father," Francis said at breakfast the next morning, +"that there may be no opportunity of sending me back to England, +until something is heard of the Polanis."</p> + +<p>"I have somewhat changed my mind, Francis, as to that matter. +After what Signor Polani said the other day, I feel that it would +be foolish for me to adhere to that plan. With his immense trade +and business connections he can do almost anything for you, and +such an introduction into business is so vastly better than your +entering my shop in the city, that it is best, in every way, that +you should stay here for the present. Of course, for the time he +will be able to think of nothing but his missing daughters; but at +any rate, you can remain here until he has leisure to pursue the +subject, and to state, further than he did the other day, what he +proposes for you. My own business is a good one for a London +trader, but it is nothing by the side of the transactions of the +merchant princes at Venice, among the very first of whom Signor +Polani is reckoned."</p> + +<p>Francis was greatly pleased at his father's words. He had, ever +since Polani had spoken to him, been pondering the matter in his +mind. He knew that to enter business under his protection would be +one of the best openings that even Venice could afford; but his +father was slow to change his plans, and Francis greatly feared +that he would adhere to his original plan.</p> + +<p>"I was hoping, father, that you would think favourably of what +Signor Polani said, although, of course, I kept silence, knowing +that you would do what was best for me. And now I would ask you if +you will, until this matter is cleared up, excuse me from my tasks. +I should learn nothing did I continue at them, for my mind would be +ever running upon Signor Polani's daughters, and I should be +altogether too restless to apply myself. It seems to me, too, that +I might, as I row here and there in my gondola, obtain some clue as +to their place of concealment."</p> + +<p>"I do not see how you could do that, Francis, when so many +others, far better qualified than yourself, will be on the lookout. +Still, as I agree with you that you are not likely to apply your +mind diligently to your tasks, and as, indeed, you will shortly be +giving them up altogether, I grant your request."</p> + +<p>Polani returned in the evening to Venice. Ruggiero Mocenigo had +been found. He professed great indignation at the accusation +brought against him, of being concerned in the abduction of the +ladies, and protested furiously when he heard that, until they were +found, he was to consider himself a prisoner. Signor Polani +considered that his indignation was feigned, but he had no doubt as +to the reality of his anger at finding that he was to be confined +to his house under a guard.</p> + +<p>Immediately after his return, Polani sent his gondola for +Francis. He was pacing up and down the room when the lad +arrived.</p> + +<p>"Your suspicions have turned out correct, as you see, Francis. +Would to Heaven I had acted upon them at once, and then this would +not have happened. It seemed to me altogether absurd, when you +spoke to me, that the woman I have for years treated as a friend +should thus betray me. And yet your warning made me uneasy, so much +so that I set off myself to fetch them home at five o'clock, only +to find that I was too late. I scarcely know why I have sent for +you, Francis, except that as I have found, to my cost, that you +were more clear sighted in this matter than I, I want to know what +you think now, and whether any plan offering even a chance of +success has occurred to you. That they have been carried off by the +friends of Mocenigo I have no doubt whatever."</p> + +<p>"I fear, signor," Francis said, "that there is little hope of my +thinking of anything that has not already occurred to you. It seems +to me hardly likely that they can be in the city, although, of +course, they may be confined in the house of Mocenigo's agents. +Still, they would be sure that you would offer large rewards for +their discovery, and would be more likely to take them right away. +Besides, I should think that it was Mocenigo's intention to join +them, wherever they may be, as soon as he learned that they were in +the hands of his accomplices. Your fortunate discovery that they +had gone, so soon after they had been carried off, and your going +straight to him armed with the order of the council, probably upset +his calculations, for it is likely enough that his agents had not +arrived at the house, and that he learned from you, for the first +time, that his plans had succeeded. Had you arrived two or three +hours later, you might have found him gone."</p> + +<p>"That is what I calculated, Francisco. His agents had but four +hours' start of me. They would, no doubt, carry the girls to the +place of concealment chosen, and would then bear the news to him; +whereas I, going direct in one of the state gondolas, might reach +him before they did, and I feel assured that I did so.</p> + +<p>"It was nigh midnight when I arrived, but he was still up, and I +doubt not awaiting the arrival of the villains he had employed. My +first step was to set a watch round the house, with the order to +arrest any who might come and inquire for him. No one, however, +came.</p> + +<p>"The news, indeed, of the sudden arrival of a state galley, at +that hour, had caused some excitement in the place, and his agents +might well have heard of it upon their arrival. I agree with you in +thinking they are not in the town, but this makes the search all +the more difficult. The question is, what ought we to do next?"</p> + +<p>"The reward that you have offered will certainly bring you news, +signor, if any, save those absolutely concerned, have observed +anything suspicious; but I should send to all the fishing villages, +on the islets and on the mainland, to publish the news of the +reward you have offered. Beyond that, I do not see that anything +can be done; and I, too, have thought of nothing else since Matteo +brought me the news of their being carried off. It will be of no +use, that I can see, going among the fishermen and questioning +them, because, with such a reward in view, it is certain that +anyone who has anything to tell will come, of his own accord, to do +so."</p> + +<p>"I know that is the case already, Francisco. The authorities +have been busy all day with the matter, and a score of reports as +to closed gondolas being seen have reached them; but so far nothing +has come of it. Many of these gondolas have been traced to their +destinations, but in no case was there anything to justify +suspicion. Happily, as long as Mocenigo is in confinement, I feel +that no actual harm will happen to the girls; but the villain is as +crafty as a fox, and may elude the vigilance of the officer in +charge of him. I am going to the council, presently, to urge that +he should be brought here as a prisoner; but from what I hear there +is little chance of the request being complied with. His friends +are already declaiming on the injustice of a man being treated as a +criminal, when there is no shadow of proof forthcoming against him; +and the disturbances last night have angered many who have no great +friendship for him, but who are indignant at the attack of the +populace upon the house of a noble. So you see that there is but +faint chance that they would bring him hither a prisoner."</p> + +<p>"I think, sir, that were I in your case, I should put some +trusty men to watch round the house where he is confined; so that +in case he should escape the vigilance of his guards they might +seize upon him. Everything depends, as you say, upon his being kept +in durance."</p> + +<p>"I will do so, Francisco, at once. I will send to two of my +officers at the port, and tell them to pick out a dozen men on whom +they can rely, to proceed to Botonda, and to watch closely everyone +who enters or leaves the house, without at the same time making +themselves conspicuous. At any rate, they will be handy there in +case Mocenigo's friends attempt to rescue him by force, which might +be done with success, for the house he occupies stands at a short +distance out of the town, and the official in charge of Mocenigo +has only eight men with him.</p> + +<p>"Yes, your advice is excellent, and I will follow it at once. +Should any other idea occur to you, pray let me know it +immediately. You saved my daughters once, and although I know there +is no reason why it should be so, still, I feel a sort of belief +that you may, somehow, be instrumental in their again being brought +back to me."</p> + +<p>"I will do my best, sir, you may depend upon it," Francis said +earnestly. "Were they my own sisters, I could not feel more +strongly interested in their behalf."</p> + +<p>Francis spent the next week almost entirely in his gondola. +Starting soon after daybreak with Giuseppi, he would row across to +the villages on the mainland, and make inquiries of all sorts +there; or would visit the little groups of fishermen's huts, built +here and there on posts among the shallows. He would scan every +house as he passed it, with the vague hope that a face might appear +at the window, or a hand be waved for assistance. But, during all +that time, he had found nothing which seemed to offer the slightest +clue, nor were the inquiries set on foot by Signor Polani more +successful. Every piece of information which seemed to bear, in the +slightest degree, upon the affair was investigated, but in no case +was it found of the slightest utility.</p> + +<p>One evening he was returning late, tired by the long day's work, +and discouraged with his utter want of success, when, just as he +had passed under the Ponto Maggiore, the lights on the bridge fell +on the faces of the sitters in a gondola coming the other way. They +were a man and a woman. The latter was closely veiled. But the +night was close and oppressive, and, just at the moment when +Francis' eyes fell upon her, she lifted her veil for air. Francis +recognized her instantly. For a moment he stopped rowing, and then +dipped his oar in as before. Directly the other gondola passed +through the bridge behind him, and his own had got beyond the +circle of light, he swept it suddenly round.</p> + +<p>Giuseppi gave an exclamation of surprise.</p> + +<p>"Giuseppi, we have luck at last. Did you notice that gondola we +met just now? The woman sitting in it is Castaldi, the woman who +betrayed the signoras."</p> + +<p>"What shall we do, Messer Francisco?" Giuseppi, who had become +almost as interested in the search as his master, asked. "There was +only a single gondolier and one other man. If we take them by +surprise we can master them."</p> + +<p>"That will not do, Giuseppi. The woman would refuse to speak, +and though they could force her to do so in the dungeons, the girls +would be sure to be removed the moment it was known she was +captured. We must follow them, and see where they go to. Let us get +well behind them, so that we can just make them out in the +distance. If they have a suspicion that they are being followed, +they will land her at the first steps and slip away from us."</p> + +<p>"They are landing now, signor," Giuseppi exclaimed directly +afterwards. "Shall we push on and overtake them on shore?"</p> + +<p>"It is too late, Giuseppi. They are a hundred and fifty yards +away, and would have mixed in the crowd, and be lost, long before +we should get ashore and follow them. Row on fast, but not over +towards that side. If the gondola moves off, we will make straight +for the steps and try to follow them, though our chance of hitting +upon them in the narrow lanes and turnings is slight indeed.</p> + +<p>"But if, as I hope, the gondola stops at the steps, most likely +they will return to it in time. So we will row in to the bank a +hundred yards farther up the canal and wait."</p> + +<p>The persons who had been seen in the gondola had disappeared +when they came abreast of it, and the gondolier had seated himself +in the boat, with the evident intention of waiting. Francis steered +his gondola at a distance of a few yards from it as he shot past, +but did not abate his speed, and continued to row till they were +three or four hundred yards farther up the canal. Then he turned +the gondola, and paddled noiselessly back until he could see the +outline of the boat he was watching.</p> + +<p>An hour elapsed before any movement was visible. Then Francis +heard the sound of footsteps, and could just make out the figures +of persons descending the steps and entering the gondola. Then the +boat moved out into the middle of the canal, where a few boats were +still passing to and fro. Francis kept his gondola close by the +bank, so as to be in the deep shade of the houses. The boat they +were following again passed under the Ponto Maggiore, and for some +distance followed the line of the Grand Canal.</p> + +<p>"Keep your eye upon it, Giuseppi. It is sure to turn off one way +or the other soon, and if it is too far ahead of us when it does +so, then it may give us the slip altogether."</p> + +<p>But the gondola continued its course the whole length of the +canal, and then straight on until, nearly opposite Saint Mark's, it +passed close to a larger gondola, with four rowers, coming slowly +in the other direction; and it seemed to Francis that the two boats +paused when opposite each other, and that a few words were +exchanged.</p> + +<p>Then the boat they were watching turned out straight into the +lagoon. It was rather lighter here than in the canal, bordered on +each side by houses, and Francis did not turn the head of his +gondola for a minute or two.</p> + +<p>"It will be very difficult to keep them in sight out here +without their making us out," Giuseppi said.</p> + +<p>"Yes, and it is likely enough that they are only going out there +in order that they may be quite sure that they are not followed, +before striking off to the place they want to go to. They may +possibly have made us out, and guess that we are tracking them. +They would be sure to keep their eyes and ears open."</p> + +<p>"I can only just make them out now, Messer Francisco, and as we +shall have the buildings behind us, they will not be able to see us +as well as we can see them. I think we can go now."</p> + +<p>"We will risk it, at any rate, Giuseppi. I have lost sight of +them already, and it will never do to let them give us the +slip."</p> + +<p>They dipped their oars in the water, and the gondola darted out +from the shore. They had not gone fifty strokes when they heard the +sound of oars close at hand.</p> + +<p>"To the right, Giuseppi, hard!" Francis cried as he glanced over +his shoulder.</p> + +<p>A sweep with both oars brought the gondola's head, in a moment, +almost at right angles to the course that she had been pursuing; +and the next sent her dancing on a new line, just as a four-oared +gondola swept down upon them, missing their stern by only three or +four feet. Had they been less quick in turning, the iron prow would +have cut right through their light boat.</p> + +<p>Giuseppi burst into a torrent of vituperation at the +carelessness of the gondoliers who had so nearly run into them, but +Francis silenced him at once.</p> + +<p>"Row, Giuseppi. It was done on purpose. It is the gondola the +other spoke to."</p> + +<p>Their assailant was turning also, and in a few seconds was in +pursuit. Francis understood it now. The gondola they had been +following had noticed them, and had informed their friends, waiting +off Saint Mark's, of the fact. Intent upon watching the receding +boat, he had paid no further attention to the four-oared craft, +which had made a turn, and lay waiting in readiness to run them +down, should they follow in the track of the other boat.</p> + +<p>Francis soon saw that the craft behind them was a fast one, and +rowed by men who were first-rate gondoliers. Fast as his own boat +was flying through the water, the other gained upon them steadily. +He was heading now for the entrance to the Grand Canal, for their +pursuer, in the wider sweep he had made in turning, was nearer to +the Piazza than they were, and cut off their flight in that +direction.</p> + +<p>"Keep cool, Giuseppi," he said. "They will be up to us in a +minute or two. When their bow is within a yard or two of us, and I +say, 'Now!' sweep her head straight round towards the lagoon. We +can turn quicker than they can. Then let them gain upon us, and we +will then turn again."</p> + +<p>The gondola in pursuit came up hand over hand. Francis kept +looking over his shoulder, and when he saw its bow gliding up +within a few feet of her stern he exclaimed "Now!" and, with a +sudden turn, the gondola again swept out seaward.</p> + +<p>Their pursuer rushed on for a length or two before she could +sweep round, while a volley of imprecations and threats burst from +three men who were standing up in her with drawn swords. Francis +and Giuseppi were now rowing less strongly, and gaining breath for +their next effort. When the gondola again came up to them they +swept round to the left, and as their pursuers followed they headed +for the Grand Canal.</p> + +<p>"Make for the steps of Santa Maria church. We will jump out +there and trust to our feet."</p> + +<p>The two lads put out all their strength now. They were some +three boats' lengths ahead before their pursuers were fairly on +their track. They were now rowing for life, for they knew that they +could hardly succeed in doubling again, and that the gondola behind +them was so well handled, that they could not gain on it at the +turnings were they to venture into the narrow channels. It was a +question of speed alone, and so hard did they row that the gondola +in pursuit gained but slowly on them, and they were still two +lengths ahead when they dashed up to the steps of the church.</p> + +<p>Simultaneously they sprang on shore, leaped up the steps, and +dashed off at the top of their speed, hearing, as they did so, a +crash as the gondola ran into their light craft. There was a +moment's delay, as the men had to step across their boat to gain +the shore, and they were fifty yards ahead before they heard the +sound of their pursuers' feet on the stone steps; but they were +lightly clad and shoeless, and carried nothing to impede their +movements, and they had therefore little fear of being +overtaken.</p> + +<p>After racing on at the top of their speed for a few minutes, +they stopped and listened. The sound of their pursuers' footsteps +died away in the distance; and, after taking a few turns to put +them off their track, they pursued their way at a more leisurely +pace.</p> + +<p>"They have smashed the gondola," Giuseppi said with a sob, for +he was very proud of the light craft.</p> + +<p>"Never mind the gondola," Francis said cheerfully. "If they had +smashed a hundred it would not matter."</p> + +<p>"But the woman has got away and we have learned nothing," +Giuseppi said, surprised at his master's cheerfulness.</p> + +<p>"I think we have learned something, Giuseppi. I think we have +learned everything. I have no doubt the girls are confined in that +hut on San Nicolo. I wonder I never thought of it before; but I +made so sure that they would be taken somewhere close to where +Mocenigo was staying, that it never occurred to me that they might +hide them out there. I ought to have known that that was just the +thing they would do, for while the search would be keen among the +islets near the land, and the villages there, no one would think of +looking for them on the seaward islands.</p> + +<p>"I have no doubt they are there now. That woman came ashore to +report to his friends, and that four-oared boat which has chased us +was in waiting off Saint Mark's, to attack any boat that might be +following them.</p> + +<p>"We will go to Signor Polani at once and tell him what has +happened. I suppose it is about one o'clock now, but I have not +noticed the hour. It was past eleven before we first met the +gondola, and we must have been a good deal more than an hour lying +there waiting for them."</p> + +<p>A quarter of an hour's walking took them to the palazzo of +Polani. They rang twice at the bell at the land entrance, before a +face appeared at the little window of the door, and asked who was +there.</p> + +<p>"I wish to see Signor Polani at once," Francis said.</p> + +<p>"The signor retired to rest an hour ago," the man said.</p> + +<p>"Never mind that," Francis replied. "I am Francis Hammond, and I +have important news to give him."</p> + +<p>As soon as the servitor recognized Francis' voice, he unbarred +the door.</p> + +<p>"Have you news of the ladies?" he asked eagerly.</p> + +<p>"I have news which will, I hope, lead to something," Francis +replied.</p> + +<p>A moment later the voice of Polani himself, who, although he had +retired to his room, had not yet gone to sleep, was heard at the +top of the grand stairs, inquiring who it was who had come so late; +for although men had been arriving all day, with reports from the +various islands and villages, he thought that no one would come at +this hour unless his news were important.</p> + +<p>Francis at once answered:</p> + +<p>"It is I, Signor Polani, Francis Hammond. I have news which I +think may be of importance, although I may be mistaken. Still, it +is certainly news that may lead to something."</p> + +<p>The merchant hurried down.</p> + +<p>"What is it, Francisco? What have you learned?"</p> + +<p>"I have seen the woman Castaldi, and have followed her. I do not +know for certain where she was going, for we have been chased by a +large gondola, and have narrowly escaped with our lives. Still, I +have a clue to their whereabouts."</p> + +<p>Francis then related the events of the evening.</p> + +<p>"But why did you not run into the boat and give the alarm at +once, Francisco? Any gondolas passing would have given their +assistance, when you declared who she was, for the affair is the +talk of the city. If that woman were in our power we should soon +find means to make her speak."</p> + +<p>"Yes, signor; but the moment she was known to be in your power, +you may be sure that they would remove your daughters from the +place where they have been hiding them. I thought, therefore, the +best plan would be to track them. No doubt we should have succeeded +in doing so, had it not been for the attack upon us by another +gondola."</p> + +<p>"You are right, no doubt, Francisco. Still, it is unfortunate, +for I do not see that we are now any nearer than we were before, +except that we know that this woman is in the habit of coming into +the city."</p> + +<p>"I think we are nearer, sir, for I had an adventure some time +ago that may afford a clue to their hiding place."</p> + +<p>He then told the merchant how he had, one evening, taken a man +out to San Nicolo, and had discovered that a hut in that island was +used as a meeting place by various persons, among whom was Ruggiero +Mocenigo.</p> + +<p>"I might have thought of the place before, signor; but, in fact, +it never entered my mind. From the first, we considered it so +certain that the men who carried off your daughters would take them +to some hiding place where Mocenigo could speedily join them, that +San Nicolo never entered my mind. I own that it was very stupid, +for it seems now to me that the natural thing for them to do, would +be to take them in the very opposite direction to that in which the +search for them would be made."</p> + +<p>The story had been frequently interrupted by exclamations of +surprise by Polani. At its conclusion, he laid his hand on Francis' +shoulder.</p> + +<p>"My dear boy," he said, "How can I thank you! You seem to me to +be born to be the preserver of my daughters. I cannot doubt that +your suspicion is correct, and that they are confined in this hut +at San Nicolo. How fortunate that you did not denounce this +conspiracy--for conspiracy no doubt it is--that you discovered, +for, had you done so, some other place would have been selected for +the girls' prison."</p> + +<p>"I would not be too sanguine, sir. The girls may not be in this +hut, still we may come on some clue there which may lead us to +them. If not, we will search the islands on that side as closely as +we have done those on the mainland."</p> + +<p>"Now, shall I send for the gondoliers and set out at once? There +are ten or twelve men in the house, and it is hardly likely that +they will place a guard over them of anything like this strength, +as of course they will be anxious to avoid observation by the +islanders."</p> + +<p>"I do not think I would do anything tonight, sir," Francis said. +"The gondola that chased us will be on the alert. They cannot, of +course, suspect in the slightest that we have any clue to the +hiding place of your daughters. Still, they might think that, if we +were really pursuing the other gondola, and had recognized the +woman Castaldi, we might bring the news to you, and that a stir +might be made. They may therefore be watching to see if anything +comes of it; and if they saw a bustle and gondolas setting out +taking the direction of the island, they might set off and get +there first, for it is a very fast craft, and remove your daughters +before we reach the hut.</p> + +<p>"I should say wait till morning. They may be watching your house +now, and if, in an hour or two, they see all is quiet, they will no +doubt retire with the belief that all danger is at an end. Then, in +the morning, I would embark the men in two or three gondolas, but I +would not start from your own steps, for no doubt your house is +watched. Let the men go out singly, and embark at a distance from +here, and not at the same place. Once out upon the lagoon, they +should row quietly towards San Nicolo, keeping a considerable +distance apart, the men lying down in the bottom as the boats +approach the island, so that if anyone is on watch he will have no +suspicion.</p> + +<p>"As I am the only one that knows the position of the hut, I will +be with you in the first gondola. We will not land near the hut, +but pass by, and land at the other end of the island. The other +gondolas will slowly follow us, and land at the same spot. Then +three or four men can go along by the sea face, with orders to +watch any boats hauled up upon the shore there, and stop any party +making down towards them. The rest of us will walk straight to the +hut, and, as it lies among sand hills, I hope we shall be able to +get quite close to it before our approach is discovered."</p> + +<p>"An excellent plan, Francisco, though I am so impatient that the +night will seem endless to me; but certainly your plan is the best. +Even if the house is watched, and you were seen to enter, if all +remains perfectly quiet they will naturally suppose that the news +you brought was not considered of sufficient importance to lead to +any action. You will, of course, remain here till morning?"</p> + +<p>"I cannot do that, sir, though I will return the first thing. +There is, lying on my table, a paper with the particulars and names +of the persons I saw meet in this hut, and a request to my father +that, if I do not return in the morning, he will at once lay this +before the council. I place it there every day when I go out, in +order that, if I should be seized and carried off by Mocenigo's +people, I should have some means of forcing them to let me go.</p> + +<p>"Although I know absolutely nothing of the nature of the +conspiracy, they will not know how much I am aware of, or what +particulars I may have given in the document; and as I could name +to them those present, and among them is the envoy of the King of +Hungary, now in the city, they would hardly dare harm me, when they +knew that if they did so this affair would be brought before the +council."</p> + +<p>"It was an excellent precaution, Francisco. Why, you are as +prudent and thoughtful as you are courageous!"</p> + +<p>"It was not likely to be of much use, sir," Francis said +modestly. "I was very much more likely to get a stab in the back +than to be carried off. Still, it was just possible that Mocenigo +might himself like to see his vengeance carried out, and it was +therefore worth my while guarding against it. But, as you see, it +will be necessary for me to be back sometime before morning."</p> + +<p>"At any rate, Francisco, you had better wait here until morning +breaks. Your room is not likely to be entered for some hours after +that; so while I am preparing for our expedition, you can go out +and make your way to the Grand Canal, hail an early gondola, and be +put down at your own steps, when, as you have told me, you can +enter the house without disturbing anyone. Then you can remove that +paper, and return here in the gondola. We will start at seven. +There will be plenty of boats about by that time, and the lagoon +will be dotted by the fishermen's craft, so that our gondolas will +attract no attention."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps that will be the best plan, signor; and, indeed, I +should not be sorry for a few hours' sleep, for Giuseppi and I have +been in our boat since a very early hour in the morning, and were +pretty well tired out before this last adventure began."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch6">Chapter 6</a>: The Hut On San Nicolo.</h2> + +<p>At seven o'clock all was in readiness for a start. Signor Polani +set out alone in his gondola, and picked up Francis, and four men, +at a secluded spot some distance from the house. A messenger had +been sent, two hours before, to the captain of one of the merchant +ships lying in the port. He at once put ten men into a large boat, +and rowed down to within half a mile of the island. Here a grapnel +was thrown overboard, most of the men lay down in the bottom, and +the captain, according to his instructions, kept a sharp lookout to +see that no boat left San Nicolo--his instructions being to +overhaul any boat coming out, and to see that no one was concealed +on board it.</p> + +<p>There he remained until Polani's gondola rowed past him. After +it had gone a few hundred yards, the grapnel was got up, the men +took to their oars and followed the gondola, keeping so far behind +that it would not seem there was any connection between them.</p> + +<p>Francis made for the narrow channel which separated San Nicolo +from the next island, and then directed the gondola to be run +ashore, where a low sand hill, close by, hid them from the sight of +anyone on the lookout. A few minutes later the ship's boat +arrived.</p> + +<p>Francis now led the way direct for the hut, accompanied by +Polani and six men, while four sailors advanced, at a distance of a +hundred yards on either flank, to cut off anyone making for the +water.</p> + +<p>"We may as well go fast," he said, "for we can scarcely get +there without being seen by a lookout, should there be one on the +sand hills, and the distance is so short that there will be no +possibility of their carrying your daughters off, before we get +there."</p> + +<p>"The faster the better," the merchant said. "This suspense is +terrible."</p> + +<p>Accordingly, the party started at a brisk run. Francis kept his +eyes on the spot where he believed the hut lay.</p> + +<p>"I see no one anywhere near there," he said, as they came over +one of the sand ridges. "Had there been anyone on the watch I think +we should see him now."</p> + +<p>On they ran, until, passing over one of the sand hills, Francis +came to a standstill. The hut lay in the hollow below them.</p> + +<p>"There is the house, signor. Now we shall soon know."</p> + +<p>They dashed down the short slope, and gathered round the +door.</p> + +<p>"Within there, open!" the merchant shouted, hammering with the +hilt of his sword on the door.</p> + +<p>All was silent within.</p> + +<p>"Break it down!" he said; and two of the sailors, who had +brought axes with them, began to hew away at the door.</p> + +<p>A few blows, and it suddenly opened, and two men dressed as +fishermen appeared in the doorway.</p> + +<p>"What means this attack upon the house of quiet people?" they +demanded.</p> + +<p>"Bind them securely," Polani said, as he rushed in, followed +closely by Francis, while those who followed seized the men.</p> + +<p>Polani paused as he crossed the threshold, with a cry of +disappointment--the hut was empty. Francis was almost equally +disappointed.</p> + +<p>"If they are not here, they are near by," Francis said to +Polani. "Do not give up hope. I am convinced they are not far off; +and if we search we may find a clue. Better keep your men outside. +We can search more thoroughly by ourselves."</p> + +<p>The merchant told his men, who had seized and were binding the +two occupants of the hut, to remain outside. The inside of the hut +differed in no way from the ordinary dwelling of fishermen, except +that a large table stood in the middle of it, and there were some +benches against the walls. Some oars stood in one corner, and some +nets were piled close to them. A fire burned in the open hearth, +and a pot hung over it, and two others stood on the hearth.</p> + +<p>"Let us see what they have got here," Francis said, while the +merchant leaned against the table with an air of profound +depression, paying no attention to what he was doing.</p> + +<p>"A soup," Francis said, lifting the lid from the pot over the +fire, "and, by the smell, a good one."</p> + +<p>Then he lifted the other pots simmering among the burning +brands.</p> + +<p>"A ragout of kid and a boiled fish. Signor Polani, this is no +fisherman's meal. Either these men expect visitors of a much higher +degree than themselves, or your daughters are somewhere close.</p> + +<p>"Oh! there is a door."</p> + +<p>"It can lead nowhere," Polani said. "The sand is piled up to the +roof on that side of the house."</p> + +<p>"It is," Francis agreed; "but there may be a lower room there, +completely covered with the sand. At any rate, we will see."</p> + +<p>He pushed against the door, but it did not give in the +slightest.</p> + +<p>"It may be the sand," he said. "It may be bolts."</p> + +<p>He went to the outside door, and called in the sailors with the +hatchets.</p> + +<p>"Break open that door," he said.</p> + +<p>"There is a space behind," he exclaimed, as the first blow was +given. "It is hollow, I swear. It would be a different sound +altogether if sand was piled up against it."</p> + +<p>A dozen blows and the fastenings gave, and, sword in hand, the +merchant and Francis rushed through.</p> + +<p>Both gave a shout of delight. They were in a room built out at +the back of the hut. It was richly furnished, and hangings of +Eastern stuffs covered the walls. A burning lamp hung from the +ceiling. Two men stood irresolute with drawn swords, having +apparently turned round just as the door gave way; for as it did +so, two figures struggled to their feet from a couch behind them, +for some shawls had been wrapped round their heads, and with a cry +of delight rushed forward to meet their rescuers. Seated at the end +of the couch, with bowed down head, was another female figure.</p> + +<p>"Maria--Giulia!" the merchant exclaimed, as, dropping his sword, +he clasped his daughters in his arms.</p> + +<p>Francis, followed by the two sailors with hatchets, advanced +towards the men.</p> + +<p>"Drop your swords and surrender," he said. "Resistance is +useless. There are a dozen men outside."</p> + +<p>The men threw their swords down on the ground.</p> + +<p>"Lead them outside, and bind them securely," Francis said.</p> + +<p>For the next minute or two, few words were spoken. The girls +sobbed with delight on their father's breast, while he himself was +too moved to do more than murmur words of love and thankfulness. +Francis went quietly out and spoke to the captain, who went in to +the inner room, touched the sitting figure on the shoulder, and, +taking her by the arm, led her outside.</p> + +<p>"Come in, Francis," Polani called a minute later.</p> + +<p>"My dears, it is not me you must thank for your rescue. It is +your English friend here who has again restored you to me. It is to +him we owe our happiness, and that you, my child, are saved from +the dreadful fate of being forced to be the wife of that villain +Mocenigo.</p> + +<p>"Embrace him, my dears, as a brother, for he has done more than +a brother for you. And now tell me all that has happened since I +last saw you."</p> + +<p>"You know, father, the message that was brought us, that you had +been hurt and wanted us home?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, my dears, that I learned soon afterwards. I went at five +o'clock to fetch you home, and found that you had gone, and +why."</p> + +<p>"Well, father, directly we had taken our seats in the cabin of +the gondola, our gouvernante closed the doors, and soon afterwards +she slid to the two shutters before the windows. We cried out in +surprise at finding ourselves in the dark, but she bade us be +quiet, in a tone quite different to any in which she had ever +spoken to us before. We were both frightened, and tried to push +back the shutters and open the door, but they were fastened firmly. +I suppose there was some spring which held them. Then we screamed; +but I could feel that the inside was all thickly padded. I suppose +our voices could not be heard outside. I thought so, because once I +thought I heard the gondoliers singing, but it was so faint that I +could not be sure. Then the air seemed stiflingly close, and I +fainted; and when I came to myself one of the windows was open, and +Giulia said she had promised we would not scream, but I think we +were beyond the canals then, for I could see nothing but the sky as +we passed along. When I was better the windows were almost shut +again, so that we could not see out, though a little air could get +in; then the gondola went on for a long time.</p> + +<p>"At last it stopped, and she said we must be blindfolded. We +said we would not submit to it, and she told us unless we let her +do it, the men would do it. So we submitted, and she wrapped shawls +closely over our heads. Then we were helped ashore, and walked some +distance. At last the shawls were taken off our heads, and we found +ourselves here, and here we have been ever since."</p> + +<p>"You have not been ill treated in any way, my children?" the +merchant asked anxiously.</p> + +<p>"Not at all, father. Until today, nobody has been into this room +besides ourselves and that woman. The door was generally left a +little open for air, for you see there are no windows here. She +used to go into the next room and come back with our food. We could +see men moving about in there, but they were very quiet, and all +spoke in low tones.</p> + +<p>"You may think how we upbraided our gouvernante for her +treachery, and threatened her with your anger. She told us we +should never be found, and that I might as well make up my mind to +marry Ruggiero Mocenigo, for if I did not consent quietly, means +would be found to compel me to do so. I said I would die first, but +she used to laugh a cruel laugh, and say he would soon be here with +the priest, and that it mattered not whether I said yes or no. The +ceremony would be performed, and then Ruggiero would sail away with +me to the East, and I should be glad enough then to make peace +between him and you. But he never came. I think she became anxious, +for she went away twice for three or four hours, and locked us in +here when she went.</p> + +<p>"That, father, is all we know about it. Where are we?"</p> + +<p>"You are at San Nicolo."</p> + +<p>"On the island!" Maria exclaimed in surprise. "She told us we +were on the mainland. And now, how did you find us?"</p> + +<p>"I will tell you as we go home, Maria."</p> + +<p>"Yes, that will be better, father. Giulia and I long for a +breath of fresh air, and the sight of the blue sky."</p> + +<p>"Giulia has not had so much to frighten her as you have," her +father said.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I have, father; for she said I was to go across the seas +with Maria, and that Ruggiero would soon find a husband for me +among his friends. I told her she was a wicked woman, over and over +again, and we told her that we were sure you would forgive, and +even reward her, if she would take us back again to you. When she +was away, we thought we would try to make our escape behind, and we +made a little hole in the boards; but the sand came pouring in, and +we found we were underground, though how we got there we didn't +know, for we had not come down any steps. So we had to give up the +idea of escape."</p> + +<p>"You are partly underground," her father said, "for, as you will +see when you get out, the sand has drifted up at the back of the +hut to the roof, and has altogether hidden this part of the hut; so +that we did not know that there was more than one room, and I +should never have thought of breaking into that door, had it not +been for Francisco. And now come along, my dears. Let us wait here +no longer."</p> + +<p>The sailors and servitors broke into a cheer as the girls came +out of the hut.</p> + +<p>"Shall we put a torch to this place?" Francis asked Polani.</p> + +<p>"No, Francisco. It must be searched thoroughly first.</p> + +<p>"Captain Lontano, do you order four of your men to remain here, +until some of the officials of the state arrive. If anyone comes +before that, they must seize them and detain them as prisoners. The +state will investigate the matter to the bottom."</p> + +<p>Now that they were in the open air, the merchant could see that +the close confinement and anxiety had told greatly upon his +daughters. Both were pale and hollow eyed, and looked as if they +had suffered a long illness. Seeing how shaken they were, he +ordered one of the retainers to go to the gondola, and tell the men +to row it round to the nearest point to the hut. The party then +walked along down to the shore.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the gondola arrived. Polani, his two daughters, +and Francis took their places in it. The four men, bound hand and +foot, were laid in the bottom of the ship's boat; the gouvernante +was made to take her place there also, and the sailors were told to +follow closely behind the gondola, which was rowed at a very slow +pace.</p> + +<p>On the way, Polani told his daughters of the manner in which +Francis had discovered the place of concealment.</p> + +<p>"Had it not been for him, my dears, we should certainly not have +found you, and that villain would have carried out his plans, +sooner or later. He would either have given his guards the slip, +or, when no evidence was forthcoming against him, they would have +been removed. He would then have gone outside the jurisdiction of +the republic, obtained a ship with a crew of desperadoes, sailed +round to the seaward side of San Nicolo, and carried you off. +Nothing could have saved you, and your resistance would, as that +woman told you, have been futile."</p> + +<p>"We shall be grateful to you all our lives, Francisco," Maria +said. "We shall pray for you always, night and morning.</p> + +<p>"Shall we not, Giulia?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, indeed," the young girl said simply. "We shall love him +all our lives."</p> + +<p>"Answer for yourself, Giulia," Maria said with a laugh, her +spirits returning in the bright sunshine and fresh air. "When +Francisco asks for my love, it will be quite soon enough to say +what I think about it."</p> + +<p>"I should never have courage enough to do that, signora. I know +what you would say too well."</p> + +<p>"What should I say?" Maria asked.</p> + +<p>"You would say I was an impudent boy."</p> + +<p>Maria laughed.</p> + +<p>"I cannot think of you as a boy any longer, Francisco," she said +more gravely. "I have, perhaps, regarded you as a boy till now, +though you did save us so bravely before; but you see you are only +my own age, and a girl always looks upon a boy of her own age as +ever so much younger than she is herself. Besides, too, you have +none of the airs of being a man, which some of my cousins have; and +never pay compliments or say pretty things, but seem altogether +like a younger brother. But I shall think you a boy no more. I know +you better now."</p> + +<p>"But I am a boy," Francis said, "and I don't want to be thought +anything else. In England we keep young longer than they do here, +and a boy of my age would not think of speaking to his elders, +unless he was first addressed.</p> + +<p>"What are you going to do with your prisoners, signor?"</p> + +<p>"I shall take them direct to my house, and then go and report +the recovery of my daughters, and their capture. Officials will at +once be sent, with a gondola, to take them off to the prison. There +can be no question now as to the part Mocenigo has played in this +business, and no doubt he will be brought here a prisoner at once. +Even his nearest connections will not dare to defend conduct so +outrageous, especially when public indignation has been so +excited.</p> + +<p>"You do not know, girls, what a stir has been caused in the city +on your account. If it had not been for the citizen guard, I +believe the Mocenigo Palace would have been burned down; and +Ruggiero's connections have scarcely dared to show their faces in +the streets, since you have been missing. You see, every father of +a family felt personally grieved, for if the nobles were permitted, +with impunity, to carry off the daughters of citizens, who could +feel safe?</p> + +<p>"When this is all over I shall take you, for a time, back to our +home in Corfu. It is not good for girls to be the subject of public +talk and attention."</p> + +<p>"I shall be very glad, father," Giulia said. "I love our home at +Corfu, with its gardens and flowers, far better than the palazzo +here. The air is always soft and balmy, while here it is so hot +sometimes by day, and so damp and foggy in the evening. I shall be +glad to go back again."</p> + +<p>"And you, Maria?"</p> + +<p>"I shall be very happy there, father, but I like Venice +best."</p> + +<p>"You are getting to an age to enjoy gaiety, Maria; and it is +natural you should do so. However, it will not be necessary for you +to be long absent. In a city like Venice there are always fresh +subjects for talk, and the most exciting piece of scandal is but a +three days' wonder. A few weeks at Corfu will restore your nerves, +which cannot but have been shaken by what you have gone through, +and you will come back here more disposed than ever to appreciate +the gaieties of Venice."</p> + +<p>"As long as it is for only a few weeks, father, I shall not +care; for you know I am very fond, too, of our beautiful home +there. Still, I do like Venice."</p> + +<p>They had now reached the steps of the Palazzo Polani. They had +not proceeded by way of the Grand Canal, as the merchant was +anxious that his daughters should reach their home unrecognized, +as, had they been noticed, it would have given rise to no little +excitement, and they had had more than enough of this, and needed +quiet and repose. Besides, until the prisoners were in the safe +custody of the officials of the state, it was in every way +desirable that the events of the morning should remain unknown.</p> + +<p>Their return home created quite a tumult of joy in the house. +The preparations that had been made had been kept a profound +secret, as the merchant could not be sure but that some other +member of his household was in the pay of Mocenigo. Thus, until the +girls alighted at the steps, none in the house were aware that any +clue had been obtained as to their hiding place. The women ran down +with cries of joy. The men would have shouted and cheered, had not +Polani held up his hand.</p> + +<p>"The signoras have had more than enough excitement," he said. +"They are grateful to you for your goodwill and affection, but for +the present they need quiet. They may have more to go through +today. I pray you that no word, as to their return, be said outside +the house. I would not that the news were whispered in the city, +till the seignory decide what is to be done in the matter."</p> + +<p>As soon as the girls had gone upstairs to their rooms, the +ship's boat came alongside, and the prisoners were carried into the +house, glances of indignation and anger being cast at the +gouvernante, who had, as soon as she was placed on board the boat, +closely veiled herself; and some of the women broke out into +threats and imprecations.</p> + +<p>"Captain Lontano, the servants will show you a room where your +men can guard the prisoners. You had better remain with them +yourself. Let no one, except your own men, enter the room."</p> + +<p>Giuseppi was on the steps, and Francis stepped up to him and +eagerly asked, "What news of the gondola?"</p> + +<p>"I found her, stove in and full of water, behind the piles close +to the steps. Someone must have pushed her there, to be out of the +way of the traffic. She has several holes in her bottom, besides +being stove in at the gunwale where the other boat struck her. They +must have thrust the ends of their oars through her planks, out of +sheer spite, when they found that we had escaped them. Father and I +have towed her round to your steps, but I doubt whether she is +worth repairing."</p> + +<p>"Well, we can't help it, Giuseppi. She has done her work; and if +every two ducats I lay out were to bring in as good a harvest, I +should have no reason to complain."</p> + +<p>Having seen the prisoners safely placed, the merchant +returned.</p> + +<p>"I think, Francisco, you must go with me. They will be sure to +want to question you."</p> + +<p>"I shall have to say what were my reasons for thinking your +daughters were hid in that hut, signor," Francis said as the +gondola rowed towards Saint Mark's; "and I can only do that by +telling of that secret meeting. I do not want to denounce a number +of people, besides Ruggiero. I have no evidence against them, and +do not know what they were plotting, nor have I any wish to create +for myself more enemies. It is quite enough to have incurred the +enmity of all the connections of the house of Mocenigo."</p> + +<p>"That is true enough, Francisco, but I do not see how it is to +be avoided. Unfortunately, you did recognize others besides +Ruggiero."</p> + +<p>"Quite so, signor, and I am not going to tell a lie about it, +whatever the consequences may be. Still, I wish I could get out of +it."</p> + +<p>"I wish you could, Francis, but I do not see any escape for it, +especially as you say you did not recognize Ruggiero as the +passenger you carried."</p> + +<p>"No, signor, I did not. It might have been he, but I cannot say. +He was wrapped in a cloak, and I did not see his features."</p> + +<p>"It is a pity, Francisco, for had you known him, the statement +that, moved by curiosity, you followed him and saw him into that +hut, would have been sufficient without your entering into the +other matter. Most of my countrymen would not hesitate about +telling a lie, to avoid mixing themselves up further in such a +matter, for the dangers of making enemies are thoroughly +appreciated here; but you are perfectly right, and I like your +steady love of the truth, whatever the consequences to yourself; +but certainly as soon as the matter is concluded, it will be better +for you to quit Venice for a time."</p> + +<p>"Are you going to the council direct, signor?"</p> + +<p>"No. I am going first to the magistrates, to tell them that I +have in my hands five persons, who have been engaged in carrying +off my daughters, and beg them to send at once to take them into +their custody. Then I shall go before the council, and demand +justice upon Mocenigo, against whom we have now conclusive +evidence. You will not be wanted at the magistracy. My own +evidence, that I found them keeping guard over my daughters, will +be quite sufficient for the present, and after that the girls' +evidence will be sufficient to convict them, without your name +appearing in the affair at all.</p> + +<p>"I will try whether I cannot keep your name from appearing +before the council also. Yes, I think I might do that; and as a +first step, I give you my promise not to name you, unless I find it +absolutely necessary. You may as well remain here in the gondola +until I return."</p> + +<p>It was upwards of an hour before Signor Polani came back to the +boat.</p> + +<p>"I have succeeded," he said, "in keeping your name out of it. I +first of all told my daughters' story, and then said that, having +obtained information that Ruggiero, before he was banished from +Venice, was in the habit of going sometimes at night to a hut on +San Nicolo, I proceeded thither, and found my daughters concealed +in the hut whose position had been described to me. Of course, they +inquired where I had obtained the information; but I replied that, +as they knew, I had offered a large reward which would lead to my +daughters' discovery, and that this reward had attracted one in the +secret of Mocenigo, but that, for the man's own safety, I had been +compelled to promise that I would not divulge his name.</p> + +<p>"Some of the council were inclined to insist, but others pointed +out that, for the ends of justice, it mattered in no way how I +obtained the information. I had, at any rate, gone to the island +and found my daughters there; and their evidence, if it was in +accordance with what I had stated, was amply sufficient to bring +the guilt of the abduction of my daughters home to Ruggiero, +against whom other circumstances had already excited suspicion. A +galley has already started for the mainland, with orders to bring +him back a prisoner, and the girls are to appear to give evidence +tomorrow. The woman, Castaldi, is to be interrogated by the council +this afternoon, and I have no doubt she will make a full +confession, seeing that my daughters' evidence is, in itself, +sufficient to prove her guilt, and that it can be proved, from +other sources, that it was she who inveigled them away by a false +message from me."</p> + +<p>"I am glad indeed, signor, that I am not to be called, and that +this affair of the conspiracy is not to be brought up. I would, +with your permission, now return home. Giuseppi took a message to +my father from me, the first thing, explaining my absence; and I +told him, when we left your house, to go at once to tell him that +your daughters had been recovered, and that I should return before +long. Still, he will want to hear from me as to the events of the +night."</p> + +<p>"Will you also tell him, Francisco, that I will call upon him +this afternoon. I have much to say to him."</p> + +<p>"I am glad Signor Polani is coming," Mr. Hammond said, when his +son gave him the message. "I am quite resolved that you shall quit +Venice at once. I do not wish to blame you for what you have done, +which, indeed, is likely to have a favourable effect upon your +fortunes; but that, at your age, you have mixed yourself up in +adventures of this kind, taken part in the affairs of great houses, +and drawn upon yourself the enmity of one of the most powerful +families of Venice, is altogether strange and improper for a lad of +your years, and belonging to the family of a quiet trader. I have +been thinking about it all this morning, and am quite resolved that +the sooner you are out of Venice the better. If I saw any way of +sending you off before nightfall I would do so.</p> + +<p>"Signor Polani has, you say, so far concealed from the council +the fact that you have been mixed up in this business; but there is +no saying how soon it may come out. You know that Venice swarms +with spies, and these are likely, before many hours, to learn the +fact of your midnight arrival at Polani's house; and as no orders +were given for the preparation of this expedition to the island +before that time, it will not need much penetration to conclude +that you were the bearer of the news that led to the discovery of +the maidens. Besides which, you accompanied the expedition, and +acted as its guide to the hut. Part of this they will learn from +the servants of the house, part of it they may get out from the +sailors, who, over their wine cups, are not given to reticence. The +council may not have pressed Polani on this point, but, take my +word for it, some of them, at least, will endeavour to get to the +bottom of it, especially Mocenigo's connections, who will naturally +be alarmed at the thought that there is somewhere a traitor among +their own ranks.</p> + +<p>"The affair has become very serious, Francis, and far beyond the +compass of a boyish scrape, and no time must be lost in getting you +out of Venice. I have no doubt Polani will see the matter in the +same light, for he knows the ways of his countrymen even better +than I do."</p> + +<p>The interview between the two traders was a long one. At its +conclusion Francis was sent for.</p> + +<p>"Francis," his father said, "Signor Polani has had the kindness +to make me offers of a most generous nature."</p> + +<p>"Not at all, Messer Hammond," the Venetian interrupted. "Let +there be no mistake upon that score. Your son has rendered me +services impossible for me ever to repay adequately. He has laid me +under an obligation greater than I can ever discharge. At the same +time, fortunately, I am in a position to be able to further his +interests in life.</p> + +<p>"I have proposed, Francisco, that you shall enter my house at +once. You will, of course, for some years learn the business, but +you will do so in the position which a son of mine would occupy, +and when you come of age, you will take your place as a partner +with me.</p> + +<p>"Your father will return to England. He informs me that he is +now longing to return to his own country, and has for some time +been thinking of doing so. I have proposed to him that he shall act +as my agent there. Hitherto I have not traded direct with England; +in future I shall do so largely. Your father has explained to me +somewhat of his transactions, and I see there is good profit to be +made on trade with London, by a merchant who has the advantage of +the advice and assistance of one, like your father, thoroughly +conversant in the trade. Thus, I hope that the arrangement will be +largely to our mutual advantage. As to yourself, you will probably +be reluctant to establish yourself for life in this country; but +there is no reason why, in time, when your father wishes to retire +from business, you should not establish yourself in London, in +charge of the English branch of our house."</p> + +<p>"I am most grateful to you for your offer, signor, which is +vastly beyond anything that my ambition could ever have aspired to. +I can only say that I will try my best to do justice to your +kindness to me."</p> + +<p>"I have no fear as to that, Francisco," the merchant said. "You +have shown so much thoughtfulness, in this business, that I shall +have no fear of entrusting even weighty affairs of business in your +hands; and you must remember always that I shall still consider +myself your debtor. I thoroughly agree with your father's views as +to the necessity for your leaving Venice, as soon as possible. In a +few months this matter will have blown over, the angry feelings +excited will calm down, and you will then be able to come and go in +safety; but at present you were best out of the town, and I have, +therefore, arranged with your father that you shall embark tonight +on board the Bonito, which sails tomorrow. You will have much to +say to your father now, but I hope you will find time to come +round, and say goodbye to my daughters, this evening."</p> + +<p>"Your adventures, Francis," Mr. Hammond said when the merchant +had left them, "have turned out fortunate, indeed. You have an +opening now beyond anything we could have hoped for. Signor Polani +has expressed himself most warmly. He told me that I need concern +myself no further with your future, for that would now be his +affair. The arrangement that he has made with me, will enable me to +hold my head as high as any in the City, for it will give me almost +a monopoly of the Venetian trade; and although he said that he had +long been thinking of entering into trade direct with England, +there is no doubt that it is his feeling towards you, which has +influenced him now in the matter.</p> + +<p>"My business here has more than answered my expectations, in one +respect, but has fallen short in another. I have bought cheaply, +and the business should have been a very profitable one; but my +partner in London is either not acting fairly by me, or he is +mismanaging matters altogether. This offer, then, of Signor Polani +is in every respect acceptable. I shall give up my own business and +start anew, and selling, as I shall, on commission, shall run no +risk, while the profits will be far larger than I could myself +make, for Polani will carry it on on a great scale.</p> + +<p>"As for you, you will soon learn the ways of trade, and will be +able to come home and join me, and eventually succeed me in the +business.</p> + +<p>"No fairer prospect could well open to a young man, and if you +show yourself as keen in business, as you have been energetic in +the pursuits you have adopted, assuredly a great future is open to +you, and you may look to be one of the greatest merchants in the +city of London. I know not yet what offers Polani may make you +here, but I hope that you will not settle in Venice permanently, +but will always remember that you are an Englishman, and the son of +a London citizen, and that you will never lose your love for your +native land.</p> + +<p>"And yet, do not hurry home for my sake. Your two brothers will +soon have finished their schooling, and will, of course, be +apprenticed to me as soon as I return; and if, as I hope, they turn +out steady and industrious; they will, by the time they come to +man's estate, be of great assistance to me in the business.</p> + +<p>"And now, you will be wanting to say goodbye to your friends. Be +careful this last evening, for it is just when you are thinking +most of other matters, that sudden misfortune is likely to come +upon you."</p> + +<p>Delighted with his good fortune--rather because it opened up a +life of activity, instead of the confinement to business that he +had dreaded, than for the pecuniary advantages it offered--Francis +ran downstairs and, leaping into his father's gondola, told Beppo +to take him to the Palazzo Giustiniani. On the way he told Beppo +and his son that the next day he was leaving Venice, and was going +to enter the service of Signor Polani.</p> + +<p>Giuseppi ceased rowing, and, throwing himself down at the bottom +of the gondola, began to sob violently, with the abandonment to his +emotions common to his race. Then he suddenly sat up.</p> + +<p>"If you are going, I will go too, Messer Francisco. You will +want a servant who will be faithful to you. I will ask the padrone +to let me go with you.</p> + +<p>"You will let me go, will you not, father? I cannot leave our +young master, and should pine away, were I obliged to stop here to +work a gondola; while he may be wanting my help, for Messer +Francisco is sure to get into adventures and dangers. Has he not +done it here in Venice? and is he not sure to do it at sea, where +there are Genoese and pirates, and perils of all kinds?</p> + +<p>"You will take me with you, will you not, Messer Francisco? You +will never be so hard hearted as to go away and leave me +behind?"</p> + +<p>"I shall be very glad to have you with me, Giuseppi, if your +father will give you leave to go. I am quite sure that Signor +Polani will make no objection. In the first place, he would do it +to oblige me, and in the second, I know that it is his intention to +do something to your advantage. He has spoken to me about it +several times, for you had your share of the danger when we first +rescued his daughters, and again when we were chased by that +four-oared gondola. He has been too busy with the search for his +daughters to give the matter his attention, but I know that he is +conscious of his obligation to you, and that he intends to reward +you largely. Therefore, I am sure that he will offer no objection +to your accompanying me.</p> + +<p>"What do you say, Beppo?"</p> + +<p>"I do not like to stand in the way of the lad's wishes, Messer +Francisco; but, you see, he is of an age now to be very useful to +me. If Giuseppi leaves me, I shall have to hire another hand for +the gondola, or to take a partner."</p> + +<p>"Well, we will talk it over presently," Francis said. "Here we +are at the steps of the palazzo, and here comes Matteo himself. It +is lucky I was not five minutes later, or I should have missed +him."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch7">Chapter 7</a>: On Board A Trader.</h2> + +<p>"Have you heard the news, Francisco? My cousins are rescued! I +have been out this morning and have only just heard it, and I was +on the point of starting to tell you."</p> + +<p>"Your news is old, Matteo. I knew it hours ago."</p> + +<p>"And I hear," Matteo went on, "that Polani found them in a hut +on San Nicolo. My father cannot think how he came to hear of their +hiding place. He says Polani would not say how he learned the news. +My father supposes he heard it from some member of Ruggiero's +household."</p> + +<p>Francis hesitated for a moment. He had at first been on the +point of telling Matteo of the share he had had in the recovery of +the girls; but he thought that although his friend could be trusted +not to repeat the news wilfully, he might accidentally say +something which would lead to the fact being known, and that as +Polani had strongly enjoined the necessity of keeping the secret, +and had himself declined to mention, even to the council, the +source from which he obtained his information, he would look upon +him as a babbler, and unworthy of trust, did he find that Matteo +had been let into the secret.</p> + +<p>"It does not much matter who it is Polani learned the news from. +The great point is, he has found his daughters safe from all +injury, and I hear has brought back with him the woman who betrayed +them. It is fortunate indeed that he took such prompt measures with +Ruggiero, and thus prevented his escaping from the mainland, and +making off with the girls, as of course he intended to do."</p> + +<p>"My father tells me," Matteo said, "that a state gondola has +already been dispatched to bring Ruggiero a prisoner here, and that +even his powerful connections will not save him from severe +punishment, for public indignation is so great at the attempt, that +his friends will not venture to plead on his behalf."</p> + +<p>"And now I have my bit of news to tell you, Matteo. Signor +Polani has most generously offered me a position in his house, and +I am to sail tomorrow in one of his ships for the East."</p> + +<p>"I congratulate you, Francisco, for I know, from what you have +often said, that you would like this much better than going back to +England. But it seems very sudden. You did not know anything about +it yesterday, and now you are going to start at once. Why, when can +it have been settled? Polani has been absent since daybreak, +engaged in this matter of the girls, and has been occupied ever +since with the council."</p> + +<p>"I have seen him since he returned," Francis replied; "and +though it was only absolutely settled this morning, he has had +several interviews with my father on the subject. I believe he and +my father thought that it was better to get me away as soon as +possible, as Ruggiero's friends may put down the disgrace which has +befallen him to my interference in his first attempt to carry off +the girls."</p> + +<p>"Well, I think you are a lucky fellow anyhow, Francisco, and I +hope that I may be soon doing something also. I shall speak to my +father about it, and ask him to get Polani to let me take some +voyages in his vessels, so that I may be fit to become an officer +in one of the state galleys, as soon as I am of age. Where are you +going now?"</p> + +<p>"I am going round to the School of Arms, to say goodbye to our +comrades. After that I am going to Signor Polani's to pay my +respects to the signoras. Then I shall be at home with my father +till it is time to go on board. He will have left here before I +return from my voyage, as he is going to wind up his affairs at +once and return to England."</p> + +<p>"Well, I will accompany you to the school and to my cousin's," +Matteo said. "I shall miss you terribly here, and shall certainly +do all I can to follow your example, and get afloat. You may have +all sorts of adventures, for we shall certainly be at war with +Genoa before many weeks are over, and you will have to keep a sharp +lookout for their war galleys. Polani's ships are prizes worth +taking, and you may have the chance of seeing the inside of a +Genoese prison before you return."</p> + +<p>After a visit to the School of Arms, the two friends were rowed +to Signor Polani's. The merchant himself was out, but they were at +once shown up to the room where the girls were sitting.</p> + +<p>"My dear cousins," Matteo said as he entered, "I am delighted to +see you back safe and well. All Venice is talking of your return. +You are the heroines of the day. You do not know what an excitement +there has been over your adventure."</p> + +<p>"The sooner people get to talk about something else the better, +Matteo," Maria said, "for we shall have to be prisoners all day +till something else occupies their attention. We have not the least +desire to be pointed at, whenever we go out, as the maidens who +were carried away. If the Venetians were so interested in us, they +had much better have set about discovering where we were hidden +away before."</p> + +<p>"But everyone did try, I can assure you, Maria. Every place has +been ransacked, high and low. Every gondolier has been questioned +and cross questioned as to his doings on that day. Every fishing +village has been visited. Never was such a search, I do believe. +But who could have thought of your being hidden away all the time +at San Nicolo! As for me, I have spent most of my time in a +gondola, going out and staring up at every house I passed, in hopes +of seeing a handkerchief waved from a casement. And so has +Francisco; he has been just as busy in the search as anyone, I can +assure you."</p> + +<p>"Francisco is different," Maria said, not observing the signs +Francis was making for her to be silent. "Francisco has got eyes in +his head, and a brain in his skull, which is more, it seems, than +any of the Venetians have; and had he not brought father to our +hiding place, there we should have remained until Ruggiero Mocenigo +came and carried us away."</p> + +<p>"Francisco brought your father the news!" Matteo exclaimed in +astonishment. "Why, was it he who found you out, after all?"</p> + +<p>"Did you not know that, Matteo? Of course it was Francisco! As I +told you, he has got brains; and if it had not been for him, we +should certainly never have been rescued. Giulia and I owe him +everything--don't we, Giulia?"</p> + +<p>"Forgive me for not telling you, Matteo," Francis said to his +astonished friend; "but Signor Polani, and my father, both +impressed upon me so strongly that I should keep silent as to my +share in the business, that I thought it better not even to mention +it to you at present. It was purely the result of an accident."</p> + +<p>"It was nothing of the sort," Maria said. "It was the result of +your keeping your eyes open and knowing how to put two and two +together. I did not know, Francisco, that it was a secret. We have +not seen our father since we have returned, and I suppose he +thought we should see nobody until he saw us again, and so did not +tell us that we were not to mention your name in the affair; but we +will be careful in future."</p> + +<p>"But how was it, Francisco?" Matteo asked. "Now I know so much +as this, I suppose I can be told the rest. I can understand well +enough why it was to be kept a secret, and why my cousin is anxious +to get you out of Venice at once."</p> + +<p>Francis related the manner in which he first became acquainted +with the existence of the hut on the island, and the fact of its +being frequented by Ruggiero Mocenigo; and how, on catching sight +of the gouvernante in a gondola, and seeing her make out across the +lagoons, the idea struck him that the girls were confined in the +hut.</p> + +<p>"It is all very simple, you see, Matteo," he concluded.</p> + +<p>"I will never say anything against learning to row a gondola in +future," Matteo said, "for it seems to lead to all sorts of +adventures; and unless you could have rowed well, you would never +have got back to tell the story. But it is certain that it is a +good thing you are leaving Venice for a time, for Ruggiero's +friends may find out the share you had in it from some of my +cousin's servants. You may be sure that they will do their best to +discover how he came to be informed of the hiding place, and he is +quite right to send you off at once."</p> + +<p>"What! are you going away, Francisco?" the two girls exclaimed +together.</p> + +<p>"I am sailing tomorrow in one of your father's ships, +signoras."</p> + +<p>"And you are not coming back again?" Maria exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"I hope to have the pleasure of seeing you again before very +long, signora. I am entering your father's service for good, and +shall be backwards and forwards to Venice as the ship comes and +goes. My father is returning to England, and Signor Polani has most +kindly requested me to make my home with him whenever I am in +port."</p> + +<p>"That is better," Maria said. "We should have a pretty quarrel +with papa if he had let you go away altogether, after what you have +done for us--</p> + +<p>"Shouldn't we, Giulia?"</p> + +<p>But Giulia had walked away to the window, and did not seem to +hear the question.</p> + +<p>"That will be very pleasant," Maria went on; "for you will be +back every two or three months, and I shall take good care that +papa does not send the ship off in a hurry again. It will be almost +as good as having a brother; and I look upon you almost as a +brother now, Francisco--and a very good brother, too. I don't think +that man will molest us any more. If I thought there was any chance +of it, I should ask papa to keep you for a time, because I should +feel confident that you would manage to protect us somehow."</p> + +<p>"I do not think there is the slightest chance of more trouble +from him," Francis said. "He is sure of a long term of imprisonment +for carrying you off."</p> + +<p>"That is the least they can do to him, I should think," Maria +said indignantly. "I certainly shall not feel comfortable while he +is at large."</p> + +<p>After half an hour's talk Francis and his friend took their +leave.</p> + +<p>"You certainly were born with a silver spoon in your mouth," +Matteo said as they took their seats in the gondola, "and my cousin +does well to get you out of Venice at once, for I can tell you +there are scores of young fellows who would feel jealous at your +position with my cousins."</p> + +<p>"Nonsense!" Francis said, colouring. "How can you talk so +absurdly, Matteo? I am only a boy, and it will be years before I +could think of marriage. Besides, your cousins are said to be the +richest heiresses in Venice; and it is not because I have been able +to be of some slight service to them, that I should venture to +think of either of them in that way."</p> + +<p>"We shall see," Matteo laughed. "Maria is a little too old for +you, I grant, but Giulia will do very well; and as you have already +come, as Maria says, to be looked upon by them as a brother and +protector, there is no saying as to how she may regard you in +another two or three years."</p> + +<p>"The thing is absurd, Matteo," Francis said impatiently. "Do not +talk such nonsense any more."</p> + +<p>Matteo lay back in his seat and whistled.</p> + +<p>"I will say no more about it at present, Francisco," he said, +after a pause; "but I must own that I should be well content to +stand as high in the good graces of my pretty cousins as you +do."</p> + +<p>The next morning Francis spent some time with his father talking +over future arrangements.</p> + +<p>"I have no doubt that I shall see you sometimes, Francis; for +Polani will be sure to give you an opportunity of making a trip to +England, from time to time, in one of his ships trading thither. +Unless anything unexpected happens, your future appears assured. +Polani tells me he shall always regard you in the light of a son; +and I have no fear of your doing anything to cause him to forfeit +his good opinion of you. Do not be over adventurous, for even in a +merchant ship there are many perils to be met with. Pirates swarm +in the Mediterranean, in spite of the efforts of Venice to suppress +them; and when war is going on, both Venice and Genoa send out +numbers of ships whose doings savour strongly of piracy. Remember +that the first duty of the captain of a merchant ship is to save +his vessel and cargo, and that he should not think of fighting +unless he sees no other method of escape open to him.</p> + +<p>"It is possible that, after a time, I may send one of your +brothers out here, but that will depend upon what I find of their +disposition when I get home; for it will be worse than useless to +send a lad of a headstrong disposition out to the care of one but a +few years older than himself. But this we can talk about when you +come over to England, and we see what position you are occupying +here.</p> + +<p>"I fear that Venice is about to enter upon a period of great +difficulty and danger. There can be little doubt that Genoa, Padua, +and Hungary are leagued against her; and powerful as she is, and +great as are her resources, they will be taxed to the utmost to +carry her through the dangers that threaten her. However, I have +faith in her future, and believe that she will weather the storm, +as she has done many that have preceded it.</p> + +<p>"Venice has the rare virtue of endurance--the greatest dangers, +the most disastrous defeats, fail to shake her courage, and only +arouse her to greater efforts. In this respect she is in the +greatest contrast to her rival, Genoa, who always loses heart the +moment the tide turns against her. No doubt this is due, in no +slight extent, to her oligarchic form of government. The people see +the nobles, who rule them, calm and self possessed, however great +the danger, and remain confident and tranquil; while in Genoa each +misfortune is the signal for a struggle between contending +factions. The occasion is seized to throw blame and contumely upon +those in power, and the people give way to alternate outbursts of +rage and depression.</p> + +<p>"I do not say there are no faults in the government of Venice, +but taking her altogether there is no government in Europe to +compare with it. During the last three hundred years, the history +of every other city in Italy, I may say of every other nation in +Europe, is one long record of intestine struggle and bloodshed, +while in Venice there has not been a single popular tumult worthy +of the name. It is to the strength, the firmness, and the +moderation of her government that Venice owes her advancement, the +respect in which she is held among nations, as much as to the +commercial industry of her people.</p> + +<p>"She alone among nations could for years have withstood the +interdict of the pope, or the misfortunes that have sometimes +befallen her. She alone has never felt the foot of the invader, or +bent her neck beneath a foreign yoke to preserve her existence. +Here, save only in matters of government, all opinions are free, +strangers of all nationalities are welcome. It is a grand city and +a grand people, Francis, and though I shall be glad to return to +England I cannot but feel regret at leaving it.</p> + +<p>"And now, my boy, it is time to be going off to your ship. +Polani said she would sail at ten o'clock. It is now nine, and it +will take you half an hour to get there. I am glad to hear that +Giuseppi is going with you. The lad is faithful and attached to +you, and may be of service. Your trunk has already been sent on +board, so let us be going."</p> + +<p>On arriving at the ship, which was lying in the port of +Malamocco, they found that she was just ready for sailing. The last +bales of goods were being hoisted on board, and the sailors were +preparing to loosen the sails.</p> + +<p>The Bonito was a large vessel, built for stowage rather than +speed. She carried two masts with large square sails, and before +the wind would probably proceed at a fair rate; but the art of +sailing close hauled was then unknown, and in the event of the wind +being unfavourable she would be forced either to anchor or to +depend upon her oars, of which she rowed fifteen on either side. As +they mounted on to the deck they were greeted by Polani +himself.</p> + +<p>"I have come off to see the last of your son, Messer Hammond, +and to make sure that my orders for his comfort have been carried +out.</p> + +<p>"Captain Corpadio, this is the young gentleman of whom I have +spoken to you, and who is to be treated in all respects as if he +were my son. You will instruct him in all matters connected with +the navigation of the ship, as well as in the mercantile portion of +the business, the best methods of buying and selling, the prices of +goods, and the methods of payment.</p> + +<p>"This is your cabin, Francisco."</p> + +<p>He opened the door of a roomy cabin in the poop of the ship. It +was fitted up with every luxury.</p> + +<p>"Thank you very much indeed, Signor Polani," Francis said. "The +only fault is that it is too comfortable. I would as lief have +roughed it as other aspirants have to do."</p> + +<p>"There was no occasion, Francisco. When there is rough work to +be done, you will, I have no doubt, do it; but as you are going to +be a trader, and not a sailor, there is no occasion that you should +do so more than is necessary. You will learn to command a ship just +as well as if you began by dipping your hands in tar. And it is +well that you should learn to do this, for unless a man can sail a +vessel himself, he is not well qualified to judge of the merits of +men he appoints to be captains; but you must remember that you are +going as a representative of my house, and must, therefore, travel +in accordance with that condition.</p> + +<p>"You will be sorry to hear that bad news has just been received +from the mainland. The state galley sent to fetch Ruggiero Mocenigo +has arrived with the news that, on the previous night, a strong +party of men who are believed to have come from Padua, fell upon +the guard and carried off Ruggiero. My sailors came up and fought +stoutly, but they were overpowered, and several of them were +killed; so Ruggiero is again at large.</p> + +<p>"This is a great disappointment to me. Though the villain is not +likely to show his face in the Venetian territory again, I shall be +anxious until Maria is safely married, and shall lose no time in +choosing a husband for her. Unless I am mistaken, her liking is +turned in the direction of Rufino, brother of your friend Matteo +Giustiniani, and as I like none better among the suitors for her +hand, methinks that by the time you return you will find that they +are betrothed.</p> + +<p>"And now I hear the sailors are heaving the anchor, and +therefore, Messer Hammond, it is time we took to our boats."</p> + +<p>There was a parting embrace between Francis and his father. Then +the merchants descended into their gondolas, and lay waiting +alongside until the anchor was up, the great sails shaken out, and +the Bonito began to move slowly through the water towards the +entrance of the port. Then, with a final wave of the hand, the +gondolas rowed off and Francis turned to look at his surroundings. +The first object that met his eye was Giuseppi, who was standing +near him waving his cap to his father.</p> + +<p>"Well, Giuseppi, what do you think of this?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know what to think yet, Messer Francisco. It all seems +so big and solid one does not feel as if one was on the water. It's +more like living in a house. It does not seem as if anything could +move her."</p> + +<p>"You will find the waves can move her about when we get fairly +to sea, Giuseppi, and the time will come when you will think our +fast gondola was a steady craft in comparison. How long have you +been on board?"</p> + +<p>"I came off three hours ago, signor, with the boat that brought +the furniture for your cabin. I have been putting that to rights +since. A supply of the best wine has been sent off, and extra +stores of all sorts, so you need not be afraid of being starved on +the voyage."</p> + +<p>"I wish he hadn't sent so much," Francis said. "It makes one +feel like a milksop. Whose cabin is it I have got?"</p> + +<p>"I believe that it is the cabin usually used by the supercargo, +who is in charge of the goods and does the trading, but the men say +the captain of this ship has been a great many years in Polani's +employment, and often sails without a supercargo, being able to +manage the trading perfectly well by himself. But the usual cabin +is only half the size of yours, and two have been thrown into one +to make it light and airy."</p> + +<p>"And where do you sleep, Giuseppi?"</p> + +<p>"I am going to sleep in the passage outside your door, Messer +Francisco."</p> + +<p>"Oh, but I sha'n't like that!" Francis said. "You ought to have +a better place than that."</p> + +<p>Giuseppi laughed.</p> + +<p>"Why, Messer Francisco, considering that half my time I slept in +the gondola, and the other half on some straw in our kitchen, I +shall do capitally. Of course I could sleep in the fo'castle with +the crew if I liked, but I should find it hot and stifling there. I +chose the place myself, and asked the captain if I could sleep +there, and he has given me leave."</p> + +<p>In an hour the Bonito had passed through the Malamocco Channel, +and was out on the broad sea. The wind was very light, and but just +sufficient to keep the great sails bellied out. The sailors were +all at work, coiling down ropes, washing the decks, and making +everything clean and tidy.</p> + +<p>"This is a good start, Messer Hammond," the captain said, coming +up to him. "If this wind holds, we shall be able to make our course +round the southern point of Greece, and then on to Candia, which is +our first port. I always like a light breeze when I first go out of +port, it gives time for everyone to get at home and have things +shipshape before we begin to get lively."</p> + +<p>"She does not look as if she would ever get lively," Francis +said, looking at the heavy vessel.</p> + +<p>"She is lively enough in a storm, I can tell you," the captain +said, laughing. "When she once begins to roll she does it in +earnest, but she is a fine sea boat, and I have no fear of gales. I +wish I could say as much of pirates. However, she has always been +fortunate, and as we carry a stout crew she could give a good +account of herself against any of the small piratical vessels that +swarm among the islands, although, of course, if she fell in with +two or three of them together it would be awkward."</p> + +<p>"How many men do you carry altogether, captain?"</p> + +<p>"Just seventy. You see she rows thirty oars, and in case of need +we put two men to each oar, and though she doesn't look fast she +can get along at a fine rate when the oars are double banked. We +have shown them our heels many a time. Our orders are strict. We +are never to fight if we can get away by running."</p> + +<p>"But I suppose you have to fight sometimes?" Francis asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes, I have been in some tough fights several times, though not +in the Bonito, which was only built last year. Once in the Lion we +were attacked by three pirates. We were at anchor in a bay, and the +wind was blowing on the shore, when they suddenly came round the +headland, so there was no chance of running, and we had to fight it +out. We fought for five hours before they sheered off, pretty well +crippled, and one of them in flames, for we carried Greek fire.</p> + +<p>"Three or four times they nearly got a footing on deck, but we +managed to beat them off somehow. We lost a third of our crew. I +don't think there was a man escaped without a wound. I was laid up +for three months, after I got home, with a slash on the shoulder, +which pretty nigh took off my left arm. However, we saved the ship +and the cargo, which was a valuable one, and Messer Polani saw that +no one was the worse for his share in the business. There's no more +liberal-hearted man in the trade than he is, and whatever may be +the scarcity of hands in the port, there is never any difficulty in +getting a good crew together for his vessels.</p> + +<p>"Of course there are the roughs with the smooths. Some years ago +I was in prison for six months, with all my crew, in Azoff. It was +the work of those rascally Genoese, who are always doing us a bad +turn when they have the chance, even when we are at peace with +them. They set the mind of the native khan--that is the prince of +the country--against us by some lying stories that we had been +engaged in smuggling goods in at another port. And suddenly, in the +middle of the night, in marched his soldiers on board my ship, and +two other Venetian craft lying in the harbour, and took possession +of them, and shut us all up in prison. There we were till Messer +Polani got news, and sent out another ship to pay the fine +demanded. That was no joke, I can tell you, for the prison was so +hot and crowded, and the food so bad, that we got fever, and pretty +near half of us died before our ransom came. Then at Constantinople +the Genoese stirred the people up against us once or twice, and all +the sailors ashore had to fight for their lives. Those Genoese are +always doing us mischief."</p> + +<p>"But I suppose you do them mischief sometimes, captain. I +imagine it isn't all one side."</p> + +<p>"Of course, we pay them out when we get a chance," the captain +replied. "It isn't likely we are going to stand being always put +upon, and not take our chance when it comes. We only want fair +trade and no favour, while those rascals want it all to themselves. +They know they have no chance with us when it comes to fair +trading."</p> + +<p>"You know, captain, that the Genoese say just the same things +about the Venetians, that the Venetians do about them. So I expect +that there are faults on both sides."</p> + +<p>The captain laughed.</p> + +<p>"I suppose each want to have matters their own way, Messer +Hammond, but I don't consider the Genoese have any right to come +interfering with us, to the eastward of Italy. They have got France +and Spain to trade with, and all the western parts of Italy. Why +don't they keep there? Besides, I look upon them as landsmen. Why, +we can always lick them at sea in a fair fight."</p> + +<p>"Generally, captain. I admit you generally thrash them. Still, +you know they have sometimes got the better of you, even when the +force was equal."</p> + +<p>The captain grunted. He could not deny the fact.</p> + +<p>"Sometimes our captains don't do their duty," he said. "They put +a lot of young patricians in command of the galleys, men that don't +know one end of a ship from the other, and then, of course, we get +the worst of it. But I maintain that, properly fought, a Venetian +ship is always more than a match for a Genoese."</p> + +<p>"I think she generally is, captain, and I hope it will always +prove so in the future. You see, though I am English, I have lived +long enough in Venice to feel like a Venetian."</p> + +<p>"I have never been to England," the captain said, "though a good +many Venetian ships go there every year. They tell me it's an +island, like Venice, only a deal bigger than any we have got in the +Mediterranean. Those who have been there say the sea is mighty +stormy, and that, sailing up from Spain, you get tremendous +tempests sometimes, with the waves ever so much bigger than we have +here, and longer and more regular, but not so trying to the ships +as the short sharp gales of these seas."</p> + +<p>"I believe that is so, captain, though I don't know anything +about it myself. It is some years since I came out, and our voyage +was a very calm one."</p> + +<p>Three days of quiet sailing, and the Bonito rounded the +headlands of the Morea, and shaped her course to Candia. The voyage +was a very pleasant one to Francis. Each day the captain brought +out the list of cargo, and instructed him in the prices of each +description of goods, told him of the various descriptions of +merchandise which they would be likely to purchase at the different +ports at which they were to touch, and the prices which they would +probably have to pay for them. A certain time, too, was devoted +each day to the examination of the charts of the various ports and +islands, the captain pointing out the marks which were to be +observed on entering and leaving the harbours, the best places for +anchorage, and the points where shelter could be obtained should +high winds come on.</p> + +<p>After losing sight of the Morea the weather changed, clouds +banked up rapidly in the southwest, and the captain ordered the +great sails to be furled.</p> + +<p>"We are going to have a serious gale," he said to Francis, +"which is unusual at this period of the year. I have thought, for +the last two days, we were going to have a change, but I hoped to +have reached Candia before the gale burst upon us. I fear that this +will drive us off our course."</p> + +<p>By evening it was blowing hard, and the sea got up rapidly. The +ship speedily justified the remarks of the captain on her power of +rolling, and the oars, at which the men had been labouring since +the sails were furled, were laid in.</p> + +<p>"It is impossible to keep our course," the captain said, "and we +must run up among the islands, and anchor under the lee of one of +them. I should recommend you to get into your bed as soon as +possible. You have not learned to keep your legs in a storm. I see +that lad of yours is very ill already, but as you show no signs of +suffering thus far, you will probably escape."</p> + +<p>It was some time, however, before Francis went below. The scene +was novel to him, and he was astonished at the sight of the waves, +and at the manner in which they tossed the great ship about, as if +she were an eggshell. But when it became quite dark, and he could +see nothing but the white crests of the waves and the foam that +flew high in the air every time the bluff bows of the ship plunged +down into a hollow, he took the captain's advice and retired to his +cabin.</p> + +<p>He was on deck again early. A gray mist overhung the water. The +sea was of a leaden colour, crested with white heads. The waves +were far higher than they had been on the previous evening, and as +they came racing along behind the Bonito each crest seemed as if it +would rise over her stern and overwhelm her. But this apprehension +was soon dispelled, as he saw how lightly the vessel rose each +time. Although showing but a very small breadth of sail, she was +running along at a great rate, leaving a white streak of foam +behind her. The captain was standing near the helm, and Francis +made his way to him.</p> + +<p>"Well, captain, and how are you getting on, and where are we?" +he asked, cheerfully.</p> + +<p>"We are getting on well enough, Messer Francisco, as you can see +for yourself. The Bonito is as good a sea boat as ever floated, and +would not care for the wind were it twice as strong as it is. It is +not the storm I am thinking about, but the islands. If we were down +in the Mediterranean I could turn into my cot and sleep soundly; +but here it is another matter. We are somewhere up among the +islands, but where, no man can say. The wind has shifted a bit two +or three times during the night, and, as we are obliged to run +straight before it, there is no calculating to within a few miles +where we are. I have tried to edge out to the westward as much as I +could, but with this wind blowing and the height of the ship out of +water, we sag away to leeward so fast that nothing is gained by +it.</p> + +<p>"According to my calculation, we cannot be very far from the +west coast of Mitylene. If the clouds would but lift, and give us a +look round for two minutes, we should know all about it, as I know +the outline of every island in the Aegean; and as over on this side +you are always in sight of two or three of them, I should know all +about it if I could get a view of the land. Now, for aught we know, +we may be running straight down upon some rocky coast."</p> + +<p>The idea was not a pleasant one, and Francis strained his eyes, +gazing through the mist.</p> + +<p>"What should we do if we saw land, captain?" he asked +presently.</p> + +<p>"Get out the oars, row her head round, and try to work either to +the right or left, whichever point of land seemed easiest to +weather. Of course, if it was the mainland we were being driven on +there would be no use, and we should try and row into the teeth of +the gale, so as to keep her off land as long as possible, in the +hope of the wind dropping. When we got into shallow water we should +drop our anchors, and still keep on rowing to lessen the strain +upon them. If they gave, there would be an end to the Bonito. But +if, as I think, we are driving towards Mitylene, there is a safe +harbour on this side of the island, and I shall certainly run into +it. It is well sheltered and landlocked."</p> + +<p>Two more hours passed, and then there was a startling +transformation. The clouds broke suddenly and cleared off, as if by +magic, and the sun streamed brightly out. The wind was blowing as +strong as ever, but the change in the hue of sky and sea would at +once have raised the spirits of the tired crew, had not a long line +of land been seen stretching ahead of them at a distance of four or +five miles.</p> + +<p>"Just as I thought," the captain exclaimed as he saw it. "That +is Mitylene, sure enough, and the entrance to the harbour I spoke +of lies away there on that beam."</p> + +<p>The oars were at once got out, the sail braced up a little, and +the Bonito made for the point indicated by the captain, who himself +took the helm.</p> + +<p>Another half hour and they were close to land. Francis could see +no sign of a port, but in a few minutes the Bonito rounded the end +of a low island, and a passage opened before her. She passed +through this and found herself in still water, in a harbour large +enough to hold the fleet of Venice. The anchor was speedily let +drop.</p> + +<p>"It seems almost bewildering," Francis said, "the hush and quiet +here after the turmoil of the storm outside. To whom does Mitylene +belong?"</p> + +<p>"The Genoese have a trading station and a castle at the other +side of the island, but it belongs to Constantinople. The other +side of the island is rich and fertile, but this, as you see, is +mountainous and barren. The people have not a very good reputation, +and if we had been wrecked we should have been plundered, if not +murdered.</p> + +<p>"You see those two vessels lying close to the shore, near the +village? They are pirates when they get a chance, you may be quite +sure. In fact, these islands swarm with them. Venice does all she +can to keep them down, but the Genoese, and the Hungarians, and the +rest of them, keep her so busy that she has no time to take the +matter properly in hand, and make a clean sweep of them."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch8">Chapter 8</a>: An Attack By Pirates.</h2> + +<p>A boat was lowered, and the captain went ashore with a strong +crew, all armed to the teeth. Francis accompanied him. The natives +were sullen in their manner, but expressed a willingness to trade, +and to exchange hides and wine for cloth.</p> + +<p>"We may as well do a little barter," the captain said, as they +rowed back towards the ship. "The port is not often visited, and +the road across the island is hilly and rough, so they ought to be +willing to sell their goods cheaply."</p> + +<p>"They did not seem pleased to see us, nevertheless," Francis +said.</p> + +<p>"No; you see the Genoese have got a footing in the island, and +of course they represent us to the natives as being robbers, who +would take their island if we got the chance. All round these +coasts and islands the people are partisans either of Venice or +Genoa. They care very little for Constantinople, although they form +part of the empire. Constantinople taxes them heavily, and is too +weak to afford them protection. Of course they are Greeks, but the +Greeks of the islands have very little in common, beyond their +language, with the Greeks of Constantinople. They see, too, that +the Turks are increasing in power, and they know that, if they are +to be saved from falling into the hands of the Moslem, it is Venice +or Genoa who will protect them, and not Constantinople, who will +have enough to do to defend herself.</p> + +<p>"As to themselves, they would naturally prefer Venice, because +Venice is a far better mistress than Genoa; but of course, when the +Genoese get a footing, they spread lies as to our tyranny and +greed, and so it comes that the people of the islands are divided +in their wishes, and that while we are gladly received in some of +them, we are regarded with hate and suspicion in others."</p> + +<p>Trade at once began, and continued until evening.</p> + +<p>"How long do you expect to stay here, captain?" Francis +asked.</p> + +<p>"That must depend upon the wind. It may go down tomorrow, it may +continue to blow strong for days, and it is no use our attempting +to work down to Candia until it changes its direction. I should +hope, however, that in a day or two we may be off. We are doing +little more than wasting our time here."</p> + +<p>A strong watch was placed on deck at nightfall.</p> + +<p>"Why, surely, captain, there is no fear of an attack! War has +not yet been proclaimed with Genoa, although there is little doubt +it will be so in a few weeks, or perhaps a few days."</p> + +<p>"There is never a real peace between Venice and Genoa in these +seas," the captain said, "and as war is now imminent, one cannot be +too watchful. State galleys would not be attacked, but merchant +vessels are different. Who is to inquire about a merchant ship! +Why, if we were attacked and plundered here, who would be any the +wiser? We should either have our throats cut, or be sent to rot in +the dungeons of Genoa. And not till there was an exchange of +prisoners, perhaps years hence, would any in Venice know what had +befallen us. When weeks passed, and no news came to Venice of our +having reached Candia, it would be supposed that we had been lost +in the storm.</p> + +<p>"Signor Polani would run his pen through the name of the Bonito, +and put her down as a total loss, and there would be an end of it, +till those of us who were alive, when the prison doors were opened, +made their way back to Venice. No, no, Messer Francisco. In these +eastern waters one must always act as if the republic were at war. +Why, did not Antonio Doria, in a time of profound peace, attack and +seize eight Venetian ships laden with goods, killing two of the +merchants on board, and putting the ships at a ransom? As to single +vessels missing, and never heard of, their number is +innumerable.</p> + +<p>"It is all put down to pirates; but trust me, the Genoese are +often at the bottom of it. They are robbers, the Genoese. In fair +trade we can always beat them, and they know it, and so they are +always seeking a pretext for a quarrel with us."</p> + +<p>Francis smiled quietly at the bigoted hatred which the captain +bore the Genoese, but thought it useless to argue with him. The +next morning he came up on deck soon after daybreak.</p> + +<p>"I see one of those vessels has taken her departure," he said, +as he glanced towards the spot where they had been lying.</p> + +<p>"So she has," the captain said. "I had not noticed that before. +I wonder what that fellow has gone for? No good, you may be sure. +Why, it is blowing hard outside still, as you may see by the rate +those light clouds travel. He would never have put to sea without +having a motive, and he must have had a strong crew on board, to +row out in the teeth of the gale far enough to make off the land. +That fellow is up to mischief of some sort."</p> + +<p>A few minutes later the captain ordered a boat to be lowered, +and rowed out to the rocky islet at the mouth of the harbour, and +landing, climbed up the rocks and looked out to sea. In half an +hour he returned to the ship.</p> + +<p>"It is no use," he said to Francis. "The wind is blowing +straight into the passage, and we could not row the Bonito out +against it. It was different with that craft that went out +yesterday evening, for I have no doubt she started as soon as it +became dark. She was low in the water, and would not hold the wind; +besides, no doubt they lowered the masts, and with a strong crew +might well have swept her out. But with the Bonito, with her high +sides and heavy tonnage, it could not be done."</p> + +<p>"What do you think she went out for, captain?"</p> + +<p>"It is likely enough that she may have gone to one of the other +islands, and may return with a dozen other craft, pirates like +herself. The news that a Venetian merchant ship, without consorts, +is weather bound here, would bring them upon us like bees.</p> + +<p>"It is a dangerous thing, this sailing alone. I have talked it +over several times with the master. Other merchants generally send +their ships in companies of eight or ten, and they are then strong +enough to beat off any attack of pirates. Messer Polani always +sends his vessels out singly. What he says is this: 'A single ship +always travels faster than a convoy, because these must go at the +rate of the slowest among them. Then the captain is free to go +where he will, without consulting others, according as he gets news +where trade is to be done, and when he gets there he can drive his +own bargains without the competition of other ships.</p> + +<p>"So you see there are advantages both ways. The padrone's ships +run greater risks, but, if they get through them safely, they bring +home much larger profits than do those of others. As a rule, I +prefer sailing singly; but just at the present time I should be +well pleased to see half a dozen consorts lying alongside."</p> + +<p>Three times during the day the captain paid a visit to the rocky +island. On his return for the last time before nightfall he said to +Francis:</p> + +<p>"The wind is certainly falling. I hope that tomorrow morning we +shall be able to get out of this trap. I am convinced that there is +danger."</p> + +<p>"You see nothing else, do you, captain, beyond the departure of +that craft, to make you think that there is danger?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, I have seen two things," the captain said. "In the first +place, the demeanour of the people has changed. They do not seem +more unfriendly than they were before, but as I moved about the +place today, it seemed to me that there was a suppressed +excitement--people gathered together and talked earnestly, and +separated if any of our crew happened to go near them; even laughed +when they thought that none of us were looking, and looked serious +and sullen if we turned round. I am convinced that they are +expecting something to happen.</p> + +<p>"I have another reason for suspecting it. I have kept a sharp +watch on that high hill behind the village; they tell me there is +nothing at the top except some curious stones, that look as if they +had once been trees, so there is nothing they can want to go up +for. Several times today I have made out the figures of men +climbing that hill. When they got to the top they stood for some +time as if they were looking out over the sea, and then came down +again without doing anything. Now, men do not climb such a hill as +that merely for exercise. They went up because they expected to see +something, and that something could only be a fleet of pirate boats +from the other islands. I would give a year's pay if we could get +out of this place this evening, but it cannot be done, and we must +wait till tomorrow morning. I will try then, even though I risk +being driven on the rocks. However, if they do come tonight they +will not catch us asleep."</p> + +<p>Orders were issued that the whole crew were to remain in +readiness for attack, and that those whose watch was below were to +sleep with their arms beside them. The lower ports were all closed, +a strong watch was kept on deck, and it was certain that, whatever +happened, the Bonito would not be taken by surprise.</p> + +<p>Being assured by the captain that it was not probable that any +attack would be made before morning, as the pirates, not knowing +their exact position, would wait until the first gleam of daylight +enabled them to make out where she was lying, and to advance in +order against her, Francis lay down on his couch, leaving orders +that, if asleep, he was to be called two hours before daybreak. He +slept but little, however, getting up frequently and going out to +ascertain if any sounds indicated the presence of an enemy.</p> + +<p>Upon one of these occasions he found that the person leaning +next to him against the bulwark, and gazing towards the mouth of +the harbour, was Giuseppi.</p> + +<p>"Have you been here long, Giuseppi?"</p> + +<p>"Since you were out last, Messer Francisco. I thought I would +wait a bit, and listen."</p> + +<p>"And have you heard anything?"</p> + +<p>"I have heard sounds several times."</p> + +<p>"What sort of sounds, Giuseppi?"</p> + +<p>"Such a sound as is made when the sails and yards are lowered. I +have heard it over and over again when out at night on the lagoons +near the port. There is no mistake in the creaking of the blocks as +the halyards run through them. I am sure, that since I have been +here several vessels have brought up inside the mouth of the +harbour. Some of the sailors have heard the same noises, so there +cannot be any mistake about it. If the captain likes, I will take a +small boat and row out, and find out all about them."</p> + +<p>"I will ask the captain, Giuseppi."</p> + +<p>The captain, however, said that there would be no use in this +being done.</p> + +<p>"Whether there are few or whether there are many of them, we +must wait till morning before we go out. There will be no working +out that channel in the dark, even if we were unopposed."</p> + +<p>"But they must have managed to come in," Francis said.</p> + +<p>"No doubt some of their comrades in the other barque, or people +from the village, show a light out there to guide them in. Besides, +the wind is favourable to them and against us. No, young sir, there +is nothing to do but to wait. In the morning, if there are but few +of them, we will try to break through and gain the sea. If there +are many we will fight here, as then all hands will be available +for the combat, while if we were rowing, half of them would be +occupied with the oars. If your lad were to go as he proposes he +might fall into the hands of the enemy, and as the information he +could gather would be in any case of no use, it is best he should +remain where he is."</p> + +<p>The hours seemed long until the first tinge of daylight appeared +in the sky. All hands were on deck now, for the news that vessels +had been arriving in the port had convinced all that danger really +threatened them. It was not until half an hour later that they were +able to make out some dark objects, lying in under the shadow of +the islet across the mouth of the harbour.</p> + +<p>"There they are, Messer Francisco," the captain said. "Ten of +them, as far as I can make out; but there may be more, for likely +enough some of them are lying side by side. There may, too, be some +round a corner, where we cannot see them. Another half hour we +shall know all about it."</p> + +<p>Francis was half surprised that the captain did not order the +oars to be put out and lashed in that position, for it was a +recognized plan for preventing a ship from being boarded by an +enemy, who could thus only approach her at the lofty poop and +forecastle.</p> + +<p>"Are you not going to get out the oars to keep them off?"</p> + +<p>"No, Messer Francisco. In the first place, our sides are so high +out of water that the pirates will have a difficulty in boarding us +in any case. In the second place, if we get the oars out and they +row full at them, sooner or later they will break them off; and it +is all important that we should be able to row. I have been +thinking the matter over, and my idea is, as soon as they advance, +to get three or four oars at work on either side, so as to move her +gradually through the water towards the harbour mouth. The rowers +will be charged to let their oars swing alongside whenever any of +their craft dash at them. We shall want every oar, as well as our +sails, to get away when we are once outside. I do not think we have +much chance of finally beating them off if we stop and fight here. +But if we can do so for a time, and can manage to creep out of the +harbour, all may be well."</p> + +<p>When daylight fairly broke they were able to make out their +enemy. The vessels were of all sizes, from long, low craft, +carrying great sails and long banks of oars, down to boats of a few +tons burden. All seemed crowded with men.</p> + +<p>"None of them are anything like as high out of the water as the +Bonito," the captain said, "and they will find it very difficult to +climb up our sides. Still the odds against us are serious, but we +shall give them a warmer reception than they expect. They will +hardly calculate either on our being so strong handed, or so well +prepared for them."</p> + +<p>Everything was indeed ready for the combat. Two or three barrels +of the compound known as Greek fire had been brought up from the +hold, and the cooks had heated cauldrons full of pitch. Thirty men +with bows and arrows were on the poop, and the rest, with spears, +axes, and swords, stood along the bulwarks.</p> + +<p>"We may as well get as near the entrance as we can before the +fight begins," the captain said. "Get up the anchor, and as soon as +it is aboard, get out four oars on each side."</p> + +<p>The anchor had already been hove short, and was soon in its +place. Then the oars dipped into the water, and slowly the Bonito +moved towards the mouth of the harbour. Scarcely had the oars +touched the water, than a bustle was perceived on board the +piratical ships. Oars were put out, and in two or three minutes the +pirates were under way, advancing at a rapid pace towards the +Bonito.</p> + +<p>The crew made no reply to the shouts and yells of the pirates, +but, in accordance with the orders of the captain, remained in a +stooping position, so that the figure of the captain, as he hauled +up the flag with the lion of Venice to the masthead, was alone +visible to the pirates. As these approached volleys of arrows were +shot at the Bonito, but not a shot replied until they were within +fifty yards of the ship.</p> + +<p>Then the captain gave the word. The archers sprang to their +feet, and from their eminence poured their arrows thick and fast on +to the crowded decks of the pirates. The captain gave the word to +the rowers, and they relinquished their oars, which swung in by the +side of the vessel.</p> + +<p>A moment later two of the largest craft of the pirates dashed +alongside. The instant they did so they were saluted with showers +of boiling pitch, while pots full of Greek fire were thrown down +upon them. Those who tried to climb up the side of the Bonito were +speared with lances or cut down with battleaxes.</p> + +<p>The combat was of short duration. Many of those on whom the +boiling pitch had fallen jumped overboard in their agony, while +others did the same to escape the Greek fire, which they in vain +endeavoured to extinguish. The fire quickly spread to the woodwork, +and in five minutes after the beginning of the fight, the two craft +dropped astern from the Bonito, with the flames already rising +fiercely from them.</p> + +<p>In the meantime the other vessels had not been idle, and a storm +of missiles was poured upon the Bonito. The fate which befell their +comrades, however, showed them how formidable was the vessel they +had regarded as an easy prey, and when the first assailants of the +Bonito dropped astern, none of the others cared to take their +places.</p> + +<p>"Man the oars again!" the captain ordered, and the Bonito again +moved forward, her crew stooping behind the bulwarks, while the +archers only rose from time to time to discharge their shafts.</p> + +<p>"The thing I am most afraid of," the captain said to Francis, +who was standing beside him, "is, that they will ram us with their +prows. The Bonito is strongly built, but the chances are that they +would knock a hole in her."</p> + +<p>"I should think, captain, that if we were to get up some of +those bales of cloth, and fasten ropes to them, we might lower them +over the side and so break the shock."</p> + +<p>"It is worth trying, anyhow," the captain said.</p> + +<p>And a score of the sailors were at once sent down to fetch up +the bales. Ropes were fastened round these, and they were laid +along by the bulwarks in readiness for being lowered instantly. Ten +bales were placed on each side, and three men told off to each +bale.</p> + +<p>By this time they were halfway to the mouth of the harbour, and +the preparations were completed just in time, for the small boats +suddenly drew aside, and two of the largest of the pirates' craft, +each rowed by twenty-four oars, dashed at her, one on each side. +The captain shouted the order, and the men all sprang to their +feet. It was seen at once that the vessels would both strike about +midships. Three bales on either side were raised to the bulwarks, +and lowered down with the ropes until close to the water's edge and +closely touching each other. Francis sprang on to the bulwark and +superintended the operations on one side, while the captain did the +same on the other.</p> + +<p>"A few feet more astern, lads. That is right. Now, keep the +bales touching. You are just in the line."</p> + +<p>An instant later the Bonito reeled from the shock of two +tremendous blows. The bows of the pirates were stove in, but the +thick bales enabled the Bonito to withstand the shock, although her +sides creaked, the seams started, and the water flowed in freely. +But of this the crew thought little. They were occupied in hurling +darts, arrows, and combustibles into the pirates as these backed +off, in an already sinking condition.</p> + +<p>"Now I think we can go," the captain said, and ordered the whole +of the oars to be manned.</p> + +<p>They were speedily got out, and the Bonito made her way out +through the mouth of the harbour. The pirates, in their lighter +boats, rowed round and round her, shooting clouds of arrows, but +not venturing to come to close quarters, after the fate which had +befallen the four largest vessels of their fleet.</p> + +<p>As soon as they were clear of the islet the sails were hoisted. +The wind had fallen much during the night, and had worked round to +the east, and under sails and oars the Bonito left the island, none +of the pirates venturing to follow in pursuit. The oars were soon +laid in, and the men, with mallets and chisels, set to work to +caulk the seams through which the water was making its way. The +casualties were now inquired into, and it was found that six men +had been shot dead, and that nine-and-twenty had received wounds +more or less severe from the arrows of the pirates.</p> + +<p>Francis had been twice wounded while superintending the placing +of the bales. One arrow had gone through his right leg, another had +struck him in the side and glanced off a rib.</p> + +<p>"This won't do, Messer Francisco," the captain said as he +assisted Giuseppi to bandage the wounds. "Signor Polani placed you +on board to learn something of seamanship and commerce, not to make +yourself a target for the arrows of pirates. However, we have to +thank you for the saving of the Bonito, for assuredly she would +have been stove in, had not the happy thought of hanging those +bales overboard struck you. It would be of no use against war +galleys, whose beaks are often below the waterline, but against +craft like these pirates it acts splendidly, and there is no doubt +that you saved the ship from destruction, and us from death, for +after the burning of the two first vessels that attacked us, you +may be sure they would have shown but little mercy. I can't think +how you came to think of it."</p> + +<p>"Why, I have read in books, captain, of defenders of walls +hanging over trusses of straw, to break the blows of battering rams +and machines of the besiegers. Directly you said they were going to +ram us it struck me we might do the same, and then I thought that +bales of cloth, similar to those you got up on deck to trade with +the islanders would be just the thing."</p> + +<p>"It was a close shave," the captain said. "I was leaning over, +and saw the whole side of the ship bend beneath the blow, and +expected to hear the ribs crack beneath me. Fortunately the Bonito +was stronger built than her assailants, and their bows crumpled in +before her side gave; but my heart was in my mouth for a time, I +can tell you."</p> + +<p>"So was mine, captain. I hardly felt these two arrows strike me. +They must have been shot from one of the other boats. Then I could +not help laughing to see the way in which the men at the oars +tumbled backwards at the moment when their vessel struck us. It was +as if an invisible giant had swept them all off their seats +together."</p> + +<p>The wind continued favourable until they arrived at Candia, +where the captain reported, to the commander of a Venetian war +galley lying in the port, the attack that had been made upon him; +and the galley at once started for the scene of the action, to +destroy any pirates she might find there or among the neighbouring +islands, or in the various inlets and bays of the mainland.</p> + +<p>Having delivered their letters and landed a portion of their +cargo for the use of Polani's agents in the islands, the Bonito +proceeded to Cyprus. For some weeks she cruised along the coast of +Syria, trading in the various Turkish ports, for Venice, although +she had shared in some of the crusades, was now, as she had often +been before, on friendly terms with the Turks. Her interests all +lay in that direction. She carried on a large trade with them; and +in the days when she lay under the interdict of the pope, and all +Europe stood aloof from her, she drew her stores of provisions from +the Moslem ports, and was thus enabled successfully to resist the +pressure which she suffered from the interdict. She foresaw, too, +the growing power of the Turks, and perceived that in the future +they would triumph over the degenerate Greek empire at +Constantinople. She had spent her blood and treasure freely in +maintaining that empire; but the weakness and profligacy of its +emperors, the intestine quarrels and disturbances which were +forever going on, and the ingratitude with which she had always +treated Venice, had completely alienated the Venetians from her. +Genoa had, indeed, for many years exercised a far more +preponderating influence at Constantinople than Venice had +done.</p> + +<p>Having completed the tour of the Syrian ports, the Bonito sailed +north, with the intention of passing the Dardanelles and Bosphorus, +and proceeding to Azoph.</p> + +<p>When she reached the little island of Tenedos, a few miles from +the entrance to the strait, she heard news which compelled the +captain to alter his intentions. A revolution had broken out in +Constantinople, aided by the Genoese of Pera. The cruel tyrant +Calojohannes the 5th had been deposed, and his heir Andronicus, +whom he had deprived of sight and thrown into a dungeon, released +and placed on the throne.</p> + +<p>As a reward for the services she had rendered him, Andronicus +issued a decree conferring Tenedos upon Genoa. The news had just +arrived when the Bonito entered the port, and the town was in a +ferment. There were two or three Venetian warships in the harbour; +but the Venetian admiral, being without orders from home as to what +part to take in such an emergency, remained neutral. The matter +was, however, an important one, for the possession of Tenedos gave +its owners the command of the Dardanelles, and a fleet lying there +could effectually block the passage.</p> + +<p>The people thronged up to the governor's house with shouts of +"Down with Genoa!" The governor, being unsupported by any Greek or +Genoese troops, bowed to the popular will, and declared that he did +not recognize the revolution that had taken place in +Constantinople, and refused to submit to the decree of Andronicus. +Donato Trono, a Venetian merchant resident in the island, and other +Venetians, harangued the people, and pointed out to them that alone +they could not hope to resist the united forces of Greece and +Genoa, and that their only hope of safety lay in placing themselves +under the protection of Venice. The people, seeing the justice of +the arguments of the Venetians, and preferring the Venetian rule to +that of Genoa, agreed to the proposal. The banner of St. Mark was +raised amid great enthusiasm, and the island declared subject to +Venice.</p> + +<p>A Genoese galley in port immediately set sail, and quickly +carried the news to Constantinople, where the emperor at once threw +the whole of the Venetian residents into prison. As soon as the +news of this reached Tenedos the captain of the Bonito held a +consultation with Francis.</p> + +<p>"It is evident, Messer Francisco, that we cannot proceed upon +our northward voyage. We should be captured and held at +Constantinople; and, even did we succeed in passing at night, we +should fall into the hands of the Genoese--who are far stronger in +the Black Sea than we are--for if Venice accepts the offer of the +people of this place, and takes possession of the island, Genoa is +sure to declare war.</p> + +<p>"I think, then, that we had better make our way back to Venice +with what cargo we have on board, and there get fresh orders from +the padrone. We have not done badly so far, and it is better to +make sure of what we have got than to risk its loss, for at any day +we may fall in with the Genoese fleet sailing hither."</p> + +<p>Francis quite agreed with the captain's opinion, and the Bonito +sailed for the south. They touched, on their way, at several +islands, and the news that an early outbreak of hostilities between +Genoa and Venice was probable--in which case there would be an +almost complete cessation of trade--produced so strong a desire, on +the part of the islanders, to lay in a store of goods, that the +captain was able to dispose of the rest of his cargo on good terms, +and to fill up his ship with the produce of the islands.</p> + +<p>Thus the Bonito was deep in the water when she re-entered the +port of Venice after an absence of about three months. As soon as +the anchor was dropped the captain, accompanied by Francis, hired a +gondola, and rowed into the city to give an account to Signor +Polani of the success of his voyage, and to lay before him a list +of the cargo with which the Bonito was laden. The merchant received +them with great cordiality, and embraced Francis with the affection +of a father.</p> + +<p>"Do you go at once into the salon, Francisco. You will find my +daughters expecting you there, for the news came an hour ago that +the Bonito was entering port. Of course, we heard from the letters +from Candia of your adventures with the pirates, and the gallant +way in which the Bonito defeated them.</p> + +<p>"You will find, captain, that I have ordered an extra month's +pay to be given to all on board.</p> + +<p>"The captain did full justice, Francisco, in his account of the +matter, to your quickness in suggesting a method by which the +effort of the ramming of the enemy was neutralized, and for the +courage you showed in carrying out your idea; but we will talk of +that afterwards. He and I have business to transact which will +occupy us for some time, so the sooner you go the better."</p> + +<p>Francis at once took himself off and joined the girls, who +received him with the heartiest greeting.</p> + +<p>"We were glad indeed, Francis," Maria said, "when our father +told us that the Bonito was signalled as entering the port. No +letters have come for some time, and we feared that you must have +entered the Dardanelles, and reached Constantinople, before the +news arrived there of that affair at Tenedos, in which case you +would no doubt have been seized and thrown into the dungeons."</p> + +<p>"We were at Tenedos when the affair took place," Francis said, +"and have had no opportunity since of sending a letter by any ship +likely to be here before us. The outbreak made us alter our plans, +for, of course, it would not have been safe to have sailed farther +when the emperor was so enraged against Venice. I need hardly tell +you I was not sorry when we turned our faces again towards Venice. +I have enjoyed the voyage very much, and have had plenty to occupy +me. Still, three months at a time is long enough, and I was +beginning to long for a sight of Venice."</p> + +<p>"For a sight of Venice and--" Maria repeated, holding up her +finger reprovingly.</p> + +<p>"And of you both," Francis said smiling. "I did not think it +necessary to put that in, because you must know that you are Venice +to me."</p> + +<p>"That is much better," Maria said approvingly. "I think you have +improved since you have been away. Do you not think so, +Giulia?"</p> + +<p>"I don't think that sort of nonsense is an improvement," Giulia +said gravely. "Any of the young Venetian gallants can say that sort +of thing. We do not want flattery from Francisco."</p> + +<p>"You should say you do not want it, Giulia," Maria said, +laughing. "I like it, I own, even from Francisco. It may not mean +anything, but it is pleasant nevertheless; besides, one likes to +think that there is just a little truth in it, not much, perhaps, +but just a little in what Francisco said, for instance. Of course +we are not all Venice to him. Still, just as we are pleased to see +him, he is pleased to see us; and why shouldn't he say so in a +pretty way? It's all very well for you to set up as being above +flattery, Giulia, but you are young yet. I have no doubt you will +like it when you get as old as I am."</p> + +<p>Giulia shook her head decidedly.</p> + +<p>"I always think," she said, "when I hear a man saying flattering +things to a girl, that it is the least complimentary thing he can +do, for it is treating her as if he considers that she is a fool, +otherwise he would never say such outrageous nonsense to her."</p> + +<p>"There, Francisco," Maria laughed, "you are fairly warned now. +Beware how you venture to pay any compliment to Giulia in +future.</p> + +<p>"It would be a dull world if every one were to think as you do, +Giulia, and to say exactly as they meant. Fancy a young man saying +to you: 'I think you are a nice sort of girl, no prettier than the +rest, but good tempered and pleasant, and to be desired because +your father is rich!' A nice sort of way that would be to be made +love to!"</p> + +<p>"There is no occasion for them to say anything at all," Giulia +said indignantly. "We don't go about saying to them, 'I think you +are good looking, and well mannered, and witty;' or, 'I like you +because they say you are a brave soldier and a good swordsman.' Why +should they say such things to us? I suppose we can tell if anyone +likes us without all that nonsense."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps so," the elder girl assented; "and yet I maintain it's +pleasant, and at any rate it's the custom, and as it's the custom, +we must put up with it.</p> + +<p>"What do you say, Francisco?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know anything about it," Francis said. "Certainly some +of the compliments I have heard paid were barefaced falsehoods, and +I have wondered how men could make them, and how women could even +affect to believe in them; but, on the other hand, I suppose that +when people are in love, they really do think the person they are +in love with is prettier and more charming, or braver and more +handsome, than anyone else in the world, and that though it may be +flattery, it is really true in the opinion of the person who utters +it."</p> + +<p>"And now let us leave the matter alone for the present, +Francisco. We are dying to hear all about your adventures, and +especially that fight with the pirates. The captain, in his letter, +merely said that you were attacked and beat the pirates off, and +that you would have been sunk if it hadn't been that, at your +suggestion, they lowered bales of cloth over to break the shock; +and that so many men were killed and so many wounded; and that you +were hit twice by arrows, but the wounds were healing. That's all +he said, for papa read that portion of his letter out to us. Now we +want a full and particular account of the affair."</p> + +<p>Francis gave a full account of the fight, and then related the +other incidents of the voyage.</p> + +<p>"We know many of the ports you touched at," Maria said when he +had finished, "for when we were little girls, papa took us +sometimes for voyages in his ships, when the times were peaceful +and there was no danger. Now let us order a gondola, and go for a +row. Papa is sure to be occupied for ever so long with your +captain."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch9">Chapter 9</a>: The Capture Of The Lido.</h2> + +<p>Signor Polani told Francis, that evening, that he was much +pleased with the report that the captain had given of his eagerness +to acquire information both in mercantile and nautical matters, and +of the manner in which he had kept the ship's books, and the +entries of the sales, and purchases of goods.</p> + +<p>"Many young fellows at your age, Francis, when there was no +compulsion for them to have taken these matters into their charge, +would have thought only of amusement and gaiety when they were in +port, and I am glad to see that you have a real interest in them. +Whatever the line in life a young man takes up, he will never excel +in it unless he goes into it with all his heart, and I am very glad +to see that you have thrown yourself so heartily into your new +profession. The Bonito made a most satisfactory voyage, far more so +than I anticipated, when I found that she would not be able to +carry out the programme I had laid down for her; but the rise in +the prices in the latter part of your voyage have more than made up +for the loss of the trade in the Black Sea; and you have done as +much in the three months you were absent, as I should have expected +had you been, as I anticipated, six months away.</p> + +<p>"You will be some little time before you start again, as I wish +to see how matters are going before I send the Bonito out upon +another adventure. At present nothing is settled here. That there +will be war with Genoa before long is certain, but we would rather +postpone it as long as possible, and the senate has not yet arrived +at the decision to accept the offer of Tenedos. Negotiations are +going on with Genoa and Constantinople, but I have little hope that +anything will come of them.</p> + +<p>"It is getting late in the season now, and the war will hardly +break out until next spring; but I have no doubt the struggle will +then begin, and preparations are going on with all speed in the +dockyards. We are endeavouring to obtain allies, but the +combination is so strong against Venice that we are meeting with +little success, and Ferrara is really the only friend on whom we +can rely, and she is not in a position to aid us materially, in +such a struggle as this will be.</p> + +<p>"I am glad to tell you that the affair in which you were +concerned, before you sailed, has now completely dropped. Nothing +has been heard of Mocenigo since he made his escape.</p> + +<p>"A decree of banishment was passed against him, but where he is +we know not. That wretched woman was sentenced to four years' +imprisonment, but upon my petition she will be released at the end +of six months, on her promise that she will not again set foot in +the territory of the republic. As Mocenigo has not been brought to +trial, there will be no further official inquiry into the matter, +and I have not been further questioned as to the source from which +I obtained my information as to the girls' hiding place. Your share +in the matter is therefore altogether unsuspected, and I do not +think that there is any further danger to you from Mocenigo's +partisans."</p> + +<p>"I should be glad enough to remain in Venice a fortnight or so, +sir," Francis said. "But if, at the end of that time, you have any +vessel going out, I shall prefer to go in her. Now that my studies +are over, I shall very soon get tired of doing nothing. Perhaps in +a few years I may care more for the gaieties of Venice, but +certainly at present I have no interest in them, and would rather +be at sea. Matteo tells me that you have promised he shall make a +few voyages in your ships, and that you have told him he shall go +in one of them shortly. If so, it would be very pleasant to us both +if we can sail together."</p> + +<p>"I will arrange it so, Francisco. It would be for the benefit of +my cousin--who is a good lad, but harebrained, and without +ballast--for you to go with him. I should indeed have proposed it, +but the vessel in which I have decided he shall sail will be ready +for sea in another ten days or so, and I thought that you would +prefer a longer stay in Venice before you again set sail. If, +however, it is your wish to be off again so soon, I will arrange +for you both to sail together.</p> + +<p>"This time you will go officially as my supercargo, since you +now understand the duties. The captain of the vessel in which you +will sail is a good sailor and a brave man, but he has no aptitude +for trade, and I must have sent a supercargo with him. Your +decision to go relieves me of this, for which I am not sorry, for +men who are at once good supercargos, and honest men, are difficult +to get."</p> + +<p>The fortnight passed rapidly, and Francis enjoyed his stay at +the merchant's greatly, but he was not sorry when, at the end of +ten days, Polani told him that the lading of the vessel would begin +the next day, and that he had best go on board early and see the +cargo shipped, so that he might check off the bales and casks as +they were sent on board, and see where each description of goods +was stowed away.</p> + +<p>"I think, papa, it is too bad of you, sending Francisco away so +soon," Maria said, when at their evening meal she learned the news +of his early departure.</p> + +<p>"It is his own doing," her father said. "It is he who wants to +go, not I who send him. I consider that it is entirely your +fault."</p> + +<p>"Our fault!" the two girls repeated in surprise.</p> + +<p>"Certainly. If you had made Venice sufficiently pleasant to him, +he would not wish to leave. I am too busy to see about such things, +and I left it to you to entertain him. As he is in such a hurry to +get away again, it is evident that you have not succeeded in doing +so."</p> + +<p>"Indeed, Signor Polani, your daughters have been everything that +is kind, but I have no taste for assemblies and entertainments. I +feel out of place there, amid all the gaily dressed nobles and +ladies, and no sooner do I get there, than I begin to wonder how +anyone can prefer the heated rooms, and clatter of tongues, to the +quiet pleasure of a walk backwards and forwards on the deck of a +good ship. Besides, I want to learn my profession, and there is so +much to learn in it that I feel I have no time to lose."</p> + +<p>"I am right glad to see your eagerness in that direction, +Francisco, and I did but jest with my daughters. You have not yet +asked me what is the destination of the Lido, for that is the name +of your new vessel. This time you are going quite in a new +direction. In the spring we are certain to have war with Genoa, and +as Parma and Hungary will probably both take side against us, we +may find ourselves cut off from the mainland, and, in case of a +disaster happening to our fleet, in sore straits for food. I am, +therefore, going to gather into my warehouses as much grain as they +will hold. This will both be a benefit to the state, and will bring +me good profit, for the price of wheat will be high in the city if +we are leaguered on the land side.</p> + +<p>"The Lido will go down to Sicily, and fill up there with corn. +You will have to use care before entering port, for with war now +certain, both parties will begin to snap up prizes when they get +the chance. So you must keep a sharp lookout for Genoese galleys. +If you find the coast is too closely watched, you will go to the +Moorish ports. We are friends with them at present, though +doubtless, as soon as Genoa and ourselves get to blows, they will +be resuming their piratical work. Thus you will, this time, take in +a much smaller amount of cargo, as you will have to pay for the +most part in gold."</p> + +<p>It mattered little to Francis where he voyaged; but Matteo, who +had been greatly delighted at the thought of sailing with his +friend, was much disappointed when he heard that they were only +going to fetch grain from Sicily.</p> + +<p>"Why, it is nothing to call a voyage," he said in tones of +disgust, when Francis told him the destination of the Lido. "I had +hoped we were going to make a long voyage, and touch at all sorts +of places, just as you did last time."</p> + +<p>"I do not see that it matters much, Matteo; and we shall learn +navigation just as well from one course as another. The voyage will +not be a long one, unless we meet with unfavourable winds; but +there's no saying what may happen, and you may meet with adventure, +even on a voyage to Sicily and back."</p> + +<p>The trip down to Sicily was quickly made. Francis had worked +hard on his first voyage, and was now able to make daily +calculations as to the run made, the course steered, and the +position of the ship, and found that these tallied closely with +those of the captain. Matteo and he shared a large and handsome +cabin, and the time passed pleasantly as the vessel ran down the +coast of Italy. Once out of the Adriatic a sharp lookout was kept, +but the coast of Sicily was made without seeing any sails of a +suspicious character.</p> + +<p>The lads were struck with surprise and admiration when, on +coming on deck in the morning, they saw the great cone of Etna +lying ahead of them. Neither of them had ever seen a mountain of +any size, and their interest in the scene was heightened by a +slight wreath of smoke, which curled up from the summit of the +hill.</p> + +<p>"It is well worth a voyage, if it were only to see that +mountain," Francis said. "What an immense height it is, and how +regular in its shape!"</p> + +<p>"And yet," Matteo said, "those who have journeyed from Italy +into France tell me that there are mountains there beside which +Etna is as nothing. These mountains are a continuation of the range +of hills which we can see from Venice. Their tops are always +covered with snow, and cannot be ascended by man; whereas it is +easy, they say, to reach the top of Etna."</p> + +<p>"Yes, that looks easy enough," Francis agreed. "It seems such a +regular slope, that one could almost ride up; but I dare say, when +you are close you would find all sorts of difficult places."</p> + +<p>"I should like to try," Matteo said. "What a grand view there +would be from the top!</p> + +<p>"Is the port we are going to try first, captain, anywhere near +the foot of the mountain?"</p> + +<p>"No, I am going round the southern part of the island. On this +side the ground is less fertile, and we should have difficulty in +obtaining a cargo. But even were we to put into a port on this +side, you would not be able to climb Mount Etna.</p> + +<p>"Sicily has been an unfortunate country. Its great natural +wealth has rendered it an object of desire, to all its neighbours. +It was the battleground of the Romans and Carthaginians. Pisa, +Genoa, and Naples have all contended for its possession; and the +Moors frequently make descents upon its coasts. It has seldom +enjoyed a peaceful and settled government. The consequence is that +general lawlessness prevails in the districts remote from the +towns; while in the forests that clothe the side of Mount Etna, +there are numerous hordes of bandits who set the authorities at +defiance, levy blackmail throughout the surrounding villages, and +carry off wealthy inhabitants, and put them to ransom. No one in +his senses would think of ascending that mountain, unless he had +something like an army with him."</p> + +<p>"I should like to try it, all the same," Matteo asserted. "If +there are woods all over it, it is not likely one would happen to +meet with any of these people. I should like, above all things, to +get to the top of that hill."</p> + +<p>"It would be harder work than you think, young sir," the captain +said. "You have no idea from this distance what the height is, or +what a long journey it is to ascend to the top. I have been told +that it is a hundred and twenty miles round its foot."</p> + +<p>"I don't think you would like it, Matteo, if you were to try +it," Francis said laughing. "You know you are as lazy as you can +be, and hate exerting yourself. I am sure that, before you got a +quarter the distance up that mountain, you would have only one +wish, and that would be to be at the bottom again."</p> + +<p>"I don't know," Matteo said. "I hate exerting myself +uselessly--wasting my strength, as you do, in rowing at an oar, or +anything of that sort; but to do anything great, I would not mind +exertion, and would go on until I dropped."</p> + +<p>"That is all very well, Matteo; but to do anything great, you +have got to do small things first. You could never wield a sword +for five minutes unless you had practised with it; and you will +never succeed in accomplishing any feats requiring great strength +and endurance, if you do not practise your muscles on every +occasion. You used to grumble at the height when you came up to my +room in the old house, and I suppose Etna is something like two +hundred times as high."</p> + +<p>"That does sound a serious undertaking," Matteo said, laughing; +"and I am afraid that I shall never see the view from the top of +Etna. Certainly I shall not, if it will be necessary beforehand to +be always exercising my muscles by running up the stairs of high +houses."</p> + +<p>The next day they were off Girgenti, the port at which they +hoped to obtain a cargo. They steered in until they encountered a +fishing boat, and learned from those on board that there was no +Genoese vessel in port, nor, as far as the men knew, any state +galleys anywhere in the neighbourhood. Obtaining this news, they +sailed boldly into the port and dropped anchor.</p> + +<p>Francis, who had received before starting a list of houses with +whom Signor Polani was in the habit of doing business, at once +rowed ashore, Matteo and Giuseppi accompanying him. His business +arrangements were soon completed. The harvest had been a good one, +and there was an abundance of corn to be had at a cheap rate. In +half an hour he arranged for as large a quantity as the Lido would +carry.</p> + +<p>The work of loading soon commenced, and in four days the ship +was full up to the hatches. Francis went on shore to settle the +various accounts, and was just making the last payment when Matteo +ran into the office.</p> + +<p>"Four Genoese galleys are entering the bay!"</p> + +<p>Francis ran out, and saw four Genoese galleys rowing in.</p> + +<p>"It is too late to escape. Even were we empty we could not get +away; but laden as the Lido is, they could row three feet to her +one."</p> + +<p>"What shall we do, Francisco?"</p> + +<p>Francis stood for half a minute thinking.</p> + +<p>"You had better stay here, Matteo. I will row out to the ship, +and send most of the men on shore. If they seize the ship, they may +not take those on board prisoners; but if they do, there is no +reason why they should take us all."</p> + +<p>"You had better come on shore too, Francisco, and leave the +captain in charge. You can do no good by staying there; and Polani +would be more concerned at your capture than he would at the loss +of a dozen ships. If you could do any good, it would be different; +but as it is, it would be foolish to risk capture."</p> + +<p>"I will see," Francis said. "At any rate, do you stop here."</p> + +<p>Jumping into a boat, he rowed towards the Lido, which was lying +but a cable's length from the shore. As he neared her, he shouted +to the men to lower the boats.</p> + +<p>"Captain," he said, "I do not know whether there is any danger +of being captured by the Genoese. But it is useless to run any +unnecessary risk. Therefore send all the crew but three or four men +on shore. If the Genoese board us, we have our papers as peaceful +traders buying wheat; but if, in spite of that, they capture us, we +must take our chance."</p> + +<p>"Surely you are not thinking of stopping, Messer Francisco. The +padrone would be terribly vexed if you were taken. He specially +ordered me, before we started, to see that no unnecessary risk was +run, and to prevent you from thrusting yourself into danger. +Therefore, as captain of the ship, I must insist that you go on +shore."</p> + +<p>"I think I ought to stay here," Francis said.</p> + +<p>"I do not think so," the captain said firmly, "and I will not +suffer it. I have to answer for your safety to the padrone; and if +you do not go by yourself, I shall order the men to put you into +one of the boats by force. I mean no disrespect; but I know my +duty, and that is to prevent you from falling into the hands of the +Genoese."</p> + +<p>"I will not oblige you to use force, captain," Francis said, +smiling, "and will do as you wish me."</p> + +<p>In five minutes the men were all--save four, whom the captain +had selected--in the boat, and rowing towards shore. Matteo was +awaiting them when they landed.</p> + +<p>"That is right, Francisco. I was half afraid you would stay on +board. I know how obstinate you are whenever you take a thing into +your head."</p> + +<p>"The captain was more obstinate still, Matteo, and said that +unless I came away he would send me on shore by force; but I don't +like deserting the ship."</p> + +<p>"That is nonsense, Francisco. If the Genoese take her, they take +her, and your remaining on board could not do any good. What are +you going to do now?"</p> + +<p>"We will at once leave the place with the men, Matteo, and +retire into the country behind. It is not likely the Genoese would +land and seize us here, but they might do so, or the inhabitants, +to please Genoa, might seize us and send us on board. At any rate, +we shall be safer in the country."</p> + +<p>The men had, by the captain's orders, brought their arms ashore +on leaving the ship. This was the suggestion of Francis, who said +that, were they unarmed, the people might seize them and hand them +over to the Genoese. At the head of this party, which was about +fifty strong, Francis marched up through the little town and out +into the country. He had really but little fear, either that the +Genoese would arrest them on shore, or that the people would +interfere with them, for they would not care to risk the anger of +Venice by interfering in such a matter. He thought it probable, +however, that if his men remained in the town, broils would arise +between them and any of the Genoese sailors who might land.</p> + +<p>As soon as the Genoese galleys came up to the head of the bay, a +boat was lowered and rowed to the Lido, at whose masthead the +Venetian flag was flying. An officer, followed by six men, climbed +up on to the deck.</p> + +<p>"Are you the captain of this ship?" the officer asked as the +captain approached him.</p> + +<p>"I am," the captain said.</p> + +<p>"What ship is it?"</p> + +<p>"It is the Lido, the property of Messer Polani, a merchant of +Venice, and laden with a cargo of wheat."</p> + +<p>"Then you are my prisoner," the Genoese said. "I seize this +vessel as lawful prize."</p> + +<p>"There is peace between the republics," the captain said. "I +protest against the seizure of this ship, as an act of piracy."</p> + +<p>"We have news that several of our ships have been seized by the +Venetians," the officer said; "and we therefore capture this vessel +in reprisal. Where are your crew?"</p> + +<p>"There are only four on board," the captain said. "We have +filled up our cargo, and were going to sail tomorrow, and therefore +the rest of the crew were allowed to go on shore; and I do not +think it is likely that they will return now," for one of the +Genoese sailors had hauled down the flag of Venice, and had +replaced it with that of Genoa.</p> + +<p>The Genoese officer briefly examined the vessel.</p> + +<p>"Whom have you here on board with you?" he asked, struck with +the furniture and fittings of Francis' cabin.</p> + +<p>"This is the cabin of Matteo Giustiniani, a young noble of +Venice, who is making his first voyage, in order to fit himself for +entering the service of the state: and of Francisco Hammond, who +stands high in the affections of my patron."</p> + +<p>The Genoese uttered an angry exclamation. The name of Polani was +well known in Genoa as one of the chief merchants of Venice and as +belonging to a ducal house, while the family of Giustiniani was +even more illustrious; and had these passengers fallen into his +hands, a ransom might have been obtained greatly exceeding the +value of the Lido and her cargo. Leaving four of his men on board +he went off to the galley of the officer commanding the fleet, and +presently returned with a large boat full of sailors.</p> + +<p>"You and your men can go ashore," he said to the captain. "The +admiral does not deem you worth the trouble of carrying to Genoa; +but be quick, or you will have to swim to shore."</p> + +<p>As the Lido's boats had all gone ashore, the captain hailed a +fishing boat which was passing, and with the four sailors was rowed +to shore, well content that he had escaped the dungeons of Genoa. +He rightly imagined that he and his men were released solely on +account of the paucity of their numbers. Had the whole crew been +captured, they would have been carried to Genoa; but the admiral +did not care to bring in five prisoners only, and preferred taking +the ship alone.</p> + +<p>Francis, with his party, followed the line of the coast, +ascending the hills which rose steeply from the edge of the sea at +a short distance from the town. He had brought with him from the +town a supply of food sufficient for four or five days, and +encamped in a little wood near the edge of the cliff. From this +they had a view of the port, and could watch the doings of the +Genoese galleys. Fires were lit and meat cooked over them; and just +as the meal was prepared the captain and the four sailors joined +them, amid a hearty cheer from the crew.</p> + +<p>"I have made my protest," the captain said as he took his seat +by the side of Francis, "and the padrone can make a complaint +before the council if he thinks fit to do so; but there is small +chance that he will ever recover the Lido, or the value of her +cargo."</p> + +<p>"I don't like losing the ship," Francis said. "Of course, it is +only a stroke of bad fortune, and we could neither fly nor defend +ourselves. Still one hates arriving home with the story that one +has lost the ship."</p> + +<p>"Yes," the captain agreed. "Messer Polani is a just man, yet no +one cares to employ men who are unlucky; and the worst of it is +that the last ship I commanded was wrecked. Many men would not have +employed me again, although it wasn't my fault. But after this +second affair, in a few months' time, I shall get the name of being +an unlucky man, and no one in his senses would employ a man who is +always losing his ships."</p> + +<p>"Do you think that there is any chance of our recapturing it, +captain?"</p> + +<p>"Not the least in the world," the captain replied. "Even +supposing that we could get on board, and overpower the Genoese +without being heard, and get her out of the port without being +seen, we should not get away. Laden as she is with grain, she will +sail very slowly, and the Genoese would overtake her in a few +hours; and I needn't tell you that then there would be very little +mercy shown to any on board."</p> + +<p>"That is true enough," Francis said. "Still, I do not like the +idea of losing the Lido."</p> + +<p>After the meal was over Francis rose, and asked Matteo to +accompany him on a stroll along the cliffs, Giuseppi as usual +following them. They walked along until they rounded the head of +the bay, and were able to look along the coast for some distance. +It was steep and rocky, and worn into a number of slight +indentations. In one of these rose a ledge of rocks at a very short +distance from the shore.</p> + +<p>"How much further are we going, Francis?" Matteo said when they +had walked a couple of miles.</p> + +<p>"About a quarter of a mile, Matteo. I want to examine that ledge +of rocks we saw from the first point."</p> + +<p>"What on earth do you want to look at them for, Francis? You +certainly are the most curious fellow I ever met. You scoffed at me +when I said I should like to go up Mount Etna, and now here you +are, dragging me along this cliff, just to look at some rocks of no +possible interest to any one."</p> + +<p>"That is the point to be inquired into, Matteo. I think it's +possible they may prove very interesting."</p> + +<p>Matteo shrugged his shoulders, as he often did when he felt too +lazy to combat the eccentric ideas of his English friend.</p> + +<p>"There we are," Francis said at last, standing on the edge of +the cliff and looking down. "Nothing could be better."</p> + +<p>"I am glad you think so, Francisco," Matteo said, seating +himself on the grass. "I hope you intend to stay some little time +to admire them, for I own that I should like a rest before I go +back."</p> + +<p>Francis stood looking at the rocks. The bay was a shallow one, +and was but five or six hundred yards from point to point, the +rocks rising nearly in a line between the points, and showing for +about two hundred yards above water, and at about the same distance +from the cliffs behind them.</p> + +<p>"What height do you think those rocks are above the water, +Giuseppi?"</p> + +<p>"It is difficult to judge, signor, we are so high above them; +but I should think in the middle they must be ten or twelve +feet."</p> + +<p>"I should think it likely they were more than double that, +Giuseppi; but we shall see better when we get down to the bottom. I +daresay we shall find a place where we can clamber down +somewhere."</p> + +<p>"My dear Francisco," Matteo said earnestly, "is anything the +matter with you? I begin to have doubts of your sanity. What on +earth do these rocks matter to you, one way or the other? or what +can you care whether they are thirty inches or thirty feet above +the water?</p> + +<p>"They do not differ from other rocks, as far as I can see. They +are very rugged and very rough, and would be very awkward if they +lay out at sea instead of in this little bay, where they are in +nobody's way. Is it not enough that you have tramped two miles to +have a look at them, which means four miles, as we have got to +return somehow? And now you talk about climbing down that +break-neck cliff to have a look at them close!"</p> + +<p>But Francis paid no attention to Matteo's words. He was gazing +down into the clear smooth water, which was so transparent that +every stone and pebble at the bottom could be seen.</p> + +<p>"The water looks extremely shallow, Giuseppi. What do you +think?"</p> + +<p>"It seems to me, signor, that there is not a foot of water +between the rocks and the shore."</p> + +<p>"It does look so, Giuseppi; but it is possible that the +transparency of the water deceives us, and that there may be ten or +twelve feet of water there. However, that is what we must go down +and find out. Now the first thing is to look about, and find some +point at which we can get down to the beach."</p> + +<p>"Well, I will lie down and take a nap till you come back," +Matteo said in a tone of resignation. "I have no interest either in +these rocks or in the water; and as far as I can protest, I do so +against the whole proceeding, which to me savours of madness."</p> + +<p>"Don't you understand, you silly fellow, what I am thinking +about?" Francis said impatiently.</p> + +<p>"Not in the smallest degree, Francisco; but do not trouble to +tell me--it makes no matter. You have some idea in your head. Carry +it out by all means; only don't ask me to cut my hands, tear my +clothes, and put myself into a perspiration by climbing down that +cliff."</p> + +<p>"My idea is this, Matteo. There is no chance of carrying off the +Lido by speed from the Genoese; but if we could get her out of the +bay we might bring her round here and lay her behind those rocks, +and the Genoese would pass by without dreaming she was there. Half +a mile out those rocks would look as if they form part of the +cliff, and none would suspect there was a passage behind them."</p> + +<p>"That is something like an idea!" Matteo said, jumping to his +feet. "Why did you not tell me of it before? You have quite alarmed +me. Seriously, I began to think that you had become a little mad, +and was wondering whether I had not better go back and fetch the +captain and some of his men to look after you.</p> + +<p>"Now let us look at your rocks again. Why, man, there is not +water enough to float a boat between them and the shore, much less +the Lido, which draws nine foot of water now she is loaded."</p> + +<p>"I don't know, Matteo. Looking down on water from a height is +very deceiving. If it is clear and transparent, there is nothing to +enable you to judge its depth. At any rate it is worth trying. +Before we go down, we will cut some long stiff rods with which we +can measure the depth. But we have first to find a place where we +can get down to the water."</p> + +<p>After a quarter of an hour's search, they found a point where +the descent seemed practicable. A little stream had worn a deep +fissure in the face of the rock. Shrubs and bushes had grown up in +the crevices and afforded a hold for the hands, and there appeared +no great difficulty in getting down. Before starting they cut three +stiff slender rods twelve feet in length. They then set to work to +make the descent. It was by no means difficult, and in a few +minutes they stood by the edge of the water.</p> + +<p>"It is a great advantage, the path being so easy," Francis said, +"for in case they did discover the ship we could land and climb to +the top before they had time to come to shore, and once there we +could keep the whole force in those galleys at bay. Now for the +main point, the depth of the water."</p> + +<p>Matteo shook his head.</p> + +<p>"It is useless to take the trouble to undress, Francis," he +said, as the latter threw off his jacket. "Giuseppi can wade out to +the rocks without wetting his knees."</p> + +<p>"Giuseppi can try if he likes," Francis said, "but I will wager +he will not get far."</p> + +<p>Giuseppi, as convinced as Matteo of the shallowness of the +water, stepped into it, but was surprised to find that, before he +had gone many paces, the water was up to his waist.</p> + +<p>"Well, I wouldn't have believed it if I hadn't seen it," Matteo +said when he returned, "but I think he must have got into a deep +hole among the rocks. However, we shall soon see," and he too began +to undress.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the three lads were swimming out towards the +rocks which, as Francis had anticipated, rose from twenty to thirty +feet above the level of the sea. The water deepened fast, and for +the last thirty or forty yards, they were unable to touch the +bottom, even when thrusting down their rods to the fullest depth. +They then tried the depth in the passages at the end of the rocks, +and found that there was ample water for the Lido. When they +ascertained this to their satisfaction they swam back to the +shore.</p> + +<p>"I shall believe you in future, Francis, even if you assert that +the moon is made of cheese. I could have taken an oath that there +was not a foot of water between those rocks and the shore."</p> + +<p>"I hardly ventured to hope that it was as deep as it is," +Francis said, "but I know how deceiving clear water is, when you +look down upon it from a height. However, that point is +settled."</p> + +<p>"But they would see our masts above the rocks, Francisco. They +are sure to keep a sharp lookout as they go along."</p> + +<p>"We must take the masts out of her," Francis said. "I don't know +how it is to be done, but the captain will know, and if that can't +be managed we must cut them down. There is no difficulty about +that.</p> + +<p>"Now we will make our way back again, it will be dark in a +couple of hours' time. Everything depends upon whether they have +towed the Lido out and anchored her among their galleys. If they +have, I fear the scheme is impracticable, but if they let her +remain where she is lying, we might get her out without being +noticed, for there is no moon."</p> + +<p>As they began to ascend the cliff, Francis stopped suddenly.</p> + +<p>"We should never be able to find this place in the dark," he +said.</p> + +<p>"Giuseppi, you must stay here. Do you collect a quantity of +dried sticks, and lay them in readiness at that point opposite the +ledge. We will show a light as we come along, that is if we succeed +in getting the Lido out, and directly you see it set fire to the +sticks. The fire will be a guide to us as to the position of the +rocks."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps I had better take the sticks off to the ledge, Messer +Francisco, and light my fire on the rock at the end. The water is +deep a few yards out, as we found, so you could sail close to the +fire and then round behind the rocks without danger."</p> + +<p>"That will be the best way, Giuseppi; but how will you get the +sticks off without wetting them?"</p> + +<p>"I will make a bundle three or four times as big as I want," +Giuseppi said, "and then half of them will be dry. I can put my +clothes on them and the tinder. I will answer for the fire, but I +would rather have been with you in your adventure."</p> + +<p>"There will be no danger there, Giuseppi, so you need not be +anxious about us. It has to be done quietly and secretly, and there +will be no fighting. These Genoese are too strong to think of that; +and if we are discovered in the attempt, or as we make off, we +shall take to our boats again and row straight on shore.</p> + +<p>"Keep a sharp lookout for us, we will hoist two lights, one +above the other, to prevent your mistaking any fishing boat which +may be coming along for us.</p> + +<p>"Now, Matteo, for a climb. We have no time to lose."</p> + +<p>The two lads climbed to the top of the cliff, and then started +at a brisk pace along the top, and in half an hour reached the +wood.</p> + +<p>"We were beginning to wonder what had become of you," the +captain said as they joined him.</p> + +<p>"We have been settling how to carry off the Lido," Francis said, +"and have arranged everything."</p> + +<p>The captain laughed.</p> + +<p>"If we could fly with her through the air, you might get her +away, but I see no other way. I have been thinking it over since +you left. With luck we might get her safely out of the bay, but the +galleys row four feet to our one, and as they would be sure to send +some one way, and some the other, along the coast; they would pick +us up again in two or three hours after daylight."</p> + +<p>"Nevertheless we have settled it, captain. We have found a place +where we can hide her, and the Genoese might search the coast for a +month without finding her."</p> + +<p>"If that be so it is possible," the captain said eagerly, "and +you may be sure you will not find us backward in doing our +best."</p> + +<p>Francis described the nature and position of the rock which +would afford a shelter, and the means by which they had ascertained +that there was plenty of water for the Lido behind it.</p> + +<p>"It seems plausible," the captain said when he had concluded, +"and I am quite ready to make the attempt, if, in your opinion, it +can be done. You are Messer Polani's representative, and for my own +sake as well as his, I would do anything which promises a chance of +recapturing the ship. Besides, as you say, there is little danger +in it, for we can take to the boats and make for the shore if +discovered.</p> + +<p>"The Lido is still lying where we anchored her. They can have no +fear of a recapture, for they would know that they could overtake +us easily enough. I daresay they intend to sail tomorrow morning, +and did not think it worth the trouble to get up the anchor and tow +her out to where they are lying."</p> + +<p>The details of the expedition were now discussed and arranged, +and the men told off to their various duties, and at eleven o'clock +at night, when all in the town were fast asleep, the party quitted +the bivouac and marched down again to the port.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch10">Chapter 10</a>: Recaptured.</h2> + +<p>No one was astir in the streets as the band marched through, and +they reached the port without encountering a single person. A small +boat was chosen, and in this the captain, Francis, Matteo, and two +of the strongest and most powerful of the sailors embarked. It was +thought unlikely that, lying, as the Lido did, within a couple of +hundred yards of the Genoese galleys, any very vigilant watch would +be kept, and not more than two sailors would probably be on +deck.</p> + +<p>The dark mass of the ship could just be made out from the shore, +and when all was ready the two sailors with their oars pushed her +off with all their strength, and then stood perfectly quiet.</p> + +<p>The impetus was sufficient. The boat moved so slowly through the +water, indeed, before they reached the ship, that Francis thought +it would be necessary for the men to row a stroke or two; but the +boat still moved on, until at last it touched the side of the ship. +All had removed their boots before starting, and they now clambered +up the sides without making the slightest noise.</p> + +<p>Once on deck they stood perfectly quiet, listening. Presently +they heard a murmur of voices on the other side of the vessel. Very +quietly they crept towards the sound, and at length made out two +figures leaning over the bulwarks, talking.</p> + +<p>Each man's work had been settled, and there was no confusion. +One of the sailors and Francis stole towards one of the men, while +the other and Matteo approached the second. The captain stood with +his sword bared, in readiness to cut down any other man who might +be on deck.</p> + +<p>The Genoese did not look round. Francis gave the word, "Now," +and in a moment the two sailors seized them from behind with a +grasp of iron, while the lads at the same moment passed bandages +tightly round their mouths, and before the Genoese were quite aware +of what had happened, they were lying, bound hand and foot, gagged +upon the deck.</p> + +<p>The party now made a search, but found no one else about. They +then secured and fastened down the hatch of the forecastle by +coiling ropes upon it, quietly opened the door leading to the poop +cabins, and entering, seized and bound two officers sleeping there +without the slightest noise or resistance.</p> + +<p>Then they took a light from the cabin and showed it towards the +shore. At the signal the sailors, who had already taken their +places in the boats, at once rowed out to the vessel. When all were +on board, the boats were fastened alongside, in case it should be +necessary to abandon the ship again.</p> + +<p>The cable was then cut. One of the sailors had already ascended +the shrouds, and poured oil over the blocks through which the +halyards ran, so that the sails should ascend noiselessly. The wind +was very light, scarcely enough to belly out the sails, but it was +fortunately in the right direction, and the Lido began to steal +through the water.</p> + +<p>Not a word had been spoken since they first started, but Francis +now whispered to the captain, "I think I can make out the Genoese +ships."</p> + +<p>"So can I," the captain said, "but they cannot see us. They are +against the skyline, while we are in the shadow of the shore. So +far all is perfectly safe, and if this breath of wind will but +carry us far enough out to be able to use our oars without their +hearing us, we shall certainly get away."</p> + +<p>The progress of the Lido was so slow, that it was nearly an hour +before the captain said that he thought they were now fairly round +the point of the bay, and could use their oars.</p> + +<p>"We had better tow," he said; "the sweeps make a noise that can +be heard miles away on a calm night like this, whereas, if they are +careful, men in a boat can row almost noiselessly."</p> + +<p>Ten of the men accordingly took their places in one of the large +boats in which they had come on board, and a rope being passed down +to them they began rowing at the head of the ship.</p> + +<p>"We may as well lower the sails," the captain said, "they are +doing no good now. Indeed I think it is a current rather than the +wind that has helped us so far."</p> + +<p>"I will put two lanterns over the side," Francis said. "We may +have gone farther than we think, and it would never do to pass our +hiding place."</p> + +<p>The men in the boat rowed vigorously, but it was slow work +towing the deeply-laden vessel. At last, however, a light burst +suddenly up from the shore.</p> + +<p>"There is Giuseppi," Francis exclaimed. "We are further out than +we thought we were. He must be fully a mile and a half away."</p> + +<p>The men in the boat were told to row direct for the light, and +some of the sweeps were got out and helped the vessel through the +water. As they drew near, they could make out Giuseppi throwing +fresh wood on the fire.</p> + +<p>"You can steer within ten yards of where he is standing, +captain, and directly you are abreast of him, put your helm hard to +port. You had better get the sweeps in now, the less way she has on +her the better."</p> + +<p>"All well?" Giuseppi hailed, as they came within fifty yards of +it.</p> + +<p>"All well, Giuseppi! There has been no fighting, so you have +lost nothing. Put all your wood on the fire, we want as much light +as we can to get in."</p> + +<p>The flames shot up high, and the captain had no difficulty in +rounding the corner of the rocks, and bringing up his vessel behind +them. A kedge was dropped, and the men in the boat rowed to the end +of the rocks, and brought off Giuseppi.</p> + +<p>"I was beginning to be anxious," the lad said, as he joined them +on deck, "and when I first saw your signal I took you for a fishing +boat. You were so far off that the two lights looked like one, but +by dint of gazing I made them out at last, and then lit the +fire."</p> + +<p>"Now, captain," Francis said, "we have a good deal to do before +morning, for I take it it will be no easy matter to get out the +masts."</p> + +<p>"There would be no difficulty in getting the masts out," the +captain answered. "I have only to knock out the wedges, and loosen +the stays, and get up a tripod made of three spars to lift them +out; but I don't see how they are to be got in again."</p> + +<p>"How is that, captain? I should have thought it no more +difficult to get a mast in than to take it out."</p> + +<p>"Nor would it be so, under ordinary circumstances," the captain +replied; "but you see, our hold is full of grain, and as the mast +comes out, the hole it leaves will fill up, and there will be no +getting it down again to step it on the keel without discharging +the cargo."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I see that, captain. Then you think we had better cut down +the masts; but in that case how are we to raise them?"</p> + +<p>"We will cut them off about six feet above the deck, Messer +Francisco; then when we want to set sail again, we have only to +rear the masts up by the side of the stumps, and lash them +securely. Of course they will be six feet shorter than before, but +that is of little consequence."</p> + +<p>"Then so let it be," Francis said, "the sooner we begin the +better."</p> + +<p>Just at this moment there was a violent knocking against the +hatch of the forecastle.</p> + +<p>"I had forgotten all about the sailors," the captain said, +laughing. "I suppose the men who were to relieve the watch have +woke up, and finding they could not get out, have aroused their +comrades."</p> + +<p>"Shall we leave them there, or take them out and bind them?" +Matteo asked.</p> + +<p>"We had better have them up," the captain said. "I don't suppose +there are more than twenty of them, and it would be best to bind +them, and put them down in the hold with the corn, otherwise they +may manage to break out when we are not expecting it, and might +give us some trouble."</p> + +<p>Accordingly, the sailors gathered round the hatch. The ropes +were then removed, and the hatch taken off.</p> + +<p>"What fooling are you up to?" one of the Genoese exclaimed, +angrily, as they rushed up on deck. "You have nearly stifled us +down below putting on the hatch and fastening it."</p> + +<p>He stopped abruptly as, on gaining the deck, he saw a crowd of +armed figures round him, for a lantern had been placed so as to +throw a light upon the spot.</p> + +<p>"You are prisoners," the captain said. "It is useless to attempt +resistance."</p> + +<p>"Help, help, treachery!" one of the Genoese shouted at the top +of his voice.</p> + +<p>"It is useless for you to shout," the captain said, "you are +miles away from your fleet. Now, do you surrender, or are we to +attack you?"</p> + +<p>Taken by surprise, and unarmed, the Genoese who had gained the +deck sullenly replied that they surrendered. They were bound and +led away, and the others ordered to come up on deck. There were +found to be four-and-twenty in all, and these were soon laid side +by side on the grain in the hold, the hatch being left off to give +them air. The masts were then cut through, and were with some +trouble lowered to the deck.</p> + +<p>"There is nothing more to be done now," the captain said, "and I +think we can all safely turn in till morning."</p> + +<p>He then ordered the under officer to place two men on watch on +the rocks, and two men on deck, two men to stand as sentinels over +the prisoners, and the rest to lie down. He directed that he should +be roused at the earliest streak of daylight.</p> + +<p>The lads were soon fast asleep, and could hardly believe that +the night was over, when Giuseppi awakened them with the news that +day was breaking. They were soon on deck, and found that the crew +were already astir. The sentinels on the rock were at once ordered +to lie down, so that they could command a view of the sea, without +exposing themselves to sight. The boats were drawn up alongside, +and everything put in readiness for instant debarkation, and then +the party waited for the appearance of the Genoese galleys.</p> + +<p>"They will be along in less than an hour," the captain said. "It +is light enough now for the watch to have discovered that the Lido +is missing, and it will not be many minutes before they are under +way. They will calculate that we can have but five or six hours' +start at the utmost, and that three hours' rowing will bring them +up to us."</p> + +<p>"I have no fear whatever of their discovering us as they go +along," Francis said. "The only fear is that, after rowing for +three or four hours and seeing no sign of us, they will guess that +we are hidden somewhere under the cliffs, and will come back along +the shore, searching every bay."</p> + +<p>"There is a chance of that," the captain agreed, "but I should +think only a chance. When the party who come this way find they do +not overtake us, they will suppose that we have sailed to the west, +and that on their return they will find us in the hands of their +comrades; and when these also come back empty handed they will +conclude that we have sailed straight out to sea. Of course they +may have sent a galley southward also, but will conclude that that +has somehow missed us when it returns without news. I hardly think +that the idea, that we may be hidden so close to them, will enter +their minds, and the only fear I entertain is that some peasant may +happen to come to the edge of the cliff and see us lying here, and +may take the news back to Girgenti."</p> + +<p>"Yes, there is certainly a danger of that," Francis said. "I +think, captain, it would be the best plan to land twenty men at +once. Giuseppi will show them the way up the cliff, and then they +must take their station, at short distances apart, along the edge +of the cliff, from point to point of this little bay, with orders +to seize any one who may approach and bring him down here. They +must, of course, be told to lie down, as a line of sentries along +the top of the cliff might attract the attention of somebody on the +galleys, and lead to a search."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I think that will be a wise precaution," the captain +agreed.</p> + +<p>"Thomaso, do you take twenty men and post them as you hear +Messer Francisco say. Tell them to lie in the bushes and keep out +of sight, and on no account to show themselves, unless someone +comes along sufficiently near to look over the edge of the +cliff."</p> + +<p>"Giuseppi," Francis said, "do you act as guide to the party. You +will have plenty of time to get to the top and to return before the +galleys come along."</p> + +<p>A quarter of an hour later the captain, with Matteo and Francis, +landed on the ledge, and took the place of the sentries, and in +twenty minutes a simultaneous exclamation burst from them, as a +Genoese galley was seen rowing rapidly along.</p> + +<p>"They have sent only one galley," Francis said. "Of course, they +would know that it was sufficiently strong to overpower us without +difficulty. I suppose one has gone west, and the others have put +out to sea in different directions. That certainly was the best +course they could have adopted, and it is very lucky that we did +not attempt to escape seaward, for they would assuredly have had +us. I suppose, captain, you intend to sail tonight."</p> + +<p>"Certainly," the captain replied. "We will get everything in +readiness for hoisting the masts as soon as the galley has passed +us on its way back. There is no fear of their coming along again +later on, for the men will have had an eight hours' row of it; the +first part, at any rate, at full speed. Besides, they will not +know, until all the galleys return, that we have not been found, so +I think it will be quite safe to get up the masts as soon as they +have passed. Then directly it is dark we will man our oars and row +to the southwest. We shall be far away before morning, even if they +look further for us, which they are hardly likely to do."</p> + +<p>"How about the prisoners, captain?"</p> + +<p>"We have no choice but to take them with us, Messer Francisco. I +am sure I do not want to be bothered with them, but we cannot land +them before we leave, or they would carry the news to Girgenti in +an hour, and we should be caught the first thing in the +morning."</p> + +<p>It was late in the afternoon before the galley was seen +returning, rowing slowly and heavily.</p> + +<p>"I expect," the captain said, "they kept up the racing pace at +which they started for some four hours. By that time they must have +been completely worn out, and no doubt they anchored and waited for +some hours for the men to feed and rest themselves, for from the +hurry with which they started you may be sure that they did not +wait to break their fast.</p> + +<p>"I would give a month's pay to be in that harbour this evening. +What tempers they must be in when they find, after all their toil, +that we have slipped through their fingers, How they will talk the +matter over, and discuss which way we went. How the men in each +ship will say that the others cannot have used their eyes or +exerted themselves, else we must have been overtaken. Messer +Francisco, I am indebted to you, not only for having saved the +ship, but for giving me a joke, which I shall laugh over whenever I +think of it. It will be a grand story to tell over the wine cups, +how we cheated a whole Genoese fleet, and carried off the Lido from +under their noses. What a tale it will be to relate to a Genoese, +when we meet in some port after the war is over; it will be enough +to make him dance with rage.</p> + +<p>"Now, lads," he went on, turning to the men, "stand to your +tackle. The moment that galley gets out of sight round the point, +up with the mast."</p> + +<p>Ten minutes later the masts were up, stout ropes were lashed +round them and the stumps, and wedges driven in to tighten the +cords to the utmost. The rigging was of the simplest description, +and before dark everything was in readiness for hoisting the +sails.</p> + +<p>"I don't think they can make us out now," the captain said.</p> + +<p>"I don't think they could," Francis agreed; "but we had better +wait another quarter of an hour. It would be absurd to run any risk +after everything has turned out so well; but the men can get into +the boats and tow us out through the channel, then we can hoist the +boats on board, and by that time it should be nearly dark +enough."</p> + +<p>"I think there will be a breeze presently," the captain said, +"and from the right direction. However, the men won't mind working +hard for a bit. They have had an easy time for the last two +days."</p> + +<p>The oars were all manned, and the men set to work with hearty +goodwill. They were delighted at their escape from the island, for +they might have been there some time before they got a passage +back; and still more pleased at having tricked the Genoese; and the +Lido, heavy laden as she was, moved at a steady pace through the +water, under the impulsion of the oars.</p> + +<p>For an hour they rowed parallel with the shore, as, had they +made out to sea, they might possibly have been seen by one of the +galleys, returning late from the search for them. At the end of +that time the captain turned her head from shore. As soon as they +got well out from under the shelter of the land the breeze made +itself felt, and the sails were hoisted.</p> + +<p>For a time the men kept on rowing, but the breeze increased +rapidly, and the captain ordered the oars to be laid in. A double +allowance of wine was served out, and an hour or two spent in song +and hilarity; then the watch below was sent down, and Francis and +Matteo turned into their cots.</p> + +<p>In the morning the breeze was blowing strong. The sails had been +taken off the mainmast, but that on the foremast was dragging the +Lido through the water at a good rate of speed, and before night +they were off Cape Spartivento. The wind held till next morning, +when they were abreast of the Gulf of Taranto. Then came a long +spell of calms or baffling winds, and it was a fortnight before the +campaniles of Venice were seen rising apparently from the +water.</p> + +<p>"I have been anxious about you," Signor Polani said when Francis +arrived. "One of our galleys brought the report that a Genoese +fleet was cruising on the coast of Sicily, and as, although war had +not yet been openly declared, both parties were making prizes, I +was afraid that they might have snapped you up."</p> + +<p>"They did snap us up," Francis said smiling. "They caught us in +the port of Girgenti, and the standard of Genoa waved over the +Lido."</p> + +<p>"But how can that be," Polani said, "when you have returned in +her? For she was signalled as approaching the port hours ago. You +could hardly have persuaded the Genoese by fair words to release a +prize that they had once taken.</p> + +<p>"Eh, captain?"</p> + +<p>"No, that is not the Genoese way, nor ours either," the captain +said. "We did better than that, signor. We recaptured her, and +carried her off from under their noses."</p> + +<p>"You are joking," Polani said, "for they signalled the Lido as +returning laden, and a laden ship could never get away from state +galleys, however long her start. A fat pig might as soon try to +escape from a hunting dog."</p> + +<p>"That is so, Messer Polani, and we did not trust to our speed. +We tricked them famously, sir. At least, when I say we did, Messer +Francisco here did, for the credit is due solely to him. If it had +not been for this young gentleman, I and the crew would now have +been camping out in the forests of Sicily, without the slightest +prospect of being able to make our way home, and the Lido would now +be moored in the port of Genoa."</p> + +<p>"That is so, Cousin Polani," Matteo said. "It is to Francisco +that we owe our escape, and you owe the safety of the Lido and her +cargo."</p> + +<p>"It was just a happy idea that occurred to me," Francis said, +"as it would assuredly have occurred to Captain Pesoro, if he had +been with us, or to anyone else, and after I had first suggested it +the captain carried out all the arrangements."</p> + +<p>"Not at all, Messer Francisco," the captain said obstinately. "I +had no part or hand in the business, beyond doing what you +suggested, and you would have got the Lido off just as well if I +hadn't been there."</p> + +<p>"Well, I will judge for myself when I hear," Polani said. "But, +as it must be an interesting story, my daughters would like to hear +it also. So, come into the next room and tell the tale, and I will +order up a flagon of Cyprus wine to moisten your throats."</p> + +<p>"First of all," the captain began, after the girls had greeted +Francis, and all had taken their seats, "I must tell how the Lido +was captured."</p> + +<p>And he then related how the Genoese fleet had suddenly appeared +before them, and how, seeing the impossibility of escape, he had +sent all on shore with the exception of four sailors, and how he +had, with them, been released and sent on shore.</p> + +<p>"That's the Genoese all over," Polani said. "If they could have +sent forty prisoners home they would have done so; but the fact +that there were only five on board, when they took the vessel, +would seem to them to detract from the credit of the capture."</p> + +<p>The captain then told how, fearing that the people of Girgenti +might give them all up to the Genoese, or that fights might ensue +among the Genoese sailors who landed, he had marched the crew away +out of the town.</p> + +<p>"Now, captain," Matteo broke in, "I will tell the next bit, +because I was with Francis when he found a hiding place."</p> + +<p>He then related how Francis had seen the ledge of rocks in the +distance, and had dragged him along the cliff two miles to observe +them more closely; and how he had come to the conclusion that his +companion had lost his senses. Then he described the exact +position, and the clearness of the water, and how he had been +convinced that there was not depth to float a rowboat inside the +rocks; and how they had gone down, swum out, fathomed the water, +and then returned to the wood.</p> + +<p>The captain then took up the tale again, and completed it to the +end.</p> + +<p>"There is no doubt you were right, captain," Polani said, "and +that it is entirely Francisco's quickness of observation, readiness +of plan, and determination to see if his ideas could be carried +into effect, which saved the Lido. That he possessed these +qualities is not new to me, for I have already greatly benefited by +them. If he had not been born a peaceful trader, he would have made +a great captain some day; but the qualities which would distinguish +a man in war are also useful in peace, and I think it fully as +honourable to be a successful merchant, as a successful +soldier.</p> + +<p>"Henceforth, Francisco, I shall no longer consider you as in +leading strings, and shall feel that I can confide important +business to you, young as you are."</p> + +<p>The next voyage that Francis made was to Jaffa, and this was +accomplished without adventure. On his return, he found that Venice +was in a state of excitement--war had at last been declared, and +every effort was being made to fit out a fleet which could cope +with that of Genoa.</p> + +<p>The command was entrusted to Vettore Pisani, who was invested in +the church of Saint Mark with the supreme command of the fleet by +the doge himself, who handed to the admiral the great banner of +Venice, with the words:</p> + +<p>"You are destined by God to defend with your valour this +republic, and to retaliate upon those who have dared to insult her +and to rob her of that security which she owes to the virtue of her +ancestors. Wherefore, we confide to you this victorious and great +standard, which it will be your duty to restore to us unsullied and +triumphant."</p> + +<p>Carlo Zeno, a noble, who had gained a high reputation in various +capacities, was appointed commissioner and captain general of +Negropont. The three first divisions of those inscribed in the +register, as liable to serve in the navy, were called out, and on +the 24th of April Pisani sailed from Venice with fourteen war +galleys.</p> + +<p>Pisani enjoyed the highest popularity among the people of +Venice. His manner was that of a bluff hearty sailor. He was always +ready to share in the hardships of his men, and to set them an +example of good temper and cheerfulness, as well as of bravery. He +was quick tempered, and when in a passion cared nothing whom he +struck.</p> + +<p>When governor of Candia, he had got into a serious scrape, by +striking Pietro Cornaro, an officer of the republic, from whom he +happened to differ on some point of routine. He was a relative of +the Doge Andrea Contarini, and had been employed not only as an +officer in the navy, but as a military engineer and as a +diplomatist, and in each capacity had shown equal talent.</p> + +<p>He was connected with the Polani family, and was at their house +several times before he sailed. Here he heard from his kinsman an +account of the manner in which Francisco had saved the Bonito from +being rammed by the pirates, and how he had succeeded in getting +the Lido out of the hands of the Genoese; and he was so much +pleased that he offered to take him with him in his galley, but +Polani advised Francis not to accept the offer.</p> + +<p>"It is quite true," he said, "that most of our noble families +are, like myself, engaged in commerce; and that one day they are +trading as merchants and the next fighting under the state; but at +present, if you take my advice, you will stick to the peaceful side +of the profession; especially as, being an Englishman, you are in +no way called upon to serve the state. In another five or six +years, if we are then at war, it will be different. I have +frequently offered galleys for the service of the state, and you +can then take the command of one, and will, I have no doubt, +distinguish yourself; but were you to enter now, you might remain +in the service of the state for some years, and would be losing +your time as a merchant.</p> + +<p>"There are countries in which, when a man once takes up the +profession of arms, he remains a soldier all his life, and may not +only achieve honour but wealth and wide possessions. It is not so +in Venice. Here we are all citizens as well as all soldiers if need +be. We fight for the state while a war lasts, and then return to +our peaceful avocations. Even my kinsman, Pisani, may be admiral of +the fleet today, and a week hence may be a private citizen. +Therefore, my lad, I think it would be very foolish of you to give +up commerce at present to take military service."</p> + +<p>"I quite agree with you, signor," Francis said, although, in +truth, for a moment he had felt a strong mind to accept the offer +of Pisani. "I am just beginning to learn a little of trade, and +desire nothing better than to be a successful merchant; though I +confess that I should like to take part in such a glorious sea +fight as that which is likely to take place soon."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and perhaps be killed in the first engagement, Francis, +for neither skill nor bravery avail against a bolt from a Genoese +crossbow. No, my lad, be content with trade, especially since you +have seen already that even the life of a trader has plenty of +incident and excitement. What with storms, what with pirates, what +with the enemies of the state and the treachery of the native +peoples with whom we trade, there is no lack of adventure in the +life of a Venetian merchant."</p> + +<p>Francis felt that this was true, and that he had in the past six +months had fully his share in adventures. His stay on shore this +time extended over a month, and it was not until three weeks after +Pisani sailed that he again set out.</p> + +<p>The notice was a short one. Polani had been sent for to attend +the council early in the morning, and on his return he said to +Francis:</p> + +<p>"You must go down to the port at once, Francis. News has been +received from Pisani that he has sailed almost into the port of +Genoa, without finding the fleet of Fieschi. The Genoese have been +in a terrible state of panic. The Lord of Fiesole, who is our ally, +is menacing the city by land; the Stella Company of Condottieri, +which is in our pay, is also marching against them; and the news +that Pisani was close at hand seems to have frightened them out of +their senses. Their first step, as usual, has been to depose their +doge and choose another.</p> + +<p>"However, that is not the point. Pisani has written asking that +some ships with provisions and stores shall be sent out to him. +They are to go through the Straits of Messina and up the coast of +Italy until he meets them. His force is far too small for him to +think of making an attack upon Genoa. He will wait in the +neighbourhood of the city for a short time in hopes of Fieschi's +fleet returning. If it does not do so he will come down the coast +searching for it, and as he does not wish to put in port, he +desires the stores mentioned to be sent out to him.</p> + +<p>"I have placed the Bonito at their service, and have promised +that she shall be ready to sail tomorrow morning, if they will send +the stores on board today. Three other merchants placed ships at +their disposal, but these may not sail for a day or two. They are +particularly anxious that the Bonito shall start at once, as, in +addition to provisions, she will carry a store of javelins, arrows, +and other missiles of which there was not a sufficiency in the +arsenal when Pisani sailed.</p> + +<p>"You will have a strong party on board, as speed is required, +and the oars must be kept going until you join the fleet. Therefore +I shall place the crew of the Lido on board as well as the Bonito's +own complement, and this will bring the number up to a hundred men. +The captain has had an accident, and will not be able to go in +charge, therefore the Lido's captain will command. This time I +shall appoint you specifically second in command, as well as my +representative. Now get off on board as quickly as you can, for +there is enough to keep you at work, till tomorrow morning, to get +everything in readiness for a start. You had best run in and say +goodbye to my daughters, as it may be that you will not find time +to return before sailing. You can send your boy ashore for what +things you require. Matteo will accompany you."</p> + +<p>A few minutes later, Francis was on his way to the port, leaving +Giuseppi to charter a gondola and follow with his trunks. As Polani +had said, he was occupied without intermission until the time for +sailing next morning. The barges of the state kept coming alongside +with stores and provisions from the arsenal; while other boats +brought out the ship's stores; and Francis had to take a note of +all that came on board.</p> + +<p>The captain superintended the setting up of the rigging, and the +getting of the ship into working order; while the under officers +saw to the hoisting in and storing of the cargo. Gangs of men were +at work tarring the sides of the ship, for she had only two days +before returned from a trip to Spain; and a number of sailors were +unloading the cargo from one hatchway, while her fresh freight was +being taken in at the other.</p> + +<p>It seemed well nigh impossible that she could be ready to sail +at the hour named, but everyone worked with a will, and by daybreak +things were almost in order. Polani himself came down to the port +as soon as it was light, and expressed satisfaction at the work +which had been done; and half an hour afterwards the anchor was +weighed.</p> + +<p>Just as the sails had been hoisted, Matteo arrived.</p> + +<p>"You are only just in time, Matteo," Polani said. "Why did you +not come off yesterday and help?"</p> + +<p>"I was out," Matteo said, "when your message came, and only +returned just in time to go to the entertainment at the ducal +palace. I knew I could be of no use on board while they were only +getting in the cargo."</p> + +<p>"You will never be of any use on board, Matteo, if you go to +entertainments when there's work to be done. You could have taken +the marks on the bales as they came on board, just as well as +another. I suppose you thought that the dirt and dust wouldn't suit +a fine gentleman like you! Another time, unless you come on board +when sent for, and make yourself as useful as you can, while the +ship is fitting out and loading, you will not sail in her. One part +of the duty is just as important as the other, and seamanship does +not consist solely in strolling up and down the deck, and watching +a vessel sail for her destination."</p> + +<p>Matteo was abashed at the reproach, but soon recovered his usual +spirits after Polani had left, when the vessel was under way.</p> + +<p>"My cousin was rather in a sharp mood this morning," he said +with a laugh to Francis; "but really I did not think I could be of +any good, and the entertainment was a grand one. Everyone was +there, and I should have been very sorry to have missed it."</p> + +<p>"Everyone to his taste, Matteo. For my part, I would very much +rather have been at work here all night watching the cargo got in +and checking it off, than have been standing about doing nothing in +the palace."</p> + +<p>"Doing nothing!" Matteo repeated indignantly. "Why, I was +talking to someone the whole time I was there."</p> + +<p>"Talking about what, Matteo?"</p> + +<p>"The heat, and the music, and the costumes, and the last bit of +scandal at the Piazza."</p> + +<p>"I don't call that talk. I call it chatter. And now, Matteo, I +shall leave you to your own devices, for I am going to turn in and +get a sleep for a few hours."</p> + +<p>"You look as if you wanted it," Matteo said; "but I think that +you stand in even more need of a wash. You are grimy with dust. It +is just as well that my cousin Giulia did not come on board with +her father this morning, for the sight of your face would have +given her quite a shock, and would have dissipated any illusions +she may have had that you were a good-looking fellow."</p> + +<p>Francis went off to his cabin with a laugh, and took Matteo's +advice as to the wash before he turned in. In a few minutes he was +asleep, and did not wake until Giuseppi came to say that the midday +meal was just ready.</p> + +<p>The Bonito made a rapid voyage. The winds were light, and for +the most part favourable, and the twenty-four oars were kept going +night and day, the men relieving each other every two hours, so +that they had six hours' rest between the spells of rowing.</p> + +<p>When they rounded the southern point of Italy a sharp lookout +was kept for the fleet of Fieschi, but they passed through the +straits without catching sight of a single vessel carrying the +Genoese flag. The most vigilant watch was now kept for Pisani's +galleys, and they always anchored at the close of day, lest they +should pass him in the dark.</p> + +<p>Occasionally they overhauled a fishing boat, and endeavoured to +obtain news of the two squadrons; but beyond the fact that Fieschi +had been seen steering north some days before, and that no signs +had been seen of Pisani's returning fleet, they could learn +nothing.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch11">Chapter 11</a>: The Battle Of Antium.</h2> + +<p>"We are running very far north," the captain said on the 29th of +May. "We are near Antium now, and are getting into what we may call +Genoese waters. If anything has occurred to prevent Pisani carrying +out his intention of sailing back along this coast, or if he has +passed us on the way up, our position would be a hazardous one, for +as soon as he has rowed away the Genoese galleys will be on the +move again, and even if we do not fall in with Fieschi, we may be +snapped up by one of their cruisers."</p> + +<p>"It is rather risky, captain," Francis agreed; "but our orders +are distinct. We were to sail north till we met Pisani, and we must +do so till we are within sight of the walls of Genoa. If we then +see he is not lying off the port, we shall put about and make our +way back again."</p> + +<p>"Yes, if they give us the chance, Messer Francisco; but long +before we are sufficiently near to Genoa to make out whether Pisani +is lying off the port, they will see us from the hills, and will +send off a galley to bring us in. However, we must take our chance, +and if we get into a scrape I shall look to you confidently to get +us out again."</p> + +<p>"I should advise you not to count on that," Francis said, +laughing. "It is not always one gets such a lucky combination of +circumstances as we did at Girgenti."</p> + +<p>At last, they obtained news from a fishing boat that Fieschi's +fleet had passed, going northward, on the previous day, and was now +lying in the bay of Antium. As Antium lay but a few miles north, +they held a consultation as to the best method to pursue. If they +sailed on there was a risk of capture; but that risk did not appear +to be very great. The Genoese admiral would not expect to find a +Venetian merchant ship so near to Genoa, and they might be able to +pass without being interfered with. On the other hand, news might +possibly have come of the departure of store ships from Venice for +Pisani's fleet, and in that case a strict lookout would certainly +be kept, and it would be necessary to keep so far to sea as to be +out of sight of the Genoese; but in that case there would be a risk +of their missing Pisani's fleet on the way down.</p> + +<p>"I think," the captain said, after a long debate, "that we had +better anchor here close under the shore tonight. If I am not +mistaken, we shall have a gale in the morning. I do not like the +look of the sky. Tomorrow we shall see how the weather is, and can +then come to a decision."</p> + +<p>By morning, as the captain had predicted, the wind was blowing +strongly, and a heavy sea was running, and it was agreed to keep +along under the lee of the shore until they could obtain a view of +the Bay of Antium, and see if the fleet of Fieschi was still there. +If so, they would tack and run back some distance, and make +straight out to sea, so as to pass along four or five miles from +the shore, as it would be unlikely in the extreme that the Genoese +admiral would send a galley out to overhaul a passing ship in such +weather.</p> + +<p>They sailed along till they neared the slight depression known +as the Bay of Antium, and then bore farther out to sea. Suddenly a +fleet was seen running down the coast at some distance away.</p> + +<p>"'Bout ship," the captain cried. "The Genoese have been cruising +further north, and are coming down the coast. In such weather as +this, the Bonito ought to be able to get away from them."</p> + +<p>"It may be Pisani's fleet," Francis said, as the ship was put +round.</p> + +<p>"It is possible," the captain agreed; "but we cannot run the +risk of stopping until we make inquiries."</p> + +<p>"No, captain; but, at least, if we run a mile or so out to sea, +we should be able to see round the point, and discover whether +Fieschi's galleys are there."</p> + +<p>The captain assented. The vessel's head was turned from the +land. In ten minutes there was a joyous shout on board the Bonito, +for the Genoese fleet was seen lying in the bay. The distant fleet +must then form that of Pisani.</p> + +<p>"See!" Francis exclaimed. "The Genoese have just caught sight of +them, and are hoisting sail. They are either going to meet them or +to run away. Our vessels are the most numerous; but no, there is +not much difference. Pisani has fourteen ships, but some must be +lagging behind, or have been lost. How many do you make them out to +be, captain?"</p> + +<p>"I think there are only nine," the captain answered, "and that +is just the number of the Genoese."</p> + +<p>"Then Fieschi will fight, if he is not a coward," Matteo said; +"but, in that case, why are they making out to sea?"</p> + +<p>"Fieschi may not care to be attacked at anchor," the captain +replied. "That would give all the advantage to us. Besides, if they +were beaten there would be but little chance of any of them +escaping. No, he is right to make out to sea, but blowing as it is, +it will be next to impossible for him to fight there. Two vessels +could hardly get alongside to board in such a sea as this. I expect +Fieschi thinks that we shall never attack him in such a storm; but +Pisani would fight if it were a hurricane."</p> + +<p>It did indeed seem almost impossible to fight in such a sea. The +Bonito was rolling, gunwale under. Her sail had been reduced to its +smallest proportions, and yet, when the squalls struck her she was +laid completely over on her side. But the rival admirals were too +anxious to fight to be deterred by the difficulty, and both were +bent upon bringing on an action at once.</p> + +<p>"I would give anything to be on board one of our galleys," +Matteo said. "It is horrible standing here doing nothing, when such +a fight as this is going to begin."</p> + +<p>"Cannot we edge down towards them, captain?" Francis asked. "I +do not mean that we should take part in the fight, for we have but +a hundred men, and the galleys must each carry at least three times +as many. Still, we might be near enough to see something, and +perhaps to give succour to any disabled ship that drops out of the +fight."</p> + +<p>"I will do so if you like, Messer Francisco," the captain said. +"If you will take the responsibility. But if our side gets the +worst of it, you must remember that the Bonito may be +captured."</p> + +<p>"I don't think there's much chance of Pisani being beaten by an +enemy no stronger than himself," Francis said; "and even if they +should be victorious, the Genoese will certainly have enough on +their hands, with repairing damages and securing prisoners, to +think of setting off in chase of a ship like ours."</p> + +<p>"That is true enough," the captain agreed, for he was indeed as +anxious as Francis and Matteo to witness the struggle.</p> + +<p>The vessels on both sides were under canvas, for it was +impossible to row in such a sea. As soon as they approached each +other, both fleets broke up, and the vessels each singling an +opponent out, the combat began. It was a singular one, and differed +widely from ordinary sea fights of the time, in which the +combatants always tried to grapple with their enemies and carry +them by boarding. This was almost impossible now, for it seemed +that the vessels would be dashed in pieces like eggshells were they +to strike each other. Clouds of missiles were poured from one to +the other. The archers plied their bows. Great machines hurled +javelins and big stones, and the crash of the blows of the latter, +against the sides of the ships, sounded even above the noise of the +wind and waves, and the shouting of the combatants. As for the +cannon with which all the galleys were armed, they were far too +cumbrous and unmanageable to be worked in such weather. Sometimes +one vessel, lifted on the crest of a wave while its opponent lay in +a hollow, swept its decks with terrible effect; while a few seconds +later the advantage was on the other side.</p> + +<p>For a long time, neither party seemed to gain any advantage. +Great numbers were killed on both sides, but victory did not +incline either way, until the mast of one of the Venetian galleys +was struck by a heavy stone and went over the side. She at once +fell out of the line of the battle, her opponent keeping close to +her, pouring in volumes of missiles, while the sea, taking her on +the broad side, washed numbers of her crew overboard. Her opponent, +seeing that she was altogether helpless, left her to be taken +possession of afterwards, and made for Pisani's galley, which was +distinguished by its flag at the masthead, and was maintaining a +desperate conflict with the galley of Fieschi.</p> + +<p>The admiral's ship was now swept with missiles from both sides, +and when his adversaries saw that his crew was greatly weakened, +they prepared to close, in spite of the state of the sea. If Pisani +himself could be captured, there would remain but seven Venetian +ships to the nine Genoese, and victory was certain.</p> + +<p>The captain of the Bonito had lashed together some heavy spars +and thrown them overboard, having fastened a strong rope to them, +and was riding head to the waves by means of this sea anchor, at a +distance of about half a mile from the conflict. A cry of grief and +rage had arisen when the crew saw that one of their galleys was +disabled, and their excitement became intense when they saw the +unequal struggle which Pisani was maintaining.</p> + +<p>"They are preparing to board, captain," Francis said. "We must +go to the admiral's aid. If his ship is captured, the battle is +lost."</p> + +<p>"I am ready, Messer Francisco, if you authorize me."</p> + +<p>"Certainly I do," Francis said. "The loss or capture of the +Bonito is as nothing in comparison to the importance of saving +Pisani."</p> + +<p>The captain gave the order for the hawser to be cut, and the +sail hoisted. A cheer broke from the crew as they saw what was to +be done. Their arms had been served out at the beginning of the +contest, and they now seized them, and gathered in readiness to +take part in the fight.</p> + +<p>The two Genoese galleys had thrown their grapnels and made fast, +one on each side of Pisani's galley. The bulwarks were stove in and +splintered as the vessels rolled, and the rigging of the three +ships became entangled. The Genoese sprang on to the deck of +Pisani's galley, with shouts of triumph, but they were met by the +admiral himself, wielding a mighty battleaxe, and the survivors of +his crew.</p> + +<p>The combat was still raging when the Bonito sailed swiftly up. +Her sails were lowered as she came alongside, and she was lashed to +one of the galleys. But this manoeuvre was not performed without +loss. As she approached, with the Venetian flag flying at her +masthead, the Genoese archers on the poop of the galley, who had +hitherto been pouring their missiles among Pisani's men, turned +round and opened fire upon this new foe. Their arrows did far more +execution here than they had done among the armour clad soldiers of +the state. The captain fell dead with an arrow which struck him +full in the throat, and ten or twelve of the sailors fell on the +deck beside him.</p> + +<p>"Pour in one volley," Francis shouted; "then throw down your +bows, and take to your axes and follow me."</p> + +<p>The instant the vessel was lashed, Francis sprang on to the deck +of the galley. Matteo was by his side, Giuseppi just behind, and +the whole crew followed. Climbing first upon the poop, they fell +upon the archers, who, after a short struggle, were cut down; then, +descending again to the waist of the galley, they leaped on to the +deck of Pisani's ship, and fell upon the rear of the Genoese.</p> + +<p>These were taken completely by surprise. Absorbed in the +struggle in which they were engaged, they had noticed neither the +approach of the Bonito, nor the struggle on board their own galley, +and supposed that another of the Venetian warships had come up to +the assistance of their admiral.</p> + +<p>Taken then by surprise, and finding themselves thus between two +bands of foes, they fought irresolutely, and the crew of the +Bonito, with their heavy axes, cut down numbers of them, and +fighting their way through the mass, joined the diminished force of +Pisani.</p> + +<p>The admiral shouted the battle cry of "Saint Mark!" His +followers, who had begun to give way to despair, rallied at the +arrival of this unlooked-for reinforcement, and the whole fell upon +the Genoese with fury. The latter fought stoutly and steadily now, +animated by the voice and example of Fieschi himself; but their +assurance of victory was gone, and they were gradually beaten back +to the deck of their admiral's ship. Here they made desperate +efforts to cut the lashings and free the vessel; but the yards had +got interlocked and the rigging entangled, and the Venetians sprang +on to the deck of the ship, and renewed the conflict there.</p> + +<p>For some time the struggle was doubtful. The Genoese had still +the advantage in numbers, but they were disheartened at the +success, which they had deemed certain, having been so suddenly and +unexpectedly snatched from their grasp.</p> + +<p>The presence of Pisani, in itself, doubled the strength of the +Venetians. He was the most popular of their commanders, and each +strove to imitate the example which he set them.</p> + +<p>After ten minutes' hard fighting, the result was no longer +doubtful. Many of the Genoese ran below. Others threw down their +arms, and their admiral, at last, seeing further resistance was +hopeless, lowered his sword and surrendered.</p> + +<p>No sooner had resistance ceased than Pisani turned to Francis, +who had been fighting by his side:</p> + +<p>"I thank you, in the name of myself and the republic," he said. +"Where you have sprung from, or how you came here, I know not. You +seemed to me to have fallen from heaven to our assistance, just at +the moment when all was lost. Who are you? I seem to know your +face, though I cannot recall where I have seen it."</p> + +<p>"I am Francis Hammond, Messer Pisani. I had the honour of seeing +you at the house of my patron, Signor Polani, and you were good +enough to offer to take me with you to sea."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I remember now!" Pisani said. "But how came you here?"</p> + +<p>"I came in the Bonito, one of Polani's ships. She is lying +outside the farther of the Venetian galleys. We bring from Venice +some of the stores for which you sent. We were lying off, watching +the battle, until we saw that you were sore beset and in need of +help, and could then no longer remain inactive. Our captain was +killed by an arrow as we ranged up alongside of the galley, and I +am now in command. This is my friend, Matteo Giustiniani, a +volunteer on board the Bonito."</p> + +<p>"I remember you, Master Matteo," Pisani said, as he shook him by +the hand. "I have seen you often at your father's house. I shall +have to give him a good account of you, for I saw you fighting +bravely.</p> + +<p>"But we will talk more of this afterwards. We must set to work +to separate the galleys, or we shall have them grinding each other +to pieces. Then we must hasten to the assistance of our +friends."</p> + +<p>The Genoese prisoners were all fastened below, and the Venetians +then set to work to cut the lashings and free the rigging of the +ships. Francis kept only twenty men on board the Bonito. The +remainder were distributed between the two captured Genoese +galleys, and the admiral turned his attention to the battle.</p> + +<p>But it was already almost over. The sight of the Venetian flag, +at the mastheads of the admiral's ship and the other galley, struck +dismay into the Genoese. Five of their ships immediately hoisted +all canvas and made off, while the other two, surrounded by the +Venetian galleys, hauled down their flags.</p> + +<p>The battle had been a sanguinary one, and but eight hundred men +were found alive on board the four galleys captured. The fight is +known in history as the battle of Porto d'Anzo. The struggle had +lasted nearly the whole day, and it was growing dark when the +Venetian fleet, with their prizes, anchored under shelter of the +land.</p> + +<p>All night long the work of attending upon the wounded went on, +and it was daybreak before the wearied crews lay down for repose. +In the afternoon, Pisani hoisted a signal for the captains of the +galleys to come on board; and in their presence he formally thanked +Francis, in the name of the republic, for the aid he had afforded +him at the most critical moment. Had it not been for that aid, he +acknowledged that he and his crew must have succumbed, and the +victory would assuredly have fallen to the Genoese.</p> + +<p>After the meeting was over he took Francis into his cabin, and +again offered him a post in his own ship.</p> + +<p>"Were your merit properly rewarded," he said, "I would appoint +you at once to the command of a galley; but to do so would do you +no service, for it would excite against you the jealousy of all the +young nobles in the fleet. Besides, you are so young, that although +the council at home cannot but acknowledge the vastness of the +service you have rendered, they might make your age an excuse for +refusing to confirm the appointment; but if you like to come as my +third officer, I can promise you that you shall have rapid +promotion, and speedily be in command of a galley. We Venetians +have no prejudice against foreigners. They hold very high commands, +and, indeed, our armies in the field are frequently commanded by +foreign captains."</p> + +<p>Francis thanked the admiral heartily for his offer, but said +that his father's wishes, and his own, led him to adopt the life of +a merchant, and that, under the patronage of Messer Polani, his +prospects were so good that he would not exchange them, even for a +command under the state of Venice.</p> + +<p>"You are quite right, lad," the admiral said. "All governments +are ungrateful, and republics most of all. Where all are supposed +to be equal, there is ever envy and jealousy against one who rises +above the rest. The multitude is fickle and easily led; and the +first change of fortune, however slight, is seized upon by enemies +as a cause of complaint, and the popular hero of today may be an +exile tomorrow. Like enough I shall see the inside of a Venetian +prison some day."</p> + +<p>"Impossible, signor!" Francis exclaimed. "The people would tear +to pieces anyone who ventured to malign you."</p> + +<p>"Just at present, my lad; just at present. But I know my +countrymen. They are not as light hearted and fickle as those of +Genoa; but they are easily led, and will shout 'Abasso!' as easily +as 'Viva!' Time will show. I was within an ace of being defeated +today; and you may not be close at hand to come to my rescue next +time. And now to business.</p> + +<p>"Tomorrow morning I will set the crews to get out your stores, +and distribute them as required, and will place four hundred +prisoners in your hold, and you shall carry them to Venice with my +despatches announcing the victory. The other four hundred Genoese I +shall send, in the galley that was dismasted yesterday, to Candia, +to be imprisoned there. I shall send prize crews home in the +galleys we have captured; and as soon as they are refitted and +manned, and rejoin me, I shall sail in search of Doria and his +fleet. I shall first cruise up the Adriatic, in case he may have +gone that way to threaten Venice, and I can the more easily receive +such reinforcements as may have been prepared for me."</p> + +<p>The following day was spent in unloading the vessel. This was +accomplished by nightfall. The prisoners were then put on board. +Francis at once ordered sail to be set, and the Bonito was started +on her homeward voyage.</p> + +<p>As soon as the Bonito was signalled in sight, Signor Polani went +down to the port to meet her, to ascertain where she had fallen in +with the fleet, for there was great anxiety in Venice, as no news +had been received from Pisani for more than ten days. The vessel +had just passed through the entrance between the islands, when the +gondola, with her owner, was seen approaching. Francis went to the +gangway to receive him.</p> + +<p>"Why, what has happened, Francisco?" Polani asked, as the boat +neared the side of the ship. "Half your bulwark is carried away, +and the whole side of the ship is scraped and scored. She looks as +if she had been rubbing against a rock."</p> + +<p>"Not quite so bad as that, Messer Polani. She has been grinding +against a Genoese galley."</p> + +<p>"Against a Genoese galley!" the merchant repeated in surprise, +stopping in his passage up the rope ladder, which had been lowered +for him. "Why, how is that? But never mind that now. First tell me +what is the news from the fleet?"</p> + +<p>"There is great news," Francis replied. "The admiral fell in +with Fieschi off Antium. There were nine ships on each side, and +the battle took place in a storm. We were victorious, and captured +four of the Genoese galleys, with Fieschi himself and eight hundred +prisoners. The rest fled. Fieschi is now in my cabin, and four +hundred prisoners in the hold."</p> + +<p>"This is indeed great news," the merchant said, "and will be an +immense relief to Venice. We were getting very anxious, for had +Pisani been defeated, there was nothing to prevent the Genoese +ravaging our coasts, and even assailing Venice itself. But where is +the captain?"</p> + +<p>"I regret to say, sir, that he has been killed, as well as +twenty-seven of the sailors, and many of the others are more or +less severely wounded. I am the bearer of despatches from the +admiral to the council."</p> + +<p>"Then get into my gondola, and come along at once," Polani said. +"I deeply regret the death of the captain and sailors. You shall +tell me all about it as we come along. We must not delay a moment +in carrying this great news ashore. Have you got the +despatches?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, signor. I put them into my doublet when I saw you +approaching, thinking that you would probably wish me to take them +on shore at once."</p> + +<p>"And now tell me all about the battle," the merchant said as +soon as they had taken their seats in the gondola. "You say there +were nine ships on either side. Pisani sailed away with fourteen. +Has he lost the remainder?"</p> + +<p>"They came up next day," Francis replied. "The fleet was in a +port north of Antium when the news came that Fieschi's fleet was +there. Five of the galleys had been dismantled, and were under +repair, and Pisani would not wait for them to be got into fighting +order, as he was afraid lest Fieschi might weigh anchor and escape +if he delayed an hour. He learned that the Genoese had nine ships +with him, and as he had himself this number ready for sea, he +sailed at once.</p> + +<p>"The weather was stormy, and the sea very high, when he appeared +within sight of Antium. Fieschi sailed boldly out to meet him. The +battle lasted all day, for it was next to impossible to board; but +in the end, as I say, four Genoese galleys surrendered and the rest +fled. It was a terrible sight; for it seemed at every moment as if +the waves would hurl the vessels against each other, and so break +them into fragments; but in no case did such an accident +happen."</p> + +<p>"Why, you speak as if you saw it, Francisco! Had you joined the +admiral before the battle took place?"</p> + +<p>"No, signor. We arrived near Antium on the evening before the +fight, and heard of Fieschi's presence there. Therefore we anchored +south of the promontory. In the morning we put out, intending to +sail well out to sea and so pass the Genoese, who were not likely, +in such weather, to put out to question a sail passing in the +distance; but as we made off from land we saw Pisani's fleet +approaching. Then, as Fieschi put to sea and we saw that the battle +was imminent, there was nothing for us to do but to lie to, and +wait for the battle to be over, before we delivered our stores, +having little doubt that Pisani would be victorious."</p> + +<p>"Then had the battle gone the other way," the merchant said, +"the Bonito at the present moment would probably be lying a prize +in the harbour of Genoa!"</p> + +<p>"We did not lose sight of the probability of that, signor, but +thought that, if the Genoese should gain a victory, they would be +too busy with their prizes and prisoners, if not too crippled, to +pursue us, and we reckoned that in such weather the Bonito would be +able to sail quite as fast as any of the Genoese."</p> + +<p>"And now, tell me about your affairs, Francisco. Where was it +you fell in with the Genoese galley, and by what miracle did you +get off?"</p> + +<p>"It was in the battle, sir. One of the Venetian galleys had +dropped out of the fight disabled, and its opponent went to the +assistance of their admiral's ship, which was engaged with Pisani. +They attempted to board him on both sides, and, seeing that he was +in great peril, and that if his ship was taken the battle would be +as bad as lost, we thought that you yourself would approve of our +going to his assistance. This we did, and engaged one of their +galleys; and, as her crew were occupied with the admiral, we took +them by surprise, and created such a diversion that he succeeded, +with what assistance we could give him, in capturing both his +opponents."</p> + +<p>"That was done well indeed," Polani said warmly. "It was a risky +matter, indeed, for you, with sailors unprotected by armour, to +enter into a combat with the iron-clad soldiers of Genoa.</p> + +<p>"And so the captain and twenty-seven of the men were killed! You +must have had some brisk fighting!"</p> + +<p>"The captain, and many of the men, were shot by the Genoese +archers as we ranged up alongside their vessel. The others were +killed in hand-to-hand fighting."</p> + +<p>"And my cousin Matteo, what has become of him?" Polani asked +suddenly. "I trust he is not among the killed!"</p> + +<p>"He is unharmed," Francis replied. "He fought gallantly, and the +admiral, the next day, offered to take him on board his own ship, +many of the volunteers serving on board having been killed. Matteo, +of course, accepted the offer."</p> + +<p>"He would have done better to have stayed on board my ship for +another two years," Polani said, "and learned his business. He +would have made a far better sailor than he can ever become on +board a state galley; but I never expected him to stick to it. He +has no earnestness of purpose, and is too particular about his +dress to care about the rough life of a real seaman."</p> + +<p>"He has plenty of courage, sir, and I have always found him a +staunch friend."</p> + +<p>"No doubt he has courage," the merchant said. "He comes of good +blood and could hardly be a coward. I think he is a good-hearted +lad, too, and will, I have no doubt, make a brave commander of a +galley; but more than that Matteo is never likely to become."</p> + +<p>"Your daughters are well, I hope?" Francis asked.</p> + +<p>"Quite well; but you will not find them at home--they sailed +three days ago, in the Lido, for Corfu. They are going to stay for +a time at my villa there. That affair of last year shook them both, +and I thought it better that they should go away for a change--the +hot months here are trying, and often unhealthy. I will go over +myself next week to be with them."</p> + +<p>They were now approaching the Piazzetta, and Polani shouted out, +to various acquaintances he met in passing gondolas, the news that +Pisani had gained a great victory, and had captured the Genoese +admiral with four of his galleys. The gondolas at once changed +their course, and accompanied them, to gather further details of +the fight. The news was shouted to other passing boats, and by the +time they reached the steps of the Piazzetta, a throng was round +them.</p> + +<p>Those on shore shouted out the news, and it spread rapidly from +mouth to mouth. The shopkeepers left their stores, and the loungers +on the Piazzetta ran up, and it was with difficulty that Polani and +Francis could make their way, through the shouting and excited +crowd, to the entrance of the ducal palace.</p> + +<p>Polani at once led Francis to the doge, to whom he gave an +account of the action. Messengers were immediately despatched to +some of the members of the council, for it was to them that the +despatches had to be delivered. As soon as a sufficient number to +transact the business had arrived at the palace, the doge himself +led Francis to the council chamber.</p> + +<p>"Is the news that we heard, shouted in the streets as we came +thither, true, your highness?" one of the councillors asked as they +entered. "That our fleet has gained a victory over the +Genoese?"</p> + +<p>"I am happy to say that it is quite true; but this young +gentleman is the bearer of despatches from the admiral, and these +will doubtless give us all particulars."</p> + +<p>"Admiral Pisani has chosen a strange messenger for so important +a despatch," one of the party hostile to the admiral said. "It is +usual to send despatches of this kind by a trusted officer, and I +do not think it respectful, either to the council or the republic, +to send home the news of a victory by a lad like this."</p> + +<p>"The admiral apparently chose this young gentleman because, +owing to the death of his captain, he was in command of the ship +which Messer Polani placed at the service of the republic, and +which was present at the fight. The admiral intended, as I hear, to +set out at once in search of the fleet of Doria, and doubtless did +not wish to weaken himself by despatching a state galley with the +news. But perhaps he may explain the matter in his despatches."</p> + +<p>Several other councillors had by this time arrived, and the +despatches were opened. The admiral's account of the engagement was +brief, for he was fonder of the sword than the pen. He stated that, +having obtained news that Fieschi's fleet was at anchor under the +promontory of Antium, he sailed thither with nine ships, these +being all that were at the moment fit to take to sea; that Fieschi +had sailed out to meet him, and that an engagement had taken place +in the storm, which prevented the ships from pursuing their usual +tactics, and compelled them to fight with missiles at a distance. +The despatch then went on:</p> + +<p>"We fought all day, and the upshot of it was, we captured four +of their galleys, the admiral himself, and eight hundred prisoners. +Fortunately it is unnecessary for me to give your seignory the +details of the fighting, as these can be furnished you by Messer +Francisco Hammond, who will hand you these despatches. He was a +witness of the action on the Bonito, which had that morning arrived +at Antium with some of the stores you despatched me. I have +selected this young gentleman as the bearer of these despatches, +because it is to him I entirely owe it that I am not at the present +moment a prisoner in Genoa, and to him the republic owes that we +yesterday won a victory.</p> + +<p>"I was attacked by Fieschi and by another galley, and, in spite +of the weather, they cast grapnels on to my ship and boarded me. I +had already lost half of my crew by their missiles, and things were +going very badly with us, when the Bonito came up to our +assistance, and grappled with one of the galleys. Her captain was +killed, but Messer Hammond--of whom Polani has so high an opinion +that he had appointed him second in command--led his men to my +rescue. They boarded the galley and slew those who remained on +board, and then, crossing on to my ship, fell upon the rear of the +Genoese who were pressing us backwards. His sailors, undefended as +they were by armour, fought like demons with their axes, and, led +by Messer Hammond, cut their way through the enemy and joined +me.</p> + +<p>"This reinforcement gave fresh strength and spirit to my men, +who had a minute before thought that all was lost. Together we fell +upon the Genoese, before they could recover from their surprise, +beat them back into their admiral's ship, and following them there +forced them to surrender. Messer Hammond fought by my side, and +although but a lad in years, he showed himself a sturdy +man-at-arms, and behaved with a coolness and bravery beyond praise. +I hereby recommend him to your gracious consideration, for +assuredly to him it is due that it is I, and not Fieschi, who is +writing to announce a victory."</p> + +<p>A murmur of surprise from the councillors greeted the reading of +this portion of the letter. When it was concluded, the doge was the +first to speak.</p> + +<p>"You have indeed deserved well of the republic, Messer Hammond, +for we know that Admiral Pisani is not one to give undue praise, or +to exaggerate in aught.</p> + +<p>"This is news to me, signors, as well as to you, for in his +narrative to me of the events of the fight, he passed over his own +share in it, though Messer Polani, who accompanied him, did say +that his ship had taken some part in the fight, and that the +captain and twenty-seven men had been killed.</p> + +<p>"Now, young sir, as the admiral has referred us to you for a +detailed narrative of the battle, we will thank you to tell us all +you witnessed, omitting no detail of the occurrences."</p> + +<p>Francis accordingly gave a full account of the action, and gave +great praise to his crew for the valour with which they had fought +against the heavy armed Genoese. When he had concluded the doge +said:</p> + +<p>"We thank you for your narrative, Messer Hammond, as well as for +the great service you have rendered the state. Will you now leave +us, as we have much to debate on regarding this and other matters, +and to arrange for the reinforcements for which, I see by his +letter, the admiral asks.</p> + +<p>"Will you ask Messer Polani to remain in attendance for a while, +as we wish to consult with him as to ships and other matters? As to +yourself, we shall ask you to come before us again shortly."</p> + +<p>After Francis had left, the council first voted that five ducats +should be given to every man of the crew of the Bonito, and that +the widows of those who had been slain should be provided for, at +the expense of the state. They deferred the question as to the +honours which should be conferred upon Francis, until they had +consulted Polani.</p> + +<p>State barges were at once sent off to bring in the prisoners +from the ship, and preparations made for their accommodation, for +Venice always treated prisoners taken in war with the greatest +kindness, an example which Genoa was very far from following.</p> + +<p>Then Polani was sent for, and the question of stores and ships +gone into. Orders were issued for redoubled activity in the +arsenal, and it was arranged that several ships, belonging to +Polani and others, should be at once purchased for the service of +the state.</p> + +<p>Then they asked him for his opinion as to the reward which +should be given to Francis. Upon the merchant expressing his +ignorance of any special service his young friend had rendered, the +passage from Pisani's letter relating to him was read out.</p> + +<p>"The lad is as modest as he is brave," the merchant said, "for +although, of course, he told me that the ship had taken some part +in the fight, and had done what it could to assist the admiral, in +which service the captain and twenty-seven men had lost their +lives, I had no idea of the real nature of the encounter. I feel +very proud of the service he has rendered the state, for he has +rendered me as a private individual no less important service, and +I regard him as my adopted son, and my future partner in my +business. Such being the case, signors, he needs no gift of money +from the state."</p> + +<p>"He has not, of course, being still a minor, taken up his papers +of naturalization as a citizen?" the doge said.</p> + +<p>"No, your highness, nor is it his intention to do so. I spoke to +him on the subject once, and he said that, although he regarded +Venice with affection, and would at all times do everything in his +power for the state, he could not renounce his birthplace, as an +Englishman, by taking an oath of allegiance to another state, and +that probably he should after a time return to his native country. +I pointed out to him that, although foreigners were given every +facility for trade in Venice, it would be a grievous disadvantage +to him in the islands, and especially with countries such as Egypt, +the Turks, and the Eastern empire, with whom we had treaties; as, +unless he were a Venetian, he would be unable to trade with +them.</p> + +<p>"He fully saw the force of my argument, but persisted in his +determination. If you ask my opinion, therefore, signors, and you +do not think the honour too great, I would suggest that the highest +and most acceptable honour that could be bestowed upon him, would +be that which you have at various times conferred upon foreign +personages of distinction, namely, to grant him the freedom of +Venice, and inscribe his name upon the list of her citizens, +without requiring of him the renunciation of his own country, or +the taking the oath of allegiance."</p> + +<p>"The honour is assuredly a great and exceptional one," the doge +said, "but so is the service that he has rendered. He has converted +what would have been a defeat into a victory, and has saved Venice +from a grave peril.</p> + +<p>"Will you retire for a few minutes, signor, and we will then +announce to you the result of our deliberations on the matter."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch12">Chapter 12</a>: In Mocenigo's Power.</h2> + +<p>It was fully an hour before Polani was recalled to the council +chamber. He saw at once, by the flushed and angry faces of some of +the council, that the debate had been a hot one. At this he was not +surprised, for he knew that the friends and connections of Ruggiero +Mocenigo would vehemently oppose the suggestion he had made.</p> + +<p>The doge announced the decision.</p> + +<p>"The council thank you for your suggestion, Signor Polani, and +have resolved, by a majority, to confer upon Messer Francisco +Hammond the high honour of placing his name upon the list of the +citizens of Venice, without requiring from him the oaths of +allegiance to the state. As such an honour has never before been +conferred, save upon personages of the highest rank, it will be a +proof of the gratitude which Venice feels towards one who has done +her such distinguished service. The decree to that effect will be +published tomorrow."</p> + +<p>The merchant retired, highly gratified. The honour was a great +and signal one, and the material advantages considerable. The fact +that Francis was a foreigner had been the sole obstacle which had +presented itself to him, in associating him with his business, for +it would prevent Francis from trading personally with any of the +countries in which Venetian citizens enjoyed special +advantages.</p> + +<p>Francis was immensely gratified, when he heard from the merchant +of the honour to be conferred upon him. It was of all others the +reward he would have selected, had a free choice been given him, +but it was so great and unusual an honour, that he could indeed +scarcely credit it when the merchant told him the result of his +interviews with the council. The difficulty which his being a +foreigner would throw in the way of his career as a merchant in +Eastern waters, had been frequently in his mind, and would, he +foresaw, greatly lessen his usefulness, but that he should be able +to obtain naturalization, without renouncing his allegiance to +England, he had never even hoped.</p> + +<p>"It is a very high honour, doubtless," Polani said, "but no whit +higher than you deserve. Besides, after all, it costs Venice +nothing, and money is scarce at present. At any rate, I can +congratulate myself as well as you, for I foresaw many difficulties +in our way. Although the ships carrying the Venetian flag could +enter the ports of all countries trading with us, you would +personally be liable to arrest, at any time, on being denounced as +not being a native of Venice, which you assuredly would be by my +rivals in trade."</p> + +<p>The next day a bulletin was published, giving the substance of +Pisani's despatch, and announcing that, in token of the gratitude +of the republic for the great service he had rendered, Messer +Hammond would be at once granted the freedom of Venice, and his +name inserted on the list of her citizens.</p> + +<p>During these two days the delight of Venice at the news of the +victory had been extreme. The houses had been decorated with flags, +and the bells of all the churches had peeled out joyously. Crowds +assembled round the Polani Palace, and insisted upon Francis making +his appearance, when they greeted him with tremendous shouts of +applause. Upon the evening of the second day he said to Polani:</p> + +<p>"Have you any ship fit for sea, signor, because if so, I pray +you to send me away, no matter where. I cannot stand this. Since +the decree was published, this morning, I have not had a moment's +peace, and it is too absurd, when I did no more than any sailor on +board the ship. If it went on, I should very soon be heartily sorry +I ever interfered on behalf of the admiral."</p> + +<p>The merchant smiled.</p> + +<p>"I have half promised to take you with me to the reception at +the Persanis' this evening, and have had a dozen requests of a +similar nature for every night this week and next."</p> + +<p>"Then, if you have no ship ready, signor, I will charter a +fishing boat, engage a couple of men, and go off for a fortnight. +By the end of that time something fresh will have happened."</p> + +<p>"I can send you off, if you really wish it, Francisco, the first +thing tomorrow morning. I am despatching a small craft with a +message to my agent in Corfu, and with letters for my daughters. +They will be delighted to see you, and indeed, I shall be glad to +know that you are with them, until I can wind up several affairs +which I have in hand, and join them myself. She is fast, and you +should be at Corfu in eight-and-forty hours after sailing."</p> + +<p>Francis gladly embraced the offer, and started the next morning. +The vessel was a small one, designed either to sail or row. Her +crew consisted of twenty men, who rowed sixteen sweeps when the +wind was light or unfavourable. She was an open boat, except that +she was decked at each end, a small cabin being formed aft for the +captain, and any passengers there might be on board, while the crew +stowed themselves in the little forecastle.</p> + +<p>When the boat was halfway across, a sail was seen approaching, +and the captain recognized her as one of Polani's vessels.</p> + +<p>"In that case," Francis said, "we may as well direct our course +so as to pass them within hailing distance. When you approach them, +hoist the Polani flag, and signal to them to lay to."</p> + +<p>This was done, and the two craft brought up within thirty yards +of each other. The captain appeared at the side of the vessel, and +doffed his cap when he recognized Francis.</p> + +<p>"Have you any news from the East?" the latter asked.</p> + +<p>"But little, signor. A few Genoese pirates are among the +islands, and are reported to have made some captures, but I have +seen none. There is nothing new from Constantinople. No fresh +attempt has been made by the emperor to recapture Tenedos."</p> + +<p>"Did you touch at Corfu on your way back?"</p> + +<p>"I left there yesterday, signor. A strange craft has been +reported as having been seen on the coast. She carries no flag, but +from her appearance she is judged to be a Moor."</p> + +<p>"But we are at peace with the Moors," Francis said, "and it is +years since they ventured on any depredations, excepting on their +own waters."</p> + +<p>"That is so, signor, and I only tell you what was the report at +Corfu. She appeared to be a swift craft, rowing a great many oars. +Her movements certainly seem mysterious, as she has several times +appeared off the coast. Two vessels which sailed from Cyprus, and +were to have touched at Corfu, had not arrived there when I left, +and they say that several others are overdue. I do not say that has +anything to do with the strange galley, but it is the general +opinion in Corfu that it has something to do with it, and I am the +bearer of letters from the governor to the seignory, praying that +two or three war ships may at once be sent down to the island."</p> + +<p>"It looks strange, certainly," Francis said; "but I cannot +believe that any Moorish pirates would be so daring as to come up +into Venetian waters."</p> + +<p>"I should not have thought so either, signor; but it may be +that, knowing there is war between Venice and Genoa, and that the +state galleys of the republics, instead of being scattered over the +seas, are now collected in fleets, and thinking only of fighting +each other, they might consider it a good opportunity for picking +prizes."</p> + +<p>"It is a good opportunity, certainly," Francis said; "but they +would know that Venice would, sooner or later, reckon with them; +and would demand a four-fold indemnity for any losses her merchants +may have suffered.</p> + +<p>"However, I will not detain you longer. Will you tell Signor +Polani that you met us, and that we were making good progress, and +hoped to reach Corfu some time tomorrow?"</p> + +<p>"This is a curious thing about this galley," the captain of the +boat said to Francis, as the men again dipped their oars into the +water, and the boat once more proceeded on the way.</p> + +<p>"It is much more likely to be a Genoese pirate than a Moor," +Francis said. "They may have purposely altered their rig a little, +in order to deceive vessels who may sight them. It is very many +years since any Moorish craft have been bold enough to commit acts +of piracy on this side of Sicily. However, we must hope that we +shall not fall in with her, and if we see anything answering to her +description we will give it a wide berth. Besides, it is hardly +likely they would interfere with so small a craft as ours, for they +would be sure we should be carrying no cargo of any great +value."</p> + +<p>"Twenty Christian slaves would fetch money among the Moors," the +captain said. "Let us hope we shall see nothing of them; for we +should have no chance of resistance against such a craft, and she +would go two feet to our one."</p> + +<p>The next morning Francis was aroused by a hurried summons from +the captain. Half awake, and wondering what could be the cause of +the call, for the boat lay motionless on the water, he hurried out +from the little cabin. Day had just broken, the sky was aglow with +ruddy light in the east.</p> + +<p>"Look there, signor!" the captain said, pointing to the south. +"The watch made them out a quarter of an hour since, but, thinking +nothing of it, they did not call me. What do you think of +that?"</p> + +<p>Two vessels were lying in close proximity to each other, at a +distance of about two miles from the boat. One of them was a large +trader, the other was a long galley rigged quite differently to +those of either Venice or Genoa.</p> + +<p>"That is the craft they were speaking of," the captain said. +"There is no mistaking her. She may be an Egyptian or a Moor, but +certainly she comes from the African coast."</p> + +<p>"Or is got up in African fashion," Francis said. "She may be, as +we agreed yesterday, a Genoese masquerading in that fashion, in +order to be able to approach our traders without their suspicions +being aroused. She looks as if she has made a captive of that +vessel. I imagine she must have come up to her late yesterday +evening, and has been at work all night stripping her. I hope she +is too busy to attend to us."</p> + +<p>The sail had been lowered the instant the captain caught sight +of the vessels, for there was scarcely enough wind to fill it, and +the men were now rowing steadily.</p> + +<p>"I do not think she could have taken much of her cargo out. She +is very deep in the water."</p> + +<p>"Very deep," Francis agreed. "She seems to me to be deeper than +she did three minutes ago."</p> + +<p>"She is a great deal deeper than when we first caught sight of +her," one of the sailors said. "She stood much higher in the water +than the galley did, and now, if anything, the galley stands +highest."</p> + +<p>"See!" the captain exclaimed suddenly, "the galley is rowing her +oars on the port bow, and bringing her head round. She has noticed +us, and is going to chase us! We have seen too much.</p> + +<p>"Row, men--it is for life! If they overtake us it is a question +between death, and slavery among the Moors."</p> + +<p>A sudden exclamation from one of the men caused the captain to +glance round again at the galley. She was alone now on the +water--the trader had sunk!</p> + +<p>"Do you take the helm, signor," the captain said. "All hands +will help at the oars."</p> + +<p>Some of the oars were double banked, and beneath the strength of +the twenty men, the boat moved fast through the water. The galley +was now rowing all her oars, and in full pursuit. For a quarter of +an hour not a word was spoken. Every man on board was doing his +utmost. Francis had glanced backwards several times, and at the end +of a quarter of an hour, he could see that the distance between the +boat and her pursuer had distinctly lessened.</p> + +<p>"Is she gaining on us?" the captain asked, for the cabin in the +stern hid the galley from the sight of the oarsmen.</p> + +<p>"She is gaining," Francis said quietly, "but not rapidly. Row +steadily, my lads, and do not despair. When they find how slowly +they gain, they may give up the chase and think us not worth the +trouble.</p> + +<p>"Jacopo," he said to an old sailor who was rowing in the bow, +and who already was getting exhausted from the exertion, "do you +lay in your oar and come aft. I will take your place."</p> + +<p>At the end of an hour the galley was little more than a quarter +of a mile away.</p> + +<p>"We had better stop," the captain said. "We have no chance of +getting away, and the longer the chase the more furious they will +be. What do you think, signor?"</p> + +<p>"I agree with you," Francis replied. "We have done all that we +could. There is no use in rowing longer."</p> + +<p>The oars fell motionless in the water, and a few minutes later +the long galley came rushing up by their side.</p> + +<p>"A fine row you have given us, you dogs!" a man shouted angrily +as she came alongside. "If you haven't something on board that will +pay us for the chase we have had, it will be the worse for you. +What boat is that?"</p> + +<p>"It is the Naxos, and belongs to Messer Polani of Venice. We are +bound to Corfu, and bear letters from the padrone to his agent +there. We have no cargo on board."</p> + +<p>"The letters, perhaps, may be worth more than any cargo such a +boat would carry. So come on board, and let us see what the +excellent Polani says to his agent. Now, make haste all of you, or +it will be the worse for you."</p> + +<p>It was useless hesitating. The captain, Francis, and the crew +stepped on board the galley.</p> + +<p>"Just look round her," the captain said to one of his sailors. +"If there is anything worth taking, take it, and then knock a hole +in her bottom with your axe."</p> + +<p>Francis, as he stepped on board the galley, looked round at the +crew. They were not Genoese, as he had expected, but a mixture of +ruffians from all the ports in the Mediterranean, as he saw at once +by their costumes. Some were Greeks from the islands, some +Smyrniots, Moors, and Spaniards; but the Moors predominated, nearly +half the crew belonging to that race.</p> + +<p>Then he looked at the captain, who was eagerly perusing the +documents the captain had handed him. As his eye fell upon him, +Francis started, for he recognized at once the man whose designs he +had twice thwarted, Ruggiero Mocenigo, and felt that he was in +deadly peril.</p> + +<p>After reading the merchant's communication to his agent, +Ruggiero opened the letter addressed to Maria. He had read but a +few lines when he suddenly looked up, and then, with an expression +of savage pleasure in his face, stepped up to Francis.</p> + +<p>"So, Messer Hammond, the good Polani sends you to stay for a +while with his daughters! Truly, when I set out in chase this +morning of that wretched rowboat, I little deemed that she carried +a prize that I valued more than a loaded caravel! It is to you I +owe it that I am an exile, instead of being the honoured son-in-law +of the wealthy Polani. It was your accursed interference that +brought all my misfortunes upon me; but thank Heaven my vengeance +has come at last!</p> + +<p>"Take them all below," he said, turning to his men. "Put the +heaviest irons you have got on this fellow, and fasten them with +staples into the deck.</p> + +<p>"You thought I was going to hang you, or throw you overboard," +he went on, turning to Francis. "Do not flatter yourself that your +death will be so easy a one--you shall suffer a thousand torments +before you die!"</p> + +<p>Francis had not spoken a word since Ruggiero first turned to +him, but had stood with a tranquil and almost contemptuous +expression upon his face; but every nerve and muscle of his body +were strained, and in readiness to spring into action. He had +expected that Ruggiero would at once attack him, and was determined +to leap upon him, and to sell his life as dearly as possible.</p> + +<p>The sailors seized Francis and his companions, and thrust them +down into the hold, which was already crowded with upwards of a +hundred captives. He was chained with heavy manacles. In obedience +to Ruggiero's orders, staples were driven through the links of his +chain deep into the deck, so that he was forced to remain in a +sitting or lying posture. The captain of the Naxos came and sat +beside him.</p> + +<p>"Who is this pirate captain, Messer Francisco, who thus knows +and has an enmity against you? By his speech he is surely a +Venetian. And yet, how comes a Venetian in command of a +pirate?"</p> + +<p>"That man is Ruggiero Mocenigo--the same who twice attempted to +carry off Messer Polani's daughters. The second time he succeeded, +and would have been tried for the offence by the state had he not, +aided by a band of Paduans, escaped from the keeping of his +guard."</p> + +<p>"Of course I heard of it, signor. I was away at sea at the time, +but I heard how you came up at the moment when the padrone's +gondoliers had been overcome, and rescued his daughters. And this +is that villain Mocenigo, a disgrace to his name and family!"</p> + +<p>"Remember the name, captain, and tell it to each of your men, so +that if they ever escape from this slavery, into which, no doubt, +he intends to sell you, they may tell it in Venice that Ruggiero +Mocenigo is a pirate, and an ally of the Moors. As for me, there +is, I think, but small chance of escape; but at any rate, if you +ever reach Venice, you will be able to tell the padrone how it was +that we never arrived at Corfu, and how I fell into the hands of +his old enemy. Still, I do not despair that I may carry the message +myself. There is many a slip between the cup and the lip, and +Mocenigo may have cause, yet, to regret that he did not make an end +of me as soon as he got me into his hands."</p> + +<p>"It may be so," the captain said, "and indeed I cannot think +that so brave a young gentleman is destined to die, miserably, at +the hands of such a scoundrel as this man has shown himself to be. +As for death, did it come but speedily and sharply, I would far +sooner die than live a Moorish slave. Santa Maria, how they will +wonder at home, when the days go on, and the Naxos does not return, +and how at last they will give up all hope, thinking that she has +gone down in a sudden squall, and never dreaming that we are sold +as slaves to the Moors by a countryman!"</p> + +<p>"Keep up your heart, captain. Be sure that when the war with +Genoa is over, Venice will take the matter in hand. As you know, a +vessel has already carried tidings thither of the depredation of a +Moorish cruiser, and she will take vengeance on the Moors, and may +even force them to liberate the captives they have taken; and +besides, you may be sure that the padrone, when he hears of the +Moorish galley, and finds we never reached Corfu although the +weather continued fine, will guess that we have fallen into her +hands, and will never rest till he finds where we have been taken, +and will ransom those who survive at whatever price they may put +upon them."</p> + +<p>"He will do his best, I know. He is a good master to serve. But +once a prisoner among the Moors, the hope of one's ever being heard +of again is slight. Sometimes, of course, men have been ransomed; +but most, as I have heard, can never be found by their friends, +however ready they may be to pay any ransom that might be asked. It +just depends whether they are sold to a Moor living in a seaport or +not. If they are, there would be no great difficulty in hearing of +them, but if they are sold into the interior, no inquiries are ever +likely to discover them."</p> + +<p>"You must hope for the best," Francis said. "Chances of escape +may occur, and I have heard that Christian captives, who have been +released, say that the Moors are for the most part kind +masters."</p> + +<p>"I have heard so, too," the captain said; "and anyhow, I would +rather be a Moorish slave than lie in a Genoese dungeon. The +Genoese are not like us. When we take prisoners we treat them +fairly and honourably, while they treat their prisoners worse than +dogs. I wish I could do something for you, Messer Francisco. Your +case is a deal worse than ours.</p> + +<p>"Listen, they are quarrelling up on deck!"</p> + +<p>There was indeed a sound of men in hot dispute, a trampling of +feet, a clash of steel, and the sound of bodies falling.</p> + +<p>"It is not possible that one of our cruisers can have come up, +and is boarding the pirate," the captain said, "for no sail was in +sight when we were brought here. I looked round the last thing +before I left the deck. What can they be fighting about?"</p> + +<p>"Likely enough, as to their course. They have probably, from +what we heard, taken and sunk several ships, and some may be in +favour of returning to dispose of their booty, while others may be +for cruising longer. I only hope that scoundrel Ruggiero is among +those we heard fall. They are quiet now, and one party or the other +has evidently got the best of it. There, they are taking to the +oars again."</p> + +<p>Several days passed. Sometimes the oars were heard going, but +generally the galley was under sail. The sailors brought down food +and water, morning and evening, but paid no other attention to the +captives. Francis discussed, with some of the other prisoners, the +chances of making a sudden rush on to the deck, and overpowering +the crew; but all their arms had been taken from them, and the +galley, they calculated, contained fully a hundred and fifty men. +They noticed, too, when the sailors brought down the food, a party +armed and in readiness were assembled round the hatchway.</p> + +<p>At all other times the hatchway was nearly closed, being only +left sufficiently open to allow a certain amount of air to pass +down into the hold, and by the steady tramp of steps, up and down, +they knew that two sentries were also on guard above. Most of the +prisoners were so overcome with the misfortune which had befallen +them, and the prospect of a life in hopeless slavery, that they had +no spirit to attempt any enterprise whatever, and there was nothing +to do but to wait the termination of the voyage.</p> + +<p>At the end of six days there was a bustle on deck, and the chain +of the anchor was heard to run out. Two or three hours afterwards +the hatchway was taken off. When the rest had ascended, two men +came below with hammers, and drew the staples which fastened +Francis to the deck.</p> + +<p>On going up, he was at first so blinded with the glare of the +sunshine--after six days in almost total darkness--that he could +scarce see where he was. The ship was lying at anchor in a bay. The +shores were low, and a group of houses stood abreast of where the +ship was anchored. By their appearance Francis saw at once that he +was on the coast of Africa, or of some island near it.</p> + +<p>The prisoners were ordered to descend into the boats which lay +alongside, some sailors taking their places with them. Ruggiero was +not at first to be seen, but just as Francis was preparing to take +his place in the boat, he came out from the cabin. One of his arms +was in a sling, and his head bandaged.</p> + +<p>"Take special care of that prisoner," he said to the men. "Do +not take off his chains, and place a sentinel at the door of the +place of his confinement. I would rather lose my share of all the +spoil we have taken, than he should escape me!"</p> + +<p>The shackles had been removed from the rest of the captives, and +on landing they were driven into some huts which stood a little +apart from the village. Francis was thrust into a small chamber +with five or six companions. The next morning the other prisoners +were called out, and Francis was left alone by himself all day. On +their return in the evening, they told him that all the prisoners +had been employed in assisting to get out the cargo, with which the +vessel was crammed, and in carrying it to a large storehouse in the +village.</p> + +<p>"They must have taken a rich booty, indeed," said one of the +prisoners, who had already told Francis that he was the captain of +the vessel they had seen founder. "I could tell pretty well what +all the bales contain, by the manner of packing, and I should say +that there were the pick of the cargoes of a dozen ships there. All +of us here belong to three ships, except those taken with you; but +from the talk of the sailors, I heard that they had already sent +off two batches of captives, by another ship which was cruising in +company of them. I also learned that the quarrel, which took place +just after you were captured, arose from the fact that the captain +wished a party to land, to carry off two women from somewhere in +the island of Corfu; but the crew insisted on first returning with +the booty, urging, that if surprised by a Venetian galley, they +might lose all the result of their toil. This was the opinion of +the majority, although a few sided with the captain, being induced +to do so by the fact that he offered to give up all his share of +the booty, if they would do so.</p> + +<p>"The captain lost his temper and drew his sword, but he and his +party were quickly overpowered. He has kept to his cabin ever +since, suffering, they say, more from rage than from his wounds. +However, it seems that as soon as we and the cargo have been sold, +they are to start for Corfu to carry out the enterprise. We are on +an island not very far from Tunis, and a fast-rowing boat started +early this morning to the merchants with whom they deal, for it +seems that a certain amount of secrecy is observed, in order that +if any complaints are made by Venice, the Moorish authorities may +disclaim all knowledge of the matter."</p> + +<p>Two days later the prisoners captured were again led out, their +guards telling them that the merchants who had been expected had +arrived. Giuseppi, who had hitherto borne up bravely, was in an +agony of grief at being separated from Francis. He threw himself +upon the ground, wept, tore his hair, and besought the guards to +let him share his master's fate, whatever that might be. He +declared that he would kill himself were they separated; and the +guards would have been obliged to use force, had not Francis begged +Giuseppi not to struggle against fate, but to go quietly, promising +again and again that, if he himself regained his freedom, he would +not rest until Giuseppi was also set at liberty. At last the lad +yielded, and suffered himself to be led away, in a heartbroken +state, by the guards.</p> + +<p>None of the captives returned to the hut, and Francis now turned +his whole thoughts to freeing himself from his chains. He had +already revolved in his mind every possible mode of escape. He had +tried the strong iron bars of the window, but found that they were +so rigidly fixed and embedded in the stonework, that there was no +hope of escape in this way; and even could he have got through the +window, the weight of his shackles would have crippled him.</p> + +<p>He was fastened with two chains, each about two feet six inches +long, going from the wrist of the right hand to the left ankle, and +from the left hand to the right ankle. Thus he was unable to stand +quite upright, and anything like rapid movement was almost +impossible. The bottom of the window came within four feet of the +ground, and it was only by standing on one leg, and lifting the +other as high as he could, that he was able to grasp one of the +bars to try its strength.</p> + +<p>The news he had heard from his fellow prisoner almost maddened +him, and he thought far less of his own fate, than of that of the +girls, who would be living in their quiet country retreat in +ignorance of danger, until suddenly seized by Mocenigo and his band +of pirates.</p> + +<p>He had, on the first day, tried whether it was possible to draw +his hand through the iron band round his wrist, but had concluded +it could not be done, for it was riveted so tightly as to press +upon the flesh. Therefore there was no hope of freeing himself in +that manner. The only possible means, then, would be to cut through +the rivet or chain, and for this a tool would be required.</p> + +<p>Suddenly an idea struck him. The guard who brought in his food +was a Sicilian, and was evidently of a talkative disposition, for +he had several times entered into conversation with the captives. +In addition to a long knife, he carried a small stiletto in his +girdle, and Francis thought that, if he could obtain this, he might +possibly free himself. Accordingly, at the hour when he expected +his guard to enter, Francis placed himself at his window, with his +face against the bars. When he heard the guard come in, and, as +usual, close the door behind him, he turned round and said:</p> + +<p>"Who is that damsel there? She is very beautiful, and she passes +here frequently. There she is, just going among those trees."</p> + +<p>The guard moved to the window and looked out.</p> + +<p>"Do you see her just going round that corner there? Ah! She is +gone."</p> + +<p>The guard was pressing his face against the bars, to look in the +direction indicated, and Francis, who was already standing on his +left leg, with the right raised so as to give freedom to the hand +next to the man, had no difficulty in drawing the stiletto from its +sheath, and slipping it into his trousers.</p> + +<p>"You were just too late," he said, "but no doubt you often see +her."</p> + +<p>"I don't see any beautiful damsels about in this wretched +place," the man replied. "I suppose she is the daughter of the head +man in the village. They say he has some good-looking ones, but he +takes pretty good care that they are not about when we are here. I +suppose she thought she wouldn't be seen along that path. I will +keep a good lookout for her in future."</p> + +<p>"Don't frighten her away," Francis said, laughing. "She is the +one pleasant thing I have in the day to look at."</p> + +<p>After some more talk the man retired, and Francis examined his +prize. It was a thin blade of fine steel, and he at once hid it in +the earth which formed the floor of the hut.</p> + +<p>An hour later the guard opened the door suddenly. It was now +dusk, and Francis was sitting quietly in a corner.</p> + +<p>"Bring a light, Thomaso," the guard shouted to his comrade +outside. "It is getting dark in here."</p> + +<p>The other brought a torch, and they carefully examined the floor +of the cell.</p> + +<p>"What is it that you are searching for?" Francis asked.</p> + +<p>"I have dropped my dagger somewhere," the man replied. "I can't +think how it fell out."</p> + +<p>"When did you see it last?"</p> + +<p>"Not since dinner time. I know I had it then. I thought possibly +I might have dropped it here, and a dagger is not the sort of +plaything one cares about giving to prisoners."</p> + +<p>"Chained as I am," Francis said, "a dagger would not be a +formidable weapon in my hands."</p> + +<p>"No," the man agreed. "It would be useless to you, unless you +wanted to stick it into your own ribs."</p> + +<p>"I should have to sit down to be able to do even that."</p> + +<p>"That is so, lad. It is not for me to question what the captain +says, I just do as I am told. But I own it does seem hard, keeping +a young fellow like you chained up as if you were a wild beast. If +he had got Pisani or Zeno as a prisoner, and wanted to make doubly +sure that they would not escape, it would be all well enough, but +for a lad like you, with one man always at the door, and the window +barred so that a lion couldn't break through, I do think it hard to +keep you chained like this; and the worst of it is, we are going to +have to stop here to look after you till the captain gets back, and +that may be three weeks or a month, who knows!"</p> + +<p>"Why don't you keep your mouth shut, Philippo?" the other man +growled. "It's always talk, talk with you. We are chosen because +the captain can rely upon us."</p> + +<p>"He can rely upon anyone," Philippo retorted, "who knows that he +will get his throat cut if he fails in his duty."</p> + +<p>"Well, come along," the other said, "I don't want to be staying +here all night. Your dagger isn't here, that's certain, and as I am +off guard at present, I want to be going."</p> + +<p>As soon as he was left alone, Francis unearthed the dagger, +feeling sure that no fresh visit would be made him that evening. As +he had hoped, his first attempt showed him that the iron of the +rivet was soft, and the keen dagger at once notched off a small +piece of the burred end. Again and again he tried, and each time a +small piece of metal flew off. After each cut he examined the edge +of the dagger, but it was well tempered, and seemed entirely +unaffected.</p> + +<p>He now felt certain that, with patience, he should be able to +cut off the projecting edges of the rivets, and so be able to free +his hands. He, therefore, now examined the fastenings at the +ankles. These were more heavy, and on trying them, the iron of the +rivet appeared to be much harder than that which kept the manacles +together. It was, however, now too dark to see what he was doing, +and concealing the dagger again, he lay down with a lighter heart +than he had from the moment of his capture.</p> + +<p>Even if he found that the lower fastenings of the chain defied +all his efforts, he could cut the rivets at the wrists, and so free +one end of each chain. He could then tie the chains round his legs, +and their weight would not be sufficient to prevent his +walking.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch13">Chapter 13</a>: The Pirates' Raid.</h2> + +<p>As soon as it was daylight next morning, Francis was up and at +work. His experiments of the evening before were at once confirmed. +Three or four hours' work would enable him to free his wrists, but +he could make no impression on the rivets at his ankles. After a +few trials he gave this up as hopeless, for he was afraid, if he +continued, he would blunt the edge of the dagger.</p> + +<p>For an hour he sat still, thinking, and at last an idea occurred +to him. Iron could be ground by rubbing it upon stone, and if he +could not cut off the burr of the rivet with the dagger, he might +perhaps be able to wear it down, by rubbing it with a stone.</p> + +<p>He at once turned to the walls of his cell. These were not built +of the unbaked clay so largely used for houses of the poorer class +in Northern Egypt, but had evidently been constructed either as a +prison, or more probably as a strong room where some merchant kept +valuable goods. It was therefore constructed of blocks of hard +stone.</p> + +<p>It seemed to Francis that this was sandstone, and to test its +quality, he sat down in the corner where the guard had, the night +before, placed his supply of food and water. First he moistened a +portion of the wall, then he took up a link of his chain, and +rubbed for some time against it. At last, to his satisfaction, a +bright patch showed that the stone was capable of wearing away +iron. But in vain did he try to twist his legs so as to rub the +rivet against the wall, and he gave up the attempt as +impossible.</p> + +<p>It was clear, then, that he must have a bit of the stone to rub +with. He at once began to dig with the dagger in the earth at the +foot of the wall, to see if he could find any such pieces. For a +long time he came across no chips, even of the smallest size. As he +worked, he was most careful to stamp down the earth which he had +moved, scattering over it the sand, of which there was an abundance +in the corners of the room, to obliterate all traces of his +work.</p> + +<p>When breakfast time approached he ceased for a while, but after +the meal had been taken, he recommenced the task. He met with +little success till he reached the door, but here he was more +fortunate. A short distance below the surface were a number of +pieces of stone of various sizes, which, he had no doubt, had been +cut from the blocks to allow for the fixing of the lintel and +doorpost. He chose half a dozen pieces of the handiest sizes, each +having a flat surface. Then replacing the earth carefully, he took +one of the pieces in his hand, and moistening it with water, set to +work.</p> + +<p>He made little progress. Still the stone did wear the iron, and +he felt sure that, by perseverance, he should succeed in wearing +off the burrs. All day he worked without intermission, holding a +rag wrapped round the stone to deaden the sound. He worked till his +fingers ached so that he could no longer hold it, then rested for +an hour or two, and resumed his work. When his guard brought his +dinner he asked him when the galley was to sail again.</p> + +<p>"It was to have gone today," the man said, "but the captain has +been laid up with fever. He has a leech from Tunis attending him, +and, weak as he is, he is so bent on going that he would have had +himself carried on board the ship, had not the leech said that, in +that case, he would not answer for his life, as in the state his +blood is in, his wounds would assuredly mortify did he not remain +perfectly quiet. So he has agreed to delay for three days."</p> + +<p>Francis was unable to work with the stone at night, for in the +stillness the sound might be heard; but for some hours he hacked +away with the dagger at the rivets on his manacles. The next +morning he was at work as soon as the chirrup of the cicadas began, +as these, he knew, would completely deaden any sound he might make. +By nighttime the rivet ends on the irons round his ankles were worn +so thin, that he felt sure that another hour's work would bring +them level with the iron, and before he went to sleep the rivets on +the wrist were in the same condition.</p> + +<p>He learned from his guard, next morning, that the captain was +better, that he was to be taken on board in the cool of the +evening, and that the vessel would start as soon as the breeze +sprang up in the morning. In the afternoon his two guards entered, +and bade him follow them. He was conducted to the principal house +in the village, and into a room where Ruggiero Mocenigo was lying +on a couch.</p> + +<p>"I have sent for you," Ruggiero said, "to tell you that I have +not forgotten you. My vengeance has been delayed from no fault of +mine, but it will be all the sweeter when it comes. I am going to +fetch Polani's daughters. I have heard that, since you thrust +yourself between me and them, you have been a familiar in the +house, that Polani treats you as a member of the family, and that +you are in high favour with his daughters. I have kept myself +informed of what happened in Venice, and I have noted each of these +things down in the account of what I owe you. I am going to fetch +Polani's daughters here, and to make Maria my wife, and then I will +show her how I treat those who cross my path. It will be a lesson +to her, as well as for you. You shall wish yourself dead a thousand +times before death comes to you."</p> + +<p>"I always knew that you were a villain, Ruggiero Mocenigo," +Francis said quietly, "although I hardly thought that a man who had +once the honour of being a noble of Venice, would sink to become a +pirate and renegade. You may carry Maria Polani off, but you will +never succeed through her in obtaining a portion of her father's +fortune, for I know that, the first moment her hands are free, she +will stab herself to the heart, rather than remain in the power of +such a wretch."</p> + +<p>Ruggiero snatched up a dagger from a table by his couch as +Francis was speaking, but dropped it again.</p> + +<p>"Fool," he said. "Am I not going to carry off the two girls? and +do you not see that it will tame Maria's spirit effectually, when +she knows that if she lays hands on herself, she will but shift the +honour of being my wife from herself to her sister?"</p> + +<p>As the laugh of anticipated triumph rang in Francis's ears, the +latter, in his fury, made a spring forward to throw himself upon +the villain, but he had forgotten his chains, and fell headlong on +to the floor.</p> + +<p>"Guards," Ruggiero shouted, "take this fellow away, and I charge +you watch over him securely, and remember that your lives shall +answer for his escape."</p> + +<p>"There is no need for threats, signor," Philippo said. "You can +rely on our vigilance, though, as far as I see, if he had but a +child to watch him he would be safe in that cell of his, fettered +as he is."</p> + +<p>Ruggiero waved his hand impatiently, and the two men withdrew +with their prisoner.</p> + +<p>"If it were not that I have not touched my share of the booty of +our last trip," Philippo said as they left the house, "I would not +serve him another day. As it is, as soon as the galley returns, and +we get our shares of the money, and of the sum he has promised if +this expedition of his is successful, I will be off. I have had +enough of this. It is bad enough to be consorting with Moors, +without being abused and threatened as if one was a dog."</p> + +<p>As soon as he was alone again, Francis set to work, and by the +afternoon the ends of the four rivets were worn down level with the +iron, and it needed but a pressure to make the rings spring open. +Then he waited for the evening before freeing himself, as by some +chance he might again be visited, and even if free before nightfall +he could not leave the house.</p> + +<p>Philippo was later than usual in bringing him his meal, and +Francis heard angry words passing between him and his comrade, +because he had not returned to relieve him sooner.</p> + +<p>"Is everything ready for the start?" Francis asked the man as he +entered.</p> + +<p>"Yes, the crew are all on board. The boat is to be on shore for +the captain at nine o'clock, and as there is a little breeze +blowing, I expect they will get up sail and start at once."</p> + +<p>After a few minutes' talk the man left, and Francis waited until +it became almost dark, then he inserted the dagger between the +irons at the point of junction. At the first wrench they flew +apart, and his left hand was free. A few minutes' more work and the +chains lay on the ground.</p> + +<p>Taking them up, he rattled them together loudly. In a minute he +heard the guard outside move and come to the door, then the key was +inserted in the lock and the door opened.</p> + +<p>"What on earth are you doing now?" Philippo asked as he +entered.</p> + +<p>Francis was standing close to the door, so that as his guard +entered he had his back to him, and before the question was +finished he sprang upon him, throwing him headlong to the ground +with the shock, and before the astonished man could speak he was +kneeling upon him, with the point of the dagger at his throat.</p> + +<p>"If you make a sound, or utter a cry," he exclaimed, "I will +drive this dagger into your throat."</p> + +<p>Philippo could feel the point of the dagger against his skin, +and remained perfectly quiet.</p> + +<p>"I do not want to kill you, Philippo. You have not been harsh to +me, and I would spare your life if I could. Hold your hands back +above your head, and put your wrists together that I may fasten +them. Then I will let you get up."</p> + +<p>Philippo held up his hands as requested, and Francis bound them +tightly together with a strip of twisted cloth. He then allowed him +to rise.</p> + +<p>"Now, Philippo, I must gag you. Then I will fasten your hands to +a bar well above your head, so that you can't get at the rope with +your teeth. I will leave you here till your comrade comes in the +morning."</p> + +<p>"I would rather that you killed me at once, signor," the man +said. "Thomaso will be furious at your having made your escape, for +he will certainly come in for a share of the fury of the captain. +There are three or four of the crew remaining behind, and no doubt +they will keep me locked up till the ship returns, and in that case +the captain will be as good as his word. You had better kill me at +once."</p> + +<p>"But what am I to do, Philippo? I must ensure my own safety. If +you will suggest any way by which I can do that, I will."</p> + +<p>"I would swear any oath you like, signor, that I will not give +the alarm. I will make straight across the island, and get hold of +a boat there, so as to be well away before your escape is known in +the morning."</p> + +<p>"Well, look here, Philippo. I believe you are sincere, and you +shall take the oath you hold most sacred."</p> + +<p>"You can accompany me, signor, if you will. Keep my hands tied +till we are on the other side of the island, and stab me if I give +the alarm."</p> + +<p>"I will not do that, Philippo. I will trust you altogether; but +first take the oath you spoke of."</p> + +<p>Philippo swore a terrible oath, that he would abstain from +giving the alarm, and would cross the island and make straight for +the mainland. Francis at once cut the bonds.</p> + +<p>"You will lose your share of the plunder, Philippo, and you will +have to keep out of the way to avoid the captain's rage. Therefore +I advise you, when you get to Tunis, to embark in the first ship +that sails. If you come to Venice, ask for me, and I will make up +to you for your loss of booty, and put you in the way of leading an +honest life again. But before going, you must first change clothes +with me. You can sell mine at Tunis for enough to buy you a dozen +suits like yours; but you must divide with me what money you now +have in your possession, for I cannot start penniless."</p> + +<p>"I thank you for your kindness," the man said. "You had it in +your power, with a thrust of the dagger, to make yourself safe, and +you abstained. Even were it not for my oath, I should be a +treacherous dog, indeed, were I to betray you. I do not know what +your plans are, signor, but I pray you to follow my example, and +get away from this place before daylight. The people here will all +aid in the search for you, and as the island is not large, you will +assuredly be discovered. It has for many years been a rendezvous of +pirates, a place to which they bring their booty to sell to the +traders who come over from the mainland."</p> + +<p>"Thank you for your advice, Philippo, and be assured I shall be +off the island before daybreak, but I have some work to do first, +and cannot therefore accompany you."</p> + +<p>"May all the saints bless you, signor, and aid you to get safe +away! Assuredly, if I live, I will ere long present myself to you +at Venice--not for the money which you so generously promised me, +but that I may, with your aid, earn an honest living among +Christians."</p> + +<p>By this time the exchange of clothes was effected, the six +ducats in Philippo's purse--the result of a little private +plundering on one of the captured vessels--divided; and then they +left the prison room, and Philippo locked the door after them.</p> + +<p>"Is there any chance of Thomaso returning speedily?" Francis +asked. "Because, if so, he might notice your absence, and so give +the alarm before the ship sets sail, in which case we should have +the whole crew on our tracks."</p> + +<p>"I do not think that he will. He will be likely to be drinking +in the wine shop for an hour or two before he returns. But I tell +you what I will do, signor. I will resume my place here on guard +until he has returned. He will relieve me at midnight, and in the +darkness will not notice the change of clothes. There will still be +plenty of time for me to cross the island, and get out of sight in +the boat, before the alarm is given, which will not be until six +o'clock, when I ought to relieve him again. As you say, if the +alarm were to be given before the vessel sails, they might start at +once to cut us off before we reach the mainland, for they would +make sure that we should try to escape in that direction."</p> + +<p>"That will be the best plan, Philippo; and now goodbye."</p> + +<p>Francis walked down to the shore. There were no boats lying +there of a size he could launch unaided, but presently he heard the +sound of oars, and a small fishing boat rowed by two men +approached.</p> + +<p>"Look here, lads," he said. "I want to be put on board the ship. +I ought to have been on board three hours ago, but took too much +wine, and lay down for an hour or two and overslept myself. Do you +think you can row quietly up alongside so that I can slip on board +unnoticed? If so I will give you a ducat for your trouble."</p> + +<p>"We can do that," the fishermen said. "We have just come from +the ship now, and have sold them our catch of today. There were +half a dozen other boats lying beside her, bargaining for their +fish. Besides they are taking on board firewood and other stores +that have been left till the last moment. So jump in and we will +soon get you there."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes they approached the side of the ship.</p> + +<p>"I see you have got half a dozen fish left in your boat now," +Francis said.</p> + +<p>"They are of no account," one of the men said. "They are good +enough for our eating, but not such as they buy on board a ship +where money is plentiful. You are heartily welcome to them if you +have a fancy for them."</p> + +<p>"Thank you," Francis said. "I will take two or three of them, if +you can spare them. I want to play a trick with a comrade."</p> + +<p>As the fishermen said, there were several boats lying near the +vessel, and the men were leaning over the sides bargaining for +fish. Handing the fishermen their promised reward, Francis sprang +up the ladder to the deck. He was unnoticed, for other men had gone +down into the boats for fish.</p> + +<p>Mingling with the sailors, he gradually made his way to the +hatchway leading into the hold, descended the ladder, and stowed +himself away among a quantity of casks, some filled with wine and +some with water, at the farther end of the hold; and as he lay +there devoutly thanked God that his enterprise had been so far +successful.</p> + +<p>Men came down from time to time with lanterns, to stow away the +lately-arrived stores, but none came near the place where Francis +was hidden. The time seemed long before he heard the clank of the +capstan, and knew the vessel was being hove up to her anchors. +Then, after a while, he heard the creaking of cordage, and much +trampling of feet on the deck above, and knew that she was under +way. Then he made himself as comfortable as he could, in his +cramped position, and went off to sleep.</p> + +<p>When he woke in the morning, the light was streaming down the +hatch, which was only closed in rough weather, as it was necessary +frequently to go down into it for water and stores. Francis had +brought the fish with him as a means of subsistence during the +voyage, in case he should be unable to obtain provisions, but for +this there was no occasion, as there was an abundance of fruit +hanging from the beams, while piles of bread were stowed in a +partition at one end of the hold. During the day, however, he did +not venture to move, and was heartily glad when it again became +dark, and he could venture to get out and stretch himself. He +appropriated a loaf and some bunches of grapes, took a long drink +from a pail placed under the tap of a water butt, and made his way +back to his corner. After a hearty meal he went out again for +another drink, and then turned in to sleep.</p> + +<p>So passed six days. By the rush of water against the outside +planks, he could always judge whether the vessel was making brisk +way or whether she was lying becalmed. Once or twice, after +nightfall, he ventured up on deck, feeling certain that in the +darkness there was no fear of his being detected. From conversation +he overheard on the seventh evening, he learned that Corfu had been +sighted that day. For some hours the vessel's sails had been +lowered, and she had remained motionless; but she was now again +making for the land, and in the course of another two hours a +landing was to be made.</p> + +<p>The boats had all been got in readiness, and the men were to +muster fully armed. Although, as they understood, the carrying off +of two girls was their special object, it was intended that they +should gather as much plunder as could be obtained. The island was +rich, for many wealthy Venetians had residences there. Therefore, +with the exception of a few men left on board to take care of the +galley, the whole were to land. A picked boat's crew were to +accompany the captain, who was now completely convalescent. The +rest were to divide in bands and scatter over the country, +pillaging as they went, and setting fire to the houses. It was +considered that such consternation would be caused that nothing +like resistance could be offered for some time, and by daybreak all +hands were to gather at the landing place.</p> + +<p>How far this spot was from the town, Francis had no means of +learning. There was a store of spare arms in the hold, and Francis, +furnishing himself with a sword and large dagger, waited until he +heard a great movement overhead, and then went upon deck and joined +a gang of men employed in lowering one of the boats. The boat was a +large one, rowing sixteen oars and carrying some twenty men seated +in the stern. Here Francis took his place with the others. The boat +pushed off and waited until four others were launched and filled. +Then the order was given, and the boats rowed in a body towards the +shore. The men landed and formed under their respective officers, +one man remaining in each boat to keep it afloat.</p> + +<p>Francis leaped ashore, and while the men were forming up, found +no difficulty in slipping away unnoticed. As he did not know where +the path was, and was afraid of making a noise, he lay down among +the rocks until he heard the word of command to start given. Then +he cautiously crept out, and, keeping far enough in the rear to be +unseen, followed the sound of their footsteps. By the short time +which had elapsed between the landing and the start, he had no +doubt they were guided by some persons perfectly acquainted with +the locality, probably by some natives of the island among the +mixed crew.</p> + +<p>Francis had, during his voyage, thought over the course he +should pursue on landing; and saw that, ignorant as he was of the +country, his only hope was in obtaining a guide who would conduct +him to Polani's villa before the arrival of Mocenigo and his band. +The fact that the crew were divided into five parties, which were +to proceed in different directions, and that he did not know which +of them was commanded by the captain, added to the difficulty. Had +they kept together he might, after seeing the direction in which +they were going, make a detour and get ahead of them. But he might +now follow a party going in an entirely wrong direction, and before +he could obtain a guide, Mocenigo's band might have gone so far +that they could not be overtaken before they reached the villa.</p> + +<p>There was nothing to do but to get ahead of all the parties, in +the hope of coming upon a habitation before going far. As soon, +therefore, as the last band had disappeared, he started at a run. +The country was open, with few walls or fences; therefore on +leaving the road he was able to run rapidly forwards, and in a few +minutes knew that he must be ahead of the pirates. Then he again +changed his course so as to strike the road he had left.</p> + +<p>After running for about a mile he saw a light ahead of him, and +soon arrived at a cottage. He knocked at the door, and then +entered. The occupants of the room--a man and woman, a lad, and +several children--rose to their feet at the sudden entrance of the +stranger.</p> + +<p>"Good people," Francis said. "I have just landed from a ship, +and am the bearer of important messages to the Signoras Polani. I +have lost my way, and it is necessary that I should go on without a +moment's delay. Can you tell me how far the villa of Polani is +distant?"</p> + +<p>"It is about three miles from here," the man said.</p> + +<p>"I will give a ducat to your son if he will run on with me at +once."</p> + +<p>The man looked doubtful. The apparel and general appearance of +Francis were not prepossessing. He had been six days a prisoner in +the hold without means of washing.</p> + +<p>"See," he said, producing a ducat, "here is the money. I will +give it you at once if you will order your son to go with me, and +to hurry at the top of his speed."</p> + +<p>"It's a bargain," the man said.</p> + +<p>"Here, Rufo! start at once with the signor."</p> + +<p>"Come along, signor," the boy said; and without another word to +the parents Francis followed him out, and both set off at a run +along the road.</p> + +<p>Francis had said nothing about pirates to the peasants, for he +knew that, did he do so, such alarm would be caused that they would +think of nothing but flight, and he should not be able to obtain a +guide. It was improbable that they would be molested. The pirates +were bent upon pillaging the villas of the wealthy, and would not +risk the raising of an alarm by entering cottages where there was +no chance of plunder.</p> + +<p>After proceeding a few hundred yards, the lad struck off by a +byroad at right angles to that which they had been following, and +by the direction he took Francis felt that he must at first have +gone far out of his way, and that the party going direct to the +villa must have had a considerable start. Still, he reckoned that +as he was running at the rate of three feet to every one they would +march, he might hope to arrive at the house well before them.</p> + +<p>Not a word was spoken as they ran along. The lad was wondering, +in his mind, as to what could be the urgent business that could +necessitate its being carried at such speed; while Francis felt +that every breath was needed for the work he had to do. Only once +or twice he spoke, to ask how much further it was to their +destination.</p> + +<p>The last answer was cheering:</p> + +<p>"A few hundred paces farther."</p> + +<p>"There are the lights, signor. They have not gone to bed. This +is the door."</p> + +<p>Francis knocked with the pommel of his sword, keeping up a loud +continuous knocking. A minute or two passed, and then a face +appeared at the window above.</p> + +<p>"Who is it that knocks so loudly at this time of night?"</p> + +<p>"It is Francisco Hammond. Open instantly. Danger threatens the +signoras. Quick, for your life!"</p> + +<p>The servant recognized the voice, and ran down without +hesitation and unbarred the fastening; but for a moment he thought +he must have been mistaken, as Francis ran into the lighted +hall.</p> + +<p>"Where are the ladies?" he asked. "Lead me to them +instantly."</p> + +<p>But as he spoke a door standing by was opened, and Signor Polani +himself, with the two girls, appeared. They had been on the point +of retiring to rest when the knocking began, and the merchant, with +his drawn sword, was standing at the door, when he recognized +Francis' voice.</p> + +<p>They were about to utter an exclamation of pleasure at seeing +him, and of astonishment, not only at his sudden arrival, but at +his appearance, when Francis burst out:</p> + +<p>"There is no time for a word. You must fly instantly. Ruggiero +Mocenigo is close at my heels with a band of twenty pirates."</p> + +<p>The girls uttered a cry of alarm, and the merchant +exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"Can we not defend the house, Francisco? I have eight men here, +and we can hold it till assistance comes."</p> + +<p>"Ruggiero has a hundred," Francis said, "and all can be brought +up in a short time--you must fly. For God's sake, do not delay, +signor. They may be here at any moment."</p> + +<p>"Come, girls," Polani said.</p> + +<p>"And you, too," he went on, turning to the servants, whom the +knocking had caused to assemble. "Do you follow us. Resistance +would only cost you your lives.</p> + +<p>"Here, Maria, take my hand.</p> + +<p>"Francisco, do you see to Giulia.</p> + +<p>"Close the door after the last of you, and bolt it. It will give +us a few minutes, before they break in and discover that we have +all gone.</p> + +<p>"Which way are the scoundrels coming?"</p> + +<p>Francis pointed in the direction from which he had come, and the +whole party started at a fast pace in the other direction. They had +not been gone five minutes, when a loud and sudden knocking broke +on the silence of the night.</p> + +<p>"It was a close thing, indeed, Francisco," the merchant said, as +they ran along close to each other. "At present I feel as if I was +in a dream; but you shall tell us all presently."</p> + +<p>They were, by this time, outside the grounds of the villa, and +some of the servants, who knew the country, now took the lead. In a +few minutes the merchant slackened his pace.</p> + +<p>"We are out of danger now," he said. "They will not know in +which direction to search for us; and if they scatter in pursuit we +could make very short work of any that might come up with us."</p> + +<p>"I do not know that you are out of danger," Francis said. "A +hundred men landed. Mocenigo, with twenty, took the line to your +house, but the rest have scattered over the country in smaller +bands, bent on murder and pillage. Therefore, we had best keep on +as fast as we can, until well beyond the circle they are likely to +sweep--that is, unless the ladies are tired."</p> + +<p>"Tired!" Maria repeated. "Why, Giulia and I go for long walks +every day, and could run for an hour, if necessary."</p> + +<p>"Then come on, my dears," the merchant said. "I am burning to +know what this all means; and I am sure you are equally curious; +but nothing can be said till you are in safety."</p> + +<p>Accordingly, the party again broke into a run. A few minutes +later one of the servants, looking back, exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"They have fired the house, signor. There are flames issuing +from one of the lower windows."</p> + +<p>"I expected that," the merchant said, without looking back. +"That scoundrel would, in any case, light it in his fury at finding +that we have escaped; but he has probably done so, now, in hopes +that the light will enable him to discover us. It is well that we +are so far ahead, for the blaze will light up the country for a +long way round."</p> + +<p>"There is a wood a little way ahead, signor," the servant said. +"Once through that we shall be hidden from sight, however great the +light."</p> + +<p>Arrived at the wood, they again broke into a walk. A few hundred +yards beyond the wood was some rising ground, from which they could +see far over the country.</p> + +<p>"Let us stop here," the merchant said. "We are safe now. We have +placed two miles between ourselves and those villains."</p> + +<p>The villa was now a mass of flames. Exclamations of fury broke +from the men servants, while the women cried with anger at the +sight of the destruction.</p> + +<p>"Do not concern yourselves," the merchant said. "The house can +be rebuilt, and I will see that none of you are the poorer for the +loss of your belongings.</p> + +<p>"Now, girls, let us sit down here and hear from Francisco how it +is that he has once again been your saviour."</p> + +<p>"Before I begin, signor, tell me whether there are any ships of +war in the port, and how far that is distant from us?"</p> + +<p>"It is not above six miles on the other side of the island. That +is to say, we have been going towards it since we left the +villa.</p> + +<p>"See," he broke off, "there are flames rising in three or four +directions. The rest of those villains are at their work."</p> + +<p>"But are there any war galleys in the port?" Francis +interrupted.</p> + +<p>"Yes. Three ships were sent here, on the report that a Moorish +pirate had been cruising in these waters, and that several vessels +were missing. When the story first came I did not credit it. The +captain of the ship who brought the news told me he had met you +about halfway across, and had told you about the supposed pirate. A +vessel arrived four days later, and brought letters from my agent, +but he said no word about your boat having arrived.</p> + +<p>"Then I became uneasy; and when later news came, and still no +word of you, I felt sure that something must have befallen you; +that possibly the report was true, and that you had fallen into the +hands of the pirates. So I at once started, in one of the galleys +which the council were despatching in answer to the request of the +governor here."</p> + +<p>"In that case, signor, there is not a moment to lose. The +governor should be informed that the pirate is lying on the +opposite coast, and that his crew have landed, and are burning and +pillaging. If orders are issued at once, the galleys could get +round before morning, and so cut off the retreat of these +miscreants."</p> + +<p>"You are quite right," Polani said, rising at once. "We will go +on without a moment's delay! The girls can follow slowly under the +escort of the servants."</p> + +<p>"Oh, papa," Maria exclaimed, "you are not going to take +Francisco away till we have heard his story! Can you not send +forward the servants with a message to the governor?"</p> + +<p>"No, my dear. The governor will have gone to bed, and the +servants might not be able to obtain admittance to him. I must go +myself. It is for your sakes, as well as for my own. We shall never +feel a moment's safety, as long as this villain is at large. +Francisco's story will keep till tomorrow.</p> + +<p>"As to your gratitude and mine, that needs no telling. He cannot +but know what we are feeling, at the thought of the almost +miraculous escape you have had from falling into the hands of your +persecutor.</p> + +<p>"Now come along, Francisco.</p> + +<p>"One of you men who knows the road had better come with us. Do +the rest of you all keep together.</p> + +<p>"Two miles further, girls, as you know, is a villa of Carlo +Maffene. If you feel tired, you had best stop and ask for shelter +there. There is no fear that the pirates will extend their ravages +so far. They will keep on the side of the island where they landed, +so as to be able to return with their booty before daybreak to the +ship."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch14">Chapter 14</a>: The End Of The Persecutor.</h2> + +<p>Signor Polani was so well known, that upon his arrival at the +governor's house the domestics, upon being aroused, did not +hesitate to awaken the governor at once. The latter, as soon as he +heard that the pirates had landed and were devastating the other +side of the island, and that their ship was lying close in to the +coast under the charge of a few sailors only, at once despatched a +messenger to the commander of the galleys; ordering them to arouse +the crews and make ready to put out to sea instantly. He added that +he, himself, should follow his messenger on board in a few minutes, +and should accompany them. He then issued orders that the bell +should toll to summon the inhabitants to arms; and directed an +officer to take the command, and to start with them at once across +the island, and to fall upon the pirates while engaged in their +work of pillage. They were to take a party with them with litters +to carry Polani's daughters to the town, and an apartment was to be +assigned to them in his palace, until his return.</p> + +<p>While he was issuing this order, refreshments had been placed +upon the table, and he pressed Polani and his companions to partake +of these before starting.</p> + +<p>Francis needed no second invitation. He had been too excited, at +the news he had heard on board the ship, to think of eating; and he +now remembered that it was a good many hours since he had taken his +last meal. He was but a few minutes, however, in satisfying his +hunger. By the time he had finished, the governor had seen that his +orders had been carried out.</p> + +<p>Two hundred armed citizens had already mustered in companies, +and were now on the point of setting out, burning with indignation +at what they had heard of the depredations which the pirates had +committed. After seeing his preparations complete the governor, +accompanied by Polani and Francis, made his way down to the port, +and was rowed out to the galleys.</p> + +<p>Here he found all on the alert. The sails were ready for +hoisting, and the men were seated at the benches, ready to aid with +oars the light wind which was blowing. The governor now informed +the commander of the vessels the reason of the sudden orders for +sailing. The news was passed to the captains of the other two +vessels, and in a very few minutes the anchors were weighed, and +the vessels started on their way.</p> + +<p>Francis was closely questioned as to the spot at which the +pirate vessel was lying, but could only reply that, beyond the fact +that it was some four miles from Polani's villa, he had no idea of +the locality.</p> + +<p>"But can you not describe to us the nature of the coast?" the +commander said.</p> + +<p>"That I cannot," Francis replied; "for I was hidden away in the +hold of the vessel, and did not come on deck until after it was +dark, at which time the land abreast of us was only a dark +mass."</p> + +<p>"Signor Polani has informed me," the governor said, "that, +although your attire does not betoken it, you are a dear friend of +his; but he has not yet informed me how it comes that you were upon +this pirate ship."</p> + +<p>"He has been telling me as we came along," Polani replied; "and +a strange story it is. He was on his voyage hither in the Naxos, +which, as you doubtless remember, was a little craft of mine, which +should have arrived here a month since. As we supposed, it was +captured by the pirates, the leader of whom is Ruggiero Mocenigo, +who, as of course you know, made his escape from the custody of the +officers of the state, they being overpowered by a party of +Paduans. The sentence of banishment for life has been passed +against him, and, until I heard from my friend here that he was +captain of the pirate which has been seen off this island, I knew +not what had become of him.</p> + +<p>"Those on board the Naxos were taken prisoners, and confined in +the pirate's hold, which they found already filled with captives +taken from other ships. The pirate at once sailed for Africa, where +all the prisoners were sold as slaves to the Moors, my friend here +alone excepted, Mocenigo having an old feud with him, and a design +to keep him in his hands. Learning that a raid was intended upon +Corfu, with the special design of carrying off my daughters, whom +Mocenigo had twice previously tried to abduct, Francisco managed to +get on board the vessel, and conceal himself in her hold, in order +that he might frustrate the design. He managed, in the dark, to +mingle with the landing party; and then, separating from them, made +his way on ahead, and fortunately was able to obtain a guide to my +house, which he reached five minutes only before the arrival of the +pirates there."</p> + +<p>"Admirable, indeed! And we are all vastly indebted to him, for +had it not been for him, we should not have known of the doings of +these scoundrels until too late to cut off their retreat; and, once +away in their ship again, they might long have preyed upon our +commerce, before one of our cruisers happened to fall in with +them.</p> + +<p>"As for Ruggiero Mocenigo, he is a disgrace to the name of a +Venetian; and it is sad to think that one of our most noble +families should have to bear the brand of being connected with a +man so base and villainous. However, I trust that his power of ill +doing has come to an end.</p> + +<p>"Is the vessel a fast one, signor?"</p> + +<p>"I cannot say whether she sails fast," Francis replied; "but she +certainly rows fast."</p> + +<p>"I trust that we shall catch her before she gets under way," the +commander of the galleys said. "Our vessels are not made for +rowing, although we get out oars to help them along in calm +weather."</p> + +<p>"What course do you propose to take?" the merchant asked.</p> + +<p>"When we approach the spot where she is likely to be lying, I +shall order the captains of the other two ships to lie off the +coast, a couple of miles distant and as far from each other, so +that they can cut her off as she makes out to sea. We will follow +the coast line, keeping in as close as the water will permit, and +in this way we shall most likely come upon her. If we should miss +her, I shall at the first dawn of morning join the others in the +offing, and keep watch till she appears from under the shadow of +the land."</p> + +<p>It was now three o'clock in the morning, and an hour later the +three vessels parted company, and the galley with the governor and +commander of the squadron rowed for the shore. When they came close +to the land, the captain ordered the oars to be laid in.</p> + +<p>"The breeze is very light," he said; "but it is favourable, and +will enable us to creep along the shore. If we continue rowing, +those in charge of the ship may hear us coming, and may cut their +cables, get up sail, and make out from the land without our seeing +them. On a still night, like this, the sound of the sweeps can be +heard a very long distance."</p> + +<p>Quietly the vessel made her way along the shore. Over the land, +the sky was red with the reflection of numerous fires, but this +only made the darkness more intense under its shadow, and the lead +was kept going in order to prevent them from sailing into shallow +water. By the captain's orders strict silence was observed on board +the ship, and every eye was strained ahead on the lookout for the +pirate vessel.</p> + +<p>Presently, all became aware of a confused noise, apparently +coming from the land, but at some distance ahead. As they got +further on, distant shouts and cries were heard.</p> + +<p>"I fancy," the governor said to the captain, "the band from the +town have met the pirates, and the latter are retreating to their +ship."</p> + +<p>"Then the ship can't be far off," the captain said. "Daylight is +beginning to break in the east, and we shall soon be able to make +her out against the sky--that is, if she is still lying at +anchor."</p> + +<p>On getting round the next point, the vessel was distinctly +visible. The shouting on the shore was now plainly heard, and there +could be no doubt that a desperate fight was going on there. It +seemed to be close to the water's edge.</p> + +<p>"There is a boat rowing off to the ship," one of the sailors +said.</p> + +<p>"Then get out your oars again. She is not more than half a mile +away, and she can hardly get under way before we reach her. +Besides, judging from the sound of the fight, the pirates must have +lost a good many men, and will not be able to man all the oars even +if they gain their ship."</p> + +<p>The men sat down to their oars with alacrity. Every sailor on +board felt it almost as a personal insult, that pirates should dare +to enter the Venetian waters and carry on their depredations there. +The glare of the burning houses, too, had fired their indignation +to the utmost, and all were eager for the fight.</p> + +<p>Three boats were now seen rowing towards the ship.</p> + +<p>"Stretch to your oars, men," the captain said. "We must be +alongside them, if we can, before they can take to their +sweeps."</p> + +<p>The pirates had now seen them; and Francis, standing at the bow +eagerly watching the vessel, could hear orders shouted to the +boats. These pulled rapidly alongside, and he could see the men +clambering up in the greatest haste. There was a din of voices. +Some men tried to get up the sails, others got out oars, and the +utmost confusion evidently prevailed. In obedience to the shouts of +the officers, the sails were lowered again, and all betook +themselves to the oars; but scarce a stroke had been pulled before +the Venetian galley ran up alongside. Grapnels were thrown, and the +crew, seizing their weapons, sprang on to the deck of the +pirate.</p> + +<p>The crew of the latter knew that they had no mercy to expect, +and although weakened by the loss of nearly a third of their number +in the fighting on shore, sprang from their benches, and rushed to +oppose their assailants, with the desperation of despair. They were +led by Ruggiero Mocenigo, who, furious at the failure of his +schemes, and preferring death to the shame of being carried to +Venice as a pirate and a traitor, rushed upon the Venetians with a +fury which, at first, carried all before it. Supported by his Moors +and renegades he drove back the boarders, and almost succeeded in +clearing the deck of his vessel.</p> + +<p>He himself engaged hand-to-hand with the commander of the +Venetian galley, and at the third thrust ran him through the +throat; but the Venetians, although they had yielded to the first +onslaught, again poured over the bulwarks of the galley. Polani, +burning to punish the man who had so repeatedly tried to injure +him, accompanied them, Francis keeping close beside him.</p> + +<p>"Ruggiero Mocenigo, traitor and villain, your time has +come!"</p> + +<p>Ruggiero started at hearing his name thus proclaimed, for on +board his own ship he was simply known as the captain; but in the +dim light he recognized Polani, and at once crossed swords with +him.</p> + +<p>"Be not so sure, Polani. Perhaps it is your time that has +come."</p> + +<p>The two engaged with fury. Polani was still strong and vigorous. +His opponent had the advantage of youth and activity. But Polani's +weight and strength told, and he was forcing his opponent back, +when his foot slipped on the bloodstained deck. He fell forward; +and in another moment Ruggiero would have run him through the body; +had not the weapon been knocked up by Francis, who, watching every +movement of the fight, sprang forward when he saw the merchant +slip.</p> + +<p>"This time, Ruggiero, my hands are free. How about your +vengeance now?"</p> + +<p>Ruggiero gave a cry of astonishment, at seeing the lad whom he +believed to be lying in chains, five hundred miles away, facing +him. For a moment he recoiled, and then with the cry, "I will take +it now," sprang forward. But this time he had met an opponent as +active and as capable as himself.</p> + +<p>For a minute or two they fought on even terms, and then Ruggiero +fell suddenly backwards, a crossbow bolt, from one of the Venetians +on the poop of the vessel, having struck him full in the +forehead.</p> + +<p>Without their leader, the spirit of the pirates had fled. They +still fought, steadily and desperately, but it was only to sell +their lives as dearly as possible; and in five minutes after the +fall of Ruggiero the last man was cut down, for no quarter was +given to pirates.</p> + +<p>Just as the combat concluded, the sound of oars was heard, and +the other two galleys came up to the assistance of their consort. +They arrived too late to take part in the conflict, but cheered +lustily when they heard that the pirate captain, and all his crew, +had been killed. Upon learning that the commander of the galley was +killed, the captain next in seniority assumed the command.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes, the bodies of the pirates were thrown +overboard, the wounded were carried below to have their wounds +attended to, while the bodies of those who had fallen--thirteen in +number--were laid together on the deck, for burial on shore.</p> + +<p>"Thanks to you, Francisco, that I am not lying there beside +them," the merchant said. "I did not know that you were so close at +hand, and as I slipped I felt that my end had come."</p> + +<p>"You were getting the better of him up to that point," Francis +said. "I was close at hand, in readiness to strike in should I see +that my aid was wanted, but up to the moment you slipped, I +believed that you would have avenged your wrongs yourself."</p> + +<p>"It is well that he fell as he did. It would have been dreadful, +indeed, had he been carried to Venice, to bring shame and disgrace +upon a noble family. Thank God, his power for mischief is at an +end! I have had no peace of mind since the day when you first +thwarted his attempt to carry off the girls; nor should I have ever +had, until I obtained sure tidings that he was dead. The +perseverance with which he has followed his resolve, to make my +daughter his wife, is almost beyond belief. Had his mind been +turned to other matters, he was capable of attaining greatness, for +no obstacle would have barred his way.</p> + +<p>"It almost seems as if it were a duel between him and you to the +death--his aim to injure me, and yours to defend us. And now it has +ended. Maria will breathe more freely when she hears the news, for, +gay and light hearted as she is, the dread of that man has weighed +heavily upon her."</p> + +<p>The governor, who from the poop of the vessel had watched the +conflict, now came up, and warmly congratulated Francis upon his +bravery.</p> + +<p>"I saw you rush forward, just as my friend Polani fell, and +engage his assailant. At first I thought you lost, for the villain +was counted one of the best swordsmen in Venice, and you are still +but a lad; but I saw you did not give way an inch, but held your +own against him; and I believe you would have slain him unaided, +for you were fighting with greater coolness than he was. Still, I +was relieved when I saw him fall, for even then the combat was +doubtful, and his men, to do them justice, fought like demons. How +comes it that one so young as you should be so skilled with your +weapon?"</p> + +<p>"This is not the first time that my young friend has done good +service to the state," Polani said; "for it was he who led a crew +of one of my ships to the aid of Pisani, when his galley was +boarded by the Genoese, at the battle of Antium."</p> + +<p>"Is this he?" the governor said, in surprise. "I heard, of +course, by the account of those who came from Venice a month since, +how Pisani was aided, when hard pressed, by the crew of one of your +ships, headed by a young Englishman, upon whom the state had +conferred the rights of citizenship as a recognition of his +services; but I did not dream that the Englishman was but a +lad.</p> + +<p>"What is your age, young sir?"</p> + +<p>"I am just eighteen," Francis replied. "Our people are all fond +of strong exercise, and thus it was that I became more skilled, +perhaps, than many of my age, in the use of arms."</p> + +<p>At nine o'clock the squadron arrived in the port, bringing with +them the captured galley. As soon as they were seen approaching, +the church bells rang, flags were hung out from the houses, and the +whole population assembled at the quay to welcome the victors and +to hear the news.</p> + +<p>"Do you go on at once, directly we land, Francisco, and set the +girls' minds at ease. I must come on with the governor, and he is +sure to be detained, and will have much to say before he can make +his way through the crowd."</p> + +<p>Francis was, on his arrival at the governor's, recognized by the +domestics, and at once shown into the room where the girls were +awaiting him. The fact that the pirate galley had been captured was +already known to them, the news having been brought some hours +before, by a horseman, from the other side of the island.</p> + +<p>"Where is our father?" Maria exclaimed, as Francis entered +alone.</p> + +<p>"He is well, and sent me on to relieve your minds."</p> + +<p>"Saint Mark be praised!" Maria said. "We have been sorely +anxious about you both. A messenger, who brought the news, said +that it could be seen from the shore that there was a desperate +fight on board the pirate ship, which was attacked by one galley +only. We felt sure that it would be the ship that the governor was +in, and we knew you were with him; and our father was so enraged at +what had happened, that we felt sure he would take part in the +fight."</p> + +<p>"He did so," Francis said, "and himself engaged hand-to-hand +with Mocenigo, and would probably have killed him, had not his foot +slipped on the deck. I was, of course, by his side, and occupied +the villain until a cross bolt pierced his brain. So there is an +end to all your trouble with him."</p> + +<p>"Is he really dead?" Maria said. "Oh, Francisco, how thankful I +am! He seemed so determined, that I began to think he was sure some +day to succeed in carrying me off. Not that I would ever have +become his wife, for I had vowed to kill myself before that came +about. I should have thought he might have known that he could +never have forced me to be his wife."</p> + +<p>"I told him the same thing," Francis said, "and he replied that +he was not afraid of that, for that he should have your sister in +his power also, and that he should warn you that, if you laid hands +on yourself, he should make her his wife instead of you."</p> + +<p>The girls both gave an exclamation of horror.</p> + +<p>"I never thought of that," Maria said; "but he would indeed have +disarmed me with such a threat. It would have been horrible for me +to have been the wife of such a man; but I think I could have borne +it rather than have consigned Giulia to such a fate.</p> + +<p>"Oh, here is father!"</p> + +<p>"I have got away sooner than I expected," Polani said as he +entered. "The governor was good enough to beg me to come on at once +to you. You have heard all the news, I suppose, and know that our +enemy will persecute you no more."</p> + +<p>"We have heard, papa, and also that you yourself fought with +him, which was very wrong and very rash of you."</p> + +<p>"And did he tell you that had it not been for him I should not +be here alive now, girls?"</p> + +<p>"No, father. He said that when you slipped he occupied +Ruggiero's attention until the cross bolt struck him."</p> + +<p>"That is what he did, my dear; but had he not occupied his +attention I should have been a dead man. The thrust was aimed at me +as I fell, and would have pierced me had he not sprung forward and +turned it aside, and then engaged in single combat with Mocenigo, +who, with all his faults, was brave and a skillful swordsman; and +yet, as the governor himself said, probably Francisco would have +slain him, even had not the combat ended as it did.</p> + +<p>"And now we must have his story in full. I have not heard much +about it yet, and you have heard nothing; and I want to know how he +managed to get out of the hands of that man, when he had once +fallen into them."</p> + +<p>"That is what we want to know, too, father. We know what a sharp +watch was kept upon us, and I am sure they must have been much more +severe with him."</p> + +<p>"They were certainly more severe," Francis said smiling, "for my +right hand was chained to my left ankle, and the left hand to to my +right ankle--not tightly, you know, but the chain was so short that +I could not stand upright. But, on the other hand, I do not think +my guards were as vigilant as yours. However, I will tell you the +whole story."</p> + +<p>The girls listened with rapt attention to the story of the +capture, the escape, and of his hiding in the hold of the pirate in +order to be able to give them a warning in time.</p> + +<p>"Your escape was fortunate, indeed," the merchant said when he +had finished. "Fortunate both for you and for us, for I have no +doubt that Mocenigo had intended to put you to a lingering death, +on his return. As for the girls, nothing could have saved them from +the fate he designed for them, save the method which you took of +arriving here before him."</p> + +<p>"What are we to do for him, father?" Maria exclaimed. "We are +not tired of thanking him, but he hates being thanked. If he would +only get into some terrible scrape, Giulia and I would set out to +rescue him at once; but you see he gets out of his scrapes before +we hear of them. It is quite disheartening not to be able to do +anything."</p> + +<p>Francis laughed merrily.</p> + +<p>"It is terrible, is it not, signora? But if I manage to get into +any scrape, and have time to summon you to my assistance, be sure I +will do so. But, you see, one cannot get into a scrape when one +chooses, and I must be content, while I am away, in knowing that I +have the good wishes of you and your sister."</p> + +<p>"Do not trouble yourself, Maria," her father said. "Some day an +opportunity may come for our paying our debts, and in the meantime +Francis is content that we should be his debtors."</p> + +<p>"And now, what are you going to do, papa?"</p> + +<p>"I shall sail with you for Venice tomorrow. The governor will be +sending one of the galleys with the news of the capture of the +pirate, and doubtless he will give us all a passage in her. I shall +order steps to be taken at once for rebuilding the villa, and will +get it completed by the spring, before which time you will be off +my hands, young lady; and I shall not be altogether sorry, for you +have been a very troublesome child lately."</p> + +<p>"It has not been my fault," Maria pouted.</p> + +<p>"Not at all, my dear. It has been your misfortune, and I am not +blaming you at all."</p> + +<p>"But the trouble is now over, father!"</p> + +<p>"So much the better for Rufino," the merchant said. "It will be +good news to him that you are freed from the persecution of +Ruggiero. And now, I must leave you, for I have arranged to ride +over with the governor to the other side of the island. He has to +investigate the damage which took place last evening. I hear that +upwards of a score of villas were sacked and destroyed, and that +many persons were killed; and while he is doing that I shall see +what has to be done at our place. I don't know whether the walls +are standing, or whether it will have to be entirely rebuilt, and I +must arrange with some builder to to go over from here with me, and +take my instructions as to what must be done."</p> + +<p>On the following day the party set sail for Venice, where they +arrived without adventure. Preparations were at once begun for the +marriage of Maria with Rufino Giustiniani, and six weeks later the +wedding ceremony took place. Francis did not go to sea until this +was over, for when he spoke of a fresh voyage, a short time after +their return, Maria declared that she would not be married unless +he remained to be present.</p> + +<p>"You have got me out of all my scrapes hitherto, Francisco, and +you must see me safely through this."</p> + +<p>As Signor Polani also declared that it was not to be thought of, +that Francis should leave until after the marriage, he was obliged +to remain for it. He was glad, however, when it was over, for he +found the time on shore more tedious than usual. The girls were +taken up with the preparations for the ceremony, and visitors were +constantly coming and going, and the house was not like itself.</p> + +<p>But even when the marriage was over, he was forced to remain +some time longer in Venice. The Genoese fleets were keeping the +sea, and Pisani had not, since the battle of Antium, succeeded in +coming up with them. The consequence was that commerce was at a +standstill, for the risk of capture was so great that the merchants +ceased to send their ships to sea.</p> + +<p>"The profit would not repay us for the risk, Francisco," the +merchant said one day when they were talking over it. "If only one +cargo in ten fell into their hands the profit off the other nine +would be swept away; but as I see that you are longing to be afloat +again, you can, if you like, join one of the state galleys which +start next week to reinforce Pisani's fleet.</p> + +<p>"The last time Pisani wrote to me he said how glad he should be +to have you with him; and after your service at Antium, I have no +doubt whatever that I could procure for you a post as second in +command in one of the ships. What do you say?"</p> + +<p>"I should certainly like it, signor, greatly; but, as you said +before, it would be a mere waste of time for me to take service +with the state, when I am determined upon the vocation of a +merchant."</p> + +<p>"I did say that, Francis, and meant it at the time; but at +present trade is, as you see, at a standstill, so you would not be +losing time, and, in the next place, it is always an advantage, +even to a trader, to stand well with the state. Here in Venice all +the great merchants are of noble family, and trade is no bar to +occupying the highest offices of the state. Many of our doges have +been merchants; while merchants are often soldiers, diplomatists, +or governors, as the state requires their services.</p> + +<p>"You have already, you see, obtained considerable benefit by the +action at Antium. I do not say that you would derive any direct +benefit, even were you to distinguish yourself again as highly as +on that occasion. Still, it is always well to gain the +consideration of your fellows, and to be popular with the people. +Therefore, if you would like to take service with the state until +this affair is decided with Genoa, and the seas are again open to +our ships, I think it will be advantageous to you rather than +not."</p> + +<p>"Then, with your permission I will certainly do so, signor," +Francis said. "Of course I should prefer to go as an officer on +board one of the ships; but if not, I will go as a volunteer."</p> + +<p>"You need not fear about that, Francis. With my influence, and +that of the Giustiniani, and the repute you have gained for +yourself, you may be sure of an appointment. Rufino would have +commanded one of the ships had it not been for his marriage."</p> + +<p>Rufino Giustiniani had indeed been most warm in his expressions +of gratitude to Francis, to whom the whole family had shown the +greatest attention, giving him many presents as a proof of their +goodwill and gratitude.</p> + +<p>"I am quite jealous of your English friend," Rufino had said one +day to Maria. "I do believe, Maria, that you care for him more than +you do for me. It is lucky for me that he is not two or three years +older."</p> + +<p>Maria laughed.</p> + +<p>"I do care for him dearly; and if he had been, as you say, older +and had fallen in love with me, I can't say how it would have been. +You must acknowledge, it would be very hard to say no to a man who +keeps on saving you from frightful peril; but then, you see, a girl +can't fall in love with a man who does not fall in love with +her.</p> + +<p>"Francisco is so different from us Venetians. He always says +just what he thinks, and never pays anyone even the least bit of a +compliment. How can you fall in love with a man like that? Of +course you can love him like a brother--and I do love Francisco as +if he were my brother--but I don't think we should have got further +than that, if he had been ever so old."</p> + +<p>"And does Francis never pay you compliments, Giulia?"</p> + +<p>"Never!" Giulia said decidedly. "It would be hateful of him if +he did."</p> + +<p>"But Maria doesn't object to compliments, Giulia. She looks for +them as if they were her daily bread--</p> + +<p>"Don't you, Maria--</p> + +<p>"You will have to learn to put up with them soon, Giulia, for +you will be out in society now, and the young men will crowd round +your chair, just as they have done round that of this little flirt, +your sister."</p> + +<p>"I shall have to put up with it, I suppose," Giulia said +quietly, "just as one puts up with other annoyances. But I should +certainly never get to care for anyone who thinks so little of me, +as to believe that I could be pleased by being addressed in such +terms."</p> + +<p>"From which I gather," Giustiniani said, smiling, "that this +English lad's bluntness of speech pleases you more than it does +Maria?"</p> + +<p>"It pleases Maria, too," Giulia said, "though she may choose to +say that it doesn't. And I don't think it quite right to discuss +him at all, when we all owe him as much as we do."</p> + +<p>Giustiniani glanced at Maria and gave a little significant +nod.</p> + +<p>"I do not think Giulia regards Francisco in quite the brotherly +way that you do, Maria," he whispered presently to her.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps not," Maria answered. "You see, she had not fallen in +love with you before she met him. But I do not know. Giulia seldom +speaks of him when we are alone, and if she did, you don't suppose +I should tell you my sister's secrets, sir?"</p> + +<p>The day after his conversation with Francis, Polani handed him +his nomination as second in command of the Pluto, which he had +obtained that morning from the seignory.</p> + +<p>"You will be glad to hear that it is in this ship that Matteo +also sails," for Matteo had come home for his brother's +wedding.</p> + +<p>"I am very glad of that," Francis said. "I wish that poor +Giuseppi was also here to go with me. I shall miss him terribly. He +was a most faithful and devoted follower."</p> + +<p>"I have already sent orders, to my agent in Tunis, to spare no +pains in discovering to whom the crew of the Naxos were sold. It is +unfortunate that so many other captives were sold at the same time, +as it will make it so much more difficult to trace our men. Those +purchasing are not likely to know more than their first names, and +may not even take the trouble to find out those, but may give them +the first appellation that comes to hand. Therefore he has to find +out who are now the masters of the whole of the captives sold at +the same time, and then to pursue his investigations until he +discovers the identity of the men he is looking for. Once he has +found this, I will promise you there will be no delay. I have +ordered him to make the best bargain in each case he can, but that +at any rate he is to buy every one of them, whatever it may +cost.</p> + +<p>"I have sent him the personal descriptions of each man of the +boat's crew, as given to me by their friends and relatives here, as +this will be an assistance in his search. If, for instance, he +hears of a Christian slave named Giuseppi living with a master some +hundreds of miles in the interior, the fact that this man is middle +aged will show at once that he was not the Giuseppi, age 20, of +whom he is in search. I have particularly impressed upon him, in my +letter, that we were especially anxious for the rescue of the +captain, and the young man Giuseppi, so I hope that by the time you +return from the voyage, I may have received some news of them."</p> + +<p>Matteo was greatly pleased when he heard that he was going to +sail under Francis.</p> + +<p>"I would rather that we had both been volunteers," Francis said. +"It seems absurd my being appointed second officer, while you as +yet have no official position."</p> + +<p>"I am not in the least bit in the world jealous, Francisco. With +the exception of taking part in the fight at Antium, I have had no +experience whatever, while you have been going through all sorts of +adventures for the last two years, and always have come out of them +marvellously well."</p> + +<p>An hour after Matteo left him, a retainer of the family brought +Francis a letter from Signor Giustiniani, inviting him to come to +his house that evening, as many of Matteo's comrades on board the +Pluto would be present. On Francis going to the palace he found +assembled, not only the young men who would be Matteo's comrades as +volunteers, but also the captain and other officers of the ship; +and to them Signor Giustiniani personally presented Francis, while +Rufino and Matteo did all they could to ensure the heartiest +welcome for him, by telling everyone how greatly they were indebted +to him, and how gallantly he had behaved on several occasions.</p> + +<p>Many of the young men he already knew as Matteo's friends, and +by them he was received with the greatest cordiality; but his +reception by the captain, and one or two of the other officers, was +much more cool. The captain, whose name was Carlo Bottini, was a +distant connection of the Mocenigo family, and was therefore +already prejudiced against Francis. The coolness of the other +officers was due to the fact that Francis, a foreigner and several +years junior to themselves, had been placed in command over their +heads.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch15">Chapter 15</a>: The Battle Of Pola.</h2> + +<p>The squadron, consisting of four galleys, sailed for Cyprus; +where Pisani had just endeavoured, without success, to expel the +Genoese from Famagosta. It was towards the end of August that they +effected a junction with his fleet. Pisani received Francis with +great warmth, and, in the presence of many officers, remarked that +he was glad to see that the republic was, at last, appointing men +for their merits, and not, as heretofore, allowing family +connection and influence to be the chief passport to their +favour.</p> + +<p>For two months the fleet sailed among the islands of the Levant, +and along the shores of Greece, Istria, and Dalmatia; hoping to +find the Genoese fleet, but altogether without success. In +November, when they were on the coast of Istria, winter set in with +extraordinary severity, and the frost was intense. Pisani wrote to +his government asking permission to bring the fleet into Venice +until the spring. The seignory, however, refused his request, for +they feared that, were it known that their fleet had come into port +for the winter, the Genoese would take advantage of its absence to +seize upon some of the islands belonging to Venice, and to induce +the inhabitants of the cities of Istria and Dalmatia, always ready +for revolt, to declare against her.</p> + +<p>The first indications of the winter were more than verified. The +cold was altogether extraordinary; and out of the nineteen galleys +of Pisani, only six were fit to take the sea, with their full +complement of men, when the spring of 1379 began. Many of the +vessels had been disabled by storms. Numbers of the men had died, +more had been sent home invalided, and it was only by transferring +the men from the other vessels to the six in the best condition, +that the crews of the latter were made up to their full +strength.</p> + +<p>As soon as the terrible frost broke, Pisani received a +reinforcement of twelve ships from Venice, these being, for the +most part, built and equipped at the cost of his personal friends, +Polani having contributed two of the number. With the eighteen +sail, Pisani put to sea to prosecute a fresh search for the Genoese +admiral, Doria, and his fleet.</p> + +<p>The Pluto was one of the six vessels which remained in good +condition at the end of the winter, thanks, in no small degree, to +the energy and care which Francis had bestowed in looking after the +welfare of the crew. In the most bitter weather, he had himself +landed with the boats, to see that firewood was cut and brought off +in abundance, not only for the officers' cabins, but to warm that +portion of the ship inhabited by the men. Knowing that Polani would +not grudge any sum which might be required, he obtained from his +agents ample supplies of warm clothing and bedding for the men, +occupying himself incessantly for their welfare, while the captain +and other officers passed their time in their warm and comfortable +cabins. Francis induced Matteo, and several of his comrades, to +brave the weather as he did, and to exert themselves for the +benefit of the men; and the consequence was, that while but few of +the other ships retained enough men to raise their sails in case of +emergency, the strength of the crew of the Pluto was scarcely +impaired at the termination of the winter.</p> + +<p>The admiral, on paying a visit of inspection to the ship, was +greatly struck with the contrast which the appearance of the crew +afforded to that of the other galleys, and warmly complimented the +commander on the condition of his men. The captain received the +praise as if it was entirely due to himself, and said not a single +word of the share which Francis had had in bringing it about. +Matteo was most indignant at this injustice towards his friend, and +managed that, through a relative serving in the admiral's own ship, +a true report of the case should come to Pisani's ears.</p> + +<p>Francis was in no way troubled at the captain's appropriation of +the praise due to himself. There had not, from the time he sailed, +been any cordiality between Francis and the other officers. These +had been selected for the position solely from family influence, +and none of them were acquainted with the working of a ship.</p> + +<p>In those days, not only in Venice but in other countries, naval +battles were fought by soldiers rather than sailors. Nobles and +knights, with their retainers, embarked on board a ship for the +purpose of fighting, and of fighting only, the management of the +vessel being carried on entirely by sailors under their own +officers. Thus, neither the commander of the force on board the +galley, nor any of his officers, with the exception of Francis, +knew anything whatever about the management of the ship, nor were +capable of giving orders to the crew. Among the latter were some +who had sailed with Francis in his first two voyages, and these +gave so excellent a report of him to the rest, that they were from +the first ready to obey his orders as promptly as those of their +own sub-officer.</p> + +<p>Francis concerned himself but little with the ill will that was +shown him by the officers. He knew that it arose from jealousy, not +only of the promotion he, a foreigner and a junior in years, had +received over them, but of the fact that he had already received +the thanks of the republic for the services he had rendered, and +stood high in the favour of the admiral, who never lost an +opportunity of showing the interest he had in him. Had the +hostility shown itself in any offensive degree Francis would at +once have resented it; but Matteo, and some of those on board, who +had been his comrades in the fencing rooms, had given such reports +of his powers with his weapons, that even those most opposed to him +thought it prudent to observe a demeanour of outward politeness +towards him.</p> + +<p>For three months the search for the Genoese fleet was +ineffectual. A trip had been made along the coast of Apulia, and +the fleet had returned to Pola with a large convoy of merchant +ships loaded with grain, when on the 7th of May Doria appeared off +the port, with twenty-five sail.</p> + +<p>But Pisani was now by no means anxious to fight. Zeno was away +with a portion of the fleet, and although he had received +reinforcements, he numbered but twenty-one vessels, and a number of +his men were laid up with sickness. The admiral, however, was not +free to follow out the dictates of his own opinions. The Venetians +had a mischievous habit, which was afterwards adopted by the French +republic, of fettering their commanders by sea and land by +appointing civilian commissioners, or, as they were termed in +Venice, proveditors, who had power to overrule the nominal +commander. When, therefore, Pisani assembled a council of war, and +informed them of his reasons for wishing to remain on the defensive +until the return of Zeno, he was overruled by the proveditors, who +not only announced themselves unanimously in favour of battle, but +sneered at Pisani's prudence as being the result of cowardice. +Pisani in his indignation drew his sword, and would have attacked +the proveditors on the spot, had he not been restrained by his +captains.</p> + +<p>However, the council decided upon instant battle, and Pisani was +forced, by the rules of the service, at once to carry their +decision into effect. Ascending the poop of his galley, he +addressed in a loud voice the crews of the ships gathered around +him.</p> + +<p>"Remember, my brethren, that those who will now face you, are +the same whom you vanquished with so much glory on the Roman shore. +Do not let the name of Luciano Doria terrify you. It is not the +names of commanders that will decide the conflict, but Venetian +hearts and Venetian hands. Let him that loves Saint Mark follow +me."</p> + +<p>The men received the address with a shout, and as soon as the +commanders had regained their galleys, the fleet moved out to +attack the enemy. The fight was a furious one, each vessel singling +out an opponent and engaging her hand to hand.</p> + +<p>Carlo Bottini was killed early in the fight, and Francis +succeeded to the command. His galley had grappled with one of the +largest of the Genoese vessels, and a desperate conflict went on. +Sometimes the Venetians gained a footing on the deck of the +Genoese, sometimes they were driven back, and the Genoese in turn +poured on board, but no decisive advantage was gained on either +side after an hour's fighting. The Genoese crew was numerically +much stronger than that of the Pluto, and although Francis, with +Matteo and his comrades, headed their men and cheered them on, they +could make no impression on the ranks of the enemy.</p> + +<p>Suddenly, the Genoese threw off the grapnels that attached the +two ships, and hoisting their sails, sheered off. Francis looked +round to see the cause of this sudden manoeuvre, and perceived for +the first time that the Genoese vessels were all in flight, with +the Venetians pressing closely upon them. Sails were at once +hoisted, and the Pluto joined in the chase.</p> + +<p>But the flight was a feigned one, and it was only designed to +throw the Venetian rank into confusion. After sailing for two +miles, the Genoese suddenly turned, and fell upon their pursuers as +they came up in straggling order.</p> + +<p>The result was decisive. Many of the Venetian ships were +captured before the rest came up to take part in the battle. Others +were hemmed in by numerous foes. Pisani, after fighting until he +saw that all was lost, made the signal for the ships to withdraw +from the conflict, and he himself, with six galleys, succeeded in +fighting his way through the enemy's fleet, and gained a refuge in +the port of Parenzo.</p> + +<p>All the rest were taken. From seven to eight hundred Venetians +perished in the fight, two thousand four hundred were taken +prisoners, twelve commanders were killed, and five captured. The +Genoese losses were also severe, and Doria himself was among the +slain, having been killed by a spear thrust by Donato Zeno, +commander of one of the galleys, almost at the moment of +victory.</p> + +<p>The Pluto had defended herself, for a long time, against the +attacks of three of the Genoese galleys, and had repeatedly +endeavoured to force her way out of the throng, but the Genoese +held her fast with their grapnels, and at last the greater part of +her crew were driven down below, and Francis, seeing the +uselessness of further resistance, ordered the little group, who +were now completely pent in by the Genoese, to lower their weapons. +All were more or less severely wounded, and were bleeding from +sword cuts and thrusts.</p> + +<p>"This is an evil day for Venice," Matteo said, as, having been +deprived of their weapons, the prisoners were thrust below. "I +heard the Genoese say that only six of our galleys have escaped, +all the rest have been taken. We were the last ship to surrender, +that's a comfort anyhow."</p> + +<p>"Now, Matteo, before you do anything else, let me bind up your +wounds. You are bleeding in two or three places."</p> + +<p>"And you are bleeding from something like a dozen, Francisco, so +you had better let me play the doctor first."</p> + +<p>"The captain is always served last, so do as you are told, and +strip off your doublet.</p> + +<p>"Now, gentlemen," he said, turning to the other officers, "let +each of us do what we can to dress the wounds of others. We can +expect no care from the Genoese leeches, who will have their hands +full, for a long time to come, with their own men. There are some +among us who will soon bleed to death, unless their wounds are +staunched. Let us, therefore, take the most serious cases first, +and so on in rotation until all have been attended to."</p> + +<p>It was fortunate for them that in the hold, in which they were +confined, there were some casks of water; for, for hours the +Genoese paid no attention whatever to their prisoners, and the +wounded were beginning to suffer agonies of thirst, when the +barrels were fortunately discovered. The head of one was knocked +in, and some shallow tubs, used for serving the water to the crew, +filled, and the men knelt down and drank by turns from these. Many +were too enfeebled by their wounds to rise, and their thirst was +assuaged by dipping articles of clothing into the water, and +letting the fluid from these run into their mouths.</p> + +<p>It was not until next morning that the prisoners were ordered to +come on deck. Many had died during the night. Others were too weak +to obey the summons. The names of the rest were taken, and not a +little surprise was expressed, by the Genoese officers, at the +extreme youth of the officer in command of the Pluto.</p> + +<p>"I was only the second in command," Francis said in answer to +their questions. "Carlo Bottini was in command of the ship, but he +was killed at the commencement of the fight."</p> + +<p>"But how is it that one so young came to be second? You must +belong to some great family to have been thus pushed forward above +men so much your senior.</p> + +<p>"It was a wise choice nevertheless," the commander of one of the +galleys which had been engaged with the Pluto said, "for it is but +justice to own that no ship was better handled, or fought, in the +Venetian fleet. They were engaged with us first, and for over an +hour they fought us on fair terms, yielding no foot of ground, +although we had far more men than they carried. I noticed this +youth fighting always in the front line with the Venetians, and +marvelled at the strength and dexterity with which he used his +weapons, and afterwards, when there were three of us around him, he +fought like a boar surrounded by hounds. I am sure he is a brave +youth, and well worthy the position he held, to whatsoever he owed +it."</p> + +<p>"I belong to no noble family of Venice," Francis said. "My name +is Francis Hammond, and my parents are English."</p> + +<p>"You are not a mercenary, I trust?" the Genoese captain asked +earnestly.</p> + +<p>"I am not," Francis replied. "I am a citizen of Venice, and my +name is inscribed in her books, as my comrades will vouch."</p> + +<p>"Right glad am I that it is so," the Genoese said, "for Pietro +Doria, who is now, by the death of his brother, in chief command, +has ordered that every mercenary found among the prisoners shall +today be slain."</p> + +<p>"It is a brutal order," Francis said fearlessly, "whosoever may +have given it! A mercenary taken in fair fight has as much right to +be held for ransom or fair exchange as any other prisoner; and if +your admiral thus breaks the laws of war, there is not a free +lance, from one end of Italy to the other, but will take it up as a +personal quarrel."</p> + +<p>The Genoese frowned at the boldness with which Francis spoke, +but at heart agreed in the sentiments he expressed; for among the +Genoese officers, generally, there was a feeling that this brutal +execution in cold blood was an impolitic, as well as a disgraceful +deed.</p> + +<p>The officers were now placed in the fore hold of the ship, the +crew being confined in the after hold. Soon afterwards, they knew +by the motion of the vessel that sail had been put on her.</p> + +<p>"So we are on our way to a Genoese prison, Francisco," Matteo +said. "We had a narrow escape of it before, but this time I suppose +it is our fate."</p> + +<p>"There is certainly no hope of rescue, Matteo. It is too early, +as yet, to say whether there is any hope of escape. The prospect +looked darker when I was in the hands of Ruggiero, but I managed to +get away. Then I was alone and closely guarded, now we have in the +ship well nigh two hundred friends; prisoners like ourselves, it is +true, but still to be counted on. Then, too, the Genoese are no +doubt so elated with their triumph, that they are hardly likely to +keep a very vigilant guard over us. Altogether, I should say that +the chances are in our favour. Were I sure that the Pluto is +sailing alone, I should be very confident that we might retake her, +but probably the fifteen captured ships are sailing in company, and +would at once come to the aid of their comrades here, directly they +saw any signs of a conflict going on, and we could hardly hope to +recapture the ship without making some noise over it."</p> + +<p>"I should think not," Matteo agreed.</p> + +<p>"Then again, Matteo, even if we find it impossible to get at the +crew, and with them to recapture the ship, some chance may occur by +which you and I may manage to make our escape."</p> + +<p>"If you say so, Francisco, I at once believe it. You got us all +out of the scrape down at Girgenti. You got Polani's daughters out +of a worse scrape when they were captives on San Nicolo; and got +yourself out of the worst scrape of all when you escaped from the +grip of Ruggiero Mocenigo. Therefore, when you say that there is a +fair chance of escape out of this business, I look upon it as +almost as good as done."</p> + +<p>"It is a long way from that, Matteo," Francis laughed. "Still, I +hope we may manage it somehow. I have the greatest horror of a +Genoese prison, for it is notorious that they treat their prisoners +of war shamefully, and I certainly do not mean to enter one, if +there is the slightest chance of avoiding it. But for today, +Matteo, I shall not even begin to think about it. In the first +place, my head aches with the various thumps it has had; in the +second, I feel weak from loss of blood; and in the third, my wounds +smart most amazingly."</p> + +<p>"So do mine," Matteo agreed. "In addition, I am hungry, for the +bread they gave us this morning was not fit for dogs, although I +had to eat it, as it was that or nothing."</p> + +<p>"And now, Matteo, I shall try to get a few hours' sleep. I did +not close my eyes last night, from the pain of my wounds, but I +think I might manage to drop off now."</p> + +<p>The motion of the vessel aided the effect of the bodily weakness +that Francis was feeling, and in spite of the pain of his wounds he +soon went off into a sound sleep. Once or twice he woke, but +hearing no voices or movement, he supposed his companions were all +asleep, and again went off, until a stream of light coming in from +the opening of the hatchway thoroughly roused him. Matteo, who was +lying by his side, also woke and stretched himself, and there was a +general movement among the ten young men who were their comrades in +misfortune.</p> + +<p>"Here is your breakfast," a voice from above the hatchway said, +and a basket containing bread and a bucket of water was lowered by +ropes.</p> + +<p>"Breakfast!" Matteo said. "Why, it is not two hours since we +breakfasted last."</p> + +<p>"I suspect it is twenty-two, Matteo. We have had a very long +sleep, and I feel all the better of it. Now, let us divide the +liberal breakfast our captors have given us; fortunately there is +just enough light coming down from those scuttles to enable us to +do so fairly."</p> + +<p>There was a general laugh, from his comrades, at the cheerful +way in which Francis spoke. Only one of them had been an officer on +the Pluto. The rest were, like Matteo, volunteers of good families. +There was a good deal of light-hearted jesting over their meal. +When it was over, Francis said:</p> + +<p>"Now let us hold a council of war."</p> + +<p>"You are better off than Pisani was, anyhow," one of the young +men said, "for you are not hampered with proveditors, and anything +that your captaincy may suggest will, you may be sure, receive our +assent."</p> + +<p>"I am your captain no longer," Francis replied. "We are all +prisoners now, and equal, and each one has a free voice and a free +vote."</p> + +<p>"Then I give my voice and vote at once, Francisco," Matteo said, +"to the proposal that you remain our captain, and that we obey you, +as cheerfully and willingly as we should if you were on the poop of +the Pluto, instead of being in the hold. In the first place, at +Carlo's death you became our captain by right, so long as we remain +together; and in the second place you have more experience than all +of us put together, and a very much better head than most of us, +myself included.</p> + +<p>"Therefore, comrades, I vote that Messer Francisco Hammond be +still regarded as our captain, and obeyed as such."</p> + +<p>There was a general chorus of assent, for the energy which +Francis had displayed throughout the trying winter, and the manner +in which he had led the crew during the desperate fighting, had won +for him the regard and the respect of them all.</p> + +<p>"Very well, then," Francis said. "If you wish it so I will +remain your leader, but we will nevertheless hold our council of +war. The question which I shall first present to your consideration +is, which is the best way to set about retaking the Pluto?"</p> + +<p>There was a burst of laughter among the young men. The matter of +fact way in which Francis proposed, what seemed to them an +impossibility, amused them immensely.</p> + +<p>"I am quite in earnest," Francis went on, when the laughter had +subsided. "If it is possibly to be done, I mean to retake the +Pluto, and I have very little doubt that it is possible, if we set +about it in the right way. In the first place, we may take it as +absolutely certain that we very considerably outnumber the Genoese +on board. They must have suffered in the battle almost as much as +we did, and have had nearly as many killed and wounded. In the +second place, if Doria intends to profit by his victory, he must +have retained a fair amount of fighting men on board each of his +galleys, and, weakened as his force was by the losses of the +action, he can spare but a comparatively small force on board each +of the fifteen captured galleys. I should think it probable that +there are not more than fifty men in charge of the Pluto, and we +number fully three times that force. The mere fact that they let +down our food to us by ropes, instead of bringing it down, showed a +consciousness of weakness."</p> + +<p>"What you say is quite true," Paolo Parucchi, the other officer +of the Pluto, said; "but they are fifty well-armed men, and we are +a hundred and fifty without arms, and shut down in the hold, to +which must be added the fact that we are cut off from our men, and +our men from us. They are, as it were, without a head to plan, +while we are without arms to strike."</p> + +<p>A murmur of approval was heard among some of the young men.</p> + +<p>"I do not suppose that there are no difficulties in our way," +Francis said quietly; "or that we have only, next time the hatch is +opened, to say to those above, 'Gentlemen of Genoa, we are more +numerous than you are, and we therefore request you to change +places with us immediately.' All I have asserted, so far, is that +we are sufficiently strong to retake the ship, if we get the +opportunity. What we have now to settle, is how that opportunity is +to come about.</p> + +<p>"To begin with, has anyone a dagger or knife which has escaped +the eye of our searchers?"</p> + +<p>No one replied.</p> + +<p>"I was afraid that nothing had escaped the vigilance of those +who appropriated our belongings. As, however, we have no weapons or +tools, the next thing is to see what there is, in the hold, which +can be turned to account. It is fortunate we are on board the +Pluto, instead of being transferred to another ship, as we already +know all about her. There are some iron bolts driven in along a +beam at the farther end. They have been used, I suppose, at some +time or other for hanging the carcasses of animals from. Let us see +whether there is any chance of getting some of them out."</p> + +<p>The iron pegs, however, were so firmly driven into the beam, +that all their efforts failed to move them in the slightest.</p> + +<p>"We will give that up for the present," Francis said, "and look +round for something more available."</p> + +<p>But with the exception of the water casks, the closest search +failed to find anything in the hold.</p> + +<p>"I do not know whether the iron hoops of a cask would be of any +use," Matteo said.</p> + +<p>"Certainly they would be of use, if we get them off, +Matteo."</p> + +<p>"There is no difficulty about that," one of the others said, +examining the casks closely. "This is an empty one, and the hoops +seem quite loose."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes, four iron hoops were taken off the cask.</p> + +<p>"After all," Matteo said, "they cannot be of much use. The iron +is rust eaten, and they would break in our hands before going into +any one."</p> + +<p>"They would certainly be useless as daggers, Matteo, but I think +that with care they will act as saws. Break off a length of about a +foot.</p> + +<p>"Now straighten it, and tear a piece off your doublet and wrap +it round and round one end, so that you can hold it. Now just try +it on the edge of a beam."</p> + +<p>"It certainly cuts," Matteo announced after a trial, "but not +very fast."</p> + +<p>"So that it cuts at all, we may be very well content," Francis +said cheerfully. "We have got a week, at least, to work in; and if +the wind is not favourable, we may have a month. Let us therefore +break the hoops up into pieces of the right length. We must use +them carefully, for we may expect to have many breakages."</p> + +<p>"What next, captain?"</p> + +<p>"Our object will, of course, be to cut through into the main +hold, which separates us from the crew. There we shall probably +find plenty of weapons. But to use our saws, we must first find a +hole in the bulkhead. First of all, then, let there be a strict +search made for a knothole, or any other hole through the +bulkhead."</p> + +<p>It was too dark for eyes to be of much use, but hands were run +all over the bulkhead. But no hole, however small, was +discovered.</p> + +<p>"It is clear, then," Francis said, "that the first thing to do +is to cut out some of those iron bolts. Pick out those that are +nearest to the lower side of the beam, say three of them. There are +twelve of us. That will give four to each bolt, and we can relieve +each other every few minutes. Remember, it is patience that is +required, and not strength."</p> + +<p>The work was at once begun. The young men had, by this time, +fully entered into the spirit of the attempt. The quiet and +businesslike way, in which their leader set about it, convinced +them that he at least had a firm belief that the work was possible; +and there was a hope, even if but a remote one, of avoiding the +dreaded dungeons of Genoa.</p> + +<p>The work was slow, and two or three of the strips of iron were +at first broken, by the too great eagerness of their holders; but +when it was found that, by using them lightly, the edges gradually +cut their way into the wood, the work went on regularly. The Pluto +had been hurriedly constructed, and any timbers that were available +in the emergency were utilized. Consequently much soft wood, that +at other times would never have been found in the state dockyards, +was put into her. The beam at which they were working was of soft +timber, and a fine dust fell steadily, as the rough iron was sawed +backward and forward upon it.</p> + +<p>Two cuts were made under each bolt, wide at the base and +converging towards it. The saws were kept going the whole day, and +although the progress was slow, it was fast enough to encourage +them; and just as the light, that came through the scuttle, faded +away; three of the young men hung their weight upon one of the +bolts, and the wood beneath it, already almost severed, gave; and a +suppressed cry of satisfaction announced that one bolt was +free.</p> + +<p>The pieces of iron were two feet long, and were intended for +some other purpose, but had been driven in when, on loading the +ship, some strong pegs on which to hang carcasses were required. +They were driven about three inches into the beam, and could have +been cut out with an ordinary saw in two or three minutes.</p> + +<p>"Try the others," Francis said. "As many of you get hold of them +as can put your hands on."</p> + +<p>The effort was made, and the other two bolts were got out. They +had been roughly sharpened at the end, and were fully an inch +across.</p> + +<p>"They do not make bad weapons," Matteo said.</p> + +<p>"It is not as weapons that we want them, Matteo. They will be +more useful to us than any weapons, except, indeed, a good axe. We +shall want at least three more. Therefore, I propose that we +continue our work at once. We will divide into watches now. It will +be twelve hours before we get our allowance of bread again, +therefore that will give three hours' work, and nine hours' sleep +to each. They will be just setting the first watch on deck, and, as +we shall hear them changed, it will give us a good idea how the +time is passing."</p> + +<p>"I am ready to work all night, myself," Matteo said. "At first I +had not much faith in what we were doing; but now that we have got +three of these irons out, I am ready to go on working until I +drop."</p> + +<p>"You will find, Matteo, that your arms will ache, so that you +cannot hold them up, before the end of the three hours. Sawing like +that, with your arms above your head, is most fatiguing; and even +the short spells of work we have been having made my arms ache. +However, each must do as much as he can in his three hours; and as +we are working in the dark, we must work slowly and carefully, or +we shall break our tools."</p> + +<p>"Fortunately, we can get more hoops off now if we want them," +Matteo said. "With these irons we can wrench them off the sound +casks, if necessary."</p> + +<p>"Yes; I did not think of that, Matteo. You see we are already +getting a stock of tools. Another thing is, with the point of the +irons we have got off, we can wrench the wood out as fast as we saw +it, and the saws will not work so stiffly as they did before. But +we must not do that till the morning, for any sound like the +breaking of wood might be heard by the watch, when everything is +quiet."</p> + +<p>Although all worked their best, they made but slight progress in +the dark, and each worker was forced to take frequent rests, for +the fatigue of working with their arms above their heads was +excessive. As soon, however, as the light began to steal down, and +the movement above head told them that the crew were at work +washing the decks, the points of the irons were used to wrench away +the wood between the saw cuts; and the work then proceeded briskly, +as they relieved each other every few minutes.</p> + +<p>At last, to their intense satisfaction, three more irons were +got out.</p> + +<p>"If anyone had told me," one of the party said, "that a man's +arms could hurt as much as mine do, from working a few hours, I +should have disbelieved him."</p> + +<p>There was a chorus of assent, for none were accustomed to hard +manual labour, and the pain in their arms was excessive.</p> + +<p>"Let us have half an hour's rest, Francis, before you issue your +next orders. I shall want that, at least, before I feel that I have +any power in my arms at all."</p> + +<p>"We will have an hour's rest, Matteo, if you like. Before that +time they will be sending us down our food, and after we have +breakfasted we can set to work again."</p> + +<p>"Breakfast!" one of the young men groaned. "I cannot call that +black bread and water breakfast. When I think of the breakfasts I +have eaten, when I think of the dishes I have refused to eat, +because they were not cooked to perfection, I groan over my folly +in those days, and my enormous stupidity in ever volunteering to +come to sea."</p> + +<p>"I should recommend you all," Francis said, "to spend the next +hour in rubbing and squeezing the muscles of your neighbours' arms +and shoulders. It is the best way for taking out stiffness, and +Giuseppi used to give me relief that way, when I was stiff with +fencing."</p> + +<p>The idea was adopted; and while the rest were at work in the +manner he suggested, Francis, taking one of the irons, went to the +bulkhead. One by one he tried the planks, from the floor boards to +the beams above.</p> + +<p>"Well, captain, what is your report?" Matteo asked as he joined +the rest.</p> + +<p>"My report is a most favourable one," Francis said. "By great +good luck, the planks are nailed from the other side against the +beams both above and below."</p> + +<p>"What difference does that make, Francisco?"</p> + +<p>"All the difference in the world. Had they been nailed on this +side, there would have been nothing for it but to carry out our +original plan--that is, to make holes through the planks with these +irons, large enough for the saws to go through, and then to saw the +wood out from hole to hole. As it is, I believe that with five +minutes' work we could wrench a plank away. We have only to push +the points of the irons up, between the beams and the planks, and +use them as levers. The nails will be strong, indeed, if those +irons, with two of us at each, would not wrench them out."</p> + +<p>The young men all leapt to their feet, pains and aches quite +forgotten in the excitement of this unexpected news, and six of +them seized hold of the irons.</p> + +<p>"Gently!" Francis said. "You must remember, there may be people +going down there at present, getting up stores. Before we venture +to disturb a plank, we must make the hole sufficiently large for us +to spy through. This will be a very easy affair, in comparison with +making a hole large enough for a saw to go through. Still, you will +find it will take some time. However, we had better wait, as we +agreed, till we have had our food."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch16">Chapter 16</a>: The Recapture Of The Pluto.</h2> + +<p>As soon as the hatch had been removed, and the bread and water +lowered down, and they heard heavy weights again laid on the hatch, +two of the party took one of the irons and began to bore a hole, +while the others proceeded to eat their food. Several times, the +workers had to be relieved. The iron penetrated comparatively +easily for a short distance, but beyond that the difficulty greatly +increased; and it was fully four hours before one of the workers, +applying his eye to the hole, said that he could see a gleam of +light through.</p> + +<p>In another quarter of an hour, the orifice was sufficiently +enlarged to enable a view to be obtained of the central hold. It +was comparatively light there, for the hatch was off, and they +could see two men at work, opening a cask for some stores that were +required.</p> + +<p>"We must wait till it gets dark now," Francis said. "I do not +think that we shall make much noise, for the nails will be likely +to draw quietly; but we had better choose the time between +nightfall and the hour for the crew to turn in, as there will be a +trampling of feet on deck, and talking and singing, which would +prevent any slight noise we might make, being heard."</p> + +<p>"The difficulty will be to force the ends of the iron down, +between the beams and the planks, so as to give us a purchase," +Matteo said.</p> + +<p>"I think we shall be able to manage that," Francis replied. "The +beams are put in in the rough, and if we hunt carefully, I think we +shall find a plank where we can get the irons in far enough, +between it and the beam, to give us a hold."</p> + +<p>After a careful examination, they fixed upon a plank to operate +upon, and, leaving one of the irons there, so that they could find +it in the dark, they lay down to sleep, or sat talking until it was +dark. Before this, a glance, through the peephole, showed them that +the hatch had been placed over the hatchway of the next hold, so +that there was little fear of anyone coming down, unless something +special was required.</p> + +<p>"Now I think we can begin," Francis said, at last. "Do you, +Paolo Parucchi, take one of the irons, I will take another, Matteo +a third. We cannot possibly work more than three at the foot of a +plank, though perhaps, when we have fixed them and put on the +strain, two or three more hands may get at the irons; but first we +will try with three, and, unless the nails have got a wonderfully +firm hold, we shall certainly be able to draw them."</p> + +<p>It took some time to fix the irons, to the best advantage, +between the planks and the beam.</p> + +<p>"Are you both ready?" Francis asked at last. "Then pull."</p> + +<p>As Francis had anticipated, the levers did their work, and the +nails yielded a little.</p> + +<p>"It has sprung half an inch," Francis said, feeling. "Now you +keep your irons as they are, while I thrust mine down farther. I +have got a fresh hold. Do you shift yours."</p> + +<p>Again the effort was made, and this time the nails drew fully +two inches. Another effort, and the plank was completely free at +the lower end.</p> + +<p>"Now do you push against it as hard as you can," Francis said, +"while I get my iron in between it and the beam above."</p> + +<p>The upper nails yielded even more easily than those below.</p> + +<p>"No farther," Francis said, when they had fairly started them, +"or the plank will be falling with a crash. We must push from the +bottom now, until it gives sufficiently far for you to get an iron +down each side, to prevent its closing again."</p> + +<p>"Now," he said, "push the irons higher up. That is right. Now I +will loosen a bit farther at the top, and then you will be able to +get your hands in at the bottom to steady it, and prevent its +falling when the nails are quite drawn."</p> + +<p>Another effort, and the plank was free, and, being drawn in, was +laid down. The delight of those who were standing in the dark, and +could only judge how matters were going on from Francis's low +spoken orders, was extreme.</p> + +<p>"Can we get through?"</p> + +<p>"No," Francis replied. "It will be necessary to remove another +plank first, but perhaps one of the slighter among you might manage +to squeeze through, and hold the plank at the back. We shall be +able to work with more freedom, if we know that there is no danger +of its falling."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes, the second plank was laid beside the +first.</p> + +<p>"What is to be done next?" Matteo asked.</p> + +<p>"We must establish a communication with the sailors. I will take +a working party of four. Paolo Parucchi, with four others, will +relieve me. You, Matteo, will with the rest take the last spell. +When we have entered the next compartment, we will put up the +planks again, and press the nails in tightly enough to prevent +their falling. Should, by some chance, anyone descend into the hold +while we are working, we shall be hidden from their view. At the +other end there are a number of sacks piled up, and we shall be +working behind them."</p> + +<p>Francis, and the men he had chosen, made their way to the pile +of arms they had observed through their peephole, moving with great +precaution, so as to avoid falling over anything. Here, with some +trouble, they succeeded in finding a dagger among the heap, and +they then felt their way on, until they reached the pile of sacks. +These were packed to within a foot of the deck beams, and there was +but just room for them to crawl in at the top.</p> + +<p>"Whatever you do, do not bump against the beams," Francis said. +"Any noise of that sort, from below, would at once excite +attention. Now do you be quiet, while I find a spot to begin +upon."</p> + +<p>Commencing at a junction of two planks, Francis began, with the +dagger, to cut a hole of some three or four inches across, but +tapering rapidly as it went in. After waiting for some ten minutes, +he touched the man lying next to him, placed his hand on the hole +he had begun, and then moved aside to allow him to continue the +work.</p> + +<p>In an hour a hole was made in a two inch plank, and this was +soon enlarged until it was an inch in diameter. Lying along the +side of the bulkhead, so as to get his ear to the hole, Francis +listened, but could hear no sound within. Then he put his mouth to +the orifice and asked:</p> + +<p>"Are you all asleep there?"</p> + +<p>Then he listened again. Some of the men were speaking, and +asking each other who it was that had suddenly spoken. No one +replied; and some of them gave vent to angry threats, against +whoever it might be who had just disturbed them from going off to +sleep.</p> + +<p>Directly the voices ceased again, Francis said:</p> + +<p>"Let us have silence in there. Where is Rinaldo, the +boatswain?"</p> + +<p>"I am here," a voice replied; "but who is speaking? It sounds +like the voice of Messer Hammond."</p> + +<p>"It is my voice, Rinaldo. We have worked through from the hold +at the other end of the ship, having removed some of the planks of +the bulkhead. Now it is for you to do the same. We will pass you +some daggers through, when we have made this hole a bit larger. You +must choose one of the planks in the corner, as this will be less +likely to be observed."</p> + +<p>"They will not observe us, Messer Hammond. They never come down +here at all, but pass our food down in buckets."</p> + +<p>"Nevertheless, begin at the plank next to the side," Francis +said. "Possibly someone may come down before you have finished. You +will have to remove two planks to get through. I will pass a +javelin through. You can set to work with it, and bore holes +through the plank close to the floor; and then, with the dagger, +cut away the wood between them. When you have done them, set to at +the top, close to the beams, and cut the two planks through there. +There are sacks of grain piled up against them on this side, so +that there is no fear of your being observed from here. The work +must be carried on perfectly noiselessly, the men relieving each +other every few minutes.</p> + +<p>"When the planks are cut through, replace them in their former +positions, and wedge some small pieces of wood in, so that there +shall be no chance of their falling. You ought to finish the work +by tomorrow. When you have done it, take no farther step until you +get orders from me. It would not do to rise now, for we may be +surrounded by other ships, and if we overpowered the crew, we +should at once be attacked and recaptured by them. You will, +therefore, remain quiet until you have orders, whether it be one +day or ten. All the arms they have taken from us are lying piled +here, and when the time comes, we shall have no difficulty in +overpowering the Genoese, and shall, I hope, bring the Pluto safely +to anchor in the port of Venice before long."</p> + +<p>There was a murmur of delight among the sailors, pent up in +their close quarters. Francis listened a moment, and heard one of +the men say:</p> + +<p>"What did I tell you? Didn't I tell you that Messer Hammond got +us all out of a scrape before, when our ship was captured by the +Genoese, and that I would be bound he would do the same again, if +he had but the shadow of a chance."</p> + +<p>"You did, Pietro, and you have turned out right. That is the +sort of fellow to have for a captain. He is not like one of those +dainty young nobles, who don't know one rope's end from another, +and who turn up their noses at the thought of dirtying their hands. +See how he looked after us through the winter. I wish we could give +a cheer for him, but that would never do. But when we are out of +this, I will give him the loudest shout I ever gave yet.</p> + +<p>"Now then, Rinaldo, let us set to work without a moment's delay. +There's a chance we aren't going to rot in the dungeons of Genoa, +after all."</p> + +<p>Convinced that the work would be carried on in accordance with +his orders, Francis withdrew his ear from the hole, and, crawling +over the sacks again, made his way to the pile of arms, felt about +until he found two javelins, and taking these back, passed them one +after the other through the hole.</p> + +<p>"We have done our share now," he said to his comrades. "Paolo +and his party will find it a comparatively easy task to enlarge the +hole sufficiently to pass the daggers through."</p> + +<p>The party returned to the other end of the hold, removed the +planks, and joined their friends. The next watch had arranged to +lie down close to the planks, so that they could be aroused without +waking the others.</p> + +<p>They were soon on their feet. Francis explained to Parucchi the +progress they had made, and the orders that had been given to the +sailors as to what they were to do.</p> + +<p>"When the hole is large enough, pass these five daggers in to +the crew, and then come back again. I will guide you to the spot, +and on my return will pick out half a dozen more daggers, in case +we want them for further work."</p> + +<p>When daylight made its way into the hold, Matteo and his watch +woke, and were astonished to find that all their comrades were +quietly asleep, and that they had not been awakened. Matteo could +not restrain his curiosity, but woke Francis:</p> + +<p>"Has anything gone wrong, Francis? It is daylight, and +Parucchi's party, as well as yours, are all asleep, while we have +not been roused!"</p> + +<p>"Everything is going on well, Matteo, and we did not wake you, +because there was nothing for you to do. We have already passed in +knives and javelins to the sailors, and they are at work cutting +through two planks in their bulkhead; after which we shall be able +to meet in the next hold, arm ourselves, and fall upon the Genoese +when the opportunity offers."</p> + +<p>"That is excellent indeed, Francis; but I wish you had let us do +our share of the work."</p> + +<p>"It did not take us more than two hours, Matteo, to make a hole +big enough to pass the javelins through, and I should say +Parucchi's party enlarged it sufficiently to hand in the daggers in +another hour; so you see, it would have been useless to have +aroused you, and the less movement we make after they get quiet at +night, the better."</p> + +<p>"And how long will the sailors be cutting it through, do you +think?"</p> + +<p>"I should say they would be ready by this time, Matteo, but +certainly they will be finished some time today."</p> + +<p>"Then we shall soon be free!" Matteo exclaimed joyfully.</p> + +<p>"That will depend, Matteo. We must wait till there is a good +opportunity, so that we can recapture the ship without an alarm +being given to the other vessels, which are no doubt sailing in +company with us. And now, if you have nothing to say, I will go off +to sleep again, for there is time for another hour or two. I feel +as if I had not quite finished my night's rest, and the days pass +so slowly here that it is as well for us to sleep when we feel the +least inclination.</p> + +<p>"By the way, Matteo, put something into that peephole we made. +It is possible that they might see the light through it, and come +to examine what it is. It is better to run no risk."</p> + +<p>That day the captives were far more restless than they had been +since they were taken prisoners. At first there had been a feeling +of depression, too great to admit even of conversation with each +other. The defeat of their fleet, the danger that threatened +Venice, and the prospect of imprisonment in the gloomy dungeons of +Genoa, combined to depress them on the first day of their +imprisonment. On the second, their success in getting out the bolts +had cheered them, and they had something to look forward to and +talk about; but still, few of them thought that there was any real +prospect of their obtaining their freedom. Now, however, that +success seemed to lie ready to hand; now that they could, that very +evening, remove the sacks, effect a junction with their crew, arm +themselves with the weapons lying in sight, and rush up and +overpower the Genoese; it seemed hard to remain longer in +confinement. Several of them urged Francis to make the attempt that +night, but he refused.</p> + +<p>"You reckon only on the foe you see," he said. "The danger lies +not from them, but from the foes we cannot see. We must wait for an +opportunity."</p> + +<p>"But no opportunity may occur," one of them urged.</p> + +<p>"That is quite possible," Francis agreed; "but should no special +opportunity occur, we shall be none the worse for having waited, +for it will always be as open to us to make the attempt as it is +tonight. It might succeed--possibly we could overpower the guard on +deck before they could give the alarm--but the risk is too great to +be run, until we are certain that no other way is open to us. In +the daylight the hatch is open; but even could we free our +comrades, and unite for a rush, unobserved--which we could hardly +hope to do--we should find the whole of the Genoese on deck, and +could not possibly overpower them before they had time to give the +alarm to other vessels. At night, when we can unite, we cannot gain +the deck, for the hatch is not only closed, but would almost +certainly be fastened, so that men should not get down to pilfer +among the stores."</p> + +<p>"But if we cannot attack in the daytime, Messer Hammond, without +giving the alarm; and cannot attack at all at night, what are we to +do?"</p> + +<p>"That is the next point to be seen to," Francis replied. "We +must cut, either from this hold or from the other, a way up to the +deck above. It may take us some days to do this, but that matters +little. We have plenty of time for the work before reaching Genoa. +The difficulty is not in the work itself, but in doing it +unobserved."</p> + +<p>"That is difficult, indeed," Matteo said, "seeing that the +Genoese sailors are quartered in the forecastle above the forehold, +while the officers will be in the cabins in the poop over us."</p> + +<p>"That is so, Matteo, and for that reason, it is clear that it is +we, not the sailors, who must cut through the planks above. There +are no divisions in the forecastle, and it will be, therefore, +absolutely impossible to cut through into it, without being +perceived long before a hole is made of a sufficient size to enable +us to get out. Here we may succeed better, for fortunately we know +the exact plan of the cabins above us, and can choose a spot where +we should not be likely to be noticed."</p> + +<p>"That is so," Matteo agreed, "and as they will not have as many +officers as we had--that is, including the volunteers--some of the +cabins will not be occupied. Perhaps, by listening to the footsteps +above, we might find out which are vacant."</p> + +<p>"I thought of that, Matteo, but I doubt whether it would be well +to rely upon that. Many on board ship wear soft shoes, which make +but little noise, and it would be fatal to us were we to make a +mistake. After thinking it over, I have decided that we had best +try to cut a way up into the captain's cabin."</p> + +<p>"But that is sure to be occupied, Messer Hammond," Parucchi +said.</p> + +<p>"Yes, it will be certainly be occupied; but it affords a good +opportunity of success. As you know, Parucchi, Carlo Bottini had +been a long time at Constantinople and the Eastern ports, and had a +somewhat luxurious taste. Do you not remember that, against the +stern windows, he had caused to be erected a low wide seat running +across the cabin? This he called a divan, and spent no small +proportion of his time lolling upon it. If I am right, its height +was from ten inches to a foot above the deck, and it was fully four +feet wide. It would therefore be quite possible to cut through the +two planks at the back, without its being observed by anyone in the +cabin."</p> + +<p>There was a chorus of assent.</p> + +<p>"Of course we must work most cautiously," Francis went on. "The +wood must be cut out with clean cuts with the daggers. There must +be no sawing or scraping. The beams are two feet apart, and we must +cut through two planks close to them. In that way there will be no +nails to remove. Of course, we shall not cut quite through until +the time arrives for us to make the attempt, but just leave enough +to hold the planks together. Half an hour's work will get through +that, for if we were to cut through it at once, not only would +there be risk of the hole being discovered by anyone sweeping the +cabin, but we should be obliged to remain absolutely silent, or we +should be heard immediately."</p> + +<p>"We can begin at once, can we not?" Matteo asked. "Anything is +better than sitting quietly here."</p> + +<p>"Certainly, Matteo, if you wish. Two can work at once, one on +each line. Choose the two sharpest edged of the daggers, and be +sure to cut clean, and not to make a scraping noise or to try to +break out pieces of wood. The work must be done in absolute quiet. +Indeed, however careful you are, it is possible that some slight +sound may be heard above, but, if noticed, it will probably be +taken for the rats."</p> + +<p>Matteo and another of the young men at once fell to work; but it +was not until the evening of the following day that cuts were made +as deep as was considered prudent. The depth of wood remaining was +tested by thrusting the point of a dagger through, and it was +decided that little more than a quarter of an inch remained.</p> + +<p>Upon the following day the ship anchored, and remained for two +days in some port. Provisions were brought on board and carried +down into the hold, and the prisoners had no doubt that they were +in harbour on the coast of either Sicily, or the south of Italy. +They had not set sail many hours, when the motion of the ship told +them that the wind was getting up, and by night the vessel was +rolling heavily, the noise made by the dashing of the water against +her planks being so great, that those below could scarcely hear +each other speak. Their spirits had risen with the increase of the +motion, for the opportunity for which they had been waiting was now +at hand. In a gale the vessels would keep well apart from each +other, to prevent the danger of a collision, and any outcry would +be drowned by the noise of the wind and water.</p> + +<p>Each night Francis had paid a visit to the sailors forward, to +enjoin patience until he should give them the order for making the +attempt. They had long since cut through the planks, which were +only retained in their place by the pressure of the sacks behind +them. He had bade them be in readiness on the first occasion on +which rough weather might set in, and knew that they would now be +expecting the signal.</p> + +<p>As soon, then, as it became dark, and the hatch over the middle +hold was closed; the planks were removed, and Francis and his party +set to work shifting the sacks, in the corner where the sailors had +cut the planks. Each sack was taken up, and placed against the pile +further on, without the slightest noise, until at last all were +removed that stood in the way of the planks being taken down. These +were carried out into the hold.</p> + +<p>Francis entered the gap. The sailors had already been informed +that the occasion had come, and that they were to remain perfectly +quiet until bidden to move.</p> + +<p>"All is prepared," he said as he entered. "Rinaldo, do you see +that the men come out one by one. As each comes out a weapon will +be placed in his hands, and he will be then led to the starboard +side of the hold, which is free from encumbrance, and will there +stand until he receives orders to move further. Remember that not +the slightest noise must be made, for if any stumbled and fell, and +the noise were heard above, it might be thought that some of the +stores had shifted from their places, and men would be sent below +to secure them. The alarm would be given, and a light or other +signal shown the other ships, before we could overpower all +resistance. After the men are all ranged up as I have directed, +they will have to remain there for some little time, while we +complete our arrangements."</p> + +<p>As soon as the sailors were all armed, and ready for action, +Francis entered the after hold, where Matteo and another had been +engaged in cutting the planks quite through. They had just +completed the task when he reached them, and had quietly removed +the two pieces of plank. Francis had already given his orders to +his companions, and each knew the order in which they were to +ascend.</p> + +<p>A dim light streamed down from the hole. Two of his comrades +lifted Francis so that his head was above the level of the hole, +and he was enabled to see into the cabin. So far as he could tell, +it was untenanted, but it was possible that the commander might be +on the divan above him. This was not, however, likely, as in the +gale that was now blowing he would probably be on deck, directing +the working of the ship.</p> + +<p>Francis now gave the signal, and the others raised him still +further, until he was able to get his weight upon the deck above, +and he then crawled along underneath the divan, and lay there quiet +until Parucchi and Matteo had both reached the deck. Then he gave +the word, and all three rolled out and leaped to their feet, with +their daggers in their hands, in readiness to fall upon the captain +should he be on the divan.</p> + +<p>As they had hoped and expected, the cabin was untenanted. The +other volunteers now joined them, the last giving the word to +Rinaldo, who soon passed up, followed by the crew, until the cabin +was as full as it could contain. There were now assembled some +fifty men, closely packed together.</p> + +<p>"That is ample," Francis said, "as they will be unarmed and +unprepared. We can issue out singly until the alarm is given, and +then those that remain must rush out in a body. Simply knock them +down with the hilts of your swords. There is no occasion to shed +blood, unless in the case of armed resistance; but remember they +will have their knives in their girdles, and do not let anyone take +you by surprise."</p> + +<p>Opening the door, Francis walked along a passage, and then +through an outer door into the waist of the ship. The wind was +blowing fiercely, but the gale was not so violent as it had +appeared to them when confined below. The night was dark, but after +a week's confinement below, his eyes were able easily to make out +almost every object on deck. There were but few sailors in the +waist. The officers would be on the poop, and such of the crew as +were not required on duty in the forecastle. Man after man joined +him, until some thirty were gathered near the bulwarks. An officer +on the poop caught sight of them by the light of the lantern, which +was suspended there as a signal to the other vessels.</p> + +<p>"What are all you men doing down there?" he challenged. "There +is no occasion for you to keep on deck until you are summoned."</p> + +<p>"Do you move forward with the men here, Parucchi. Knock down the +fellows on deck, and rush into the forecastle and overpower them +there, before they can get up their arms. I will summon the rest in +a body, and we will overpower the officers."</p> + +<p>He ran back to the cabin door, and bade the men follow him. As +they poured out there was a scuffle on the deck forward, and the +officer shouted out again:</p> + +<p>"What is going on there? What does all this mean?"</p> + +<p>Francis sprang up the ladder to the poop, followed by his men, +and before the officer standing there understood the meaning of +this sudden rush of men, or had time to draw his sword, he was +knocked down. The captain and three other officers, who were +standing by the helm, drew their swords and rushed forward, +thinking there was a mutiny among their crew; but Francis shouted +out:</p> + +<p>"Throw down your weapons, all of you. We have retaken the ship, +and resistance is useless, and will only cost you your lives."</p> + +<p>The officers stood stupefied with astonishment; and then, seeing +that fully twenty armed men were opposed to them, they threw down +their swords. Francis ordered four of the sailors to conduct them +to the captain's cabin, and remain in guard over them; then with +the rest he hurried forward to assist Parucchi's party.</p> + +<p>But the work was already done. The Genoese, taken completely by +surprise, had at once surrendered, as the armed party rushed in the +forecastle, and the ship was already theirs. As soon as the +prisoners were secured, the after hatch was thrown off, and those +whose turn to crawl up through the hole had not yet arrived came up +on deck.</p> + +<p>"Rinaldo," Francis said, as soon as the crew had fallen into +their places, "send a man aloft, and let him suddenly knock out the +light in the lantern."</p> + +<p>"But we can lower it down, captain, from the deck."</p> + +<p>"Of course we can, Rinaldo, but I don't want it lowered down, I +want it put suddenly out."</p> + +<p>Rinaldo at once sent a man up, and a minute later the light +suddenly disappeared.</p> + +<p>"If we were seen to lower it down," Francis said to Matteo, "the +suspicions of those who noticed it would be at once aroused, for +the only motive for doing so would be concealment; whereas now, if +it is missed, it will be supposed that the wind has blown it out. +Now we have only to lower our sails, and we can drop unobserved out +of the fleet."</p> + +<p>"There are sixteen lights, I have just been counting them," +Matteo said.</p> + +<p>"These are probably the fourteen galleys captured with us, and +two galleys as guards, in case, on their way, they should fall in +with any of our ships.</p> + +<p>"Parucchi, will you at once muster the men, and see that all are +armed and in readiness for fighting?</p> + +<p>"Matteo, do you and some of your friends assist the +lieutenant."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes, Parucchi reported that the men were all ready +for action.</p> + +<p>"Rinaldo, brail up the sails, so that we may drop into the rear +of the squadron. Watch the lights of the vessels behind, and steer +so that they shall pass us as widely as possible."</p> + +<p>This was the order the men were expecting to receive, but they +were surprised when, just as the last light was abreast of them, +Francis gave the order for the brails to be loosed again.</p> + +<p>"Signor Parucchi, do you tell off fifty men. I am going to lay +the ship alongside that vessel, and recapture her. They will not +see us until we are close on board, and will suppose it is an +accident when we run alongside. No doubt they, like the Pluto, have +only a complement of fifty men, and we shall overpower them before +they are prepared to offer any resistance.</p> + +<p>"No doubt they have prisoners below. Immediately we have +recaptured her, I shall return on board with the rest, leaving you +with your fifty men in charge of her. As soon as you have secured +the Genoese, free any prisoners there may be in the hold. I shall +keep close to you, and you can hear me, and tell me how many there +are."</p> + +<p>The Pluto was now edged away, till she was close to the other +ship. The crew, exulting in having turned the tables on the +Genoese, and at the prospect of recovering another of the lost +galleys, clustered in the waist, grasping their arms. The ship was +not perceived until she was within her own length of the other. +Then there was a sudden hail:</p> + +<p>"Where are you coming to? Keep away, or you will be into us. Why +don't you show your light?"</p> + +<p>Francis shouted back some indistinct answer. Rinaldo pushed down +the helm, and a minute later the Pluto ran alongside the other +vessel. Half a dozen hands, told off for the work, sprang into her +rigging, and lashed the vessels together; while Francis, followed +by the crew, climbed the bulwarks and sprang on to the deck of the +enemy.</p> + +<p>Scarce a blow was struck. The Genoese, astonished at this sudden +apparition of armed men on their deck, and being entirely unarmed +and unprepared, either ran down below or shouted they surrendered, +and in two minutes the Venetians were masters of the vessel.</p> + +<p>"Back to the Pluto," Francis shouted. "The vessels will tear +their sides out!"</p> + +<p>Almost as suddenly as they had invaded the decks of the galley, +the Venetians regained their own vessel, leaving the lieutenant +with his fifty men on board the prize. The lashings were cut, the +Pluto's helm put up, and she sheered away from her prize. Her +bulwarks were broken and splintered where she had ground against +the other vessel in the sea, and Rinaldo soon reported that some of +the seams had opened, and the water was coming in.</p> + +<p>"Set the carpenter and some of the hands to work, to caulk the +seams as well as they can from the inside, and set a gang to work +at the pumps at once. It is unfortunate that it is blowing so hard. +If the wind had gone down instead of rising, we would have +recaptured the whole fleet, one by one."</p> + +<p>The Pluto was kept within a short distance of the captured +vessel, and Parucchi presently shouted out that he had freed two +hundred prisoners.</p> + +<p>"Arm them at once!" Francis shouted back. "Extinguish your +light, and board the vessel whose light you see on your starboard +bow. I will take the one to port. When you have captured her, lower +the sails of both vessels. I will do the same. You will keep a +little head sail set, so as to keep them before the wind; but do +not show more than you can help. I wish the rest of the fleet to +outrun us, as soon as possible."</p> + +<p>The Pluto sheered off from the prize, and directed her course +towards the vessel nearest to her, which she captured as easily as +she had done the preceding. But this time, not only were her +bulwarks stove in, but the chain plates were carried away; and the +mainmast, no longer supported by its shrouds, fell over the side +with a crash.</p> + +<p>This vessel had but a hundred prisoners on board. They were wild +with astonishment and delight, when they found that their vessel +had been recaptured. Francis told them to keep by him through the +night, as possibly he might need their assistance.</p> + +<p>For some hours the gale increased. The Pluto lay head to it, her +mast serving as a floating anchor. As soon as the lights of the +Genoese squadron disappeared in the distance, Francis hoisted a +lantern on his mainmast, as a signal to the other vessels to keep +near him.</p> + +<p>As soon as day broke, the galley they had last recaptured was +seen, half a mile away, while the two others could be made out some +six miles to leeward. The gale died out soon after daybreak, and +Francis at once set his crew to work to get the mast on board, and +to ship it by its stump.</p> + +<p>It was a difficult undertaking, for the vessel was rolling +heavily. It was first got alongside, two ropes were passed over it, +and it was parbuckled on board. Shears were made of two spars, and +the end was placed against the stump, which projected six feet +above the deck. By the aid of the shears, it was hoisted erect and +lashed to the stump, wedges were driven in to tighten the lashings, +and it was then firmly stayed; and by the afternoon it was in +readiness for sail to be hoisted again.</p> + +<p>By this time Parucchi, with the vessel he had captured, was +alongside. The Lion of Saint Mark was hoisted to the mainmast of +the Pluto, and three similar banners were run up by the other +vessels, the crews shouting and cheering with wild enthusiasm.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch17">Chapter 17</a>: An Ungrateful Republic.</h2> + +<p>"It is glorious, Francis," Matteo said, "to think that we should +have recaptured four of our ships!"</p> + +<p>"It is very good, as far as it goes," Francis replied, "but it +might have been a great deal better. If it hadn't been for the +storm, we might have picked them all up one by one. Each vessel we +took, the stronger we became, and I had calculated upon our +capturing the greater number. But in such a sea, I don't think we +could possibly capture more than we did."</p> + +<p>"I should think not," Matteo said. "I had never dreamt of doing +more than recovering the Pluto, and when you first talked about +that, it seemed almost like madness. I don't think one of us had +the slightest belief in the possibility of the thing, when you +first proposed it."</p> + +<p>"I thought it was to be managed somehow," Francis said. "It +would have been a shame, indeed, if a hundred and fifty men were to +be kept prisoners for a fortnight, or three weeks, by a third of +their number."</p> + +<p>"Well, certainly no one would have thought of making the +attempt, if you had not proposed it, Francis. I believe, even if +you were to propose our sailing north, and capturing Genoa, there +is not a man on board but would follow you willingly, with the firm +conviction that you would succeed."</p> + +<p>"In that case, Matteo," Francis said, laughing, "it is very +lucky for you that I am not at all out of my mind. Signal now to +Parucchi to lower his boats, and come on board with our men. We may +fall in yet with another Genoese squadron, and may as well have our +full complement on board, especially as Parucchi has found two +hundred men already on board the vessel we captured."</p> + +<p>Parucchi and his men soon transferred themselves to the Pluto, +and the four vessels hoisted their sails, and made for the south. +They had learned, from their captives, that the squadron had +already passed through the Straits of Messina, and that it was at +Messina they had stopped and taken in provision two days before. +Indeed, when, late in the afternoon, the sky cleared and the sun +shone out, they saw the mountains of Calabria on their left.</p> + +<p>Learning, from the captives, that no Genoese vessels had been +seen in the straits as they passed through, Francis did not +hesitate to order the course to be shaped for the straits, instead +of sailing round Sicily, as he would have done had there been any +chance of falling in with a hostile squadron, in passing between +the islands and the mainland.</p> + +<p>"I should like to have seen the face of the commander of the +Genoese squadron this morning," Matteo said, "when he discovered +that four of his vessels were missing. He can hardly have supposed +that they were lost, for although the wind was strong, it blew +nearly dead aft, and there was nothing of a gale to endanger +well-handled ships. I almost wonder that he did not send back the +two fully manned galleys he had with him, to search for us."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps he did," Francis said; "but he would have been a +hundred miles further north by daybreak, and it would have taken +him a couple of days to get back to where we were lying."</p> + +<p>No hostile sail was seen during the voyage back to Venice. +Francis remained in command of the little squadron, for the +captains, and many of the superior officers, had been transferred +to the galley of the officer in command of the squadron, and +Francis happened to be the only second officer on board any of the +four ships.</p> + +<p>Great care was observed when they approached Venice, as, for +aught they knew, Doria's squadron might be blockading the port. The +Genoese fleet, however, was still cruising on the coast of +Dalmatia, capturing port after port of the Venetian possessions +there.</p> + +<p>The four vessels passed through the channel of the Lido with +their colours flying. When first observed from the watchtower of +Venice, they were supposed to form part of the squadron of Zeno, +but as soon as they cast anchor, and the news spread that they were +four of Pisani's galleys, which had been recaptured from the +Genoese, the delight of the population was immense.</p> + +<p>The ships were speedily surrounded by a fleet of boats, +containing relatives and friends of those taken prisoners at the +battle of Polo, and the decks were crowded with persons inquiring +after their friends, or embracing with delight those whom they had, +an hour before, believed to be either dead or immured in the +dungeons of Genoa.</p> + +<p>One of the first to appear was Polani, who had early received +the news by a swift boat from one of his ships in the port, that +the Pluto was one of the vessels entering the harbour.</p> + +<p>"What miracle is this, Francis?" he asked, as he warmly embraced +his young friend.</p> + +<p>"Not a miracle at all, Messer Polani. The Genoese fancied that a +guard of fifty men was amply sufficient to keep a hundred and fifty +Venetians captives, and we taught them their mistake."</p> + +<p>"It wasn't we," Matteo put in, as he shook hands with his +kinsman. "We had no more idea of escaping than we had of flying. +The whole thing was entirely the work of Francisco here."</p> + +<p>"I might have been sure the Genoese would not keep you long, +Francisco," Polani said; "and the girls and I might have spared +ourselves the pain of fretting for you. But how did it all come +about?"</p> + +<p>"If you will take me to the Piazza in your gondola, I will tell +you all about on the way," Francis replied. "For, absurd as it +seems, I am the senior officer of the squadron, and must, I +suppose, report to the council what has happened."</p> + +<p>"Take me, too, kinsman," Matteo said. "I know Francisco so well +that I am quite sure that, of himself, he will never tell the facts +of this affair, and will simply say that we broke out, avoiding all +mention of his share in it, and how it was that under his orders we +recaptured the other ships."</p> + +<p>"I think that a very good plan, Matteo; so do you come with us, +and you shall tell me all about it, instead of my hearing it from +Francis, and I will take care the council know the truth of the +matter."</p> + +<p>"The admiral got safely back, I hope?" Francis asked. "We saw +that his galley, with five others, broke through the Genoese fleet +and got safely away, but of course, we knew not whether the brave +admiral was himself hurt."</p> + +<p>"He arrived here safely," Polani replied; "but knowing the +Venetians as you do, you will be scarcely surprised to hear that he +has been sentenced to six months' imprisonment, for losing the +battle."</p> + +<p>"But that is shameful," Francis exclaimed indignantly. "I heard +from our captain, who was present at the council, that Pisani was +opposed to fighting, and that he was only overruled by the +proveditors. It is shameful. I will go on shore and make my report, +and then I will come back to you, for I swear that not another blow +will I strike on behalf of the republic, as long as Pisani is in +prison."</p> + +<p>"It is a bad business, my lad," Polani said; "but you know that +Pisani, popular as he is with the people, has few friends among the +nobles. They are jealous of his fame and popularity, and, to say +the truth, he has often irritated them, by his bluntness and his +disregard for their opinion and rank. Consequently, they seized +upon his defeat as an occasion for accusing him, and it was even a +question in the council of taking his life, and he may be +considered fortunate in getting off with the sentence of six +months' imprisonment.</p> + +<p>"I do not think he will have to remain very long in confinement. +We may expect the Genoese fleet here in a few days, for the Paduan +army is already moving, as we heard last night. No doubt it is +going to cooperate with the fleet. Once the danger presses, the +populace will demand Pisani's release. There have already been +demonstrations, and shouts of 'Viva Pisani!' have been raised in +the Piazza.</p> + +<p>"At any rate, Francis, let me advise you, most strongly, not to +suffer any expression of your feelings concerning him to escape you +before the council. I need scarcely say it would do no good to the +admiral, and would set the whole of his enemies against you. It is +no affair of yours, if the governors of Venice behave ungratefully +to one who deserves well at their hands, and you have made more +than enough enemies by mingling in my affairs, without drawing upon +yourself more foes, by your championship of Pisani."</p> + +<p>"I will, of course, follow your counsel," Francis said; "but I +will certainly serve the state no more, until Pisani is freed."</p> + +<p>Several of the councillors were already assembled, on hearing +the strange news that four of the ships, which had been captured by +the Genoese, had entered port. Francis, on announcing his errand, +was at once shown in to them. Polani accompanied him, explaining +his presence to the council by saying:</p> + +<p>"I have ventured, signors, to accompany my young friend here, in +order that I may give you a much further detail of the affair in +which he has been engaged, than you are likely to hear from his own +lips. I have just come on shore from his ship, the Pluto, and have +heard the story from my kinsman, Matteo Giustiniani."</p> + +<p>"We have surely seen this young gentleman before, Messer +Polani," one of the council said.</p> + +<p>"You have, signor," Polani replied. "You may remember that he +greatly distinguished himself at the fight of Antium, was sent home +by the admiral with his despatches, and had the honour of +receiving, from you, the thanks of the republic and the gift of +citizenship."</p> + +<p>"I remember now," the councillor said; and a murmur of assent +from the others showed that they also recalled the circumstance. +"Is he again the bearer of despatches, from the officer in command +of the little squadron which, as it seems, has just, by some +miracle, entered the port? And how is it that the officer did not +present himself in person before us?"</p> + +<p>"The officer has presented himself," Polani said. "Messer +Hammond is in command of the four ships which have just arrived. +Not only is he in command by virtue of senior rank, but it is to +him that their recapture from the Genoese is entirely due."</p> + +<p>There was a murmur of incredulity from the circle of +councillors, but Polani went on quietly.</p> + +<p>"It may seem well nigh impossible to you, signors, but what I +say is strictly true. If Messer Hammond will first relate to you +the broad facts of the recapture of the ships, I will furnish you +with such details as he may omit."</p> + +<p>Francis then briefly related the events which had led to the +capture of the four galleys. He explained that by the death of the +captain he, as second officer, succeeded to the command of the +Pluto, and that afterwards being captured by the Genoese, Signor +Parucchi, the sole other surviving officer, and ten gentlemen +belonging to noble families and serving as volunteers on board the +Pluto, were confined in one hold of that ship on her voyage as a +prize to Genoa, the crew being shut up in the other; that by +working at night they had effected a junction with the crew, and +choosing a stormy night, when any noise that might be made would +not be heard on board the ship, they made their way up to the deck +above, through a hole they had cut in the planks, and overpowered +the Genoese almost without resistance; that they had then, in the +darkness, ran alongside another of the ships and captured her with +equal ease; and Parucchi, with a portion of the crew of the Pluto, +and the Venetian prisoners on board that ship, had retaken a third; +while the Pluto had captured a fourth.</p> + +<p>"It may seem to you, signors," Francis concluded, "that we +might, in the same way, have recaptured the rest of our ships, and +it was a bitter disappointment to me that we failed to do so; but +the storm was so high, and the sea so rough, that it was only with +the greatest danger and difficulty that ships could lie alongside +each other. The bulwarks of all four vessels were greatly damaged, +and the Pluto lost her foremast while alongside the last ship we +captured, and as the storm was increasing, rather than abating, we +were, to our great chagrin, obliged to let the rest escape, since +in striving for more we might have lost, not only our lives, but +the vessels we had taken."</p> + +<p>"This is indeed a most notable achievement, Messer Hammond, and +the restoration of four ships and their crews, at the present +moment, is of great importance to the republic, threatened as she +is with invasion by land and sea.</p> + +<p>"Now, Messer Polani, if you will give us the full details of +which you spoke, we shall be glad."</p> + +<p>Polani then related to the council the full story of the means +by which the crew of the Pluto had gained their liberty, showing +how the recapture was entirely due to the initiative of Francis, +and to the ingenuity with which he overcame all difficulties. He +ended by saying:</p> + +<p>"My kinsman, Matteo, said that should you doubt whether this +account is not tinged by his friendship and partiality for Messer +Hammond, Signor Parucchi, and all the gentlemen who were confined +with them in the hold, can substantiate the account that he has +given. He said that Parucchi's evidence would be all the more +valuable, since he and the other officers were in the first place +much prejudiced against Messer Hammond, deeming it an indignity +that one so young, and a foreigner by birth, should be appointed to +the command over the heads of others, Venetian born, of good +family, and his seniors in age. The circumstances which I have +related to you have, however, completely altered his opinion, and +he is as enthusiastic, with respect to Messer Hammond's conduct, as +are my kinsman and all on board the ship."</p> + +<p>"I remember now," one of the council said, "that we had a letter +from the admiral in the spring, and that, when describing how +terribly the crews had been diminished and weakened by the severity +of the winter, he said that the sole exception was the Pluto, whose +crew was kept up to their full strength, and in excellent health, +owing entirely to the care and attention that Messer Hammond, the +officer second in command, had bestowed upon them."</p> + +<p>"Thanks, Messer Polani," the president of the council said, "for +the light you have thrown on this matter.</p> + +<p>"Messer Hammond, it is difficult to overestimate the services +that you have rendered to the state. We shall, at an early day, +decide in what manner most fitly to reward them, and in the +meantime you will remain in command of the squadron you have +brought in."</p> + +<p>Francis returned thanks for the promise of the president, but +expressed his desire to resign the command of the squadron at +once.</p> + +<p>"I am in business," he said, "with Messer Polani, and although, +for a short time, I abandoned commerce in order to sail under +Admiral Pisani, I now, from various reasons, desire, as soon as my +successor is appointed, to return to my work with Signor +Polani.</p> + +<p>"I desire to recommend warmly to your excellencies Signor +Parucchi, who is, except myself, the sole remaining officer of the +Pluto. He seconded me most admirably in our enterprise, and himself +commanded at the recapture of one of the ships. The gentlemen +volunteers also worked with the greatest energy and spirit. Matteo +Giustiniani has been acting as third officer, and to him also the +thanks of the republic are due."</p> + +<p>On leaving the ship, Messer Polani had despatched a boat, to +carry to his house the news that Francis had returned; and when +they came back from the palace they found Giulia anxiously +expecting them, and a few minutes later Matteo arrived with his +brother Rufino, and Maria. The latter was far more effusive in her +greeting of Francis than Giulia had been.</p> + +<p>"Matteo has been telling us all about it, Francis, and that he, +and everyone else, owed their escape from the dungeons of Genoa +entirely to your cleverness."</p> + +<p>"Not so much to his cleverness, Maria," Matteo corrected, +"although he is wonderful in inventing things, but to his energy, +determination, and steadfastness. There was not one of us but +regarded a visit to the dungeons of Genoa as a foregone conclusion, +and when Francis spoke of our recapturing the Pluto, as if it were +the easiest and most natural thing in the world, it was as much as +we could do not to laugh in his face. However, he set about it as +quietly and calmly as if he were carrying on the regular work of a +ship. We gradually caught some of his spirit, and when we began to +see that there was a method in his madness, did our best to carry +out his orders."</p> + +<p>"It is wonderful," Maria said; "and do you know, Francisco, that +when we first knew you, after you had rescued us from the attack on +the canal, I absolutely thought that, though you were brave and +straightforward and honourable, yet that by the side of our own +people of your age, you were rather stupid, and ever since then I +have been learning how mistaken I was."</p> + +<p>Francis laughed.</p> + +<p>"I think your estimate of me was correct enough," he said. "You +see people are often stupid one way, and sharp another. Matteo will +tell you I was far behind most of those in the seminary in learning +lessons, and certainly when it came to talking, and bandying jokes, +I had no chance at all. I suppose that every lady I have ever +spoken to, when I have been with you at entertainments, has thought +me exceptionally stupid; and I am sure I am, in most things, only I +suppose I have got a fair share of common sense, and a habit of +thinking for myself. There was no cleverness at all in anything +that Matteo is telling you of.</p> + +<p>"It was just the same here as it was when I was in that cell +near Tunis. I wanted to get out. I supposed there must be some way +out, if I could but discover it, and so I sat down to think how it +was to be done; and of course, after trying in my mind every +possible scheme, I hit upon the right one. There certainly was +nothing clever in that."</p> + +<p>"But I have heard nothing about it yet," Giulia said; "and +everyone else seems to know how it was done."</p> + +<p>"Matteo, do you tell Giulia," Maria ordered. "I have lots of +questions to ask Francis."</p> + +<p>"By the way, Francis," Messer Polani said, "you will be glad to +hear that I have succeeded in getting home your man Giuseppi. He +returned two days ago, and I have no doubt is somewhere below +waiting to see you."</p> + +<p>"I will go and see him at once," Francis said, hurrying away. "I +am indeed glad to know that you have rescued him."</p> + +<p>Maria laughed, as the door closed behind Francis.</p> + +<p>"There, Rufino," she said, turning to him, "you pretend +sometimes to be jealous of Francisco Hammond; and there, you see, +just when I have said I have lots of questions to ask him, and five +minutes after my arrival here to greet him, he races away without a +word, directly he hears that his man Giuseppi has returned."</p> + +<p>"And he is quite right, Maria," Matteo said indignantly. +"Giuseppi would give his life for Francisco, and the two have been +together every day for the last six or seven years. I don't doubt +the faithful fellow is crying with joy now. Francisco is quite +right, not to keep him waiting for a minute."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps I cried for joy, too, Master Matteo," Maria said.</p> + +<p>"I believe I did see tears in your eyes, Maria; but I put them +down to my own account. You would naturally be delighted to know +that your brother-in-law was safe and sound, to say nothing of the +fact that the family would be spared the expense of sending a +thousand ducats or so to ransom him."</p> + +<p>"A thousand ducats, Matteo! A thousand soldi would more nearly +represent your value, if the Genoese did but know it. But why don't +you tell Giulia your adventures, as I ordered you?"</p> + +<p>"Because Giulia would very much rather hear them from +Francisco's lips, and I have no doubt he will be equally glad to +tell her himself, though certainly he is a bad hand at recounting +his own doings. However, he shall have the pleasure of telling her +of it, and I can fill up the details for her, afterwards."</p> + +<p>Two days later, a decree was published by the council stating +that, in consideration of the very great service rendered to the +state by Francisco Hammond, a citizen of Venice, in recapturing +four galleys from the Genoese, the council decreed the settlement +upon him, for life, of a pension of three hundred ducats a +year.</p> + +<p>"You will not want it, Francisco," Messer Polani said, as he +brought in the news, "for I intend, at the end of these troubles, +to take you as a partner in my business. I told your father that I +should do so; and you have not only proved yourself earnest in +business, quick at learning, and full of resources, but you have +vastly added to the debt of gratitude which first caused me to make +the proposition, by again saving my daughters from falling into the +hands of their enemy. I told your father that I should regard you +in the light of a son, and I do so regard you, and as a son of whom +I have every reason to be proud.</p> + +<p>"I need no thanks, my lad. I am still, and shall always remain, +your debtor. You have very much more than fulfilled my +expectations, and I shall be glad to place some of the burden of my +business upon your shoulders.</p> + +<p>"There is another matter, which I have long had in my mind, but +of which I will not speak just at present.</p> + +<p>"Thus, then, the three hundred ducats, which you will receive +each year from the state, may not be needed by you. Still, you are +to be congratulated upon the grant, because being the recipient of +a pension, for distinguished services, will add to your weight and +influence in the city. And so long as you do not need it--and no +man can say what may occur, in the course of years, to hinder the +trade of Venice--you can bestow the sum annually upon the poor of +the city, and thus increase your popularity."</p> + +<p>"I shall be happy to do that, signor," Francis said, "although +it seems to me that popularity is of little value in Venice. It has +not saved the man whom, a short time since, the people hailed as +their father, from unmerited disgrace and imprisonment."</p> + +<p>"It has not, Francisco, but it has saved his life. You may take +my word for it, that the proposal, absolutely made in the council, +for the execution of Pisani, would have been voted had it not been +for fear of the people; and it may be that you will yet see, that +the voice of the people will bring Pisani from his prison, long +before the expiration of his term of imprisonment. Popularity is +not to be despised, for it is a great power. That power may be +abused, as when one, having gained the ear of the people, leads +them astray for his own base ends, and uses the popularity he has +gained to attack, and hurl from power, men less eloquent and less +gifted in the arts of cajoling the people, but more worthy than +himself. But, used rightly, the power of swaying and influencing +the people is a great one, and especially valuable in a city like +Venice, where private enmities and private feuds are carried to so +great an extent. Already your name is in every mouth. Your rescue +of Pisani, when sorely beset by the enemy, has been the theme of +talk in every house; and this feat, which retrieves, to some +extent, the misfortune of Pola, will make your name a household +word in Venice."</p> + +<p>Immediately after the battle of Pola, the Venetians had entered +into negotiations with Hungary, to endeavour to detach that power +from the league against them. But the demands of King Louis were +too extravagant to be accepted. He demanded the cession of Trieste, +the recognition of the suzerainty of his crown on the part of the +present doge, and all his successors, an annual tribute of one +hundred thousand ducats, and half a million of ready money. This +demand was so excessive that, even in their distress, the Venetians +refused to accept it, and hastened on their preparations for a +struggle for life or death.</p> + +<p>Fortunately, the Genoese continued for three months, after their +success at Pola, to capture the outlying possessions of Venice, +instead of striking at the capital. Towards the end of July, +seventeen Genoese vessels appeared off Pelestrina, burned a +merchant ship lying there, and spent the day in reconnoitring +positions, and in taking soundings of the shallows and canals off +Brondolo. They then sailed away for Dalmatia. In less than a week +six galleys again hove in sight; and Admiral Giustiniani, who was +in supreme command of the forces, issued out from the Lido, with an +equal number of ships, to give them battle.</p> + +<p>On his way, however, a black object was seen in the water. As +they neared it, this was seen to be the head of a swimmer. He was +soon picked up, and was found to be a Venetian citizen, named +Savadia, who had been captured by the enemy, but had managed to +escape, and was swimming towards land to warn his countrymen that +the whole Genoese fleet, of forty-seven sail, under Pietro Doria, +was close at hand; and that the six ships in the offing were simply +a decoy, to tempt the Venetians to come out and give battle.</p> + +<p>Giustiniani at once returned to port, and scarcely had he done +so, than the whole Genoese fleet made its appearance. They +approached the passage of the Lido; but the respite that had been +afforded them had enabled the Venetians to make their preparations, +and the Genoese found, to their disappointment, that the channels +of the Lido and Malamocco were completely closed up with sunken +vessels, palisades, and chains; and they sailed away to seek +another entry through which they could strike at Venice.</p> + +<p>Had the same precautions, that had proved so effective at the +Lido and Malamocco passages, been taken at all the other channels; +Venice could have defied all the efforts of Doria's fleet.</p> + +<p>The city is situated on a group of small islands, rising in the +midst of a shallow basin twenty-five miles long and five wide, and +separated from the sea by a long sandbank, formed by the sediment +brought down by the rivers Piave and Adige. Through this sandbank +the sea had pierced several channels. Treporti, the northern of +these channels, contained water only for the smallest craft. The +next opening was known as the port of Lido, and separated the +island of San Nicolo from Malamocco. Five miles farther on is the +passage of Malamocco, between that island and Pelestrina. Southwest +of Pelestrina lay Brondolo, behind which stood Chioggia, twenty +miles distant from Venice. The southern point of Brondolo was only +separated by a small channel--called the Canal of Lombardy--from +the mainland.</p> + +<p>Unfortunately, at Brondolo the channel had not been closed. All +preparations had been made for doing so, but the work had been +postponed until the last moment, in order that trading vessels +might enter and leave the harbour, the Chioggians believing that +there was sure to be sufficient warning, of the approach of an +enemy, to enable them to close the entrance in time. The sudden +appearance of Doria's fleet before Brondolo upset all these +calculations, and the Genoese easily carried the position. Little +Chioggia, the portion of the town separated from the rest by the +Canal of Santa Caterina, was captured without difficulty; but the +bridge across the canal was strongly defended by bastions and +redoubts, and here Pietro Emo made a brave stand, with his garrison +of three thousand five hundred men.</p> + +<p>The enemy at once erected his batteries, and, on the 12th of +August, the Genoese opened fire. The Venetians replied stoutly, and +for three days a heavy cannonade was kept up on both sides. +Reinforcements had reached the garrison from Venice, and, hour by +hour, swift boats brought the news to the city of the progress of +the fight.</p> + +<p>So far, all seemed going on well. The Genoese had suffered +heavily, and made no impression upon the batteries at the head of +the bridge. The days passed in Venice in a state of restless +disquietude. It was hoped and believed that Chioggia could +successfully defend itself; but if it fell, the consequence would +be terrible.</p> + +<p>Already the Hungarians had overrun the Venetian possessions on +the mainland, the Lord of Padua was in the field with his army, and +communication was cut with Ferrara, their sole ally. Should +Chioggia fall, the Genoese fleet would enter the lagoons, and would +sail, by the great channel through the flats, from Chioggia to +Venice; and their light galleys could overrun the whole of the +lagoons, and cut off all communication with the mainland, and +starvation would rapidly stare the city in the face.</p> + +<p>Polani made all preparations for the worst. Many of his +valuables were hidden away, in recesses beneath the floors. Others +were taken on board one of his ships in the port, and this was held +in readiness to convey Giulia and Maria, whose husband had +willingly accepted Polani's offer, to endeavour to carry her off by +sea with Giulia, in case the Genoese should enter the city.</p> + +<p>The merchant made an excursion to Chioggia, with Francis, to see +for himself how things were going, and returned somewhat reassured. +Francis spent much of his time at the port visiting Polani's ships, +talking to the sailors, and expressing to them his opinion, that +the Genoese and Paduans would never have dared to lay siege to +Chioggia, had they not known that Pisani was no longer in command +of the Venetian forces.</p> + +<p>"I regard the present state of affairs," he said, over and over +again, "as a judgment upon the city, for its base ingratitude to +the brave admiral, and I am convinced that things will never come +right, until we have him again in command of our fleet.</p> + +<p>"Giustiniani is no doubt an able man; but what has he ever done +in comparison to what Pisani has accomplished? Why should we place +our only hope of safety in the hands of an untried man? I warrant, +if Pisani was out and about, you would see Venice as active as a +swarm of bees, pouring out against our aggressors. What is being +done now? Preparations are being made; but of what kind? Ships are +sunk in the channel; but what will be the use of this if Chioggia +falls? The canals to that place will be blocked, but that will not +prevent the Genoese from passing, in their light boats, from island +to island, until they enter Venice itself.</p> + +<p>"Do you think all these ships would be lying idly here, if +Pisani were in command? Talk to your comrades, talk to the sailors +in the port, talk to those on shore when you land, and urge, +everywhere, that the cry should be raised for Pisani's release, and +restoration to command."</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch18">Chapter 18</a>: The Release Of Pisani.</h2> + +<p>On the morning of the 17th, the party were sitting at breakfast, +when Giulia suddenly sprang to her feet.</p> + +<p>"Listen!" she exclaimed.</p> + +<p>Her father and Francis looked at her in surprise, but +instinctively listened for whatever sound she could have heard. +Then a deep, solemn sound boomed through the air.</p> + +<p>"It is the bell of the Campanile tolling," the merchant +exclaimed. "It is the signal for all citizens to take up arms. Some +terrible news has arrived."</p> + +<p>Hastily putting on his armour, the merchant started to Saint +Mark's, accompanied by Francis, who put on a steel cap, which he +preferred to the heavy helmet, and a breastplate. A crowd of +citizens were pursuing the same direction. The numbers thickened as +they approached the Piazza, which they found on their arrival to be +already thronged with people, who were densely packed in front of +the palace, awaiting an explanation of the summons.</p> + +<p>There was a look of deep anxiety on every face, for all felt +that the news must be bad, indeed, which could have necessitated +such a call. Presently the doge, accompanied by the council, +appeared in the balcony. A complete silence fell upon the +multitude, the bell ceased tolling, and not the slightest sound +disturbed the stillness. One of the councillors stepped to the +front, for the doge, Contarini, was now seventy-two years old, and +his voice could hardly have been heard over so wide an area.</p> + +<p>"Citizens of the republic, gather, I pray you, all your +fortitude and constancy, to hear the news which I have to tell. It +is bad news; but there is no reason for repining, still less for +despair. If Venice has but confidence in herself, such as she has +throughout her history shown, when danger seemed imminent, be +assured that we shall weather this storm, as we have done all that +have preceded it. Chioggia has fallen!"</p> + +<p>An exclamation of pain and grief went up from the crowd. The +speaker held up his hand for silence.</p> + +<p>"Chioggia, contrary to our hopes and expectations, has fallen; +but we are proud to say, it has fallen from no lack of bravery on +the part of its defenders. As you know, for six days the brave +podesta, Emo, and his troops have repulsed every attack; but +yesterday an unforeseen accident occurred. While our soldiers were +holding their own, as usual, a Genoese fire ship exploded in the +canal behind them. The idea, unfortunately, seized the troops that +the bridge was on fire. The Genoese shouted 'The bridge is in +flames!' and pressed onward, and our soldiers fell back, in some +confusion, towards the bridge. Here Emo, with four brave +companions, made a noble stand, and for a time checked the advance +of the foe; but he was driven back. There was no time to destroy +the communication behind him. The enemy pressed on, and, mingled +with our retreating soldiers, entered the town. And so Chioggia was +taken. Our loss in killed is said to be eight hundred and sixty +men; while the rest of the garrison--four thousand in number--were +taken prisoners."</p> + +<p>A loud cry of anguish burst from the crowd. Numbers of those +present had relatives and friends among the garrison of Chioggia; +and to all, the news of this terrible disaster was a profound blow. +Venice was open now to invasion. In a few hours, the enemy might +appear in her canals.</p> + +<p>The council and the nobles endeavoured to dispel the feeling of +despair. While some harangued the people from the balconies, others +went down and mingled with the crowd, assuring them that all was +not yet lost, that already messengers had been despatched to Doria, +and the Lord of Padua, asking for terms of peace; and even should +these be refused, Venice might yet defend herself until Zeno +arrived, with his fleet, to their rescue. The doge himself received +deputations of the citizens, and, by his calmness and serenity, did +much to allay the first feeling of terror and dismay; and in a few +hours the city recovered its wonted aspect of tranquillity.</p> + +<p>The next morning the answer to the overtures was received. The +Lord of Padua, who was doubtless beginning to feel some misgiving +as to the final issue of the struggle, declared that he himself was +not unwilling to treat upon certain terms, but that the decision +must rest in the hands of his colleague. Doria, believing that +Venice was now in his grasp, rejected the idea of terms with +scorn.</p> + +<p>"By God's faith, my lords of Venice," he cried, "ye shall have +no peace from the Lord of Padua, nor from our commune of Genoa, +until I have put a bit in the mouths of the horses of your +evangelist of Saint Mark. When they have been bridled you shall +then, in sooth, have a good peace; and this is our purpose and that +of our commune!</p> + +<p>"As for these captives, my brethren," he said, pointing to some +Genoese prisoners of rank, whom the Venetians had sent with their +embassy, in hopes of conciliating the Genoese, "take them back. I +want them not; for in a few days I am coming to release, from your +prisons, them and the rest."</p> + +<p>As soon as the message was received, the bell summoned the +popular assembly together, and, in the name of the doge, Pietro +Mocenigo described to them the terrible nature of the peril that +threatened them, told them that, after the insolent reply of Doria, +there was now no hope save in their own exertions, and invited all +to rally round the national standard, for the protection of their +hearths and homes. The reply of the assembly was unanimous; and +shouts were raised:</p> + +<p>"Let us arm ourselves! Let us equip and man what galleys are in +the arsenal! Let us sally out to the combat! It is better to die in +the defence of our country, than to perish here from want."</p> + +<p>A universal conscription was at once ordered, new taxes were +imposed, and the salaries of the magistrates and civil +functionaries suspended. All business came to a standstill, and +property fell to a fourth of its former value. The imposts were not +found adequate to produce the sums required, and a new loan, at +five per cent, was decreed. All subscribed to the utmost of their +ability, raising the enormous sum of 6,294,040 lire. A new captain +general was elected, and the government nominated Taddeo +Giustiniani to the post.</p> + +<p>The fortification of the city, with earthworks, was commenced. +Lines of defence were drawn from Lido to San Spirito, and two +wooden towers constructed at the former point, to guard the pass of +San Nicolo. Events succeeded each other with the greatest rapidity, +and all these matters were settled within thirty-six hours of the +fall of Chioggia. In all respects the people, at first, yielded +implicit obedience to the order of the council. They enrolled +themselves for service. They subscribed to the loan. They laboured +at the outworks. But from the moment the appointment of Taddeo +Giustiniani was announced, they grew sullen. It was not that they +objected to the new captain general, who was a popular nobleman, +but every man felt that something more than this was required, in +such an emergency, and that the best man that Venice could produce +should be at the helm.</p> + +<p>The sailors of the port were the first to move in the matter, +and shouts for Vettore Pisani were heard in the streets. Others +took up the cry, and soon a large multitude assembled in the +Piazza, and with menacing shouts, demanded that Pisani should be +freed and appointed. So serious did the tumult become, that the +council were summoned in haste. Pisani--so popular with the lower +class that they called him their father--was viewed with +corresponding dislike and distrust by the nobles, who were at once +jealous of his fame and superiority, and were alarmed at a +popularity which could have made him, had he chosen it, the master +of the state.</p> + +<p>It was not, therefore, until after some hours of stormy debate, +that they decided to give in to the wishes of the crowd, which was +continually growing larger and more threatening; and it was late in +the evening before the senators deputed by the council, followed by +the exulting populace, hurried to the prison to apprise Pisani that +he was free, and that the doge and senate were expecting him. +Pisani heard the message without emotion, and placidly replied that +he should prefer to pass the night where he was in reflection, and +would wait on the seignory in the morning.</p> + +<p>At daybreak on Friday, the 19th of August, the senatorial +delegates and the people, accompanied by the other officers who had +been involved in the disgrace of Pisani, and who had now been +freed, reappeared at the gates of the prison. These were +immediately opened, and Pisani appeared, with his usual expression +of cheerfulness and good humour on his face. He was at once lifted +on to the shoulders of some sailors, and borne in triumph to the +palace, amid the deafening cheers of the populace. On the staircase +he was met by the doge and senators, who saluted him cordially. +Mass was heard in the chapel, and Pisani and the council then set +to business, and were for some time closeted together.</p> + +<p>The crowd waited outside the building, continuing to shout, and +when Pisani issued out from the palace, he was seized and carried +in triumph to his house in San Fantino. As he was passing the +Campanile of Saint Mark, his old pilot, Marino Corbaro, a +remarkably able seaman, but a perpetual grumbler against those in +authority, met him, and elbowing his way through the crowd, drew +close to him, loudly shouting at the same time:</p> + +<p>"Now is the time, admiral, for revenging yourself, by seizing +the dictatorship of this city. Behold, all are at your service. All +are willing, at this very instant, to proclaim you prince, if you +choose."</p> + +<p>The loyalty of Pisani's nature was so affronted by this offer, +that, in a fury of rage, he leaned forward and struck Corbaro a +heavy blow with his fist, and then raising his voice shouted to +those about him:</p> + +<p>"Let none who wish me well say, 'Viva Pisani!' but, 'Viva San +Marco!'"</p> + +<p>And the populace then shouted, "Viva San Marco and our Father +Pisani!"</p> + +<p>No sooner had Pisani reached his house than the news was bruited +about, that the admiral had been merely appointed governor of Lido, +and that Giustiniani remained in command of the navy. The people +were furious; and a deputation of 600 waited upon Pisani and +said:</p> + +<p>"We are yours. Command us as you will."</p> + +<p>Pisani told them that it was for the republic, and not for him, +to command their services. The deputation then went to the council, +and declared, in the name of fifty thousand Venetians, that not a +man would embark on the galleys until Pisani received his command, +as captain general of all the forces of the republic, by land and +sea. The Council of Ten, finding it impossible to resist the +popular demand, and terrified at the idea of the tumult that a +refusal would arouse, at last agreed to their request.</p> + +<p>Fortunately for the republic, the four days which elapsed +between the fall of Chioggia, and the appointment of Pisani to the +supreme command, had not been utilized by the enemy. Carrara and +Doria had always been at variance as to their plans of operations, +and, as usual, they differed now. The Lord of Padua urged the +necessity for following up their success by an instant attack upon +Venice, while Doria insisted upon carrying out his original plan, +and trusting as much to starvation as to military operations. He, +however, gradually pushed forward two outposts, at Poreja and +Malamocco, and on the latter island, at a distance of three miles +from Venice, he erected a battery, many of whose shot fell at San +Spirito.</p> + +<p>Francis had borne his share in the events which had led to the +installation of Pisani in the supreme command. He had at first +instigated the sailors of Polani to raise a cry in the streets for +the restoration of the admiral, and had gone about with two or +three of his friends, mingling with knots of persons, and urging +that the only hope of the republic lay in the energy and talent of +Pisani. Even Matteo had joined him, although Taddeo Giustiniani was +his own uncle. But, as the lad said, "what matters it about +relationship now? What will become of relationship, if the Genoese +and Paduans land here, raze the city to the ground, and scatter us +over the face of the earth? No. When it comes to a question of +ordinary command, of course I should go with my family; but when +Venice is in danger, and only one man can save her, I should vote +for him, whoever the other may be."</p> + +<p>Polani had also exerted the great influence he possessed among +the commercial classes, and had aided the efforts of Francis, by +giving leave to the sailors of all his ships in port to go on +shore. A few hours after Pisani's release the merchant, accompanied +by Francis, called upon him.</p> + +<p>"Welcome, my friends," he said heartily.</p> + +<p>"Well, you see, Messer Hammond, that I was a true prophet, and +that I have had my share of the dungeon. However, we need not talk +of that now. I am up to my eyes in business."</p> + +<p>"I have no doubt of that, admiral," Polani said. "I have called +to offer every ship I have in the harbour, for the defence of the +city. I myself will continue to pay their crews, as at present. Use +the vessels as you like. Make fire ships of them if you will. I can +afford the loss."</p> + +<p>"Thanks, my friend," the admiral said. "We shall find a use for +them, never fear.</p> + +<p>"As for you, Messer Hammond, even in my prison I heard of your +gallant feat, in recapturing the Pluto and three other ships from +the Genoese, and thus retrieving, to some extent, the losses of +Pola. I hope to wipe off the rest of the score before long. I shall +find a command for you, in a day or two. Age and rank go for +nothing now. I am going to put the best men in the best +position.</p> + +<p>"I have just appointed that old rascal, Corbaro, vice admiral of +the Lido. He is a grumbling old scoundrel, and would have had me +get up a revolution today, for which I had to knock him down; but +he is one of the best sailors Venice ever turned out, and just the +man for the place."</p> + +<p>"I would rather act as a general aide-de-camp to you, admiral, +than have a separate command, if you will allow me," Francis said. +"I am still too young to command, and should be thwarted by rivalry +and jealousies. I would, therefore, far rather act under your +immediate orders, if you will allow me."</p> + +<p>"So be it, then, lad. Come to me tomorrow, and I have no doubt I +shall have plenty for you to do. At present, I cannot say what +course I may adopt, for in truth, I don't know what position I +shall hold. The people do not seem content with my having only the +government of Lido; but for myself, I care nothing whether I hold +that command, or that of captain general. It is all one to me, so +that I can serve the republic. And Giustiniani is an able man, and +will no doubt do his business well.</p> + +<p>"You do not think so, young man?" he broke off, when Francis +shook his head.</p> + +<p>"I do not, indeed, sir. He has erected two wooden towers at the +mouth of the Lido, which the first stone from a Genoese ballista +would knock to splinters; and has put up a fence to San Spirito, +which a Genoese soldier in full armour could jump over."</p> + +<p>"Well, we shall see, Messer Hammond," the admiral said, smiling. +"I fear you have one bad quality among your many good ones, and +that is that you are a partisan. But go along now. I have no more +time to spare to you."</p> + +<p>No sooner had Pisani obtained the supreme command, than he set +to work in earnest to provide for the safety of the city, the +reorganization of the navy, and the conversion of the new levies +into soldiers and sailors. The hulls of forty galleys, which were +lying in the arsenals, were taken in hand, and two-thirds of them +were equipped and ready for sea in three days.</p> + +<p>The population was full of ardour and enthusiasm, and crowded to +the offices to register their names for service. The women brought +their jewels, to be melted down into money; and all vied with each +other in zeal.</p> + +<p>Pisani's first task, after seeing the galleys put in hand, was +to examine the defences Giustiniani had erected. He at once +pronounced the two wooden towers--of which Francis had spoken so +disrespectfully--to be utterly useless, and ordered two tall +towers, of solid masonry, to be erected in their stead.</p> + +<p>Giustiniani was indignant at this condemnation of his work; and +he and his friends so worked upon the minds of those who were to +carry out the work, that they laid down their tools, and refused to +embark upon such useless operations. The news was brought to Pisani +by one of his friends, and, starting in his gondola, he was soon +upon the spot.</p> + +<p>He wasted no time in remonstrating with the workmen on their +conduct, but, seizing a trowel, lifted a heavy stone into its +place, shouting:</p> + +<p>"Let him who loves Saint Mark follow my example!"</p> + +<p>The success of the appeal was instantaneous. The workmen grasped +their tools. A host of volunteers seized the stones and carried +them to their places. When they were exhausted, fresh workmen took +their places, and in the incredibly short time of four days, the +two castles were finished.</p> + +<p>The workmen were next set to level the paling and earthwork, +from Lido to San Spirito, and in the course of a fortnight the +lofty and massive stone walls were erected. By this time, something +like a fleet was at Pisani's disposal. In spite of the conduct of +Taddeo Giustiniani, Pisani, with his usual magnanimity, gave him +the command of three large ships, mounting the heaviest guns in the +arsenal. The light boats were under the command of Giovanni +Barberigo. Federigo Cornaro was stationed with a force of galleys +at San Spirito. Nicholo Gallieano was charged with the defence of +the Lazaretto, San Clemente, Santa Elena, and the neighbourhood; +while on the strand between Lido and Malamocco, behind the main +wall, were the mercenaries, eight thousand strong, under Jacopo +Cavalli. Heavy booms were placed across all the canals by which it +was likely that the enemy's fleet might advance.</p> + +<p>Francis found his office, under the energetic admiral, no +sinecure. He was kept constantly moving from one point to the +other, to see that all was going on well, and to report the +progress made. The work never ceased, night or day, and for the +first week neither Francis, nor his commander, ever went to bed, +contenting themselves with such chance sleep as they could +snatch.</p> + +<p>Having wasted eight precious days, the enemy, on the 24th of +August, advanced to the attack. A Genoese force, under Doria's +brother, landed upon San Nicolo; while the Paduans attacked San +Spirito and Santa Marta. They found the besieged in readiness. +Directly the alarm was given, the Venetians flocked to the +threatened points, and repulsed the enemy with slaughter.</p> + +<p>The latter then attempted to make a junction of their forces, +but Cornaro with his galleys occupied the canal, drove back the +boats in which they intended to cross, and defeated the attempt. +Doria had felt certain that the movement, which was attempted under +cover of night, would succeed, and his disappointment was +extreme.</p> + +<p>The Lord of Padua was so disgusted that he withdrew his troops +to the mainland. Doria remained before Venice until the early part +of October, but without making another attack. Indeed, the defences +had long before become so formidable, that attack was well-nigh +hopeless. At the end of that time he destroyed all his works and +fell back upon Chioggia, and determined to wait there until Venice +was starved into surrender.</p> + +<p>The suffering in the city was intense. It was cut off from all +access to the mainland behind, but occasionally a ship, laden with +provisions from Egypt or Syria, managed to evade the Genoese +galleys. These precarious supplies, however, availed but little for +the wants of the starving city, eked out though they were by the +exertions of the sailors, who occasionally sailed across the +lagoon, landed on the mainland, and cut off the supplies sent from +Padua and elsewhere to the Genoese camp.</p> + +<p>The price of provisions was so enormous, that the bulk of the +people were famishing, and even in the houses of the wealthy the +pressure was great. The nobility, however, did their utmost for +their starving countrymen, and the words of Pietro Mocenigo, +speaking in the name of the doge to the popular assembly, were +literally carried into effect.</p> + +<p>"Let all," he said, "who are pressed by hunger, go to the +dwellings of the patricians. There you will find friends and +brothers, who will divide with you their last crust."</p> + +<p>So desperate, indeed, did the position become, that a motion was +made by some members of the council for emigrating from the +lagoons, and founding a new home in Candia or Negropont; but this +proposal was at once negatived, and the Venetians declared that, +sooner than abandon their city, they would bury themselves under +her ruins.</p> + +<p>So October and November passed. Carlo Zeno had not yet arrived, +but by some letters which had been captured with a convoy of +provisions, it was learned that he had been achieving the most +triumphant success, had swept the seas from Genoa to +Constantinople, had captured a Genoese galleon valued at three +hundred thousand ducats, and was at Candia.</p> + +<p>This intelligence revived the hopes of Venice, and on the 16th +of November Luigi Moroceni was despatched to order him, in the name +of the government, peremptorily to hasten to the rescue of Venice. +Almost at the same time, Giovanni Barberigo, with his light craft, +surprised and captured three of the enemy's vessels, killing many +of the sailors, and taking a hundred and fifty prisoners. The +success was not in itself important, but it raised the hopes of the +Venetians, as being the first time they had taken the offensive. +Pisani himself had endeavoured to reconnoitre the position of the +enemy, but had each time been sharply repulsed, losing ten boats +and thirty men upon one occasion, when the doge's nephew, Antonio +Gradenigo, was also killed by the enemy; but in spite of this, he +advised government to make a great effort to recover Chioggia.</p> + +<p>He admitted that the chances of failure were great. Still, he +maintained that success was possible, and it was better that the +Venetians should die fighting than by hunger.</p> + +<p>As the result of his expeditions, he had found that Doria had at +least thirty thousand men, fifty great ships, and from seven to +eight hundred light craft. Moreover his troops were in high +spirits, well fed, and well cared for, and should therefore be, man +to man, more than a match for the starving soldiers of Venice. +Nevertheless, there was a possibility of success, as Zeno would +doubtless arrive by the time the siege had fairly commenced.</p> + +<p>After much debate, the council determined that the undertaking +should be attempted. To stir the people to the utmost exertion, the +senate, on the 1st of December, published a decree that the thirty +plebeians, who should most liberally meet the urgent necessities of +the state by the proffer of their persons or estates, should, after +peace was made, be raised to the rank of nobility, and summoned to +the great council; that thirty-five thousand ducats of gold should +be distributed annually among those who were not elected, and their +heirs, forever; that any foreign merchant, who should display +peculiar zeal for the cause of the republic, should be admitted to +the full privileges of citizenship; and that, on the other hand, +such Venetians as might endeavour to elude a participation in the +common burdens, and hardships, should be held by so doing to have +forfeited all their civil rights.</p> + +<p>Seventy-five candidates came forward. Some offered money, some +personal service or the service of their sons and relatives; some +presented galleys and offered to pay their crews. Immense efforts +were made, and by the 21st of December sixty ships, four hundred +boats of all sizes, and thirty-four war galleys were equipped. The +doge, although just seventy-three years old, signified his wish to +assume the supreme command of the expedition, Pisani acting as his +lieutenant and admiral.</p> + +<p>During the long weeks the siege continued, Francis saw little of +the Polanis, his duties keeping him constantly near Pisani, with +whom he took such meals as the time would afford, sleeping in his +house, in readiness for instant service. Maria had returned to her +father's house, for her husband was in command of the outpost +nearest to the enemy, and was therefore constantly away from home. +Maria's spirits were higher than ever. She made light of the +hardships in the way of food, bantered Francis when he came on his +business engagements, and affected to treat him with extreme +respect, as the trusted lieutenant of Pisani. Giulia, too, kept up +her spirits, and no one would have thought, listening to the lively +talk of the two girls with their father and Francis, that Venice +was besieged by an overwhelming force, and reduced to the direst +straits by hunger.</p> + +<p>The greater part of Polani's ships were now in the service of +the state. Those which remained, were constantly engaged in running +across to the Dalmatian coast, and bringing in cargoes of +provisions through the cordon of the Genoese galleys.</p> + +<p>The light gondola which, after being repaired, had been lying +for two years under cover in Messer Polani's yard, had again been +made useful. Giuseppi had returned to his old work, and he and +another powerful oarsman made the light boat fly through the water, +as Francis carried the orders of the admiral to the various posts. +He had also been in it upon several of the reconnoitring +expeditions, in the canals leading to Chioggia, and although hotly +chased he had, on each occasion, left his pursuers behind. The +evening before the expedition was to start Pisani said to him:</p> + +<p>"I think you have brought me more news, with that fast little +craft of yours, than I have been able to obtain even at the cost of +some hard fighting, and a good many lives. I wish that you would +make an excursion for me tonight, and find out, if you can, whether +the enemy have moved their position since the last time I +reconnoitred them. I particularly wish to learn if they have strong +forces near the outlets of the channels of Chioggia, and Brondolo, +and the Canal of Lombardy. You know my plans, and with such a host +of recruits as I shall have with me, it is all important that there +should be no failure at first. Veterans can stand defeat, but a +reverse is fatal to young troops. Heaven knows, they will have +enough to bear, with wet, cold, exposure, and hunger, and success +will be necessary to keep up their spirits. Do not push your +adventure too far. Run no risk if you can help it. I would not, for +much, that harm befell you."</p> + +<p>Francis at once accepted the commission, and left the admiral in +order to make his preparations.</p> + +<p>"Giuseppi," he said, as he took his place in the boat, "I want +you to find for me, for service tonight, a gondolier who is a +native of Chioggia, and who knows every foot of the country round, +and every winding of the canals. He must be intelligent and brave, +for the risk will be no slight one."</p> + +<p>"I think I know such a man, Messer Francisco; but if he happens +to be away, there will be no difficulty in finding another, for +there are many fishermen here who escaped before the Genoese +captured Chioggia."</p> + +<p>"When will you see him?"</p> + +<p>"As soon as you have landed me at Messer Polani's."</p> + +<p>"Go and fetch him, Giuseppi; and if you can find one or two old +fishermen of Chioggia, bring them also with you. I want to gain as +much information as possible regarding the country."</p> + +<p>"Is it true that the fleet starts tomorrow, Francisco?" Maria +asked as he entered. "Everyone says so."</p> + +<p>"It is quite true. There will be no further change. The orders +have been all issued, and you may rely upon it that we are going to +sea."</p> + +<p>"And when will you return?"</p> + +<p>"That's another matter altogether," Francis laughed. "It may be +a week, it may be three months."</p> + +<p>"But I thought we were going to fight the Genoese galleys. It +does not seem to me that a week is wanted to do that. A day to go +to Chioggia, a day to fight, and a day to return. What can you want +more than that for?"</p> + +<p>"I do not think that we are going to fight the Genoese galleys," +Francis answered. "Certainly we shall not do so if we can help it. +They are vastly stronger than we are; but I do not know that we +need fear them for all that."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean, Francisco? You do not mean to fight--they are +vastly stronger than you are--and yet you do not fear them. You are +not given to speak in riddles; but you have puzzled me this +time."</p> + +<p>"Well, I will explain myself a little," Francis said; "but you +must remember that it is a secret, and not to be whispered to +anyone."</p> + +<p>"That is right," Maria said. "I love a secret, especially a +state secret.</p> + +<p>"Giulia, come and sit quite close, so that he can whisper it +into our ears, and even the walls shall not hear it.</p> + +<p>"Now, sir, explain yourself!"</p> + +<p>"I will explain it without telling you," Francis said. "Have you +not gone to see African lions, who were very much stronger and +fiercer than yourself, and yet you did not fear them?"</p> + +<p>"Because they have been in cages," Maria said. "But what has +that to do with it?"</p> + +<p>"It explains the whole matter," Francis said. "We do not mean to +fight the Genoese fleet, if we can help it; but we are going to try +to put them in a cage, and then we shall not be afraid of +them."</p> + +<p>"Do not trifle with us, sir," Maria said sternly. "How can you +put Genoese galleys in a cage?"</p> + +<p>"We cannot put them in a cage, but we can cage them up," Francis +said. "Pisani's intention is, if possible, to close all the +entrances to the canals round Chioggia. Thus, not only will the +Genoese galleys be unable to sally out to attack us, but the whole +of the Genoese army will be cooped up, and we shall then do to them +what they have been doing to us, namely, starve them out!"</p> + +<p>"Capital, capital!" Maria said, clapping her hands. "Your Pisani +is a grand man, Francisco. And if he can do this for us, there is +nothing which we would not do to show our gratitude. But you won't +find it easy; besides, in the game of starving out, are we likely +to win? The contest will not be even, for they start on it full men +and strong, while our people are half starved already."</p> + +<p>"I do not regard success as certain," Francis replied; "and +Pisani himself acknowledges the chances are very great against us. +Still, it is possible; and as nothing else seems possible, we are +going to attempt it."</p> + +<p>Polani looked grave, when he heard of the mission which Francis +was going to undertake. Giulia's bright colour fled at once, and +Maria said angrily:</p> + +<p>"You have no right to be always running into danger, Francisco. +You are not a Venetian, and there is no reason why you should be +always running risks greater than those which most Venetians are +likely to encounter. You ought to think of us who care for you, if +you don't choose to think of yourself."</p> + +<p>"I did not volunteer for the service," Francis said. "I was +asked by the admiral to undertake it, and even had I wished it, I +could hardly have refused. The admiral selected me, not from any +merit on my part, but because he knows that my boat is one of the +fastest on the lagoons, and that I can easily run away from any of +the Genoese rowboats. He particularly ordered me to run no +unnecessary risks."</p> + +<p>"That is all very well," Maria said; "but you know very well +that you will run risks, and put yourself in the way of danger, if +there is a chance of doing so.</p> + +<p>"You should tell him not to go, father!"</p> + +<p>"I cannot do that, Maria; for the service he has undertaken is a +very important one to Venice. Everything depends upon the success +of Pisani's attempt, and undertaken, as it is, against great odds, +it is of the utmost importance that there should be no mistake as +to the position of the enemy. Whether Francis was wise or not, in +accepting Pisani's offer that he should act as his aide-de-camp, +may be doubted; but now that he has undertaken it, he must carry +out his orders, especially as it is now too late to make other +arrangements, did he draw back.</p> + +<p>"If you will come into my room, Francisco, I will give you a +chart of the passages around Chioggia. You can study that, and you +will then the better understand the information you may receive, +from the men you are expecting."</p> + +<p>Half an hour later Giuseppi arrived with the gondolier he had +spoken of, and two old fishermen, and from their explanations, and +a study of the map, Francis gained an exact idea of the localities. +From his previous expeditions he had learned where the Genoese were +generally posted, and something of the strength of the forces at +the various points.</p> + +<p>In truth, they kept but a careless watch. Feeling convinced that +the Venetians possessed no forces capable of attacking him, and +that their surrender must now be a matter of a few days only, Doria +took no precautions. His troops were all quartered in the houses of +Chioggia, his galleys moored alongside its quays, and the utmost he +did was to post small bodies of men, with rowboats, at the +entrances to the passages from the sea, and up the lagoons, to give +warning of any sudden attempt on the part of Barberigo, with his +light flotilla, to make a dash at the galleys, and endeavour to +burn them.</p> + +<p>Having obtained all the information he could from the old +fishermen, Francis dismissed them.</p> + +<p>"It is evident," he said to Giuseppi, "that we can hardly hope +to succeed in passing the boats at the entrance to the canal +seaward, or by going up the lagoon. The only plan that I can see is +for us to land on the island of Pelestrina, which is held by us, to +carry the boat across it, and to embark in the Malamocco channel. +In this way, we should be within their cordon of boats, and can row +fearlessly either out to the entrances, or to Chioggia itself. We +are not likely to be detected, and if we are, we must make a race +of it to Pelestrina."</p> + +<p>The gondolier agreed that the scheme was practicable, and +Francis ordered Giuseppi and him to remove the burdens, and every +bit of wood that could be dispensed with from the gondola, so as to +facilitate its transport.</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch19">Chapter 19</a>: The Siege Of Chioggia.</h2> + +<p>Late in the afternoon, Francis embarked in his gondola, and in +an hour and a half landed at Pelestrina. He was well known, to +those posted there, as the bearer of Pisani's orders, and as soon +as it became dark, Rufino Giustiniani, who was in command, ordered +a dozen men to carry the light gondola across the island to the +Malamocco channel. While this was being done, Francis went to +Rufino's tent, and informed him of what was going on in Venice, and +that the whole fleet would set sail on the morrow.</p> + +<p>"We heard rumours, from the men who brought our rations, that it +was to be so," Rufino said; "but we have heard the same story a +dozen times. So, now, it is really true! But what can the admiral +be thinking of! Sure he can't intend to attack Doria with this +newly-manned fleet and rabble army. He could not hope for victory +against such odds!"</p> + +<p>"The admiral's intentions are kept a profound secret," Francis +said, "and are only known to the doge and the Council of Ten."</p> + +<p>"And to yourself," Rufino said laughing.</p> + +<p>"The admiral is good enough to honour me with his fullest +confidence," Francis said; "and in this matter, it is so important +that the nature of the design should be kept wholly secret, that I +cannot tell it even to you!"</p> + +<p>"You are quite right, Francisco; nor do I wish to know it, +though I would wager that Maria, and her pretty sister, have some +inkling of what is going on."</p> + +<p>Francis laughed.</p> + +<p>"The signoras are good enough to treat me as a brother," he +said, "and I will not affirm that they have not obtained some +slight information."</p> + +<p>"I will warrant they have!" Rufino said. "When my wife has made +up her mind to get to the bottom of a matter, she will tease and +coax till she succeeds.</p> + +<p>"Ah, here is Matteo! he has been out posting the sentries for +the night."</p> + +<p>The two friends had not indulged in a talk for some weeks, +though they had occasionally met when Francis paid one of his +flying visits to the island.</p> + +<p>"I have just seen your boat being carried along," Matteo said, +as he entered the tent. "I could not think what it was till I got +close; but of course, when I saw Giuseppi, I knew all about it. +What are you going to do--scout among the Genoese?"</p> + +<p>"I am going to find out as much as I can," Francis said.</p> + +<p>"It's a capital idea your bringing the boat across the island," +Matteo said. "You are always full of good ideas, Francis. I can't +make it out. They never seem to occur to me, and at the present +time, especially, the only ideas that come into my mind are as to +the comfortable meals I will eat, when this business is over. I +never thought I cared much for eating before, but since I have had +nothing but bread--and not enough of that--and an occasional fish, +I have discovered that I am really fond of good living. My bones +ache perpetually with lying on the bare ground, and if I escape +from this, without being a cripple for life from rheumatism, I +shall consider myself lucky, indeed. You are a fortunate fellow, +Francisco; spending your time in the admiral's comfortable palace, +or flying about in a smooth-rowing gondola!"</p> + +<p>"That is one side of the question certainly," Francis said, +laughing; "but there is a good deal of hard work, too, in the way +of writing."</p> + +<p>"I should not like that," Matteo said. "Still, I think you have +the best of it. If the Genoese would come sometimes, and try and +drive us off the island, there would be some excitement. But, +except when the admiral wishes a reconnaissance, or Barberigo's +galleys come down and stir them up, there is really nothing doing +here."</p> + +<p>"That ought to suit you exactly, Matteo, for never but once did +I hear you say you wanted to do anything."</p> + +<p>"When was that?" Rufino asked, laughing.</p> + +<p>"Matteo conceived a violent desire to climb Mount Etna," Francis +said, "and it needed all my arguments to prevent his leaving the +ship at Girgenti, while she was loading, and starting to make the +ascent."</p> + +<p>"He would have repented before he had gone a quarter of the way +up," Rufino said.</p> + +<p>"I might have repented," Matteo replied stoutly, "but I would +have done it, if I had begun. You don't know me yet, Rufino. I have +a large store of energy, only at present I have had no opportunity +of showing what I am made of.</p> + +<p>"And now, how do you intend to proceed, Francisco? Have you any +plan?"</p> + +<p>"None at all," Francis replied. "I simply want to assure myself +that the galleys are all in their usual places, and that the +Genoese are making no special preparations against our coming."</p> + +<p>"I have seen no unusual stir," Rufino said. "Their ships, as far +as one can see their masts, seem all in their usual position. I +fancy that, since Barberigo carried off two of them, they have put +booms across the channels to prevent sudden attacks. I saw a lot of +rowboats busy about something, but I could not make out exactly +what they were doing; but still, I fancy they were constructing a +boom. Their galleys keep a sharp lookout at night, and you +certainly would not have succeeded in passing them, had you not hit +upon this plan of carrying your boat over.</p> + +<p>"Your greatest danger will be at first. When once you have +fairly entered the inner canals, you are not likely to be suspected +of being an enemy. They will take you for Chioggian fishermen late. +We often make out their returning boats near the town. No doubt +Doria is fond of fresh fish. Otherwise you would be detected, for +the Genoese boats are, of course, quite different to ours, and even +in the dark they would make out that you belonged to the +lagoons.</p> + +<p>"Ah, here is supper! It is not often that I should have anything +to offer you, but one of my men managed to catch three or four fish +today, and sold them to me at about their weight in silver. +However, I have some good wine from my own cellars, and a man who +has good wine, fish, and bread can do royally, whatever this +grumbling brother of mine may say."</p> + +<p>Half an hour later, a soldier brought the news that the gondola +was in the water, and Francis bade adieu to his friends, and +started at once.</p> + +<p>"Row slowly and quietly," he said, as he took his seat. "Do not +let your oars make the slightest splash in the water, until we are +well across to the opposite shore. They may have a guard boat lying +in the channel."</p> + +<p>The light craft made her way noiselessly across the water. Once +or twice they heard the sound of oars, as some Genoese galley +passed up or down, but none came near enough to perceive them, and +they crossed the main channel, and entered one of the numerous +passages practicable only for boats of very light draught, without +being once hailed. A broad shallow tract of water was now crossed, +passable only by craft drawing but a few inches of water; then +again they were in a deeper channel, and the lights of Chioggia +rose but a short distance ahead.</p> + +<p>They paused and listened, now, for they were nearing the ship +channel, and here the enemy would, if anywhere, be on the alert. +Coming across the water they could hear the sound of voices, and +the dull noise made by the movement of men in a boat.</p> + +<p>"Those are the galleys watching the boom, I expect," Francis +said.</p> + +<p>"Now, Philippo, we can move on. I suppose there is plenty of +water, across the flats, for us to get into the channel without +going near the boom."</p> + +<p>"Plenty for us, signor; but if the boom goes right across the +channel, heavy rowboats would not be able to pass. There are few +shallower places in the lagoons than just about here. It may be +that in one or two places even we might touch, but if we do, the +bottom is firm enough for us to get out and float the boat +over."</p> + +<p>But they did not touch any shoal sufficiently shallow to +necessitate this. Several times Francis could feel, by the dragging +pace, that she was touching the oozy bottom; but each time she +passed over without coming to a standstill. At last Philippo +said:</p> + +<p>"We are in the deep channel now, signor. The boom is right +astern of us. The town is only a few hundred yards ahead."</p> + +<p>"Then we shall be passing the Genoese galleys, directly," +Francis said. "Row slowly as we go, and splash sometimes with the +oars. If we go quickly and noiselessly past, they might possibly +suspect something, but if we row without an attempt at concealment, +they will take us for a fisherman's boat."</p> + +<p>Soon the dark mass of Genoese ships, with their forests of +masts, rose before them. There were lights in the cabins, and a +buzz of talking, laughing, and singing among the crews on +board.</p> + +<p>"What luck today?" a sailor asked them as they rowed past, +twenty or thirty yards from the side of one of the ships.</p> + +<p>"Very poor," Giuseppi replied. "I think your ships, and the +boats lying about, and the firing, have frightened the fish away +from this end of the lagoons."</p> + +<p>It was half a mile before they passed the last of the crowd of +vessels.</p> + +<p>"Would you like me to land here, signor?" Philippo said. "There +would be no danger in my doing so. I can make my way, through the +streets, to the house of some of my relatives, and find out from +them whether there are any fresh movements among the Genoese. I +will not enter any house; for aught I know there are soldiers +quartered everywhere; but I am sure not to go many yards before I +run against someone I know."</p> + +<p>"I think it will be a very good plan, Philippo. We will lie +under the bank here, and wait your return."</p> + +<p>It was not more than twenty minutes before the gondolier was +back.</p> + +<p>"I have spoken to three men I know, signor. They are agreed that +there are no movements among the enemy, and no one seems to have an +idea that the Venetians are about to put to sea. Of course, I was +cautious not to let drop a word on the subject, and only said we +had managed to get through the enemy's cordon to learn the latest +news, and I expected to earn a ducat or two by my night's +work."</p> + +<p>"That is excellent," Francis said. "Now, we will row out to the +sea mouths of the channels, to assure ourselves that no ships are +lying on guard there, for some are going in or out every day to +cruise along the coast. A few may have taken up their station +there, without attracting notice among the townspeople."</p> + +<p>The opening of the passage known as the Canal of Lombardy was +first visited. To gain this, they had to retrace their steps for +some distance, and to row through the town of Chioggia, passing +several boats and galleys, but without attracting notice. They +found the mouth of the canal entirely unguarded, and then returned +and rowed out to the mouth of the Brondolo passage. Some blazing +fires on the shore showed that there were parties of soldiers here, +but no ships were lying anywhere in the channel.</p> + +<p>After some consultation they determined that, as no watch seemed +to be kept, it would be shorter to row on outside the islands, and +to enter by the third passage to be examined, that between +Pelestrina and Brondolo. Here, however, the Genoese were more on +the alert, as the Pelestrina shore was held by the Venetians. +Scarcely had they entered the channel, when a large rowboat shot +out from the shadow of the shore and hailed them.</p> + +<p>"Stop rowing in that boat! Who are you that are entering so +late?"</p> + +<p>"Fishermen," Philippo shouted back, but without stopping +rowing.</p> + +<p>"Stop!" shouted the officer, "till we examine you! It is +forbidden to enter the channel after dark."</p> + +<p>But the gondoliers rowed steadily on, until ahead of the boat +coming out. This fell into their wake, and its angry officer +shouted threats against the fugitives, and exhorted his men to row +their hardest.</p> + +<p>"There are two more boats ahead, signor. They are lying on their +oars to cut us off. One is a good deal further out than the other, +and I don't think we shall gain Pelestrina."</p> + +<p>"Then make for the Brondolo shore till we have passed them," +Francis said.</p> + +<p>The boat whirled off her course, and made towards the shore. The +Genoese galleys ahead at once made towards them; but in spite of +the numerous oars they pulled, the craft could not keep up with the +racing gondola, and it crossed ahead of them. In another five +minutes' rowing, the three galleys were well astern, and the +gondola again made out from the shore, her head pointing obliquely +towards Pelestrina. The galleys were now fifty yards behind, and +although their crews rowed their hardest, the gondola gradually +gained upon them, and crossing their bows made over towards +Pelestrina.</p> + +<p>"We are out of the channel now," Philippo said, "and there will +not be water enough for them to follow us much further."</p> + +<p>A minute or two later a sudden shout proclaimed that the nearest +of their pursuers had touched the ground.</p> + +<p>"We can take it easy now," Giuseppi said, "and I am not sorry, +for we could not have rowed harder if we had been racing."</p> + +<p>A few minutes later, the light craft touched the mud a few yards +distant from the shore.</p> + +<p>"Is that you, Francisco?" a voice, which Francis recognized as +Matteo's, asked.</p> + +<p>"All right, Matteo!" he replied. "No one hurt this time."</p> + +<p>"I have been on the lookout for you the last hour. I have got a +body of my men here, in case you were chased. We heard the shouting +and guessed it was you."</p> + +<p>"If you have got some men there, Matteo, there is a chance for +you to take a prize. A galley rowing twelve or fourteen oars is in +the mud, a few hundred yards out. She was chasing us, and ran +aground when at full speed, and I imagine they will have some +trouble in getting her off. I suppose she draws a couple of feet of +water. There! Don't you hear the hubbub they are making?"</p> + +<p>"I hear them," Matteo said.</p> + +<p>"Come along, lads. The night is cold, and I don't suppose the +water is any warmer, but a skirmish will heat our blood."</p> + +<p>Matteo, followed by a company of some forty men, at once entered +the water, and made in the direction of the sounds. Five minutes +later, Francis heard shouts and a clashing of weapons suddenly +break out. It lasted but a short time. Matteo and his band soon +returned with the prisoners.</p> + +<p>"What! Have you waited, Francisco? I thought you would be on the +other side of the island by this time."</p> + +<p>"I was in no particular hurry, Matteo; and besides, I want my +boat; and although two men can lift her easily enough, she would be +a heavy weight to carry so far."</p> + +<p>"You shall have a dozen, Francisco. It is owing to you we have +taken these prisoners, and that I have had my first bit of +excitement since I came out here.</p> + +<p>"Sergeant, here are a couple of ducats. When you have given the +prisoners into safe custody, spend the money in wine for the +company.</p> + +<p>"The water is bitterly cold, I can tell you, Francisco; but +otherwise I am warm enough, for one's feet stick to the mud, and it +seems, each step, as if one had fifty pounds of lead on one's +shoes. But come along to my brother's tent at once. Your feet must +be cold, too, though the water was only a few inches deep where you +got out of your boat. A glass of hot wine will do us both good; and +it will be an hour before your boat is in the water again. Indeed, +I don't see the use of your starting before daybreak."</p> + +<p>"Nor do I, Matteo; but I must go, nevertheless. Pisani knows how +long it will take me to get to Chioggia and return. He will allow +an hour or two for me to reconnoitre, and will then be expecting me +back. As it is, I shall be two hours after the time when he will be +expecting me, for he knows nothing about the boat being carried +across this island, and will make no allowance for that. Moreover, +Polani and his daughters will be anxious about me."</p> + +<p>"Oh, you flatter yourself they will be lying awake for you," +Matteo said, laughing. "Thinking over your dangers! Well, there's +nothing like having a good idea of one's self."</p> + +<p>Francis joined in the laugh.</p> + +<p>"It does sound rather conceited, Matteo; but I know they will be +anxious. They took up the idea it was a dangerous service I was +going on, and I have no doubt they fidgeted over it. Women are +always fancying things, you know."</p> + +<p>"I don't know anyone who fidgets about me," Matteo said; "but +then, you see, I am not a rescuer of damsels in distress, nor have +I received the thanks of the republic for gallant actions."</p> + +<p>"Well, you ought to have done," Francis replied. "You had just +as much to do with that fight on board Pisani's galley as I had, +only it happened I was in command.</p> + +<p>"Oh, there is your brother's tent! I see there is a light +burning, so I suppose he has not gone to bed yet."</p> + +<p>"All the better," Matteo said. "We shall get our hot wine all +the quicker. My teeth are chattering so, I hardly dare speak for +fear of biting my tongue."</p> + +<p>Francis was warmly welcomed by Rufino Giustiniani.</p> + +<p>"I need hardly ask you if you have succeeded in reconnoitring +their positions, for I know you would not come back before morning +had you not carried out your orders.</p> + +<p>"Why, Matteo, what have you been doing--wading in the mud, +apparently? Why, you are wet up to the waist."</p> + +<p>"We have captured an officer, and fourteen men, Rufino. They +will be here in a few minutes. Their boat got stuck fast while it +was chasing Francisco; so we waded out and took them. They made +some resistance, but beyond a few slashes, and two or three thumps +from their oars, no harm was done."</p> + +<p>"That is right, Matteo. I am glad you have had a skirmish with +them at last. Now go in and change your things. I shall have you on +my hands with rheumatism."</p> + +<p>"I will do that at once, and I hope you will have some hot +spiced wine ready, by the time I have changed, for I am nearly +frozen."</p> + +<p>The embers of a fire, outside the tent, were soon stirred +together, and in a few minutes the wine was prepared. In the +meantime, Francis had been telling Rufino the incidents of his +trip. In half an hour, the message came that the gondola was again +in the water, and Francis was soon on his way back to the city.</p> + +<p>"I was beginning to be anxious about you," was Pisani's +greeting, as, upon being informed of his return, he sprang from the +couch, on which he had thrown himself for an hour's sleep, and +hurried downstairs. "I reckoned that you might have been back an +hour before this, and began to think that you must have got into +some scrape. Well, what have you discovered?"</p> + +<p>"The Genoese have no idea that you are going to put to sea. +Their ships and galleys are, as usual, moored off the quays of +Chioggia. The entrance to the Canal of Lombardy, and the Brondolo +passage, are both quite open, and there appear to be no troops +anywhere near; but between Pelestrina and Brondolo they have +rowboats watching the entrance, but no craft of any size. There are +a few troops there, but, so far as I could judge by the number of +fires, not more than two hundred men or so."</p> + +<p>"Your news is excellent, Francisco. I will not ask you more, +now. It is three o'clock already, and at five I must be up and +doing; so get off to bed as soon as you can. You can give me the +details in the morning."</p> + +<p>The gondola was still waiting at the steps, and in a few minutes +Francis arrived at the Palazzo Polani. A servant was sleeping on a +bench in the hall. He started up as Francis entered.</p> + +<p>"I have orders to let my master know, as soon as you return, +signor."</p> + +<p>"You can tell him, at the same time, that I have returned +without hurt, and pray him not to disturb himself, as I can tell +him what has taken place in the morning."</p> + +<p>Polani, however, at once came to Francis' room.</p> + +<p>"Thank Heaven you have returned safe to us, my boy!" he said. "I +have just knocked at the girls' doors, to tell them of your return, +and, by the quickness with which they answered, I am sure that +they, like myself, have had no sleep. Have you succeeded in your +mission?"</p> + +<p>"Perfectly, signor. I have been to Chioggia itself, and to the +entrances of the three passages, and have discovered that none of +them are guarded by any force that could resist us."</p> + +<p>"But how did you manage to pass through their galleys?"</p> + +<p>"I landed on this side of Pelestrina, and had the gondola +carried across, and launched in the channel inside their cordon; +and it was not until we entered the last passage--that by +Brondolo--that we were noticed. Then there was a sharp chase for a +bit, but we outstripped them, and got safely across to Pelestrina. +One of the galleys, in the excitement of the chase, ran fast into +the mud; and Matteo, with some of his men, waded out and captured +the officer and crew. So there is every prospect of our succeeding +tomorrow."</p> + +<p>"All that is good," Polani said; "but to me, just at present, I +own that the principal thing is that you have got safely back. Now +I will not keep you from your bed, for I suppose that you will not +be able to lie late in the morning."</p> + +<p>Francis certainly did not intend to do so, but the sun was high +before he woke. He hurriedly dressed, and went downstairs.</p> + +<p>"I have seen the admiral," Polani said as he entered, "and told +him that you were sound asleep, and I did not intend to wake you, +for that you were looking worn and knocked up. He said: 'Quite +right! The lad is so willing and active, that I forget sometimes +that he is not an old sea dog like myself, accustomed to sleep with +one eye open, and to go without sleep altogether for days if +necessary.' So you need not hurry over your breakfast. The girls +are dying to hear your adventures."</p> + +<p>As he took his breakfast, Francis gave the girls an account of +his expedition.</p> + +<p>"And so, you saw Rufino!" Maria said. "Did he inquire after me? +You told him, I hope, that I was fading away rapidly from grief at +his absence."</p> + +<p>"I did not venture upon so flagrant an untruth as that," Francis +replied.</p> + +<p>"Is he very uncomfortable?"</p> + +<p>"Not very, signora. He has a good tent, some excellent wine, an +allowance of bread, which might be larger, and occasionally fish. +As he has also the gift of excellent spirits, I do not think he is +greatly to be pitied--except, of course, for his absence from +you."</p> + +<p>"That, of course," Maria said. "When he does come here, he +always tells me a moving tale of his privations, in hopes of +exciting pity; but, unfortunately, I cannot help laughing at his +tales of hardship. But we were really anxious about you last night, +Francisco, and very thankful when we heard you had returned.</p> + +<p>"Weren't we, Giulia?"</p> + +<p>Giulia nodded.</p> + +<p>"Giulia hasn't much to say when you are here, Francisco, but she +can chatter about you fast enough when we are alone."</p> + +<p>"How can you say so, Maria?" Giulia said reproachfully.</p> + +<p>"Well, my dear, there is no harm in that. For aught he knows, +you may be saying the most unkind things about him, all the +time."</p> + +<p>"I am sure he knows that I should not do that," Giulia said +indignantly.</p> + +<p>"By the way, do you know, Francisco, that all Venice is in a +state of excitement! A proclamation has been issued by the doge, +this morning, that all should be in their galleys and at their +posts at noon, under pain of death. So everyone knows that +something is about to be done, at last."</p> + +<p>"Then it is time for me to be off," Francis said, rising +hastily, "for it is ten o'clock already."</p> + +<p>"Take your time, my lad," the merchant said. "There is no hurry, +for Pisani told me, privately, that they should not sail until +after dark."</p> + +<p>It was not, indeed, until nearly eight o'clock in the evening, +that the expedition started. At the hour of vespers, the doge, +Pisani, and the other leaders of the expedition, attended mass in +the church of Saint Mark, and then proceeded to their galleys, +where all was now in readiness.</p> + +<p>Pisani led the first division, which consisted of fourteen +galleys. The doge, assisted by Cavalli, commanded in the centre; +and Corbaro brought up the rear, with ten large ships. The night +was beautifully bright and calm, a light and favourable breeze was +blowing, and all Venice assembled to see the departure of the +fleet.</p> + +<p>Just after it passed through the passage of the Lido, a thick +mist came on. Pisani stamped up and down the deck impatiently.</p> + +<p>"If this goes on, it will ruin us," he said. "Instead of +arriving in proper order at the mouth of the passages, and +occupying them before the Genoese wake up to a sense of their +danger, we shall get there one by one, they will take the alarm, +and we shall have their whole fleet to deal with. It will be simply +ruin to our scheme."</p> + +<p>Fortunately, however, the fog speedily lifted. The vessels +closed up together, and, in two hours after starting, arrived off +the entrances to the channels. Pisani anchored until daylight +appeared, and nearly five thousand men were then landed on the +Brondolo's shore, easily driving back the small detachment placed +there. But the alarm was soon given, and the Genoese poured out in +such overwhelming force that the Venetians were driven in disorder +to their boats, leaving behind them six hundred killed, drowned, or +prisoners.</p> + +<p>But Pisani had not supposed that he would be able to hold his +position in front of the whole Genoese force, and he had succeeded +in his main object. While the fighting had been going on on shore, +a party of sailors had managed to moor a great ship, laden with +stones, across the channel. As soon as the Genoese had driven the +Venetians to their boats, they took possession of this vessel, and, +finding that she was aground, they set her on fire, thus +unconsciously aiding Pisani's object, for when she had burned to +the water's edge she sank.</p> + +<p>Barberigo, with his light galleys, now arrived upon the spot, +and emptied their loads of stone into the passage around the wreck. +The Genoese kept up a heavy fire with their artillery, many of the +galleys were sunk, and numbers of the Venetians drowned, or killed +by the shot.</p> + +<p>Nevertheless, they worked on unflinchingly. As soon as the pile +of stones had risen sufficiently for the men to stand upon them, +waist deep, they took their places upon it, and packed in order the +stones that their comrades handed them, and fixed heavy chains +binding the whole together.</p> + +<p>The work was terribly severe. The cold was bitter. The men were +badly fed, and most of them altogether unaccustomed to hardships. +In addition to the fire from the enemy's guns, they were exposed to +a rain of arrows, and at the end of two days and nights they were +utterly worn out and exhausted, and protested that they could do no +more. Pisani, who had himself laboured among them in the thickest +of the danger, strove to keep up their spirits by pointing out the +importance of their work, and requested the doge to swear on his +sword that, old as he was, he would never return to Venice unless +Chioggia was conquered.</p> + +<p>The doge took the oath, and for the moment the murmuring ceased; +and, on the night of the 24th, the channel of Chioggia was entirely +choked from shore to shore. On that day, Corbaro succeeded in +sinking two hulks in the passage of Brondolo. Doria, who had +hitherto believed that the Venetians would attempt nothing serious, +now perceived for the first time the object of Pisani, and +despatched fourteen great galleys to crush Corbaro, who had with +him but four vessels. Pisani at once sailed to his assistance, with +ten more ships, and the passage was now so narrow that the Genoese +did not venture to attack, and Corbaro completed the operation of +blocking up the Brondolo passage. The next day the Canal of +Lombardy was similarly blocked; and thus, on the fourth day after +leaving Venice, Pisani had accomplished his object, and had shut +out the Genoese galleys from the sea.</p> + +<p>But the work had been terrible, and the losses great. The +soldiers were on half rations. The cold was piercing. They were +engaged night and day with the enemy, and were continually wet +through, and the labour was tremendous.</p> + +<p>A fort had already been begun on the southern shore of the port +of Brondolo, facing the convent, which Doria had transformed into a +citadel. The new work was christened the Lova, and the heaviest +guns in the Venetian arsenal were planted there. One of these, +named the Trevisan, discharged stones of a hundred and ninety-five +pounds in weight, and the Victory was little smaller. But the +science of artillery was then in its youth, and these guns could +only be discharged once in twenty-four hours.</p> + +<p>But, on the 29th, the Venetians could do no more, and officers, +soldiers, and sailors united in the demand that they should return +to Venice. Even Pisani felt that the enterprise was beyond him, and +that his men, exhausted by cold, hunger, and their incessant +exertions, could no longer resist the overwhelming odds brought +against him. Still, he maintained a brave front, and once again his +cheery words, and unfeigned good temper, and the example set them +by the aged doge, had their effect; but the soldiers required a +pledge that, if Zeno should not be signalled in sight by New Year's +Day, he would raise the siege. If Pisani and the doge would pledge +themselves to this, the people agreed to maintain the struggle for +the intervening forty-eight hours.</p> + +<p>The pledge was given, and the fight continued. Thus, the fate of +Venice hung in the balance. If Zeno arrived, not only would she be +saved, but she had it in her power to inflict upon Genoa a terrible +blow. Should Zeno still tarry, not only would the siege be raised, +and the Genoese be at liberty to remove the dams which the +Venetians had placed, at such a cost of suffering and blood; but +there would be nothing left for Venice but to accept the terms, +however onerous, her triumphant foes might dictate, terms which +would certainly strip her of all her possessions, and probably +involve even her independence.</p> + +<p>Never, from her first foundation, had Venice been in such +terrible risk. Her very existence trembled in the balance. The 30th +passed as the days preceding it. There was but little fighting, for +the Genoese knew how terrible were the straits to which Venice was +reduced, and learned, from the prisoners they had taken, that in a +few days, at the outside, the army besieging them would cease to +exist.</p> + +<p>At daybreak, on the 31st, men ascended the masts of the ships, +and gazed over the sea, in hopes of making out the long-expected +sails. But the sea was bare. It was terrible to see the faces of +the Venetians, gaunt with famine, broken down by cold and fatigue. +Even the most enduring began to despair.</p> + +<p>Men spoke no more of Zeno. He had been away for months. Was it +likely that he would come just at this moment? They talked rather +of their homes. The next day they would return. If they must die, +they would die with those they loved, in Venice. They should not +mind that. And so the day went on, and as they lay down at night, +hungry and cold, they thanked God that it was their last day. +Whatever might come would be better than this.</p> + +<p>Men were at the mastheads again, before daylight, on the 1st of +January. Then, as the first streak of dawn broke, the cry went from +masthead to masthead:</p> + +<p>"There are ships out at sea!"</p> + +<p>The cry was heard on shore. Pisani jumped into a boat with +Francis, rowed out to his ship, and climbed the mast.</p> + +<p>"Yes, there are ships!" he said. And then, after a pause: +"Fifteen of them! Who are they? God grant it be Zeno!"</p> + +<p>This was the question everyone on ship and on shore was asking +himself, for it was known that the Genoese, too, were expecting +reinforcements.</p> + +<p>"The wind is scarce strong enough to move them through the +water," Pisani said. "Let some light boats go off to reconnoitre. +Let us know the best or the worst. If it be Zeno, Venice is saved! +If it be the Genoese, I, and those who agree with me that it is +better to die fighting, than to perish of hunger, will go out and +attack them."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes, several fast galleys started for the fleet, +which was still so far away that the vessels could scarcely be made +out, still less their rig and nationality. It would be some time +before the boats would return with the news, and Pisani went +ashore, and, with the doge, moved among the men, exhorting them to +be steadfast, above all things not to give way to panic, should the +newcomers prove to be enemies.</p> + +<p>"If all is done in order," he said, "they cannot interfere with +our retreat to Venice. They do not know how weak we are, and will +not venture to attack so large a fleet. Therefore, when the signal +is made that they are Genoese, we will fall back in good order to +our boats, and take to our ships, and then either return to Venice, +or sail out and give battle, as it may be decided."</p> + +<p>The boats, before starting, had been told to hoist white flags +should the galleys be Venetian, but to show no signal if they were +Genoese. The boats were watched, from the mastheads, until they +became specks in the distance. An hour afterwards, the lookout +signalled to those on shore that they were returning.</p> + +<p>"Go off again, Francisco. I must remain here to keep up the +men's hearts, if the news be bad. Take your stand on the poop of my +ship, and the moment the lookouts can say, with certainty, whether +the boats carry a white flag or not, hoist the Lion of Saint Mark +to the masthead, if it be Zeno. If not, run up a blue flag!"</p> + +<h2><a id="Ch20">Chapter 20</a>: The Triumph Of Venice.</h2> + +<p>Francis rowed off to the ship, got the flags in readiness for +hoisting, and stood with the lines in his hand.</p> + +<p>"Can you make them out, yet?" he hailed the men at the +mastheads.</p> + +<p>"They are mere specks yet, signor," the man at the foremast +said.</p> + +<p>The other did not reply at once, but presently he shouted +down:</p> + +<p>"Far as they are away, signor, I am almost sure that one or two +of them, at least, have something white flying."</p> + +<p>There was a murmur of joy from the men on the deck, for Jacopo +Zippo was famous for his keenness of sight.</p> + +<p>"Silence, men!" Francis said. "Do not let a man shout, or wave +his cap, till we are absolutely certain. Remember the agony with +which those on shore are watching us, and the awful disappointment +it would be, were their hopes raised only to be crushed, +afterwards."</p> + +<p>Another ten minutes, and Jacopo slid rapidly down by the stays, +and stood on the deck with bared head.</p> + +<p>"God be praised, signor! I have no longer a doubt. I can tell +you, for certain, that white flags are flying from these +boats."</p> + +<p>"God be praised!" Francis replied.</p> + +<p>"Now, up with the Lion!"</p> + +<p>The flag was bent to the halyards and Francis hoisted it. As it +rose above the bulwark, Pisani, who was standing on a hillock of +sand, shouted out at the top of his voice:</p> + +<p>"It is Zeno's fleet!"</p> + +<p>A shout of joy broke from the troops. Cheer after cheer rent the +air, from ship and shore, and then the wildest excitement reigned. +Some fell on their knees, to thank God for the rescue thus sent +when all seemed lost. Others stood with clasped hands, and +streaming eyes, looking towards heaven. Some danced and shouted. +Some wept with joy. Men fell on to each other's necks, and +embraced. Some threw up their caps. All were wild with joy, and +pent-up excitement.</p> + +<p>Zeno, who, in ignorance of the terrible straits to which his +countrymen were reduced, was making with his fleet direct to +Venice, was intercepted by one of the galleys, and at once bore up +for Brondolo, and presently dropped anchor near the shore. As he +did so, a boat was lowered, and he rowed to the strand, where the +Venetians crowded down to greet him. With difficulty, he made his +way through the shouting multitude to the spot, a little distance +away, where the doge was awaiting him.</p> + +<p>Zeno was of medium height, square shouldered and broad chested. +His head was manly and handsome, his nose aquiline, his eyes large, +dark, and piercingly bright, and shaded by strongly-marked +eyebrows. His air was grave and thoughtful, and in strong contrast +to that of the merry and buoyant Pisani. His temper was more +equable, but his character was as impulsive as that of the admiral. +He was now forty-five years of age--ten years the junior of Pisani. +Zeno was intended for the church, and was presented by the pope +with the reversion of a rich prebendal stall at Patras. On his way +to Padua, to complete his studies at the university, he was +attacked by robbers, who left him for dead. He recovered, however, +and went to Padua. He became an accomplished scholar; but was so +fond of gambling that he lost every penny, and was obliged to +escape from his creditors by flight. For five years he wandered +over Italy, taking part in all sorts of adventures, and then +suddenly returned to Venice, and was persuaded by his friends to +proceed to Patras, where his stall was now vacant.</p> + +<p>When he arrived there, he found the city besieged by the Turks. +In spite of his clerical dignity, he placed himself in the front +rank of its defenders, and distinguished himself by extreme +bravery. He was desperately wounded, and was again believed to be +dead. He was even placed in his coffin; but just as it was being +nailed down, he showed signs of returning life. He did not stay +long at Patras, but travelled in Germany, France, and England.</p> + +<p>Soon after he returned to Patras he fought a duel, and thereby +forfeited his stall. He now renounced the clerical profession, and +married a wealthy heiress. She died shortly afterwards, and he +married the daughter of the Admiral Marco Giustiniani.</p> + +<p>He now entered upon political life, and soon showed brilliant +talents. He was then appointed to the military command of the +district of Treviso, which the Paduans were then invading. Here he +very greatly distinguished himself, and in numberless engagements +was always successful, so that he became known as Zeno the +Unconquered.</p> + +<p>When Pisani was appointed captain general, in April, 1378, he +was appointed governor of Negropont, and soon afterwards received a +separate naval command. He had been lost sight of for many months, +prior to his appearance so opportunely before Brondolo, and he now +confirmed to the doge the news that had been received shortly +before. He had captured nearly seventy Genoese vessels, of various +sizes, had cruised for some time in sight of Genoa, struck a heavy +blow at her commerce, and prevented the despatch of the +reinforcements promised to Doria. Among the vessels taken was one +which was carrying three hundred thousand ducats from Genoa.</p> + +<p>He reported himself ready with his men to take up the brunt of +the siege forthwith, and selecting Brondolo as the most dangerous +position, at once landed his crews. The stores on board ship were +also brought ashore, and proved ample for the present necessities +of the army.</p> + +<p>In a few days, he sailed with his galleys and recaptured Loredo, +driving out the Paduan garrison there. This conquest was all +important to Venice, for it opened their communication with +Ferrara, and vast stores of provisions were at once sent by their +ally to Venice, and the pressure of starvation immediately +ceased.</p> + +<p>The siege of Brondolo was now pushed on, and on the 22nd of +January the great bombard, the Victory, so battered the wall +opposite to it that it fell suddenly, crushing beneath its ruins +the Genoese commander, Doria.</p> + +<p>The change which three weeks had made in the appearance of the +Venetian forces was marvellous. Ample food, firing, and shelter had +restored their wasted frames, and assurance of victory had taken +the place of the courage of despair. A month of toil, hardship, and +fighting had converted a mob of recruits into disciplined soldiers, +and Zeno and Pisani seemed to have filled all with their own energy +and courage. Zeno, indeed, was so rash and fearless that he had +innumerable escapes from death.</p> + +<p>One evening after dusk his own vessel, having been accidentally +torn from its anchorage near the Lova Fort by the force of the wind +and currents, was driven across the passage against the enemy's +forts, whence showers of missiles were poured into it. One arrow +pierced his throat. Dragging it out, he continued to issue his +orders for getting the galley off the shore--bade a seaman swim +with a line to the moorings, and angrily rebuked those who, +believing destruction to be inevitable, entreated him to strike his +flag. The sailor reached the moorings, and, with a line he had +taken, made fast a strong rope to it, and the vessel was then +hauled off into a place of safety. As Zeno hurried along the deck, +superintending the operation, he tumbled down an open hatchway, and +fell on his back, almost unconscious. In a few moments he would +have been suffocated by the blood from the wound in his throat, but +with a final effort he managed to roll over on to his face, the +wound was thus permitted to bleed freely, and he soon +recovered.</p> + +<p>On the 28th of February, he was appointed general in chief of +the land forces, and the next day drove the Genoese from all their +positions on the islands of Brondolo and Little Chioggia, and on +the following morning established his headquarters under the +ramparts of Chioggia, and directed a destructive fire upon the +citadel. As the Genoese fell back across the bridge over the Canal +of Santa Caterina, the structure gave way under their weight, and +great numbers were drowned. The retreat of the Genoese was indeed +so hurried and confused, and they left behind them an immense +quantity of arms, accoutrements, and war material, so much so that +suits of mail were selling for a few shillings in the Venetian +camp.</p> + +<p>So completely were the Genoese disheartened, by the change in +their position, that many thought that the Venetians could at once +have taken Chioggia by assault; but the leaders were determined to +risk no failure, and knew that the enemy must yield to hunger. They +therefore contented themselves with a rigorous blockade, cutting +off all the supplies which the Lord of Padua endeavoured to throw +into the city. The Venetians, however, allowed the besieged to send +away their women and children, who were taken to Venice and kindly +treated there.</p> + +<p>The army of Venice had now been vastly increased, by the arrival +of the Star Company of Milan, and the Condottieri commanded by Sir +John Hawkwood. The dikes, erected across the channels with so much +labour, were removed, and the fleet took their part in the +siege.</p> + +<p>On the 14th of May there was joy in Chioggia, similar to that +which the Venetians had felt at the sight of Zeno's fleet, for on +that morning the squadron, which Genoa had sent to their assistance +under the command of Matteo Maruffo, appeared in sight. This +admiral had wasted much valuable time on the way, but had fallen in +with and captured, after a most gallant resistance, five Venetian +galleys under Giustiniani, who had been despatched to Apulia to +fetch grain.</p> + +<p>The Genoese fleet drew up in order of battle, and challenged +Pisani to come out to engage them. But, impetuous as was the +disposition of the admiral, and greatly as he longed to avenge his +defeat at Pola, he refused to stir. He knew that Chioggia must, ere +long, fall, and he would not risk all the advantages gained, by so +many months of toil and effort, upon the hazard of a battle. Day +after day Maruffo repeated his challenge, accompanied by such +insolent taunts that the blood of the Venetian sailors was so +stirred that Pisani could no longer restrain them. After obtaining +leave from the doge to go out and give battle, he sailed into the +roadstead on the 25th. The two fleets drew up in line of battle, +facing each other. Just as the combat was about to commence a +strange panic seized the Genoese, and, without exchanging a blow or +firing a shot, they fled hastily. Pisani pursued them for some +miles, and then returned to his old station.</p> + +<p>The grief and despair of the garrison of Chioggia, at the sight +of the retreat of their fleet, was in proportion to the joy with +which they had hailed its approach. Their supply of fresh water was +all but exhausted. Their rations had become so scanty that, from +sheer weakness, they were unable, after the first week in June, to +work their guns.</p> + +<p>Genoa, in despair at the position of her troops, laboured +unceasingly to relieve them. Emissaries were sent to tamper with +the free companies, and succeeded so far that these would have +marched away, had they not been appeased by the promise of a three +days' sack of Chioggia, and a month's extra pay at the end of the +war. Attempts were made to assassinate Zeno, but these also failed. +The Genoese then induced the pope to intercede on their behalf; but +the council remembered that when Venice was at the edge of +destruction, on the 31st of December, no power had come forward to +save her, and refused now to be robbed of the well-earned +triumph.</p> + +<p>On the 15th of July, Maruffo, who had received reinforcements +again made his appearance; but Pisani this time refused to be +tempted out. On the 21st a deputation was sent out from Chioggia to +ask for terms, and though, on being told that an unconditional +surrender alone would be accepted, they returned to the city, yet +the following day the Genoese flag was hauled down from the +battlements.</p> + +<p>On the 24th the doge, accompanied by Pisani and Zeno, made his +formal entry into Chioggia. The booty was enormous; and the +companies received the promised bounty, and were allowed to pillage +for three days. So large was the plunder collected, in this time, +by the adventurers, that the share of one of them amounted to five +hundred ducats. The republic, however, did not come off altogether +without spoil--they obtained nineteen seaworthy galleys, four +thousand four hundred and forty prisoners, and a vast amount of +valuable stores, the salt alone being computed as worth ninety +thousand crowns.</p> + +<p>Not even when the triumphant fleet returned, after the conquest +of Constantinople, was Venice so wild with delight, as when the +doge, accompanied by Pisani and Zeno, entered the city in triumph +after the capture of Chioggia. From the danger, more imminent than +any that had threatened Venice from her first foundation, they had +emerged with a success which would cripple the strength, and lower +the pride of Genoa for years. Each citizen felt that he had some +share in the triumph, for each had taken his share in the +sufferings, the sacrifices, and the efforts of the struggle. There +had been no unmanly giving way to despair, no pitiful entreaty for +aid in their peril. Venice had relied upon herself, and had come +out triumphant.</p> + +<p>From every house hung flags and banners, every balcony was hung +with tapestry and drapery. The Grand Canal was closely packed with +gondolas, which, for once, disregarded the sumptuary law that +enforced black as their only hue, and shone in a mass of colour. +Gaily dressed ladies sat beneath canopies of silk and velvet; flags +floated from every boat, and the rowers were dressed in the bright +liveries of their employers. The church bells rang out with a +deafening clang, and from roof and balcony, from wharf and river, +rang out a mighty shout of welcome and triumph from the crowded +mass, as the great state gondola, bearing the doge and the two +commanders, made its way, slowly and with difficulty, along the +centre of the canal.</p> + +<p>Francis was on board one of the gondolas that followed in the +wake of that of the doge, and as soon as the grand service in Saint +Mark's was over, he slipped off and made his way back to the +Palazzo Polani. The merchant and Giulia had both been present at +the ceremony, and had just returned when he arrived.</p> + +<p>"I guessed you would be off at once, Francisco, directly the +ceremony was over. I own that I, myself, would have stayed for a +time to see the grand doings in the Piazza, but this child would +not hear of our doing so. She said it would be a shame, indeed, if +you should arrive home and find no one to greet you."</p> + +<p>"So it would have been," Giulia said. "I am sure I should not +have liked, when I have been away, even on a visit of pleasure to +Corfu, to return and find the house empty; and after the terrible +dangers and hardships you have gone through, Francisco, it would +have been unkind, indeed, had we not been here. You still look thin +and worn."</p> + +<p>"I think that is fancy on your part, Giulia. To my eyes he looks +as stout as ever I saw him. But certainly he looked as lean and +famished as a wolf, when I paid that visit to the camp the day +before Zeno's arrival. His clothes hung loose about him, his cheeks +were hollow, and his eyes sunken. He would have been a sight for +men to stare at, had not every one else been in an equally bad +case.</p> + +<p>"Well, I thank God there is an end of it, now! Genoa will be +glad to make peace on any terms, and the sea will once more be open +to our ships. So now, Francisco, you have done with fighting, and +will be able to turn your attention to the humbler occupation of a +merchant."</p> + +<p>"That will I right gladly," Francis said. "I used to think, +once, I should like to be a man-at-arms; but I have seen enough of +it, and hope I never will draw my sword again, unless it be in +conflict with some Moorish rover. I have had many letters from my +father, chiding me for mingling in frays in which I have no +concern, and shall be able to gladden his heart, by writing to +assure him that I have done with fighting."</p> + +<p>"It has done you no harm, Francisco, or rather it has done you +much good. It has given you the citizenship of Venice, in itself no +slight advantage to you as a trader here. It has given you three +hundred ducats a year, which, as a mark of honour, is not to be +despised. It has won for you a name throughout the republic, and +has given you a fame and popularity such as few, if any, citizens +of Venice ever attained at your age. Lastly, it has made a man of +you. It has given you confidence and self possession. You have +acquired the habit of commanding men. You have been placed in +positions which have called for the exercise of rare judgment, +prudence, and courage; and you have come well through it all. It is +but four years since your father left you a lad in my keeping. Now +you are a man, whom the highest noble in Venice might be proud of +calling his son. You have no reason to regret, therefore, that you +have, for a year, taken up soldiering instead of trading, +especially as our business was all stopped by the war, and you must +have passed your time in inactivity."</p> + +<p>In the evening, when the merchant and Francis were alone +together, the former said:</p> + +<p>"I told you last autumn, Francis, when I informed you that, +henceforth, you would enter into my house as a partner in the +business, when we again recommenced trade, that I had something +else in my mind, but the time to speak of it had not then arrived. +I think it has now come. Tell me, my boy, frankly, if there is +anything that you would wish to ask of me."</p> + +<p>Francis was silent for a moment; then he said:</p> + +<p>"You have done so much, Signor Polani. You have heaped kindness +upon me, altogether beyond anything I could have hoped for, that, +even did I wish for more, I could not ask it."</p> + +<p>"Then there is something more you would like, Francisco. +Remember that I have told you that I regard you as a son, and +therefore I wish you to speak to me, as frankly as if I was really +your father."</p> + +<p>"I fear, signor, that you will think me audacious, but since you +thus urge upon me to speak all that is in my mind, I cannot but +tell you the truth. I love your daughter, Giulia, and have done so +ever since the first day that my eyes fell on her. It has seemed to +me too much, even to hope, that she can ever be mine, and I have +been careful in letting no word expressive of my feelings pass my +lips. It still seems, to me, beyond the bounds of possibility that +I could successfully aspire to the hand of the daughter of one of +the noblest families in Venice."</p> + +<p>"I am glad you have spoken frankly, dear lad," the merchant +said. "Ever since you rescued my daughters from the hands of +Mocenigo, it has been on my mind that someday, perhaps, you would +be my son-in-law, as well as my son by adoption. I have watched +with approval that, as Giulia grew from a child into a young woman, +her liking for you seemed to ripen into affection. This afternoon I +have spoken to her, and she has acknowledged that she would obey my +commands, to regard you as her future husband, with gladness.</p> + +<p>"I could not, however, offer my daughter's hand to one who might +reject it, or who, if he accepted it, would only do so because he +considered the match to be a desirable one, from a business point +of view. Now that you have told me you love her, all difficulties +are at an end. I am not one of those fathers who would force a +marriage upon their daughters, regardless of their feelings. I gave +to Maria free choice among her various suitors, and so I would give +it to Giulia. Her choice is in accordance with my own secret hopes, +and I therefore, freely and gladly, bestow her upon you. You must +promise only that you do not carry her away altogether to England, +so long as I live. You can, if you like, pay long visits with her +from time to time to your native country, but make Venice your +headquarters.</p> + +<p>"I need say nothing to you about her dowry. I intended that, as +my partner, you should take a fourth share of the profits of the +business; but as Giulia's husband, I shall now propose that you +have a third. This will give you an income equal to that of all but +the wealthiest of the nobles of Venice. At my death, my fortune +will be divided between my girls."</p> + +<p>Francis expressed, in a few words, his joy and gratitude at the +merchant's offer. Giulia had inspired him, four years before, with +a boyish love, and it had steadily increased until he felt that, +however great his success in life as Messer Polani's partner, his +happiness would be incomplete unless shared by Giulia. Polani cut +short his words by saying:</p> + +<p>"My dear boy, I am as pleased that this should be so as you are. +I now feel that I have, indeed, gained a son and secured the +happiness of my daughter. Go in to her now. You will find her in +the embroidery room. I told her that I should speak to you this +evening, and she is doubtless in a tremble as to the result, for +she told me frankly that, although she loved you, she feared you +only regarded her with the affection of a brother, and she implored +me, above all, not to give you a hint of her feelings towards you, +until I was convinced that you really loved her."</p> + +<p>Two months later, the marriage of Francis Hammond and Giulia +Polani took place. There were great festivities, and the merchant +spent a considerable sum in giving a feast, on the occasion, to all +the poor of Venice. Maria told Francis, in confidence, that she had +always made up her mind that he would marry Giulia.</p> + +<p>"The child was silly enough to fall in love with you from the +first, Francisco, and I was sure that you, in your dull English +fashion, cared for her. My father confided to me, long since, that +he hoped it would come about."</p> + +<p>Francis Hammond lived for many years with his wife in Venice, +paying occasional visits to England. He was joined, soon after his +marriage, by his brother, who, after serving for some years in the +business, entered it as a partner, when Messer Polani's increasing +years rendered it necessary for him to retire from an active +participation in it.</p> + +<p>Some months after his marriage, Francis was saddened by the +death of Admiral Pisani, who never recovered from the fatigue and +hardships he suffered during the siege of Chioggia. He had, with +the fleet, recovered most of the places that the Genoese had +captured, and after chasing a Genoese fleet to Zara, had a partial +engagement with them there. In this, Corbaro, now holding the +commission of admiral of the squadron, was killed, and Pisani +himself wounded. He was already suffering from fever; and the loss +of Corbaro, and the check that the fleet had suffered, increased +his malady, and he expired three days later.</p> + +<p>Venice made peace with Genoa, but the grudge which she bore to +Padua was not wiped out until some years later, when, in 1404, that +city was besieged by the Venetians, and forced by famine to +surrender in the autumn of the following year; after which Zeno, +having been proved to have kept up secret communications with the +Lord of Padua, was deprived of his honours and sentenced to a +year's imprisonment. Thus, in turn, the two great Venetian +commanders suffered disgrace and imprisonment.</p> + +<p>As she had been patient and steadfast in her time of distress, +Venice was clement in her hour of triumph, and granted far more +favourable terms to Padua than that city deserved.</p> + +<p>At the death of Messer Polani, Francis returned with his wife +and family to England, and established himself in London, where he +at once took rank as one of the leading merchants. His fortune, +however, was so large, that he had no occasion to continue in +commerce, and he did so only to afford him a certain amount of +occupation. His brother carried on the business in Venice, and +became one of the leading citizens there, in partnership with +Matteo Giustiniani. Every two or three years Francis made a voyage +with his wife to Venice and spent some months there, and to the end +of his life never broke off his close connection with the City of +the Waters.</p> + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE LION OF SAINT MARK***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 17546-h.txt or 17546-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/7/5/4/17546">http://www.gutenberg.org/1/7/5/4/17546</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> |